428XL v5 Installation 0311428 [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

428XL V5.0.25 Installation Manual

Ref. No. 0311428

March 24, 2014

Ahead of the Curve

SM

To contact Sercel Europe Nantes, France Sales; Customer Support; Manufacturing & Repair. B.P. 30439, 16 rue de Bel Air 44474 Carquefou Cedex Tel: +33 2 40 30 11 81, Fax: +33 2 40 30 19 48 Hot-Line: Land: +33 2 40 30 58 88 Marine: +33 2 40 30 59 59 Navigation: +33 2 40 30 69 87 E-mail: [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] www.sercel.com St Gaudens, France Vibrator Customer Support; Vibrator Manufacturing & Repair; Streamer Manufacturing & Repair. Tel: +33 5 61 89 90 00, Fax: +33 5 61 89 90 33 Hot Line: +33 5 61 89 90 91 E-mail: [email protected] [email protected] Les Ulis, France Sales; Customer Support Tel: +33 1 69 93 83 60, Fax: +33 1 69 81 78 09 E-mail: [email protected] Hot Line: +33 6 15 54 13 96 Brest, France Sales; Customer Support Tel: +33 2 98 05 29 05; Fax: +33 2 98 05 52 41 E-mail: [email protected] Toulon, France Sales; Customer Support Tel: +33 4 94 21 69 92; Fax: +33 4 94 21 73 44 E-mail: [email protected] [email protected] Toulouse, France Sales; Customer Support Tel: +33 5 61 34 80 74; Fax:+33 5 61 34 80 66 E-mail: [email protected] [email protected], [email protected] Alfreton, U. K. Streamer Manufacturing & Repair; Customer Support. Tel: +44 1 773 605 078, Fax: +44 1 773 541 778 E-mail: [email protected] Trondheim, Norway (Optoplan AS) Tel: +47 73820500, Fax: +47 73820599 Dortmund, Germany Manufacturing. DE REGT Tel: +49 2 31 65 55 64 11.

Russia Customer Support; Repair. Moscow, Russia Tel: +7 495 644 08 05, Fax: +7 495 644 08 04 E-mail: [email protected] [email protected] Surgut, Russia Tel: +7 3462 28 92 50 North America Houston, Texas, USA Sales; Customer Support; Manufacturing & Repair; Tel: +1 281 492 66 88, Fax: +1 281 579 75 05 Hot-Line: +1 281 492 66 88 E-mail: [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Tulsa, Oklahoma, USA Tel: +1 918 834 96 00, Fax: +1 918 838 88 46 E-mail: [email protected] [email protected] Calgary, Alberta, Canada Sales; Customer Support; Manufacturing. Tel: +1 403 275 3544, Fax: +1 403 295 1805 E-mail: [email protected] Middle East Dubai, U. A. E. Sales, Customer Support, Repair. Tel: +971 4 8832142, Fax: +971 4 8832143 Hot Line: +971 50 6451752 E-mail: [email protected] [email protected] Far East Beijing, P. R. of China R & D. Tel: +86 106 43 76 710, Fax: +86 106 43 76 367 E-mail: [email protected] [email protected] Xian, P. R. of China Manufacturing & Repair. Tel / Fax: +86 29 8222 9504 Xushui, P. R. of China Manufacturing & Repair. Tel:+86 312 8648355, Fax:+86 312 8648441 Singapore Streamer Manufacturing & Repair; Customer Support. Tel:+65 64 17 70 00, Fax:+65 6 545 1418

428XL Installation Manual

In no event shall SERCEL be liable for incidental or consequential damages or related expenses resulting from the use of this product, or arising out of or related to this manual or the information contained in it, even if SERCEL has been advised, or knew or should have known of the possibility of such damages. The information included in this documentation is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, SERCEL reserves the right to make changes to its products or specifications at any time, without notice, in order to improve design or performance and to supply the best possible product. This documentation does not form in any way a contractual agreement of sales promise on the part of SERCEL. Software mentioned in this documentation is sold under a precise licence agreement and as such the documentation may cover technical areas for which the user may not have a final licence. No part of this documentation, or any of the information included herein may be modified or copied in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of SERCEL. © 2005 Sercel. All Rights Reserved. Printed in France. Sercel, 428XL, 428XLS, AIB, DPG, DSD, DSU1, DSU3, DSU3-428, e-428, eSQC Pro, FDPA428, FDU, FDU-428, HSU, LandPro Bin, LAUL, LAUL-428, LAULS, LAUX, LAUX-428, LAUXS, Link, LL428, LLIU, LLX400, LRU, LSI, LSS, LT428, LX, MGA, MRU, MSI, QT428, SGA, TMS428, TMU428, VE432, VE464, VQC88, WPSR are all trademarks of Sercel. All rights reserved. DSUGPS: US Patent 7,117,094 B2. UNIX is either a registered trademark or trademark of The Open Group in the United States and/or other countries.Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.

Printed on 100% recycled paper using vegetable-oil based ink March 24, 2014

3

428XL Installation Manual

Warnings, Cautions, Important Notices, and Notes Warnings, Cautions, and Important notices throughout this manual guide you to avoid injury, prevent equipment damage, and determine equipment use when varying components or configurations exist. Notes provide tips or additional information. SERCEL is not responsible for damages or injuries that result from failure to observe the information provided. Warnings and Cautions WARNING

When a Warning or Caution appears with a lightning-bolt icon, as shown in this example, this is to indicate a potential hazard that may lead to bodily injury or even death. CAUTION

When a Warning or Caution appears with an exclamation-point icon, as shown in this example, this is to indicate possible equipment damage or potential risk of misuse and incorrect operation.

Important Notices IMPORTANT

Important notices appear in the manual to highlight information that does not affect the risk of bodily injury, death, or equipment damage, but is nevertheless important. These notices appear with a stop-sign icon, as shown in this example.

Notes Note Notes provide tips or peripheral facts and may guide you to

other sources of information.

4

March 24, 2014

Software Licence Agreement Sercel is willing to license the accompanying software package to you only upon the condition that you accept all the terms contained in this licence agreement. Read carefully the following terms and conditions before opening the software media package. By opening the software media package you agree to the terms and conditions of this agreement.

I. SOFTWARE LICENCE Software acquired under these terms and conditions is not sold, but merely licensed under the provisions of this Article I. 1.Licence Grant: Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Licensor grants to Licensee a personal, non exclusive, non transferable licence to use the object code version of the Software solely for licensee's own internal use. 2.Number And Type Of Licences: In consideration of payment of the licence fee, Licensor will provide Licensee with (a) password(s) corresponding to the Software. 3.Use Of Software: In support of its own internal use of the software, Licensee may only: (a) Use the object code version of the Software, (b) Copy the Software into machine readable or printed form for backup purposes only (2 copies maximum), provided that all copies and partial copies include Licensor's copyright notices, (c) Except with regard to training books and materials, copy the documentation as required for Licensee's own use, provided that all copies shall include Licensor's copyright notices. Except as expressly provided herein, Licensee may not: (a) Copy, modify, merge, reverse engineer, reverse assemble, decompile, or disassemble the Software, (b) Remove any labels or notices from the Software, (c) Distribute, publish, transfer, sublicense, or make the Software or program documentation available to other organisations or persons, (d) Create or attempt to create derivative works from the Software, (e) Transfer the Software to another Hardware without approval of Licensor and payment of the applicable fee,

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

(f) Use the Software to violate the terms and conditions of any other software licensing agreement between Licensee and any third parties. If Licensee is located in a country which requires registration of software licences with government authorities, Licensee shall be responsible for meeting all requirements of such registration.

II. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS Licensee acknowledges that the Software is and remains the property of Licensor and contains trade secret information and Know How proprietary to Licensor and that any breach of the provisions of this Article by Licensee would cause Licensor to suffer immediate and irreparable harm. In the event of such breach, Licensor shall have, in addition to any and all remedies at law, the right to an injunction, specific performance or other equitable relief. Title to Software remains with Licensor at all times and no title or ownership of Software is transferred under this Agreement. Licensee shall take no action that might impair any right, title or interest of Licensor in or to the Software. Licensee shall not have any rights in or to any trademark or trade name owned by Licensor with respect to the Software. Licensee shall not disclose the Software to any third party without Licensor's prior written agreement. Licensee shall inform all its employees having access to the Software of the Confidential nature of the Software and their obligations with respect thereto. Licensee shall ensure that its employees and any third party to whom disclosure is authorised strictly abide by the confidentiality restrictions set forth in this Agreement.

III. WARRANTY Software warranty period is ninety (90) days from the date of installation. Licensor warrants that Software was developed with reasonable diligence and skill and that it substantially conforms to published documentation. Licensor's sole responsibility under this warranty shall be to correct or replace any Software which does not so conform, provided that Licensee notifies Licensor in writing during the warranty period. Licensee has had the opportunity to inspect Software: except as expressly provided above, Software is deemed to be accepted "AS IS" without further warranty. The warranty does not cover, and Licensor shall not be responsible for any failure or defect and resulting damage caused by installation or use of 5

Software Licence Agreement Software not furnished by Licensor, accident (including damage during shipment), neglect, misuse or abuse, or exposure to conditions beyond the environmental power and operating constraints specified by Licensor. The warranty does not cover defects or failure resulting from modification or installation by someone other than Licensor or its authorised representative.

IV. PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS Licensor shall defend, at its expense, any claim or suit brought against Licensee alleging that Software infringes upon a patent, copyright or other proprietary right, and shall pay all costs and damages finally awarded, provided that Licensor is given prompt written notice of such claim, reasonable information and assistance, and sole authority to defend or settle the claim. In the defence or settlement of the claim, Licensor may obtain for Licensee the right to continue using Software, replace or modify Software (without substantially changing the original functions of Software) so that it becomes non-infringing, or, if such remedies are not reasonably available, grant Licensee a refund for Software (net of reasonable depreciation) upon its return. Licensor shall not have any liability if the infringement is based upon modifications of Software or the use or sale of Software in combination with products not furnished by Licensor.

V. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Except as expressly set forth herein, there are no representations of warranties by Licensor, expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Licensor does not warrant that the operation of Software shall be uninterrupted or error free, that the functions contained in the Software shall meet Licensee's requirements or operate in the combinations selected by Licensee, or that every error or defect may be corrected pursuant to the warranty or maintenance services. In no event will Licensor or its suppliers be liable for indirect, consequential, incidental, punitive, special or exemplary damages (including loss of data, production, profits or use of hardware) to Licensee or any other party. Under no circumstances will Licensor or its suppliers be liable for damages exceeding the amount of the licence fee paid for Software to Licensor by Licensee. These limitations will apply regardless of the form of action, whether in contract or tort. 6

VI. TERMINATION Licensee may terminate the Agreement at any time. Licensor may terminate the Agreement if Licensee fails to comply with the terms and conditions thereof, provided Licensee has been given ten (10) days notice prior to termination, during which Licensee has failed to cure the breach to Licensor's reasonable satisfaction. Upon termination, Licensee shall return to Licensor all Software and copies thereof, including merged portions in any form, or provide written confirmation that Software and such copies/portions have been destroyed. Termination is without prejudice to any other rights or remedies available to Licensor at contract or at law. Termination does not relieve Licensee of its obligation to pay the licence fee(s), the maintenance fees up to and including the running period, as well as any other charges and fees due to Licensor. In addition, if any act by Licensee causes the cancellation or rescheduling of Licensee's order, Licensee shall reimburse Licensor for the resultant costs incurred.

VII. GENERAL Except for the obligation of payment, neither party shall be liable for non-performance caused by circumstances beyond their reasonable control including, but not limited to, work stoppages, delay in transportation, delay in delivery by vendors, fire, civil disobedience, war or acts of nature. Except as provided herein, this Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and shall supersede and cancel all prior agreements or understandings either oral or written, including any different, conflicting or additional terms and conditions which may appear on any contract, purchase order or form submitted by Licensee. During the term of this Agreement, the relationship of Licensor to Licensee is that of an independent contractor only. This Agreement shall be governed, construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws of France. The Tribunal du Commerce of Nantes (Trade Court of Nantes) France, shall have the exclusive jurisdiction to resolve any dispute or disagreement between the parties relating to this Agreement. All notices, authorisations and requests in connection with this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed given on the day they are received by hand, first class mail, "FAX" or "TELEX" at the addresses herein or thereafter notified by either party to the other in writing. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Installation Manual

Revision history Date of revision

Chapters or pages affected

Description of revision or reason for change

Nov. 2005

V 1.0 release

Dec. 2006

V 2.0 release.

Jan. 2007

p. 241

Dec. 2007

NAS model D. V 3.0 release.

Apr. 2008

p. 57, 351, 358, 359

Transverse cable length (125 m. max.)

May 2008

p. 548

LAUX-428 XDEV1 pinout.

June 2008

p. 68

XDEV cable orientation on 428-Lite box.

Sep. 2008

p. 28 p. 57 p. 355

- Added DSU3BV-428 and DSU1-428. - GPS cord part number - DSU3BV-428 and DSU1-428 spacing.

Oct. 2008

p. 496 p 540

- GPS cord part Number. - Updated Blaster signal specifications (EGO, TB, FO).

Nov. 2008

p. 496

Later-design Ethernet Radio Bridge interface box.

Feb. 2009

V4.0

Oct. 2009

p. 207 p. 505

- Server Id. - For maximum link capacity, Ethernet radio bridge must be disarmed.

Dec. 2009

p. 36, 356

AXCUL-428.

Dec. 2009

p. 62, 340, 354

DSUGPS.

Jan. 2010

p. 560

HSU to SGDS wiring.

Feb. 2010

p. 337 p. 342

- Diameter of hole for DSU1-428 and DSU3-428. - Diameter of hole for DSU3BV-428.

Mar. 2010

p 68 p. 365 to 366

- Do not connect 428 Lite box until server is up and running. - Updated FDU-to-FDU2S cabling.

Apr. 2010

p. 235

Note about preformatted cartridges and 3592 drive.

Sep. 2010

p. 306 p. 334

- CN3e clean boot procedure. - Max. 300 DSUs on either side of a LAUX-428.

March 24, 2014

7

428XL Installation Manual

Date of revision

Chapters or pages affected

Dec. 2010

Release 5.0

Dec. 2010

p. 354

Max number of DSUGPS units between LAUs.

Jan. 2011

p. 51 p. 78 p. 91

- Changing LCI-428 IP address. - Note about QLE2462 card on HP Z800. - Z400 RAM: 6 GB (64-bit Windows7) or 2 GB (32-bit).

Mar. 2011

p. 409

LT428 on DSU line segments.

Apr. 2011

p. 363

Connecting a LAUXS-428.

June 2011

p. 80

Unmanned system configuration.

p. 120, 127, 136, 178 p. 190

Skip entering Installation Number (Red Hat 5.4).

June 30, 2011

p. 78 p. 141

- On Z800, interface card for 3592 is QLE2462. - Driver for Dell M6600 laptop computer.

p. 142 p. 191 p. 258 p. 80

- Installing Linux on 428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer. - Disabling the screensaver. - Added NAS4000. Patch10 (IP address of UPS and CDU).

Nov. 14, 2011

p. 142

Vigor laptop PC (updated Linux installation procedure).

Dec. 22, 2011

p. 75 p. 207 p. 334

- Z800 card slots. - Licences. - Later-design DSU1-428.

Dec. 28, 2011

p. 382, 563

PC/LAU cable.

Jan. 23, 2012

p. 49, 132

Network configuration for 428XL Server100 000.

May 16, 2012

p. 39 Chap. 10

- Giga Transverse. - CableFree Laser transceiver.

Aug, 9, 2012

p. 49

Network configuration for 428XL Server100 000.

Sep. 20, 2012

p. 39 p. 369

- TFOI-G colour (white). - Spare parts for ULS cable repair.

Nov. 27, 2012

p. 213 p. 241 ...

- Use DisplayPort to DVI adaptor rather than VGA. - Updated for NAS model HX.

Dec. 3, 2012

p. 337

Drilling tool kit, Part No. 1T44086184.

Mar. 4, 2013

p. 75

Z800 card slots.

Oct 13, 2011

8

Description of revision or reason for change

Installation directory.

March 24, 2014

428XL Installation Manual

Date of revision

Chapters or pages affected

Description of revision or reason for change

Mar. 21, 2013

p. 74 p. 96 p. 171 p. 292 ...

- Z820. - Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8. - Installing Redhat 5.8 on Client computer. - PSION Workabout Pro3 handheld computer.

Apr. 11, 2013

p. 340 ...

DSUGPScompatibility.

June 11, 2013

p. 417 p. 551

- Tap test (LT428). - SGD-S to 428XL cable.

July 25, 2013

p. 93

Display mount kit

July 31, 2013

p. 498

ERB: Slave box only must be connected to XDEV2.

Sep. 23, 2013

Chap. 12 p. 564

- LRB. - LRBU/PDA cable.

Oct. 1, 2013

p. 513

Web link for ERB region codes.

Nov. 28, 2013

p. 79 p. 100 p. 113

- LSI 20320 IE Single port SCSI card (P/N 10007429). - RedHat 5.8 installation (HP Z820 with 5 hard disks). - RedHat 5.8 installation (Dell M6700 Laptop).

Jan. 6, 2014

p 177

RedHat 5.4 x86 (64-bit) if Z400.

Jan. 8, 2014

p. 551

SGDS cable (DB15 pin 2 must be wired to 428XL Blaster connector pin C).

Feb. 6, 2014

p. 250

NAS 2000HX parameter settings for FTP connection.

Mar. 24, 2014

p. 372

ULS field electronics strain-relief rigging.

March 24, 2014

9

428XL Installation Manual

(Page intentionally blank)

10

March 24, 2014

Table of Contents

Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

1

Introduction Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 The 428XL system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Ground equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Central unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 GigaTransverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

IT topology information for 428XL deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Local user topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Intranet user topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Internet user topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Intranet/Internet user topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

2

Hardware installation Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Identifying Ethernet interface ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 AC Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

11

Table of Contents

LCI-428 or LCI-G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Shock-mount parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Cabling to VE464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Cabling to VE432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Shooting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Multimodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Remote input panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

DSUGPS — GPS base position station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Master/Slave configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 428XL Lite break-out box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Server computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Shock-mount parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Server computer connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Tape drive interface cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Server hardware installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Unmanned system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 CDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Client computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 LCD display anchoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer . . . . . . . . . .97 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer . . . . . . . . .120 12

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Table of Contents

428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Installing 428XL server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Installing 428XL server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Saving 428XL parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Uninstalling 428XL server software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Server software patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Firmware upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Using the Line window’s Download setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Upgrading through serial (XDEV) port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Terminal window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Terminal window on a serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 USB stick management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

4

Client software installation Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Installing RedHat Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Hardware specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Installing Redhat 5.8 on Client computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

User account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Linux user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Windows user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Installing Client software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Setting the computer’s IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Linux Client host computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Windows Client host computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

13

Table of Contents

Client software patches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Remote access to Server from a Linux Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Remote access to Server from a Windows Client . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Installing Cygwin software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Configuring Cygwin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Working with Cygwin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

First-time log-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Licence codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Uninstalling 428XL Client software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

5

Peripherals Screen management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Installing a screen management driver for Linux . . . . . . . . . .212 Multi-screen management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Updating the NVIDIA driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Mount parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 VERITAS V12 plotter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 V12 / 428XL settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Ethernet port upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Tape drive shock-mount assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Supported tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 FUJI 3490-E or 3590 SCSI address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Resetting M2488 T4 drive initialisation parameters . . . . . . . .228 LTO drive SCSI address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 CYPRESS 3490E-DIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 3592 cartridge drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Early-design NAS server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 14

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Table of Contents

Shock-mount assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Attaching a NAS system to the 428XL local network . . . . . . .243 Setting up NAS parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Attaching a 428XL NAS system to another network . . . . . . .251 Operating System software reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 NAS system rescue mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

NAS4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Shock-mount and rack-mount parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Power-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Web interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Working with NAS4000 storage systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Power-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Installing the Operating System software or a patch . . . . . . . .279

FTP server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Installing server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Server settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283

MDR or RVT300 virtual tape recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Vehicle Tracking box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

6

Handheld PC software PSION Workabout Pro3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Connecting the Workabout Pro3 to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Workabout Pro3 network address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

Installing 428XL software on Workabout Pro3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 From a Windows 7 PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

15

Table of Contents

Intermec CN3e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Resetting the CN3e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Connecting the CN3e to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

Installing 428XL software on CN3e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 From Windows XP PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 From Windows 7 PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314

Installing GoBook PC applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 GoBook PC touch screen calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 GoBook Q200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Installing 428XL software on Q200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 GoBook Q200 backup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 GoBook Q200 restore procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

7

Field equipment deployment Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Wireline telemetry equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 FDU-428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 SH Sercel geophone string connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 DSU-428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 LAUL-428, LAUX-428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Transverse Repeater (TREP-428) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 End-of-line plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351

Power supply requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 LAU spacing Vs FDU spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

16

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Table of Contents

Auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Wireline auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Vibrator signal recording (VSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

Spread layout conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Submersible (ULS) field electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Handling and service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Power supply requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Connecting an LSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Connecting an HSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

Quick Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378

8

LT428 Line Tester Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Connecting the handheld PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Launching the LT428 application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383

The main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Parameter setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 Test functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 The LT428 Position menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 The General Parameters menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 The Test Limits menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393

Running Line tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 LAUL Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Form Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

17

Table of Contents

Xmit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Save Receiver Tilt Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Instrument Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Field Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404

Running Transverse tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Form Transverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Xmit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408

DSU line segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Working with results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Error details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Searching through the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Saving and exporting results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Playing back a result file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415

Auxiliary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Tap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Serial port parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

The Link configuration update tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

9

428XL Radio telemetry Radio telemetry equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 The LRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 The LAUR-428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427

Theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Half-duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429

18

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Table of Contents

Frequency management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Desensitization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433

Typical setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Basic Radio Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Basic Radio Line Segment Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Radio relay in series connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 OWFD1.5 antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Rooftop-mount whip antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Directional antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443

Antenna mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 MTB1590S list of material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Mast installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Deployment using the FDPA428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 The Field Deployment Aid Terminal for LRU and LAUR . . .453 Connecting the FDPA428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 LRU Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 The LRU Set Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 LRU Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 The Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 The LRU Loop Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Set Radio Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 The Wakeup/Sleep Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 LAUR Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 The LAUR Set Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 The LAUR Loop Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Main Menu Pulldown Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Closing the FDPA428 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

19

Table of Contents

10 LLX400 laser link Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 The LXIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 A2000 CableFree laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Terescope laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485

Setting up an LLX400 laser link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 A2000 CableFree laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 Terescope laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

11 Ethernet Radio Bridge Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Moving an Ethernet Radio Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 Arming the Installation Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Changing the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Advanced settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Licence and frequency regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514

12 Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 List of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Setting up the wireless link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Workabout Pro3 network address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 20

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Table of Contents

Signal Strength Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Connecting the SSMon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Signal Strength monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 View / Change Country and/or Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 ODU Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Ethernet connection information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Auxiliary Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535

13 Connectors and cables LCI-428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 BLASTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 XDEV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542

428-Lite Break-Out Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 Field electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 FDU-428 input connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 AXCUL-428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 LAUL-428 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 LAUX-428 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 ULS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549

Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 SGD-S Blaster Controller to 428XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 ShotPro to 428XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 ShotPro I to 428XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Macha to 428XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 BoomBox to 428XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 LSI/HSU cable – P/N 512000196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 HSU/Blaster controller cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 ULS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

21

Table of Contents

PC XDEV cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 PC/LAU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563 LRBU/PDA cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Mater/Slave Y cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565

A Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms

22

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

1

Introduction In this chapter: • Overview (page 24) • The 428XL system (page 25) • IT topology information for 428XL deployment (page 40)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

23

1

Introduction Overview >

Overview The documentation coming with the 428XL system consists of the following manuals: • Installation Manual (0311428): this manual, providing an introduction to the 428XL system, installation information, a few instructions for the operator to get started, and reference information that will help you select a 428XL configuration tailored to your needs. • User’s Manual Volume 1 (0311430): describes the parameters displayed on the system’s Graphic User Interface (GUI) and how to use each window. • User’s Manual Volume 2 (0311431): contains information on logged data and on interfaces (description of Input/Output formats, including the SEGD format). • User’s Manual Volume 3 (0311432): contains reference information (filter charts, theory of tests, technical data, release notes, specifications). • Technical Manual (0311429): contains maintenance and repair information, including operating instructions for using the system’s testers. This manual assumes you are familiar with window-driven systems and you know how to work with windows, including how to use a mouse and standard menus and commands. With a PDF file reader (Adobe Acrobat Reader) on a computer you can view this manual direct from the 428XL CDROM’s DOC directory.

24

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction The 428XL system > Overview

The 428XL system

1

In this section: • Overview (page 25) • Ground equipment (page 27) • Central unit (page 34) • Peripheral equipment (page 35) • Auxiliary channels (page 36) • Test equipment (page 36) • GigaTransverse (page 39)

Overview Sercel’s 428XL seismic acquisition system is specifically designed to address the growing demands of the geophysical industry for even larger channel counts, high performance digital receivers, and greater layout flexibility, while improving conventional operations. The 428XL gives you the power to do more: • More channels for the highest-possible resolution data. • Greater electrical efficiency for longer battery life and less downtime. • More layout capabilities to avoid obstacles in the field, and a wider range of compatible software and hardware platforms. • The 428XL makes it easy for crews to shoot the most accurate data in the least amount of time, with the fewest possible trucks and people in the field. This system offers the most advanced technology designed to be the most reliable and most productive system in the field. It has benefited from the vast field experience of the 408UL. The 428XL maintains compatibility with the 408UL field equipment.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

25

1

Introduction The 428XL system >

LAUL

428 Link LAUX

428XL client

NAS servers Plotter 428XL server

LCI-428

LRU

LAUR

Figure 1-1 The 428XL system

26

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction The 428XL system > Ground equipment

The 428XL builds on the 400 Series’ proven technology, reliability and efficiency with hardware and software designed to enable the largest channel count operations in the industry. With a capacity of 100,000 channels – backed by a telemetry structure that boosts by 500 percent the number of channels a wire transverse cable can address in real-time at 2 ms – the 428XL gives you outstanding accuracy, speed and ease of use for even the largest surveys.

Ground equipment 428 Link Similar in architecture to the 408 Link, the 428 Link is a Figure 1-2 FDU-428 Link combination of Field Digitizing Units (FDUs) and cables that can be handled as a single lightweight unit. The length and type of cable as well as the number of FDUs and their intervals are user-defined. The sensors connect directly into the FDU eliminating any significant analogue path within the recording system.

LAUX-428 and LAUL-428 The line voltage provided to the FDUs and DSUs is supplied through the Link’s cables from dedicated field units called LAULs. The power source is a conventional 12-volt battery with a typical capacity of 60 amp/hour. The LAUX is used to connect each line in a 3D spread to the higher Figure 1-3 LAUX speed transverse connection to the recording system. The LAUL and LAUX also ensure the following functions:

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

27

1

1

Introduction The 428XL system > Ground equipment

• Consolidation of the FDUs or DSUs data for transmission to the recording system; • Buffering of local data; • Processing of instrument tests.

Figure 1-4 LAUL

DSU-428 The Digital Sensor Unit (DSU) is an integrated package including station electronics and one or three digital accelerometers based on the MEMS (Micro-machined Electro-Mechanical Sensor) technology. It offers the same Link concept as the standard FDU link, plus fully integrated digital accelerometers as part of the electronics package. Two types of electronics are available: • DSU3 (3-axis: vertical, horizontal inline, horizontal crossline), • DSU1 (1-axis: vertical acceleration).

DSU3-428

DSUGPS

DSU3BV-428 Early-design Later-design DSU1-428

Figure 1-5

28

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction The 428XL system > Ground equipment

The 3-axis type comes in three design versions: DSU3-428 and DSUGPS (stakeless) designed to be planted, and DSU3BV-428 designed to be buried.

1

DSU-428 links can be used jointly with analog-sensor units (FDU-428, etc.) within the same spread under the control of a single 428XL central unit. See Field equipment deployment (page 325) for details. The DSU is compatible with the LAUL, LAULS, LAUM, LRU, LT428, LSS, fiber optics or wireline extender cables, and QC tools (eSQC-Pro, SGA). All inherent errors attributable to the construction of the DSU are corrected by the LAU that controls it. Tilt errors attributable to planting are not corrected. The DSUGPS includes a dual-antenna GPS receiver that calculates its own absolute position and the azimuth, making deployment quicker (no staking is required) and eliminating the risk of human errors (stake identification, verticality, azimuth). Once the required positioning accuracy is achieved, the built-in GPS receiver is automatically turned off to save battery life. Note that the DSUGPS requires the use of a laterdesign LCI-428 attached to a Novatel ProPak V3 GPS receiver. Also, a 16-Mb/s line bit rate is required. The later-design DSU1-428 comes with a high-tech spike that most of the time makes it possible to plant it without drilling and provides better coupling, therefore allowing quicker deployment and higher data quality. The DSU cannot be tested with a TMS428 (a specific tester must be used for testing or troubleshooting).

428XL Transverse Cable Based on a 100 Mbps Ethernet protocol, the 428XL transverse cable is capable of handling 10,000 channels at 2 ms in real-time with only one Crossing Unit (LAUX) per line. With the 428XL, the deployment of such a large amount of channels in the field has never been so easy and has never required such little equipment.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

29

1

Introduction The 428XL system > Ground equipment

Either a conventional cable or a Transverse Fibre Optics Interface (TFOI) extender can be used. Fibre optics cable (up to 10 km)

Figure 1-6 TFOI fibre optics interface and cable

Radio Telemetry Option The radio telemetry option increases layout flexibility, allowing seismic crews to avoid all types of obstacles and achieve greater field efficiency. It includes a data acquisition unit (LAUR-428), and a transceiver unit (LRU) which connects either to a 428 line or directly into the recorder. LAUR-428 Capable of acquiring up to 30 channels of seismic data at 2 ms sampling rate in real-time, the LAUR-428 offers a high degree of flexibility without compromising the productivity of the operations. Using the 215 MHz 250 MHz RF bandwidth that has already proven to provide strong Figure 1-7 LAUR-428 propagation characteristics, the LAUR-428 allows data transmission up to 24 km. Equipped with a non-volatile data memory, the LAUR-428 allows temporary storage of acquired channels to avoid data losses in case of transmission or power supply failures.

30

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction The 428XL system > Ground equipment

LRU Using wireless Line Repeater Units (LRUs), radio transmission can be incorporated into the cable network. The line cable, or the transverse cable, may be interrupted at any point and connected to another line or transverse cable using a pair of LRUs. They can be used to extend a portion of cable Figure 1-8 LRU spread or to relay radio transmission from point to point. The LRU acts also as a master of radio cells composed of several LAURs. Each LRU can receive up to 240 channels at 2ms in real-time and connect either to a 428 line or directly into the recorder. Note If you want to use any early-production LRU (version A or B),

you have to return it to Sercel for upgrading.

LSI The Line Shooting System (LSS) allows you to use the 428XL telemetry network rather than a radio link to synchronize a remote shooting system with the recording truck, for example in situations and over stretches of land where radio communications are difficult. Shooting with an LSS does not require any audio communications between the observer in the recording truck and the shooter. The LSS consists of an LSI unit associated with a Hand-Shake Unit (HSU). • The Line/Source Interface (LSI) allows you to connect a blaster controller along an acquisition line instead of connecting it to the control unit’s Blaster connector. It acts as a remote Blaster connector.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Figure 1-9 LSI

31

1

1

Introduction The 428XL system > Ground equipment

• The HSU is used by the shooter to supply the status of the firing device and the number of the corresponding shot point to the central unit.

Figure 1-10 HSU

Submersible (ULS) field electronics Sercel’s 408ULS submersible units combine seamlessly with the standard 428XL telemetry equipment. Withstanding immersion in water down to 50 metres, the ULS technology is ideally suited for shallow water and transition zone seismic operations. Its ruggedness and ease of handling allow safe, efficient deployment and retrieval. ULS products include the following main elements: • FDU2S: a dual-channel digitizing unit. • UL-ULS jumper cables, used for transition from the land environment technology to the immersed environment technology. • LAULS: an LAUL redesigned for the immersed environment.

32

Figure 1-11 ULS adapter

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction The 428XL system > Ground equipment

• LAUXS-428: an LAUX-428 redesigned for the immersed environment.

1

• Telemetry cables with monosensor or dual-sensor takeouts.

Figure 1-12 LAUXS-428

Figure 1-13 FDU2S

Figure 1-14 LAULS

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

33

1

Introduction The 428XL system > Central unit

Central unit e-428 System Software The e-428 software totally controls the spread and the operations. It also performs all the requested computations (stacks, correlations) before recording data onto tapes or disks. Supported software platforms for the e-428 system include Windows and Linux. Taking benefits of its client/ server architecture, e-428 allows secured remote access through Internet connections.

LCI-428 Interface between the spread and the e-428 client/server architecture, the LCI-428 supports as much as 10,000 Figure 1-15 LCI-428 channels in real-time at 2 ms sampling rate. This compact unit (483 mm x 421 mm x 86 mm and 4.1 kg) (19 in x 16.5 in x 3.4 in and 9.0 lbs) acts as a router between the seismic data acquired in the field and the high-speed Ethernet network of the e-428 software. The LCI-428 also interfaces peripheral equipment such as the source controllers. Up to 10 LCI-428 can be linked together to handle up to 100,000 channels in real-time at 2 ms.

428 Lite break-out box With fewer channels to acquire (up to 1000 channels @ 2 ms, Explosive) the 428 Lite break-out box allows you to use a standard LAUX-428 in place of the LCI-428. In that case, a GPS receiver is required that supplies the necessary high-accuracy clock (PPS output). 428XL Server and Client software is installed on a laptop PC running on Linux.

34

Figure 1-16 428 Lite

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction The 428XL system > Peripheral equipment

Peripheral equipment

1

Tape drives Cartridge tapes can be used as magnetic media for recording in demultiplexed format. The 3490 or 3590 cartridge drive makes it possible to record a 3480 IBM compatible cartridge tape, directly in the field. For dual drive recording, the standard software provides alternate or simultaneous recording without any additional devices. Up to 6 drives can be connected.

Removable disk Large-capacity, removable disks rather than tape drives can be used to record your SEGD files, allowing zero-dead-time shooting. The SERCEL Network Attached Storage system (NAS) uses the Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) technology, providing the data redundancy needed for a highly secure system.

Real-Time Quality Control SERCEL QC software (eSQC Pro) allows continual Quality Control of seismic data to be performed in parallel with the acquisition without slowing down 2-D or 3-D operations.

Plotter An external plotter can be attached to the network to generate a paper record of the acquired seismic data, either in read-after-write or in playback mode.

Printer A standard colour printer allows automatic printouts of observer’s reports, or log from any operation, or snapshots.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

35

1

Introduction The 428XL system > Auxiliary channels

Auxiliary channels Analog signals from the source (sweep pilots, Uphole geophone, TB), can be recorded via an AXCUL-428 rack-mount unit connected to the LCI-428.

Figure 1-17 AXCUL-428

The AXCUL-428 houses eight FDU-428 channels. The auxiliary signals are connected to the AXCUL-428 through banana jacks on its rear panel. The Line In port connects to the Low Line port of the LCI-428. The Line Out port can be used to connect another AXCUL-428 or an FDU-428 link.

Test equipment LT-428 Line Tester The LT-428 is a pocket terminal (a handheld PC) that connects to the XDEV connector of an LAUL-428 or LAUX-428, used to check the performance of a line section. The test results are displayed on the pocket terminal. See Chapter 8.

LAUL-428

Figure 1-18 LT-428 36

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction The 428XL system > Test equipment

TMS-428 The TMS-428 mainly consists of a PC computer and an interface unit (TMU-428) the core of which is an LAUX-428 fitted with specific software. When used in a TMS-428 test system, the LAUX performs acquisition and test functions. Test results are displayed on the computer. In that configuration a high-accuracy clock is used in the LAUX. See installation and operating instructions in the 428XL Technical Manual.

TMU428

Figure 1-19 TMS-428

DSUT-428 The DSUT428 is a test system for complete performance testing and troubleshooting of DSU3-428 field electronics, using a PC, an LAUL-428, a Reference DSU3-428, and test fixture.

Figure 1-20 DSUT-428

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

37

1

1

Introduction The 428XL system > Test equipment

Quick tester The QT-400 can be connected anywhere in a line to check transmission and power supply at a glance. Figure 1-21 QT-400

CT400 cable tester The CT400 tester allows you to check a cable section for compliance with the input/output specifications of 428XL field electronics. See installation and operating instructions in the 428XL Technical Manual.

38

Figure 1-22 CT400

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction The 428XL system > GigaTransverse

GigaTransverse In high-channel-count surveys, the GigaTransverse technology makes it possible to increase the real-time capacity of the Transverse to 100 000 channels @ 2 ms. The GigaTransverse relies on the following equipment: • LCI-G (used in place of ten LCI-428 units); • LAUX-G (supporting a data rate of 1 Gb/s on its Transverse ports). • TFOI-G (Fibre Optic cable, up to 2000 m long, between GigaTransverse ports).

LCI-G

LAUX-G

TFOI-G

Figure 1-23

The Line ports of the LAUX-G are compatible with all 428XL line field electronics (LAUL, FDU, DSU1, DSU3, DSUGPS). Not allowed along the Giga Transverse is the following equipment: LAUX-428, TFOI-428, LCI-428, Laser link and Ethernet radio bridge.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

39

1

1

Introduction IT topology information for 428XL deployment >

IT topology information for 428XL deployment Two main packages should be distinguished in e428 software: • e428 Server software: typically to be installed in the recording cab housing the seismic acquisition system. • e428 Client software: Graphic User Interface software that can be installed in the recording cab and on remote computers. Remote users can access the server through an Intranet or Internet connection. Access via the Internet or Intranet requires the installation of an additional computer (referred to as Seismic Gateway). There are four different ways of implementing e428: • Local user topology (page 41). • Intranet user topology (page 42). • Internet user topology (page 43). • Intranet/Internet user topology (page 44).

40

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction IT topology information for 428XL deployment > Local user topology

Local user topology

1

Local Area Network Extra Local user

Observer (Local user)

428XL Server

Figure 1-24 Local user topology

The table below summarizes the necessary steps for the implementation shown in Figure 1-24. Where Who

Recording cab Observer (local user)

Extra local user

What

Sercel software package

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

1.Install Operating System on server computer. 2.Install Server and Client software 3.Register extra local user

1.Install Client software. 2.Request Login from Observer.

41

1

Introduction IT topology information for 428XL deployment > Intranet user topology

Intranet user topology Contractor’s Intranet (securized private network) Intranet remote user URL: http:// IP

Recording truck Crew #2 Local Area Network Seismic Gateway Observer Extra Local user

Intranet IP address

Intranet remote user

428XL Server

URL: http:// IP

Figure 1-25 Intranet user topology

The table below summarizes the necessary steps for the implementation shown in Figure 1-25.

Where

Recording cab

Remote computer

Network

Who

Observer (local user) Extra local user

Remote user

Administrator

What

42

Sercel software package

1.Install OS on server 1.Install Client computer. software. 2.Install Server and 2.Request Login Client software. from Observer. 3. Register extra users

Seismic Gateway

1.Install OS. 2.Install Seismic Gateway software.

1.Install Client software 2.Request Login from Observer. Supply Intranet IP address or DHCP address

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction IT topology information for 428XL deployment > Internet user topology

Internet user topology

1 Internet remote user

Internet Service Provider

URL: http://www.crew3.com Public Internet Seismic Gateway Interface Crew #3 Local Area Network Seismic Gateway

Observer

Extra Local user

www.crew3.com (purchased address)

428XL Server

Figure 1-26 Internet user topology

The table below summarizes the necessary steps for the implementation shown in Figure 1-26. Where Who

Recording cab Observer (local user)

Extra local user

Remote computer

Network

Remote user

Administrator

What

Sercel software package

1.Install Operating System on server computer. 2.Install Server and Client software 3.Register extra users.

Gateway

1.Install gateway Operating System. 2.Install Seismic Gateway software. 3.Install Interface software.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

1.Install Client 1.Install Client software. software. 2.Request Login 2.Request Login from Observer. from Observer.

Purchase Public Internet fixed IP address

43

1

Introduction IT topology information for 428XL deployment > Intranet/Internet user topology

Intranet/Internet user topology Internet Service Provider

Internet remote user

Public Internet

http://crews.contractor.com/crew4

Contractor’s DMZ Administered by contractor

Contractor’s Intranet (securized private network)

Firewall www.contractor.com

Intranet remote user

URL: http:// IP

Seismic Gateway

crews.contractor.com (purchased address)

Contractor’s administration centre

Recording truck Crew #4 Local Area Network Seismic Gateway Observer Extra Local user

Intranet IP address

428XLServer

Intranet remote user URL: http:// IP

Figure 1-27 Intranet/Internet user topology

44

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Introduction IT topology information for 428XL deployment > Intranet/Internet user topology

The table below summarizes the necessary steps for the implementation shown in Figure 1-27. Where Who

Recording cab Observer (local user)

Extra local user

Remote computer

Network DMZ

Remote user

Administrator

What

Sercel software package

1.Install Operating System on server 1.Install Client 1.Install Client computer. software. software. 2.Install Server and 2.Request Login 2.Request Login Client software. from Observer. from Observer. 3.Register extra users.

1.Install gateway Operating System. Gateway 2.Install Seismic Gateway software

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Supply Intranet IP address or DHCP address

1.Install gateway Operating System. 2.Install Seismic Gateway software. 3.Purchase Public Internet fixed IP address 4.Register new crew

45

1

1

Introduction IT topology information for 428XL deployment > Intranet/Internet user topology

(Page intentionally blank)

46

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

2

Hardware installation This chapter provides information for installing hardware in the recording truck. The client computer and peripherals, however, are not covered in detail in this chapter (see the specific chapters). In this chapter: • Networking (page 48) • Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 52) • AC Power requirements (page 53) • LCI-428 or LCI-G (page 54) • Master/Slave configuration (page 66) • 428XL Lite break-out box (page 68) • Server computer (page 71) • Unmanned system (page 80) • Client computer (page 91) • LCD display anchoring (page 93)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

47

2

Hardware installation Networking >

Networking 172.30.201.10

LAUX

VE464 DPG 172.30.201.1 1

DSD (172.30....)

1

LCI-428 Ethernet switch Double IP: 172.30.128.1

and 150.10.128.1 428XL client 1

172.27.128.41

NAS servers

172.27.128.42

428XL server

1

eSQC Pro server 172.27.128.2

172.27.128.1 1

FTP server

1

1

1

172.27.128.10

1 172.27.128.99

1

eSQC Pro client

1

Plotter Seismic Gateway

172.27.128.20

172.27.128.26

172.27.128.11

Contractor’s Intranet Seismic Gateway

Internet 1

RJ45, non twisted, grey, 5 m (6050047).

Figure 2-1 Standard network configuration

48

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Networking >

LAUX or LAUX-G

2

VE464 DPG 172.30.201.10 172.30.201.1

DSD (172.30....) 1

1

LCI-428 or LCI-G Ethernet switch NAS4000

Double IP: 172.30.128.1 and 150.10.128.1 172.27.127.2 1

eSQC Pro replay link

172.27.127.1

172.27.126.1

428XL server 40 000 or 100 000

428XL client

eSQC Pro server 100 000 172.27.126.10

172.27.128.1 172.27.128.10

172.27.128.2

172.27.128.11

172.27.128.99

1

1

1

1

FTP server 1

1 Seismic Gateway

Plotter

1

eSQC Pro client 172.27.128.20

172.27.128.26 Contractor’s Intranet Seismic Gateway

Internet

1 RJ45, non twisted, grey, 5 m (6050047).

Figure 2-2 Network configuration for Server 40 000 or 100 000 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

49

2

Hardware installation Networking >

Note It is recommended to power off then power on the Ethernet

switch after re-assigning its RJ45 ports. Local host

428XL server

IP address

Used by

172.27.128.1

All server sizes

172.27.127.1

Servers 40 000 & 100 000 NAS4000

172.27.126.1

Servers 40 000 & 100 000 eSQC-Pro 100 000

172.30.128.1

All server sizes

150.10.128.1

All server sizes

428XL client #1

172.27.128.2

428XL client #n

172.27.128.(n+1)

Network for

LCI-428 #1

172.30.201.1

See Changing the LCI-428 IP

LCI-428 #n

172.30.(200+n).1

address (page 51)

172.27.128.10

All server sizes

172.27.126.10

Server 100 000

428XL server 100 000

NAS4000

428XL server 100 000

eSQC-Pro server eSQC-Pro client

172.27.128.11

Seismic Gateway 172.27.128.20

Plotter 1

172.27.128.26

Plotter 2

172.27.128.27

NAS #1

172.27.128.41 172.27.127.2

NAS #2

172.27.128.42

UPS

172.27.128.98

FTP server

172.27.128.99

VE432 DSD1

150.10.128.201

VE432 DSDn

150.10.128.(200+n)

If you want to connect a network printer, look for a free address in the above table. 50

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Networking >

Changing the LCI-428 IP address The LCI-428 comes with a default IP address (172.30.201.1). If two or more are used, follow the procedure below to assign a distinct address to each of them. 1.

To avoid any network conflict, power off all LCI-428s except the one you want to set up (for example LCI-428 #2). Wait until the LCI-428 has booted up.

2.

If the 428XL Server application is running, stop it by typing the letter s in a Terminal window on the Server machine.

3.

Assuming the address of LCI-428 #1 is 172.30.201.1, type the following commands to set the address of LCI-428 #2 to 172.30.202.1: rlogin 172.30.201.1 lgsBootTargetSetI "172.30.202.1" lgsVersion (the lgsVersion command should return the correct IP address 172.30.202.1). logout

4.

Power off the LCI-428. Power on the next LCI-428 to set up, if any, and repeat steps 3 and 4, and so on and so forth until each LCI-428 has a distinct IP address.

5.

In the jInstall window: - Select the number of LCI-428s and enter the IP address of each of them (172.30.202.1, 172.30.203.1, etc.). - Click “Apply”. This reboots the server computer. The new settings will not take effect until the server computer has booted up.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

51

2

2

Hardware installation Identifying Ethernet interface ports >

Identifying Ethernet interface ports Whenever you want to make sure all Ethernet ports are properly connected, you can use the ping command to test whether a computer can reach the expected hosts across the network. This assumes that the SERCEL software is already installed on the computer and on the distant host. 1.

See Networking (page 48) to find the IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) of the host which should be visible to your computer.

2.

If your computer runs on Linux, open a Terminal window. If it runs on Windows, open a Command Prompt window.

3.

Type the command ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

and press Return

(assuming xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the host you want to connect to). 4.

52

If you get a reply saying that a number of packets were sent and received, do not change anything. Otherwise, move the Ethernet cable to another port, on the distant host or on your computer, and “ping” the network again. Try again until you get a correct reply.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation AC Power requirements >

AC Power requirements In order to help you determine the total AC power required and circuit breaker amperages, depending on the configuration of your recording cab, the table below gives the typical consumption of each device that your 428XL system may include.

428XL LCI-428

110 VAC

220 VAC

2A

1A

VE464 DPG

1.6 A

0.8 A

VE432 DPG

1.6 A

0.8 A

Ethernet switch (typical)

1A

0.5 A

HP Z800 / Z820

12 A

10 A

HP XW 8600

13.2 A

6.6 A

HP XW4600 / Z400 / Z420

10 A

6A

DELL PC (typical)

6A

3A

IBM ZPro PC

10 A

5A

CRT display (typical)

2.5 A

1.2 A

LCD display (typical)

1A

0.5 A

NAS system

4A

2A

Tape drive (typical)

3A

1.5 A

Plotter (typical)

4A

2A

TMU428

1A

0.5 A

×

=

Total =

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

53

2

2

Hardware installation LCI-428 or LCI-G > Rear panel

LCI-428 or LCI-G In this section: • Rear panel (page 54) • Shock-mount parts (page 55) • Cabling to VE464 (page 57) • Cabling to VE432 (page 58) • Shooting system (page 59) • Multimodule (page 60) • Remote input panel (page 61) • DSUGPS — GPS base position station (page 62)

Rear panel

Figure 2-3 LCI-G

Figure 2-4 LCI-428

Note that only the Transverse port connectors are different.

54

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation LCI-428 or LCI-G > Shock-mount parts

Shock-mount parts

21

81.1

The LCI-428 is delivered to you with the four shock-absorbers already in place. If you need to remove them (e. g. for a rack-mount setup), remove the cover to gain access to the screws inside the unit.

35.9

Four shock-absorbers to be bolted to mount plate Eight M3 screws Eight holes (dia. 3.9 mm)

260 mm

342 mm

35.9

310 mm 438 mm

Figure 2-5 LCI-428 mounting dimensions

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

55

2

81.1

Hardware installation LCI-428 or LCI-G > Shock-mount parts

21

2

4 screws, M6×50

Mount plate 756084647

4 mounting holes (dia. 6.2)

300

242

350

492 514

Figure 2-6 Mounting plate (dimensions in mm)

56

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation LCI-428 or LCI-G > Cabling to VE464

Cabling to VE464 Left Transverse port

12 VDC

2

FDU-428 Link LAUX-428

LAUL-428

Right Transverse port

To Ethernet switch

1

Left Transverse VE464 DPG

Ground

(or other Vibrator controller, or shooting system)

2

To Ethernet switch AC power Right Transverse

Ground

PPS booster

GPS receiver (optional)

12 VDC

1

10 m max. 3

Trimble Accutime Gold Auxiliary channels. FDU link or AXCUL-428

See also Auxiliary channels (page 356)

1 SRHRF-type Transverse cable, 125 m max. 2 P/N 1C14078465 (included in VE464 parts). 3 GPS cord, 10 m max. recommended (included in 1L13087062).

Figure 2-7 LCI-428 ports 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

57

Hardware installation LCI-428 or LCI-G > Cabling to VE432

Cabling to VE432 Up to four VE432 DPGs can be connected to an LCI-428, via a Multi-Slave Interface box (Part No. 1C14078122). TB2

TB3

TB4

3

3

3

3

Aux 1

Aux 2

Aux 3

Aux 4

MSI

DPG 1

DPG 2

DPG 3

DPG 4

1

1

1

1

110/220 VAC power

Analog Pilots

Blaster

Analog Pilots

1

TB1

Recorder

Low Line or High Line

Recorder

2

To Ethernet switch 2

2

2

2

Banana jacks

Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4

AIB

AIB

1, 2, 3, 4 Auxiliary channels (FDU link or AXCUL-428)

1

P/N 1C14078465

2

P/N 1717075950

3

P/N 1A13077600

Figure 2-8 : Multi-DPG configuration (Slip-Sweep)

Two Pilot signals from each DPG are connected to the auxiliary line via AIB boxes (Part No. 1C14079115). 58

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation LCI-428 or LCI-G > Shooting system

If more auxiliary channels need to be recorded, use as many AIB boxes as necessary. If required, TB signals can easily be connected to the Auxiliary line too, via the MSI box and additional AIB boxes. For other connections to the DPG, see VE432 documentation.

Shooting system To connect a shooting system, see the manufacturer’s documentation and BLASTER signals (page 540) and Cables (page 551).

Figure 2-9 Shooter encoder connected to LCI-428 (Blaster port)

When radio transmission is an issue in Dynamite operations, you may want the shooter encoder to be closer to the blasters. In that case, you can connect it to the XDEV2 port of an LAUX-428. Any way you connect the encoder, however, radio transmission conditions should be good enough to allow the shooter to talk to the observer. LAUX-428 must be in active spread!

XDEV2

Figure 2-10 Shooter encoder connected to LAUX-428 (XDEV2 port)

It makes no difference whether you connect the encoder to an LCI-428 or an LAUX-428 (the FO and TB signals, and an RS232 port, are available from XDEV2 just like it were the Blaster port of an LCI-428). To connect the encoder, you can use an LAUX-428 on a Transverse, or you can insert an LAUX-428 anywhere on any Line (if the LAUX-428 is included in the active spread). This does not affect the other functions of the LAUX-428 used. You can connect several encoders this way in your spread. See also Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) — page 373. See also Source controller interfacing (page 97) in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

59

2

2

Hardware installation LCI-428 or LCI-G > Multimodule

Multimodule Each LCI-428 can handle up to 10000 channels @ 2 ms. Connect the High Line port of the first LCI-428 to the Low Line port of the second, and so on, using a 1.5-metre (Part No. 512500155) or 2-m (Part No. 512100122) jumper cable. Connect each LCI-428 to the Ethernet switch (a 1 Gbps switch is required). Note that you must assign a unique IP address to each LCI-428. See Changing the LCI-428 IP address (page 51).

172.30.201.1

Auxiliary channels (FDU link or AXCUL-428) Ethernet switch (1 Gbps)

Line jumper cable

172.30.202.1

Figure 2-11 Example of Multimodule setup

60

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation LCI-428 or LCI-G > Remote input panel

Remote input panel A remote input panel (P/N 1L22084238), to be mounted on a wall of the recording cab, together with 6-metre jumper cables, can be used to connect the spread to the Line and Transverse ports of the LCI-428.

Remote input panel

Line jumper cable, 6 m (P/N 512 100 380)

High Line

Left Trans

Low Line

200 mm

Right Trans

Transverse jumper cable, 6 m (P/N 512 100 483)

220 mm

6 holes, dia 4.5 mm

140 mm

140 mm 300 mm

Figure 2-12 Remote input panel mounting dimensions

A different input panel (P/N 10002788) is available for the LCI-G, with 10-contact Transverse ports (P/N 10001136). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

61

2

2

Hardware installation DSUGPS — GPS base position station >

DSUGPS — GPS base position station When using DSUGPS links, the clock of the LCI-428 must be locked to a clock signal from a GPS receiver. This requires the use of a laterdesign LCI-428 which has a 10 MHz input BNC on its rear panel.

Power On/Off

Figure 2-13 GPS Base Position box RS port (GPS messages)

I/O port (PPS)

GPS antenna downlead (60 m max.) 110/220 VAC

GPS Base Position P/N 10000408

XDEV2

10 MHz input

LCI-428

Figure 2-14 Cabling

The GPS antenna should be located in as clear a sight of the sky as possible, without overhead foliage or other obstructions such as power lines.

62

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation DSUGPS — GPS base position station >

The DSUGPS does not allow the use of an Ethernet Radio Bridge. Note that to enable the use of DSUGPS links, you must select the “DSUGPS used” option in the jInstall window. See User’s Manual Vol. 1.

2

The necessary equipment is supplied in the GPS Base Position kit (Part No. 10001610. Table 2-1 GPS Base Position Kit P/N 10001610 Description

Part No.

Qty

GPS Base Position box

10000408

1

LCI XDEV2-RS232-PPS cable GPS antenna

1T45088362

1

3310234

1

Antenna downlead, 30 m.

3310236

2

Coaxial cord, 1.5 m. (BNC, pin / BNC, pin)

5050058

1

Coaxial adapter (N, socket / N, socket)

5050319

1

Note The GPS Base Position box houses a PROPAK GPS receiver

which must have special hardware and software (ProPak V3 from Novatel, customized for DSUGPS usage). Do not use a standard PROPAK receiver from Novatel. The GPS receiver comes with a CD-ROM from Novatel containing a software application (CDU) and a USB/DB9 cable that you can use to check for satellite visibility after connecting the GPS antenna. To do so: 1.

Install CDU software on a PC.

Figure 2-15 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

63

2

Hardware installation DSUGPS — GPS base position station >

2.

Launch the NovAtel CDU application. - From the Device menu, select Open. - In the window that shows up, click New.

Figure 2-16

3.

Connect the PC to the DB9 connector on the front panel of the GPS Base Position box, using the DB9/USB cord provided.

Figure 2-17

4.

64

Connecting the USB cord causes the computer to automatically add three virtual COM ports. Accept installing the three ports, and then open the Control Panel to check the port names in the system properties (Peripherals).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation DSUGPS — GPS base position station >

2 Figure 2-18

5.

Select the virtual COM port created by the computer and click OK.

Figure 2-19

6.

Check for visible satellites. This allows you to see if the GPS antenna is properly installed and in good working order.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

65

2

Hardware installation Master/Slave configuration >

Master/Slave configuration The “Master/Slave” mode allows using up to four separate 428XL systems synchronized to a “Master” 428XL. The “Master” and “Slave” can communicate with each other via an Ethernet switch if the Slave is close enough, or an Ethernet bridge in the case of distant systems.

LCI-428

VE464 DPG DSD

Ethernet switch

See Mater/Slave Y cable (page 565) wiring Master 428XL server

172.27.128.1

428XL client Master system Ethernet switch Slave system

172.27.128.2 Slave 428XL server

428XL client LCI-428

Figure 2-20 Master and Slave in the same doghouse

Note that you must assign a unique IP address to each LCI-428. See Changing the LCI-428 IP address (page 51). 66

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Master/Slave configuration >

LCI-428

2

VE464 DPG Ethernet switch

DSD Master 428XL server

172.27.128.1

428XL client Ethernet switch Master system Ethernet bridge Slave system Ethernet switch

172.27.128.2 Slave 428XL server 428XL client

See “Slave DSD” in VE464 User’s Manual

LCI-428 Slave DSD

Figure 2-21 Distant systems

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

67

2

Hardware installation 428XL Lite break-out box >

428XL Lite break-out box Warning: Do not connect the USB port of the 428Lite Box, or the battery of the attached LAUX-428, until the server is up and running! (i. e. connect it just before opening the jConfig window). Two 10-metre cords (included in P/N 1L11084625)

GPS receiver

Trimble Accutime Gold

“XDEV2 428-Lite” tag

LAUX-428 used as LCI-428 (see Note below)

4 “XDEV1 LAUX428” tag

3 XDEV1 XDEV2

XDEV2

5

“XDEV2 LAUX428” tag

XDEV1

“XDEV1 428-Lite” tag

Blaster

LAUX-428

2

Server/Client laptop (Linux) computer See Figure 2-27 on

page 77 1

172.27.128.41

1

172.27.128.1

Ethernet switch

NAS server 1 RJ45, non twisted, grey, 3 m (3170158).

Plotter

2 9-pin Sub D / USB cord (P/N 1L11084743) 3 GPS cord, 10 m max. recommended (P/N 1L11084742) 4 XDEV2 cable (P/N 1L11085000) 5 XDEV1 cable (P/N 1L11084999)

172.27.128.26

Client laptop computer (Linux or Windows)

Important: Be sure to connect XDEV1 and XDEV2 cables as indicated. Watch the tag at either end!

Figure 2-22 428XL Lite system 68

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation 428XL Lite break-out box >

WARNING

Do not connect the USB port of the 428Lite Box, or the battery of the attached LAUX-428, until the server is up and running! (i. e. connect it just before opening the jConfig window). WARNING

At either end of the XDEV1 and XDEV2 cables is a tag indicating which end to connect to the LAUX-428 and which end to connect to the 428-Lite box. Be sure to connect each cable the right way!

A USB disk can be used as record medium in place of a NAS as follows: - Connect the USB disk to a Windows Client computer. On the Client computer, set up an FTP server (e. g. Filezilla) and configure the shared folders options for the USB disk to be the FTP home directory. - In the 428XL Install window, select the FTP Export mode. In the 428XL Export window, enter the FTP server connection information, and select the FTP server as device to use for exports. (See the Export window’s help information for details). The power to the GPS receiver is supplied via the 428Lite box. The Ethernet switch operates from 110/220 VAC. The 428Lite box is not waterproof. Adequate shelter should be provided in case of outdoor use. Note: if the LAUX-428 to be used as LCI-428 is loaded with software version 1.0, it must be upgraded via its XDEV1 port (it cannot be upgraded using the Download menu on the GUI). See Upgrading through serial (XDEV) port — page 161.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

69

2

2

Hardware installation 428XL Lite break-out box >

Table 2-2 428XL Lite (Part No. 1L11084625) Item

Quantity

Ground stake

1C70078960

2

Lite Break Out Box

1L11084626

1

GPS Acutime Gold & cable

1L11084742

1

428 LITE/PC cable

1L11084743

1

428-LITE dongle

1L11084864

1

428-LITE PC/LAUX cable

1L11084867

1

LAUX-428 LITE XDEV1 cable

1L11084999

1

LAUX-428 LITE XDEV2 cable

1L11085000

1

LAUX-428 LITE earth cable

1L11085106

1

LINUX software package

1S30084879

1

10 BASE T cord

3170158

2

Mouse pad

3170232

1

Ethernet switch

3170252

1

317085804

1

Plug, 19-pin

5010952

1

Carrying case

8800205

1

Desktop computer

70

Part No.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Server computer >

Server computer In this section:

2

• Shock-mount parts (page 72) • Server computer connectors (page 73) • Tape drive interface cards (page 78) • Server hardware installation kit (page 79) WARNING

Be sure to install your workstations in an area where airflow is not obstructed, maintain proper clearance and provide appropriate air conditioning in the recording cab in order to meet the environmental requirements specified in the manufacturer’s documentation.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

71

2

Hardware installation Server computer > Shock-mount parts

Shock-mount parts

Computer

Shock-mount P/N

HP XW 8600 756090076 HP Z800

Rear stop

HP Z820

756086162

HP Z400 HP Z420

10008113

6 holes, dia. 7mm 250

250

390

350

195 680 750

Figure 2-23. Shock-mount assembly

72

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Server computer > Server computer connectors

Server computer connectors Note For a tape drive that connects via a Fiber Channel port (e. g.

2

IBM 3592), the following interface board is required, depending on whether you install it in a PCI or PCI-Express slot in the computer: - QLOGIC QLA2342 (P/N 1660083296) in a PCI-X slot. - QLOGIC QLE2462 (P/N 1660084970) in a PCI-Express slot (e. g. Ultra45). See Tape drive interface cards (page 78). Note If your 428XLserver computer has two internal hard disks and,

for any reason, you remove the additional disk, then you have to reinstall the Operating System and 428XL software. Use the slots as indicated in the table below, depending on the type of tape drive to connect. WARNING

The different types of SCSI interface should not be mixed. WARNING

On a computer running on Linux, if you add or move or remove any Ethernet interface card, then you may have to request a new licence code from SERCEL.

Note It is recommended to connect display screens via DisplayPort

to DVI adaptors and long DVI cables. Do not use VGA ports.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

73

2

Hardware installation Server computer > Server computer connectors

Capacity

RAM

Processor

4000

16 GB monoProc

10000

16 GB biProc

20000

32 GB biProc

40000

64 GB biProc

100000

96 GB biProc

Dual port (PCIe) Ethernet card (not required if less than 40 000 channels) FC QLE2462

Figure 2-24 Z820

Table 2-3 Item

74

Description

1

Power cord connector.

2

PS/2 mouse connector (green).

3

Audio line-in connector (blue).

4

eth0 and eth1 network interfaces. See Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 52)

5

IEEE-1394a FireWire connector (white).

6

Security slot.

7

Graphics card connector(s).

8

Serial connector (teal blue).

9

USB 3.0 ports (2, blue).

10

USB 2.0 ports (4, black).

11

Audio line-out connector (green).

12

Microphone connector (pink).

13

PS/2 keyboard connector (purple)

14

Rear power button.

15

Power supply Built-In Self Test (BIST) LED.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Server computer > Server computer connectors

2 LSI 20320 IE Single port SCSI card

PCIe PCIe

Dual port (PCIe) Ethernet card (not required if less than 40 000 channels)

PCIe PCIe PCIe PCI

FC QLE2462

PCIe

Figure 2-25 Z800 rear panel

Table 2-4 Item

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Description

1

Power cord connector.

2

PS/2 mouse connector (green).

3

IEEE-1394 connector.

4

eth0 and eth1 network interfaces. See Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 52)

5

Audio line-in connector (blue).

6

Side access panel key.

7

Graphics connector.

8

Audio line-out connector (green).

9

Microphone connector (pink).

10

USB 2.0 ports (6).

11

PS/2 keyboard connector(purple).

12

Serial connector.

13

Cable lock slot.

14

Power supply Built-In Self Test (BIST) LED.

75

2

Hardware installation Server computer > Server computer connectors

Access panel key loop Universal chassis clamp lock opening Padlock loop

Power supply Built-In Self Test (BIST) LED

Cable lock slot

eth0 and eth1 network interfaces. See Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 52)

Additional Ethernet interface Graphics card

FC QLA2342

PCI 32/33 PCI Express x16 GEN2 PCI Express x8 (x4) PCI Express x16 (x16, x8) GEN2 PCI Express x8 (1), Gen2 x8 (8) PCI Express x8 (x4) PCI-X 133

Figure 2-26 HP XW 8600

76

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Server computer > Server computer connectors

2

9-pin Sub D / USB cord (P/N 1L11084743)

Ethernet switch (1 GB)

Dongle (USB port)

Mouse

Figure 2-27 Laptop computer (DELL Precision M6400)

If more than four USB ports are required, use a USB (V2) hub.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

77

2

Hardware installation Server computer > Tape drive interface cards

Tape drive interface cards

Index

Card or adapter

Periph. bus

Host bus

Driver

Sercel Part No.

Supplied in Sercel addon package

B

Dual port Fiber Channel QLA2342 or QLA2462

FC

PCI-X

Red Hat WS 4.6

1660083296

No

C

Dual port Fiber Channel QLE2462

FC

PCIExpress

Red Hat WS 4.6 or 5.8

1660084970

No

D

Adaptec single port SCSI AHA- 2944UW

HVD

PCI

Red Hat WS 4.6

3170311

No

E

Adaptec dual port SCSI 39320

LVD/SE

PCI-X

Red Hat WS 4.6

3170297

Yes

F

LSI 20320 IE (SCSI LVD single port)

LVD

PCIExpress

Red Hat WS 5.8

Yes

Tape drives Host computer 3592

LTO3

MDR

3590

3490 HVD

3490 SE

HP XW 8600

B

E

E

D

D

Not supported

HP Z800

C

E

E

D

D

Not supported

HP Z820

C

F

Not supported

Note Depending on which slot is used for the QLE2462 card on a

Z800 HP workstation, you may get a message “101-out of memory space for option ROMs”. In that case, use the BIOS configuration menu (by pressing F9 at boot time) to disable “Option ROM Download” and “Compute” for that slot. See Figure 2-28 (page 79).

78

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Server computer > Server hardware installation kit

2

Figure 2-28

Server hardware installation kit (Part No. 1L61084838)

Item VGA video cord

Part No.

Quantity

3170231

1

Ethernet switch

3170277

2

USB extender cord

3170278

2

LSI 20320 IE Single port SCSI card (if HP Z820 server) or Adaptec dual port SCSI 39320 card (if earlier server)

10007429 3170297

1

RJ45 FTP cord, 5m

6050047

2

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

79

2

Hardware installation Unmanned system > Overview

Unmanned system In this section: • Overview (page 80) • UPS (page 81) • CDU (page 87)

Overview This section describes how to configure a UPS (page 81) and CDU (page 87) to protect the system from power cuts and automatically reboot it if SEG-D files stop being generated, for example for the Microseismic operation mode. See also Unmanned (page 67) in User’s Manual Vol. 1 to enable this option on the server.

172.30.xxx.xxx network

172.30.128.99 UPS Input Output AC power

Controlled outlets A1

A2 A3 A4 A5 A6

172.30.128.98

CDU Second NAS (if any) 428XL server LCI-428

NAS

Second NAS (if any)

172.27.128.xxx network

Figure 2-29 Unmanned configuration cabling 80

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Unmanned system > UPS

UPS Prerequisites The IP address of the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) is assumed known. To configure the IP address of the UPS (or retrieve it), refer to the Installation And Quick Start Manual from the manufacturer (Quick Configuration section). To access the configuration interface, open a Web browser window and enter the IP address of the UPS in the URL bar. The default Login and Password are apc. They can be changed in the configuration interface.

SNMP agent configuration A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent is used in the UPS to send some SNMP traps to the server when events occur. The required UPS configuration for sending SNMP traps to the server is described below. Configuring SNMP access The procedure below describes: • how to activate SNMP access for the UPS; • how to create SNMP agents which can access the UPS. In the configuration interface window: 1.

Click on the Administration tab, then Network.

2.

In the SNMPv1 section, click on access.

3.

Tick the Enable SNMPv1 access option.

4.

Click Apply.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

81

2

2

Hardware installation Unmanned system > UPS

Figure 2-30

5.

Still in the SNMPv1 section, click on Access Control.

6.

Click on Public.

7.

Enter the IP address of the server into the NMS IP/Host Name field (172.30.128.1).

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Click on Private and repeat steps 7 and 8.

10. Click on public2. - In the Community Name field, enter public. - In the NMS IP/Host Name field, enter the IP address of the CDU (e.g. 172.30.128.98). - Set the Access Type to Read. - Click Apply. 11. Click on private2. - In the Community Name field, enter private. 82

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Unmanned system > UPS

- In the NMS IP/Host Name field, enter the IP address of the CDU (e. g. 172.30.128.98). - Set the Access Type to Write.

2

- Click Apply.

Figure 2-31

Configuring Trap Receiver Follow the procedure below to configure the SNMP manager that receives traps sent by the CDU. 1.

Click on the Administration tab, then Notification.

2.

Click on trap receivers.

3.

Click on Add Trap Receiver. - In the NMS IP/Host Name field, enter IP address of the server (i.e. 172.30.128.1). - Click Apply.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

83

2

Hardware installation Unmanned system > UPS

Figure 2-32

4.

Click on Add Trap Receiver. - In the NMS IP/Host Name field, enter IP address of the LCI-428 (i.e. 172.30.201.1). - Click Apply.

Event Notification Configuration Follow the procedure below to configure the UPS to send SNMP trap to server only when a power supply problem occurs.

84

1.

Click on the Administration tab, then Notification.

2.

Click on by group (in the Event Actions section).

3.

Select Events by Category.

4.

Tick all boxes except Input Line Status, Battery.

5.

Click Next >>.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Unmanned system > UPS

2

Figure 2-33

6.

In the Event Action section, - Select the Trap Receivers radio button. - Click Next >>. - Select the boxes with the previously created SNMP server. - Click Next >>.

7.

In the Notification Parameters section, - Select the Disable Notifications radio button. - Click Next >>.

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Click Finish.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

85

2

Hardware installation Unmanned system > UPS

Shudown configuration 1.

In the configuration interface window, click on the UPS tab.

Figure 2-34

86

2.

In the Configuration section, click on Shutdown.

3.

Set the Low Battery Duration to 5 minutes, then click Apply. This setting lets the UPS notify the server 5 minutes before turning off the power supply in the event of persistent power outage leading to a low battery voltage. This allows the hardware and software monitoring application to properly shut down the server applications, the server and NAS disks. The system will automatically boot up once the power supply is restored on the UPS.

4.

Set the Return Delay to 300 seconds, then click Apply. As a result of this setting, when the battery is low and the AC power reappears, the UPS will wait 5 minutes (the duration specified in the “Return Delay” field) before restoring the power on the outlets. This delay lets the UPS regain some battery power and allows the system to restart properly.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Unmanned system > CDU

CDU Prerequisites

2

The IP address of the Cabinet Distribution Unit (CDU) is assumed known. To configure the IP address of the CDU (or to retrieve it), refer to the CDU_Switched_v60 manual from the manufacturer (Chapter 2: Installation > Connecting to the Unit). To access the configuration interface, open a Web browser window and enter the IP address of the CDU in the URL bar. The default Login and Password are admn. They can be changed in the configuration interface.

UPS identification The CDU allows checking the status and voltage of the UPS. In the CDU configuration interface window: 1.

Click on Configuration then UPS.

2.

Select APC from the Type dropdown list, and enter the IP address of the UPS into the Hostname/IP field. 172.30.128.98

172.30.128.99

Figure 2-35

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

87

2

Hardware installation Unmanned system > CDU

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Click on the Edit link.

5.

Select the Input Feed checkbox associated with this name: TowerA_InfeedA.

6.

Click Apply. IP Address: 172.30.128.98

172.30.128.99

Figure 2-36

Outlet configuration To protect the equipment from power supply cuts, each device (server, server monitor, LCI-428, NAS, etc.) must be connected to a CDU outlet. The CDU is able to manage up to 8 outlets. To configure the CDU outlets, click on Configuration then Outlets. Clicking on the Edit button ahead of each outlet allows you to change some parameters: • Outlet Name: used to enter the name of the associated device (e428 server, monitor of e428 server, NAS, LCI-428, etc.). 88

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Unmanned system > CDU

• Wakeup State: the state of the outlet (ON, OFF, LAST) when powered on. Keep the default setting (ON). • Post-On Delay: time to wait before starting the next outlet. Keep the default setting (0 second).

IMPORTANT

It is very important that the outlets be configured as shown in the screenshot below (Figure 2-37) and each device connected to the associated outlet. If a single NAS system is used, it must be connected to outlet 4 (in that case, outlet 5 must remain unused rather than used to connect the second Ethernet switch).

Figure 2-37 Outlet configuration

SNMP configuration The e428 server application can send SNMP commands to the CDU to manage outlets (power on, power off or reboot). For maximum security,

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

89

2

2

Hardware installation Unmanned system > CDU

the CDU should only accept SNMP commands from the e428 server. Follow the procedure below to set SNMP parameters. 1.

Click on Configuration > SNMP/Thresholds.

2.

From the SNMP Agent dropdown list, choose Enabled.

3.

In TRAP Community field, enter public.

4.

In the Error Trap Repeat Time field, enter 20 (seconds).

5.

In the Trap Destination 1 field, enter the IP address of the server (i.e. 172.30.128.1).

6.

From the IP restrictions dropdown list, choose No restrictions.

7.

In the SysName field, enter Sentry3_CDU.

8.

The SysLocation and SysContact fields are not mandatory (keep default values).

9.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-38

Note Your changes will not take effect until you restart the CDU. 90

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation Client computer >

Client computer Sercel recommends the use of a HP Z420, or HP Z400 or HP XW 4600, as 428XL Client host computer. It can run on RedHat Linux (recommended by Sercel) or Windows™. 8-GB RAM (Windows 7 or Linux Red Hat 5.8)

Primary Graphics card Secondary Graphics card

Figure 2-39 Z420 rear panel

Table 2-5 Item Description

Item Description

1

Power supply Built-In Self Test (BIST) LED.

9

Audio line-out connector (green).

2

Universal chassis clamp opening.

10

Microphone connector (pink).

3

PS/2 mouse connector (green)

11

eth0 network interface. See Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 52)

4

USB 2.0 ports (4, black).

12

USB 3.0 ports (2, blue).

5

Security slot.

13

IEEE-1394a FireWire connector (white).

6

Padlock loop.

14

PS/2 keyboard connector (purple).

7

Audio line-in connector (blue).

15

Rear power button.

8

Graphics card connector.

16

Power cord connector.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

91

2

2

Hardware installation Client computer >

RAM

eth0 network interface. See Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 52)

Primary Graphics card

Windows 7

2 GB

32-bit

6 GB

64-bit

Secondary Graphics card

Figure 2-40 HP Z400

eth0 network interface. See Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 52)

Primary Graphics card

Secondary Graphics card

Figure 2-41 HP XW 4600

The standard HP XW 4600 or HP Z400/Z420 comes with a dual-port graphics card. A second graphics card can be connected, allowing up to four display screens to be used: • For HP XW 4600: NVIDIA dual-port graphics card FX1700 (Sercel Part No. 3170332), or FX1800 (Sercel Part No. 3170359). Note that the FX1700 card has two DVI ports whereas the FX1800 includes a DVI port and two Display Ports. On an FX1800, only the two Display Ports must be used. • For HP Z420 or HP Z400: Nvidia Quadro 2000.

92

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Hardware installation LCD display anchoring >

LCD display anchoring An anchoring kit (Part No. 10002055) is available from SERCEL that allows you to protect an LCD screen from shocks when unused. Follow the procedure below to install the anchoring kit: 1.

Drill a hole (dia. 11 mm) in the table top, 170 mm from the wall. See Figure 2-42.

2.

Secure the LCD Monitor Arm to the table top with the mounting parts from the tool kit.

3.

Install the display on the arm, leaving a long enough loose length of connecting cable to allow for a 180° swing angle.

4.

Swing the display through 180° backward. With the screen’s front face resting against the wall, record the height (H) of the bottom edge above the table top (seeFigure 2-42). 4 5

LCD Monitor Arm

170

H

Figure 2-42

5.

Swing the display forward.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

93

2

Hardware installation LCD display anchoring >

6.

Drill four holes (dia. 12 mm) in the wall, 518 mm apart horizontally, 272 mm apart vertically, with the lowest two along a horizontal line at H + 60 mm (see Figure 2-43).

7.

Insert a hollow wall anchor into each hole. Secure the Display Anchor Base to the wall with four screws.

mm

Display Anchor Base

Display protected from shocks by strapping it in Anchor Base

272 mm

8 51

H + 60 mm

2

H

Figure 2-43

94

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

3

Server software installation In this chapter: • Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 (page 96) • Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 (page 119) • Installing 428XL server software (page 149) • Saving 428XL parameters (page 154) • Uninstalling 428XL server software (page 155) • Server software patches (page 157) • Firmware upgrading (page 161) • Troubleshooting (page 166)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

95

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 >

Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 If for any reason you have to install or re-install the Redhat Linux Operating System on the e428 server computer (HP Z820), use one of the procedures below, depending on whether you are installing it on a 428XL-20000/10000 or 428XL- 40000 desktop computer: • 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer (page 97) • 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer (page 105) • 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer (page 113) If this is a re-installation, first save the Licence codes (page 207) and operating parameters (see Saving 428XL parameters — page 154), and then power off the computer. CAUTION

This installation procedure will erase everything on the hard disk. WARNING

After Redhat Linux is installed, a GRUB boot loader window shows up each time you power up or boot up the computer. Do not press any key (the boot loader window should disappear automatically).

96

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer This procedure is for an e428 server computer handling up to 20 000 channels. 1.

2.

Power up the computer and press the prompted function key to interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F9 on HP Z820 computer, otherwise F12). Insert the SERCEL REDHAT Enterprise V5.8 (64 bit) DVD-ROM into the drive. IMPORTANT

Be sure to use the REDHAT DVD-ROM supplied by SERCEL, rather than the one accompanying the machine.

3.

Depending on the type of machine, select “Onboard or USB CDROM Drive” from the Boot Device menu, and press Return, or choose the Optical Drive or IDE-CDROM device option.

4.

When the message “to install RedHat Enterprise Linux in graphical mode” appears, press Enter (or wait until the timeout delay has expired).

5.

When the system asks if you wish “To begin testing the media before installation”, choose Skip (using the arrow keys). Press Enter.

6.

In the window that appears, click Next.

7.

In the language selection window, choose English. Click Next.

8.

In the keyboard window, choose as appropriate, for example United Kingdom or U.S. International (if Qwerty) or French (if Azerty). Click Next. Note that with the US International option, you may have to press the space bar after typing a quote or double-quote character to enter that character.

9.

In the “Installation Number” window, choose “Skip entering Installation Number”, and click Ok. In the warning box that pops up, click Skip.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

97

3

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

10. If an “Installation Type” window appears, choose Install RedHat Enterprise Linux Client. Click Next. 11. In the partitioning window: - Choose Remove all partitions on selected drives and create default layout (Caution: be sure not to choose “Remove Linux partition”). - Make sure the sda, sdb and sdc partitions are selected. - Select Review and modify partitioning layout. Leave other options unchanged. - Click Next. - In the warning box that pops up, choose Yes. 12. Select VolGroup00. - Click Delete. - In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 13. Select /dev/sda2. Click Edit. 14. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sda2 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select Swap. - Choose Fixed size. - Enter 16000 into the Size field (16000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 15. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb and sdc. - Type / in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”.

98

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

- Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 8000 into the Size field (8000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked.

3

- Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 16. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb and sdc. - Type /var/tmp in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 2000 into the Size field (2000 MB). - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 17. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb and sdc. - Type /export/home in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 18. Select /dev/sdb1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdb1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda and sdc. Only sdb should be selected. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

99

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

- Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 19. Select /dev/sdc1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdc1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump0 in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda and sdb. Only sdc should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. Note In the case of a 428XL 20000 server, the HP Z820 comes with

5 native Hard Disks which must be formatted as described in steps 20 and 21. In the case of a 428XL 4000 or 428XL 10000 server (HP Z820 with only 3 embedded Hard Disks), go direct to step 22 (skip steps 20 and 21). 20. Select /dev/sdd1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdd1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump1 in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda, sdb, sdc and sde. Only sdd should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 21. Select /dev/sde1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sde1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. 100

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

- Type /var/dump2 in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda, sdb, sdc and sdd. Only sde should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked.

3

- Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 22. Click Next. 23. In the boot loader window, leave the default settings unchanged. Click Next. 24. In the network devices window: - Select the Active on boot option (for eth0 and eth1). - Select eth0. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter 172.27.128.1 for the ip-eth0 address (visible to the seismic recording system). - Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0 as Submask for ip-eth0. - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - If a second Ethernet card is installed, select eth1. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter the ip-eth1 address visible to the local network (172.30.128.1). - Netmask: enter the Submask for ip-eth1 (that is 255.255.0.0). - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

101

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

- Set the hostname: choose the Manually option. - Leave the hostname field unchanged (localhost.localdomain). - Click Next. A warning box (Error With Data) should show up, warning you that the Gateway and DNS fields are left blank. Click Continue to dismiss those warnings. 25. In the time zone window: choose your time zone. Click Next. 26. In the Root account window, - Root password: enter the desired Root password (e. g. administrator) for the e428 server and keep it in a safe place. - Confirm: type again your password to confirm. Click Next. 27. In the package installation defaults window: - Select Software Development; - Select Customize now. - Click Next. 28. In the package group selection window: - In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment (leave other settings unchanged). - In the Applications group, remove (unselect) Games. - In the Development group, the following should be selected: - Development tools; - X Software Development Support; - Legacy Software Development; - In the Servers group: - Select Web Server. - Select Mail Server. - Select Legacy Network Server. - Click on Optional packages. 102

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

- Select rsh-server. - Click Close. - In the Base System group, - Select System Tools.

3

- Click on Optional packages. - Select sysstat. - Click Close. - Select Legacy Software Support. - Click on Optional packages. - Select Open Motif. - Click Close. - Click Next. 29. In the next window, click Next. 30. The installation program installs packages from the Redhat DVDROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour). 31. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM from the drive. 32. Click Reboot. 33. In the Welcome window, click Forward. 34. In the Licence Agreement window, choose Yes. Click Forward. 35. From the Firewall drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 36. From the SELinux drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 37. In the Kdump window, make sure “Enable Kdump” is not selected. Click Forward. 38. In the Date and Time window, set the time and click Forward.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

103

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

39. In the Set Up Software Updates window, - Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward. - In the window that pops up, click No thanks, I’ll connect later. 40. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward. 41. In the Create User window, click Forward. If a warning box appears, click Continue. 42. In the Sound Card window click Forward. 43. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This completes the installation of RedHat Linux —and reboots the server. See Installing 428XL server software (page 149).

104

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer This procedure is for an e428 server computer handling up to 40 000 or 100 000 channels (e. g. HP Z820). 1.

2.

Power up the computer and press the prompted function key to interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F9 on HP computer, otherwise F12).

3

Insert the SERCEL REDHAT Enterprise V5.8 (64 bit) DVD-ROM into the drive. IMPORTANT

Be sure to use the REDHAT DVD-ROM supplied by SERCEL, rather than the one accompanying the machine.

3.

Depending on the type of machine, select “Onboard or USB CDROM Drive” from the Boot Device menu, and press Return, or choose the Optical Drive or IDE-CDROM device option.

4.

When the message “to install RedHat Enterprise Linux in graphical mode” appears, press Enter (or wait until the timeout delay has expired).

5.

When the system asks if you wish “To begin testing the media before installation”, choose Skip (using the arrow keys). Press Enter.

6.

In the window that appears, click Next.

7.

In the language selection window, choose English. Click Next.

8.

In the keyboard window, choose as appropriate, for example United Kingdom or U.S. International (if Qwerty) or French (if Azerty). Click Next. Note that with the US International option, you may have to press the space bar after typing a quote or double-quote character to enter that character.

9.

In the “Installation Number” window, choose “Skip entering Installation Number”, and click Ok. In the warning box that pops up, click Skip.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

105

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

10. If an “Installation Type” window appears, choose Install RedHat Enterprise Linux Client. Click Next. 11. In the partitioning window: - Choose Remove all partitions on selected drives and create default layout (Caution: be sure not to choose “Remove Linux partition”). - Make sure the sda, sdb, sdc, sdd and sde partitions are selected. - Select Review and modify partitioning layout. Leave other options unchanged. - Click Next. - In the warning box that pops up, choose Yes. 12. Select VolGroup00. - Click Delete. - In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 13. Select /dev/sda2. Click Edit. 14. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sda2 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select Swap. - Choose Fixed size. - Enter 32000 into the Size field (32000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 15. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb, sdc, sdd and sde. - Type / in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”.

106

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

- Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 8000 into the Size field (8000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked.

3

- Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 16. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb, sdc, sdd and sde. - Type /var/tmp in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 4000 into the Size field (4000 MB). - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 17. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb, sdc, sdd and sde. - Type /export/home in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 18. Select /dev/sdb1. Click Edit. 19. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdb1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda, sdc, sdd and sde. Only sdb should be selected. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

107

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

- Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 20. Select /dev/sdc1. Click Edit. 21. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdc1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump0 in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda, sdb, sdd and sde. Only sdc should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 22. Select /dev/sdd1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdd1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump1 in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda, sdb, sdc and sde. Only sdd should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 23. Select /dev/sde1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sde1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump2 in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda, sdb, sdc and sdd. Only sde should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 108

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

24. Click Next 25. In the boot loader window, leave the default settings unchanged. Click Next. 26. In the network devices window:

3

- Select the Active on boot option (for eth0 and eth1). - Select eth0. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter 172.27.128.1 for the ip-eth0 address (visible to the seismic recording system). - Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0 as Submask for ip-eth0. - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - If a second Ethernet card is installed, select eth1. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Unselect the Configure using DHCP option. - Select the Active on Boot option (done by default). - IP address: enter the ip-eth1 address visible to the local network (172.30.128.1). - Netmask: enter the Submask for ip-eth1 (that is 255.255.0.0). - Click OK. - If a third Ethernet card is installed, select eth2. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter the ip-eth2 address visible to the local network (172.27.127.1).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

109

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

- Netmask: enter the Submask for ip-eth2 (that is 255.255.255.0). - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - If a fourth Ethernet card is installed, select eth3. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Unselect the Configure using DHCP option. - Select the Active on Boot option (done by default). - IP address: enter the ip-eth3 address visible to the local network (172.27.126.1). - Netmask: enter the Submask for ip-eth3 (that is 255.255.255.0). - Click OK. - Set the hostname: choose the Manually option. - Leave the hostname field unchanged (localhost.localdomain). - Click Next. A warning box (Error With Data) should show up, warning you that the Gateway and DNS fields are left blank. Click Continue to dismiss those warnings. 27. In the time zone window: choose your time zone. Click Next. 28. In the Root account window, - Root password: enter the desired Root password (e. g. administrator) for the e428 server and keep it in a safe place. - Confirm: type again your password to confirm. Click Next. 29. In the package installation defaults window: - Select Software Development; - Select Customize now. - Click Next. 30. In the package group selection window: 110

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

- In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment (leave other settings unchanged). - In the Applications group, remove (unselect) Games. - In the Development group, the following should be selected:

3

- Development tools; - X Software Development Support; - Legacy Software Development; - In the Servers group: - Select Web Server. - Select Mail Server. - Select Legacy Network Server. - Click on Optional packages. - Select rsh-server. - Click Close. - In the Base System group, - Select System Tools. - Click on Optional packages. - Select sysstat. - Click Close. - Select Legacy Software Support. - Click on Optional packages. - Select Open Motif. - Click Close. - Click Next. 31. In the next window, click Next. 32. The installation program installs packages from the Redhat DVDROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

111

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

33. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM from the drive. 34. Click Reboot. 35. In the Welcome window, click Forward. 36. In the Licence Agreement window, choose Yes. Click Forward. 37. From the Firewall drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 38. From the SELinux drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 39. In the Kdump window, make sure “Enable Kdump” is not selected. Click Forward. 40. In the Date and Time window, set the time and click Forward. 41. In the Set Up Software Updates window, - Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward. - In the window that pops up, click No thanks, I’ll connect later. 42. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward. 43. In the Create User window, click Forward. If a warning box appears, click Continue. 44. In the Sound Card window click Forward. 45. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This completes the installation of RedHat Linux —and reboots the server. See Installing 428XL server software (page 149).

112

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

428Lite 64-bit laptop computer This procedure is intended for a DELL Precision M6700 Laptop computer. 1.

2.

Power up the computer and press the prompted function key to interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F12 on the PC specified by SERCEL). Insert the SERCEL REDHAT Enterprise V5.8 (64 bit) DVD-ROM into the drive. IMPORTANT

Be sure to use the REDHAT DVD-ROM supplied by SERCEL, rather than the one accompanying the machine. 3.

Depending on the type of machine, select “Onboard or USB CDROM Drive” from the Boot Device menu, and press Return, or choose the IDE-CDROM device option.

4.

When the message “to install RedHat Enterprise Linux in graphical mode” appears, press Enter (or wait until the timeout delay has expired).

5.

When the system asks if you wish “To begin testing the media before installation”, choose Skip (using the arrow keys). Press Enter.

6.

In the window that appears, click Next.

7.

In the language selection window, choose English. Click Next.

8.

In the keyboard window, choose as appropriate, for example United Kingdom or U.S. International (if Qwerty) or French (if Azerty). Click Next. Note that with the US International option, you may have to press the space bar after typing a quote or double-quote character to enter that character.

9.

In the “Installation Number” window, choose “Skip entering Installation Number”, and click Ok. In the warning box that pops up, click Skip.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

113

3

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

10. If an “Installation Type” window appears, choose Install RedHat Enterprise Linux Client. Click Next. 11. In the partitioning window: - Choose Remove all partitions on selected drives and create default layout (Caution: be sure not to choose “Remove Linux partition”). - Select Review and modify partitioning layout. Leave other options unchanged. - Click Next. - In the warning box that pops up, choose Yes. 12. Select VolGroup00. - Click Delete. - In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete. 13. Select /dev/sda2. Click Edit. 14. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sda2 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select Swap. - Choose Fixed size. - Enter 6000 into the Size field (6000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 15. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type / in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 10000 into the Size field (10000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. 114

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

- Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 16. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type /var/tmp in the Mount Point field.

3

- From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 4000 into the Size field (4000 MB). - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 17. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type /var/dump in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 260000 into the Size field (260000 MB). - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 18. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type /export/home in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 19. Click Next 20. In the boot loader window, leave the default settings unchanged. Click Next. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

115

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

21. In the network devices window (skip this step if this window does not show up on a Dell M6700 Laptop): - Select the Active on boot option (for eth0 and eth1). - Select eth0. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter 172.27.128.1 for the ip-eth0 address (visible to the seismic recording system). - Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0 as Submask for ip-eth0. - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - Set the hostname: choose the Manually option. - Leave the hostname field unchanged (localhost.localdomain). - Click Next. A warning box (Error With Data) should show up, warning you that the Gateway and DNS fields are left blank. Click Continue to dismiss those warnings. 22. In the time zone window: choose your time zone. Click Next. IMPORTANT

The system will not be able to get synchronized with the GPS time unless you select the correct time zone. 23. In the Root account window, - Root password: enter the desired Root password (e. g. administrator) for the e428 server and keep it in a safe place. - Confirm: type again your password to confirm. Click Next. 24. In the package installation defaults window: - Select Software Development; select Customize now. - Click Next. 25. In the package group selection window: 116

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

- In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment (leave other settings unchanged). - In the Applications group, remove (unselect) Games. - In the Development group, the following should be selected:

3

- Development tools; - X Software Development Support; - Legacy Software Development; - In the Servers group: - Select Web Server. - Select Mail Server. - Select Legacy Network Server. - Click on Optional packages. - Select rsh-server. - Click Close. - In the Base System group, - Select System Tools. - Click on Optional packages. - Select sysstat. - Click Close. - Select Legacy Software Support. - Click on Optional packages. - Select Open Motif. - Click Close. - Click Next. 26. In the next window, click Next. 27. The installation program installs packages from the Redhat DVDROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

117

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

28. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM from the drive. 29. Click Reboot. 30. In the Welcome window, click Forward. 31. In the Licence Agreement window, choose Yes. Click Forward. 32. From the Firewall drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 33. From the SELinux drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 34. In the Kdump window, make sure “Enable Kdump” is not selected. Click Forward. 35. In the Date and Time window, set the time and click Forward. 36. In the Set Up Software Updates window, - Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward. - In the window that pops up, click No thanks, I’ll connect later. 37. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward. 38. In the Create User window, click Forward. If a warning box appears, click Continue. 39. In the Sound Card window click Forward. 40. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This completes the installation of RedHat Linux —and reboots the server. See Installing 428XL server software (page 149).

118

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 >

Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 If for any reason you have to install or re-install the Redhat Linux Operating System on the e428 server, use one of the procedures below, depending on whether you are installing it on a 428XL-20000/10000 or 428XL- 40000 desktop computer (HP Z800, XW8600), or a laptop (428Lite) computer: • 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer (page 120) • 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer (page 127) • 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer (page 135) • 428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer (page 142) If this is a re-installation, first save the Licence codes (page 207) and operating parameters (see Saving 428XL parameters — page 154), and then power off the computer. CAUTION

This installation procedure will erase everything on the hard disk. WARNING

After Redhat Linux is installed, a GRUB boot loader window shows up each time you power up or boot up the computer. Do not press any key (the boot loader window should disappear automatically).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

119

3

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer This procedure is for an e428 server computer handling up to 20 000 channels. 1.

Power up the computer and press the prompted function key to interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F9 on HP computer, otherwise F12).

2.

Insert the SERCEL REDHAT Enterprise V5.4 (64 bit) DVD-ROM into the drive. IMPORTANT

Be sure to use the REDHAT DVD-ROM supplied by SERCEL, rather than the one accompanying the machine.

120

3.

Depending on the type of machine, select “Onboard or USB CDROM Drive” from the Boot Device menu, and press Return, or choose the Optical Drive or IDE-CDROM device option.

4.

When the message “to install RedHat Enterprise Linux in graphical mode” appears, press Enter (or wait until the timeout delay has expired).

5.

When the system asks if you wish “To begin testing the media before installation”, choose Skip (using the arrow keys). Press Enter.

6.

In the window that appears, click Next.

7.

In the language selection window, choose English. Click Next.

8.

In the keyboard window, choose as appropriate, for example United Kingdom or U.S. International (if Qwerty) or French (if Azerty). Click Next. Note that with the US International option, you may have to press the space bar after typing a quote or double-quote character to enter that character.

9.

In the “Installation Number” window, choose “Skip entering Installation Number”, and click Ok. In the warning box that pops up, click Skip. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

10. If an “Installation Type” window appears, choose Install RedHat Enterprise Linux Client. Click Next. 11. In the partitioning window: - Choose Remove all partitions on selected drives and create default layout (Caution: be sure not to choose “Remove Linux partition”). - Make sure the sda, sdb and sdc partitions are selected. - Select Review and modify partitioning layout. Leave other options unchanged. - Click Next. - In the warning box that pops up, choose Yes. 12. Select VolGroup00. - Click Delete. - In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 13. Select /dev/sda2. Click Edit. 14. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sda2 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select Swap. - Choose Fixed size. - Enter 16000 into the Size field (16000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 15. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb and sdc. - Type / in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

121

3

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

- Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 8000 into the Size field (8000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 16. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb and sdc. - Type /var/tmp in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 2000 into the Size field (2000 MB). - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 17. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb and sdc. - Type /export/home in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 18. Select /dev/sdb1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdb1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda and sdc. Only sdb should be selected. 122

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

- Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 19. Select /dev/sdc1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdc1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump0 in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda and sdb. Only sdc should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 20. Click Next 21. In the boot loader window, leave the default settings unchanged. Click Next. 22. In the network devices window: - Select the Active on boot option (for eth0 and eth1). - Select eth0. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter 172.27.128.1 for the ip-eth0 address (visible to the seismic recording system). - Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0 as Submask for ip-eth0. - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - If a second Ethernet card is installed, select eth1. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

123

3

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

- IP address: enter the ip-eth1 address visible to the local network (172.30.128.1). - Netmask: enter the Submask for ip-eth1 (that is 255.255.0.0). - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - Set the hostname: choose the Manually option. - Leave the hostname field unchanged (localhost.localdomain). - Click Next. A warning box (Error With Data) should show up, warning you that the Gateway and DNS fields are left blank. Click Continue to dismiss those warnings. 23. In the time zone window: choose your time zone. Click Next. 24. In the Root account window, - Root password: enter the desired Root password (e. g. administrator) for the e428 server and keep it in a safe place. - Confirm: type again your password to confirm. Click Next. 25. In the package installation defaults window: - Select Software Development; - Select Customize now. - Click Next. 26. In the package group selection window: - In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment (leave other settings unchanged). - In the Applications group, remove (unselect) Games. - In the Development group, the following should be selected: - Development tools; - X Software Development Support; - Legacy Software Development; 124

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

- In the Servers group: - Select Web Server. - Select Mail Server. - Select Legacy Network Server.

3

- Click on Optional packages. - Select rsh-server. - Click Close. - In the Base System group, - Select System Tools. - Click on Optional packages. - Select sysstat. - Click Close. - Select Legacy Software Support. - Click on Optional packages. - Select Open Motif. - Click Close. - Click Next. 27. In the next window, click Next. 28. The installation program installs packages from the Redhat DVDROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour). 29. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM from the drive. 30. Click Reboot. 31. In the Welcome window, click Forward. 32. In the Licence Agreement window, choose Yes. Click Forward. 33. From the Firewall drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

125

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer

34. From the SELinux drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 35. In the Kdump window, make sure “Enable Kdump” is not selected. Click Forward. 36. In the Date and Time window, set the time and click Forward. 37. In the Set Up Software Updates window, - Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward. - In the window that pops up, click No thanks, I’ll connect later. 38. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward. 39. In the Create User window, click Forward. If a warning box appears, click Continue. 40. In the Sound Card window click Forward. 41. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This completes the installation of RedHat Linux —and reboots the server. 42. Log in as root user. 43. Insert the e428 V5.0 DVD-ROM into the drive. 44. If the installation is done on an HP XW8600 computer (otherwise skip this step) open a Terminal window and type the following commands: mkdir /media/cdrom mount /dev/cdrom /media/cdrom 45. Copy the “allow-executing-by-default.sh” file to the /tmp directory and run that file. To do that, open a Terminal window and type the following commands (replacing diskname by the label showing on the CD-ROM drive icon): cp -p /media/cdrom/diskname/e428V5.0/linux/tools/allowexecuting-by-default.sh /tmp ↵ cd /tmp ↵ ./allow-executing-by-default.sh ↵ reboot ↵ 126

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer This procedure is for an e428 server computer handling up to 40 000 or 100 000 channels (e. g. HP Z800). 1.

2.

Power up the computer and press the prompted function key to interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F9 on HP computer, otherwise F12).

3

Insert the SERCEL REDHAT Enterprise V5.4 (64 bit) DVD-ROM into the drive. IMPORTANT

Be sure to use the REDHAT DVD-ROM supplied by SERCEL, rather than the one accompanying the machine.

3.

Depending on the type of machine, select “Onboard or USB CDROM Drive” from the Boot Device menu, and press Return, or choose the Optical Drive or IDE-CDROM device option.

4.

When the message “to install RedHat Enterprise Linux in graphical mode” appears, press Enter (or wait until the timeout delay has expired).

5.

When the system asks if you wish “To begin testing the media before installation”, choose Skip (using the arrow keys). Press Enter.

6.

In the window that appears, click Next.

7.

In the language selection window, choose English. Click Next.

8.

In the keyboard window, choose as appropriate, for example United Kingdom or U.S. International (if Qwerty) or French (if Azerty). Click Next. Note that with the US International option, you may have to press the space bar after typing a quote or double-quote character to enter that character.

9.

In the “Installation Number” window, choose “Skip entering Installation Number”, and click Ok. In the warning box that pops up, click Skip.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

127

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

10. If an “Installation Type” window appears, choose Install RedHat Enterprise Linux Client. Click Next. 11. In the partitioning window: - Choose Remove all partitions on selected drives and create default layout (Caution: be sure not to choose “Remove Linux partition”). - Make sure the sda, sdb, sdc, sdd and sde partitions are selected. - Select Review and modify partitioning layout. Leave other options unchanged. - Click Next. - In the warning box that pops up, choose Yes. 12. Select VolGroup00. - Click Delete. - In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 13. Select /dev/sda2. Click Edit. 14. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sda2 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select Swap. - Choose Fixed size. - Enter 32000 into the Size field (32000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 15. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb, sdc, sdd and sde. - Type / in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”.

128

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

- Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 8000 into the Size field (8000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked.

3

- Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 16. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb, sdc, sdd and sde. - Type /var/tmp in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 4000 into the Size field (4000 MB). - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 17. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Unselect sdb, sdc, sdd and sde. - Type /export/home in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 18. Select /dev/sdb1. Click Edit. 19. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdb1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda, sdc, sdd and sde. Only sdb should be selected. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

129

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

- Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 20. Select /dev/sdc1. Click Edit. 21. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdc1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump0 in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda, sdb, sdd and sde. Only sdc should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 22. Select /dev/sdd1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdd1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump1 in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda, sdb, sdc and sde. Only sdd should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 23. Select /dev/sde1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sde1 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Type /var/dump2 in the Mount Point field. - Unselect sda, sdb, sdc and sdd. Only sde should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 130

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

24. Click Next 25. In the boot loader window, leave the default settings unchanged. Click Next. 26. In the network devices window:

3

- Select the Active on boot option (for eth0 and eth1). - Select eth0. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter 172.27.128.1 for the ip-eth0 address (visible to the seismic recording system). - Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0 as Submask for ip-eth0. - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - If a second Ethernet card is installed, select eth1. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Unselect the Configure using DHCP option. - Select the Active on Boot option (done by default). - IP address: enter the ip-eth1 address visible to the local network (172.30.128.1). - Netmask: enter the Submask for ip-eth1 (that is 255.255.0.0). - Click OK. - If a third Ethernet card is installed, select eth2. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter the ip-eth2 address visible to the local network (172.27.127.1).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

131

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

- Netmask: enter the Submask for ip-eth2 (that is 255.255.255.0). - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - If a fourth Ethernet card is installed, select eth3. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Unselect the Configure using DHCP option. - Select the Active on Boot option (done by default). - IP address: enter the ip-eth3 address visible to the local network (172.27.126.1). - Netmask: enter the Submask for ip-eth3 (that is 255.255.255.0). - Click OK. - Set the hostname: choose the Manually option. - Leave the hostname field unchanged (localhost.localdomain). - Click Next. A warning box (Error With Data) should show up, warning you that the Gateway and DNS fields are left blank. Click Continue to dismiss those warnings. 27. In the time zone window: choose your time zone. Click Next. 28. In the Root account window, - Root password: enter the desired Root password (e. g. administrator) for the e428 server and keep it in a safe place. - Confirm: type again your password to confirm. Click Next. 29. In the package installation defaults window: - Select Software Development; - Select Customize now. - Click Next. 30. In the package group selection window: 132

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

- In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment (leave other settings unchanged). - In the Applications group, remove (unselect) Games. - In the Development group, the following should be selected:

3

- Development tools; - X Software Development Support; - Legacy Software Development; - In the Servers group: - Select Web Server. - Select Mail Server. - Select Legacy Network Server. - Click on Optional packages. - Select rsh-server. - Click Close. - In the Base System group, - Select System Tools. - Click on Optional packages. - Select sysstat. - Click Close. - Select Legacy Software Support. - Click on Optional packages. - Select Open Motif. - Click Close. - Click Next. 31. In the next window, click Next. 32. The installation program installs packages from the Redhat DVDROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

133

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL-40000 or -100000 desktop computer

33. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM from the drive. 34. Click Reboot. 35. In the Welcome window, click Forward. 36. In the Licence Agreement window, choose Yes. Click Forward. 37. From the Firewall drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 38. From the SELinux drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 39. In the Kdump window, make sure “Enable Kdump” is not selected. Click Forward. 40. In the Date and Time window, set the time and click Forward. 41. In the Set Up Software Updates window, - Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward. - In the window that pops up, click No thanks, I’ll connect later. 42. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward. 43. In the Create User window, click Forward. If a warning box appears, click Continue. 44. In the Sound Card window click Forward. 45. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This completes the installation of RedHat Linux —and reboots the server. 46. Log in as root user. 47. Insert the e428 V5.0 DVD-ROM into the drive. 48. If the installation is done on an HP XW8600 computer (otherwise skip this step) open a Terminal window and type the following commands: mkdir /media/cdrom mount /dev/cdrom /media/cdrom

134

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

49. Copy the “allow-executing-by-default.sh” file to the /tmp directory and run that file. To do that, open a Terminal window and type the following commands (replacing diskname by the label showing on the CD-ROM drive icon): cp -p /media/cdrom/diskname/e428V5.0/linux/tools/allowexecuting-by-default.sh /tmp ↵ cd /tmp ↵ ./allow-executing-by-default.sh ↵ reboot ↵

428Lite 64-bit laptop computer This procedure is intended for a DELL Precision M6500 or M6600 Laptop computer. 1.

Power up the computer and press the prompted function key to interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F12 on the PC specified by SERCEL).

2.

Insert the SERCEL REDHAT Enterprise V5.4 (64 bit) DVD-ROM into the drive. IMPORTANT

Be sure to use the REDHAT DVD-ROM supplied by SERCEL, rather than the one accompanying the machine. 3.

Depending on the type of machine, select “Onboard or USB CDROM Drive” from the Boot Device menu, and press Return, or choose the IDE-CDROM device option.

4.

When the message “to install RedHat Enterprise Linux in graphical mode” appears, press Enter (or wait until the timeout delay has expired).

5.

When the system asks if you wish “To begin testing the media before installation”, choose Skip (using the arrow keys). Press Enter.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

135

3

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

6.

In the window that appears, click Next.

7.

In the language selection window, choose English. Click Next.

8.

In the keyboard window, choose as appropriate, for example United Kingdom or U.S. International (if Qwerty) or French (if Azerty). Click Next. Note that with the US International option, you may have to press the space bar after typing a quote or double-quote character to enter that character.

9.

In the “Installation Number” window, choose “Skip entering Installation Number”, and click Ok. In the warning box that pops up, click Skip.

10. If an “Installation Type” window appears, choose Install RedHat Enterprise Linux Client. Click Next. 11. In the partitioning window: - Choose Remove all partitions on selected drives and create default layout (Caution: be sure not to choose “Remove Linux partition”). - Select Review and modify partitioning layout. Leave other options unchanged. - Click Next. - In the warning box that pops up, choose Yes. 12. Select VolGroup00. - Click Delete. - In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete. 13. Select /dev/sda2. Click Edit. 14. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sda2 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select Swap. - Choose Fixed size. - Enter 6000 into the Size field (6000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. 136

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

- Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 15. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type / in the Mount Point field.

3

- From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 10000 into the Size field (10000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 16. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type /var/tmp in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 4000 into the Size field (4000 MB). - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 17. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type /var/dump in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 260000 into the Size field (260000 MB). - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 18. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type /export/home in the Mount Point field. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

137

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

- From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 19. Click Next 20. In the boot loader window, leave the default settings unchanged. Click Next. 21. In the network devices window (skip this step if this window does not show up, i. e. on a Dell M6600 Laptop): - Select the Active on boot option (for eth0 and eth1). - Select eth0. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter 172.27.128.1 for the ip-eth0 address (visible to the seismic recording system). - Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0 as Submask for ip-eth0. - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - Set the hostname: choose the Manually option. - Leave the hostname field unchanged (localhost.localdomain). - Click Next. A warning box (Error With Data) should show up, warning you that the Gateway and DNS fields are left blank. Click Continue to dismiss those warnings. 22. In the time zone window: choose your time zone. Click Next. IMPORTANT

The system will not be able to get synchronized with the GPS time unless you select the correct time zone. 138

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

23. In the Root account window, - Root password: enter the desired Root password (e. g. administrator) for the e428 server and keep it in a safe place. - Confirm: type again your password to confirm. Click Next.

3

24. In the package installation defaults window: - Select Software Development; select Customize now. - Click Next. 25. In the package group selection window: - In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment (leave other settings unchanged). - In the Applications group, remove (unselect) Games. - In the Development group, the following should be selected: - Development tools; - X Software Development Support; - Legacy Software Development; - In the Servers group: - Select Web Server. - Select Mail Server. - Select Legacy Network Server. - Click on Optional packages. - Select rsh-server. - Click Close. - In the Base System group, - Select System Tools. - Click on Optional packages. - Select sysstat. - Click Close. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

139

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

- Select Legacy Software Support. - Click on Optional packages. - Select Open Motif. - Click Close. - Click Next. 26. In the next window, click Next. 27. The installation program installs packages from the Redhat DVDROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour). 28. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM from the drive. 29. Click Reboot. 30. In the Welcome window, click Forward. 31. In the Licence Agreement window, choose Yes. Click Forward. 32. From the Firewall drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 33. From the SELinux drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 34. In the Kdump window, make sure “Enable Kdump” is not selected. Click Forward. 35. In the Date and Time window, set the time and click Forward. 36. In the Set Up Software Updates window, - Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward. - In the window that pops up, click No thanks, I’ll connect later. 37. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward. 38. In the Create User window, click Forward. If a warning box appears, click Continue. 39. In the Sound Card window click Forward.

140

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

40. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This completes the installation of RedHat Linux —and reboots the server. 41. Log in as root user. 42. This step is for a Dell M6600 only: (Note that USB 3.0 ports are not supported by RedHat 5.4 Linux). - Download the M6600 network driver from ftp.sercel.com (/tools/ethernet/EthernetM6600.sh). - Copy the driver to /tmp on the server, - In a Terminal window, type the following commands: cd /tmp ↵ ./EthernetM6600.sh ↵ 43. Insert the e428 V5.0 DVD-ROM into the drive, then copy the “allow-executing-by-default.sh” file to the /tmp directory and run that file. To do that, open a Terminal window and type the following commands (replacing diskname by the label showing on the CD-ROM drive icon): cp -p /media/cdrom/diskname/e428V5.0/linux/tools/allowexecuting-by-default.sh /tmp ↵ cd /tmp ↵ ./allow-executing-by-default.sh ↵ reboot ↵

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

141

3

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer

428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer 1.

Power up the computer and press the prompted function key to interrupt the automatic boot sequence (Escape on the PC specified by SERCEL).

2.

Insert the SERCEL REDHAT Enterprise V5.4 (64 bit) DVD-ROM into the drive. IMPORTANT

Be sure to use the REDHAT DVD-ROM supplied by SERCEL, rather than the one accompanying the machine. 3.

Depending on the type of machine, select “Onboard or USB CDROM Drive” from the Boot Device menu, and press Return, or choose the IDE-CDROM device option.

4.

When the message “to install RedHat Enterprise Linux in graphical mode” appears, type linux xdriver=vesa. Press Enter.

5.

When the system asks if you wish “To begin testing the media before installation”, choose Skip (using the arrow keys). Press Enter.

6.

In the window that appears, click Next.

7.

In the language selection window, choose English. Click Next.

8.

In the keyboard window, choose as appropriate, for example United Kingdom or U.S. International (if Qwerty) or French (if Azerty). Click Next. Note that with the US International option, you may have to press the space bar after typing a quote or double-quote character to enter that character.

9.

In the “Installation Number” window, choose “Skip entering Installation Number”, and click Ok. In the warning box that pops up, click Skip.

10. If an “Installation Type” window appears, choose Install RedHat Enterprise Linux Client. Click Next. 142

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer

11. In the partitioning window: - Choose Remove all partitions on selected drives and create default layout (Caution: be sure not to choose “Remove Linux partition”). - Select Review and modify partitioning layout. Leave other options unchanged. - Click Next. - In the warning box that pops up, choose Yes. 12. Select VolGroup00. - Click Delete. - In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete. 13. Select /dev/sda2. Click Edit. 14. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sda2 window: - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select Swap. - Choose Fixed size. - Enter 6000 into the Size field (6000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 15. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type / in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 10000 into the Size field (10000 MB). - Choose Force to be a primary partition. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

143

3

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer

16. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type /var/tmp in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 4000 into the Size field (4000 MB). - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 17. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type /var/dump in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected. - Enter 26000 into the Size field (26000 MB). - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 18. If the computer has two hard disks, click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type /var/dump0 in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sdb should be selected. - Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 19. Click New. In the Add Partition window: - Type /export/home in the Mount Point field. - From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”. - Only sda should be selected. 144

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer

- Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option. - Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked. - Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 20. Click Next 21. In the boot loader window, leave the default settings unchanged. Click Next. 22. In the network devices window: - Select the Active on boot option (for eth0 and eth1). - Select eth0. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter 172.27.128.1 for the ip-eth0 address (visible to the seismic recording system). - Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0 as Submask for ip-eth0. - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - Set the hostname: choose the Manually option. - Leave the hostname field unchanged (localhost.localdomain). - Click Next. A warning box (Error With Data) should show up, warning you that the Gateway and DNS fields are left blank. Click Continue to dismiss those warnings. - Select eth1. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter 172.30.128.1 for the ip-eth1 address (visible to the seismic recording system). - Netmask: enter 255.255.0.0 as Submask for ip-eth1.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

145

3

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer

- Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. 23. In the time zone window: choose your time zone. Click Next. IMPORTANT

The system will not be able to get synchronized with the GPS time unless you select the correct time zone. 24. In the Root account window, - Root password: enter the desired Root password (e. g. administrator) for the e428 server and keep it in a safe place. - Confirm: type again your password to confirm. Click Next. 25. In the package installation defaults window: - Select Software Development; select Customize now. - Click Next. 26. In the package group selection window: - In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment (leave other settings unchanged). - In the Applications group, remove (unselect) Games. - In the Development group, the following should be selected: - Development tools; - X Software Development Support; - Legacy Software Development; - In the Servers group: - Select Web Server. - Select Mail Server. - Select Legacy Network Server. Click on Optional packages. Select rsh-server. 146

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer

- Click Close. - In the Base System group, - Select System Tools. - Click on Optional packages.

3

- Select sysstat. - Click Close. - Select Legacy Software Support. - Click on Optional packages. - Select Open Motif. - Click Close. - Click Next. 27. In the next window, click Next. 28. The installation program installs packages from the Redhat DVDROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour). 29. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM from the drive. 30. Click Reboot. 31. In the Welcome window, click Forward. 32. In the Licence Agreement window, choose Yes. Click Forward. 33. From the Firewall drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 34. From the SELinux drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 35. In the Kdump window, make sure “Enable Kdump” is not selected. Click Forward. 36. In the Date and Time window, set the time and click Forward. 37. In the Set Up Software Updates window,

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

147

3

Server software installation Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 > 428XL ruggedized (Vigor) laptop computer

- Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward. - In the window that pops up, click No thanks, I’ll connect later. 38. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward. 39. In the Create User window, click Forward. If a warning box appears, click Continue. 40. In the Sound Card window click Forward. 41. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This completes the installation of RedHat Linux —and reboots the server. 42. Log in as root user. 43. Insert the e428 V5.0 DVD-ROM into the drive, then copy the “allow-executing-by-default.sh” file to the /tmp directory and run that file. To do that, open a Terminal window and type the following commands (replacing diskname by the label showing on the CD-ROM drive icon): cp -p /media/cdrom/diskname/e428V5.0/linux/tools/allowexecuting-by-default.sh /tmp ↵ cd /tmp ↵ ./allow-executing-by-default.sh ↵ reboot ↵ 44. Log in as root (password: administrator). - Copy the install-vigor.sh file (for example from a USB stick) to the /tmp directory. Note that the install-vigor.sh file is available from /land/software_updates/428xl/e-428/Tools/ @ftp.sercel.com. - Open a Terminal window and type the following commands: cd /tmp ↵ ./install-vigor.sh ↵ reboot ↵

148

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing 428XL server software > Prerequisites

Installing 428XL server software In this section: • Prerequisites (page 149)

3

• Installing 428XL server software (page 150)

Prerequisites Unless that is already done, connect the keyboard and display screen to the server computer.

Reinstallation If this is a reinstallation: • First save the Licence codes (page 207) and operating parameters (see Saving 428XL parameters — page 154) • Uninstall the former release. See Uninstalling 428XL server software (page 155).

Operating System The Operating System is assumed installed. • see Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.8 — page 96 • or Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 — page 119). To eject any DVD or CD-ROM from the drive, right-click on the DVD/ CD-ROM icon on the desktop and choose Eject from the pop menu.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

149

3

Server software installation Installing 428XL server software > Installing 428XL server software

Installing 428XL server software WARNING

This procedure changes the system parameters (users, host name, etc.).

1.

Power on the server computer.

2.

In the Login window: - Type root ↵ - Enter administrator as password.

3.

Insert the e-428 DVD-ROM into the drive. If the e-428 DVD/CD-ROM icon fails to appear automatically on the desktop, double-click on the “Computer” icon, and then open the DVD/CD-ROM Drive by double-clicking on it. Wait until the icon appears on the desktop.

4.

Open a Terminal window (see Terminal window on page 166) and then type the following commands (replacing diskname by the label showing on the CD-ROM drive icon): cd /media/cdrecorder/diskname/e428V5.0/linux/server (or cd /media/cdrom/diskname/e428V5.0/linux/server) ./e-428Server-v5.0-linux.bin or, if this fails to launch the install shield, use a temporary directory other than “/tmp”, by typing, for example: ./e-428Server-v5.0-linux.bin -is:tempdir /var/tmp

5.

150

Wait until the installation wizard appears (a few minutes, depending on the DVD/CD-ROM drive speed).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing 428XL server software > Installing 428XL server software

V5.0

3

Figure 3-1

6.

In the “Welcome to the installShield Wizard” window, click Next.

7.

In the copyright information window, click Next.

Figure 3-2

8.

In the licence agreement window, carefully read the terms of the agreement. Choose “I accept”. Click Next.

Figure 3-3

9.

In the next licence agreement windows. Choose “I accept”. Click Next.

10. If the installation wizard asks you if you want to install Client software, choose No. If you want to install Client software on the same computer (for example if you are installing a 428Lite system), you will have to log in with the “user428” (instead of

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

151

3

Server software installation Installing 428XL server software > Installing 428XL server software

“root”) user account after server software is installed (see page 189). 11. In the Senior Observer information window enter the desired User name and password. Click Next.

Figure 3-4

12. A summary of your installation settings should appear. Click Next to accept, then wait until the systems says installation is completed (a dozen of minutes, depending on the DVD/CD-ROM drive speed).

Figure 3-5

13. Then the installation wizard asks you how many screens you want to connect. Expand the selection button and choose the desired number of screens (1 in the case of a laptop computer). 14. Click Next.

Figure 3-6

15. When the system asks you if you wish to reboot the computer, choose “Yes”. Click Next.

152

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Installing 428XL server software > Installing 428XL server software

IMPORTANT

A vpd.properties file is created by the Install Shield in the home directory. This file is absolutely necessary. Be sure it is not by any means deleted.

3 Note After installing e-428 software, install all mandatory 428XL

patches, if any, in incremental numbering order. See Server software patches (page 157). See also Screen management (page 212).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

153

3

Server software installation Saving 428XL parameters >

Saving 428XL parameters Prior to uninstalling e428 software (for example if you want to install a new release), save your operating parameters as follows: 1.

Open the Log window. Right-click on the Parameters folder and choose Open.

Figure 3-7

2.

Save the file to a USB stick (using the Save command from the File menu).

Figure 3-8

When you subsequently want to recover your settings, use the Load command from the File menu and then select Apply from the Setup menu (or use this toolbar button: ).

154

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Uninstalling 428XL server software >

Uninstalling 428XL server software If, for any reason, you need to uninstall 428XL server software, do the following: 1.

Save the Licence codes (page 207) and your operating parameters (see Saving 428XL parameters — page 154).

1.

Power off the server computer (choose Shutdown in the Administration window on the client computer).

2.

Power on the server computer.

3.

In the Login window: - Type root ↵ - Type the root password that was entered when you or SERCEL installed Linux (SERCEL installs Linux with administrator as root password).

4.

In a Terminal window (see Terminal window on page 166), use the Change Directory command (cd) to go to the “_uninst” directory of the 428XL application (for example: cd /export/home/e-428/ _uninst).

5.

Type the following command: ./uninstallerLinux.bin This launches the Install Shield wizard. Click Next.

6.

In the Remove Existing File warning box, choose Yes to All. This uninstalls 428XL server software. If Client software is hosted on this computer, it may or may not be uninstalled too, depending on whether or not it was installed together with Server software.Click Finish.

7.

After uninstallation is completed, delete the directory which formerly contained 428XL server software, by typing the following commands in a Terminal window: cd /export/home

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

155

3

3

Server software installation Uninstalling 428XL server software >

rm -Rf e-428 8.

156

Close all applications. Reboot the computer (choose Logout from the main menu bar and then Restart the computer, then click OK).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Server software patches >

Server software patches To install (or uninstall) patches on the Server computer, you can use the Patcher icon on the Server computer (if it has a keyboard and display), or use Cygwin on a Client computer.

Installing a Server software patch IMPORTANT

Software patches, if any, provided to you by Sercel must be installed in incremental order. You must install all Mandatory-type patches.

To install a Server software patch: 1.

Power off the server machine (choose Shutdown in the Administration window) and power off the LCI-428.

2.

Power on the server, log in as user428, and wait until log-in is complete.

3.

Open a Terminal window (see Terminal window on page 166). Stop the server by typing in s (wait until “Shutting down Tomcat .....” is displayed).

4.

Open the Server Patch Installer window, either by clicking on the 428 Server Patcher icon on the desktop, or by typing the following in a Terminal window: /export/home/e-428/patch/patcher.sh & e-428 server

Click

Figure 3-9 Patch Installer window

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

157

3

3

Server software installation Server software patches >

The left-hand pane shows which patches are already installed, if any. 5.

If the patch to install is supplied to you on a CD-ROM, insert it into the server machine’s drive. If it is stored on a USB stick, plug in the USB stick.

6.

Click on the Install New Patch button in the Patch Installer window. If any warning window appears, click OK. In the dialog box that shows up, go to the folder containing the patch to install (choose /media/cdrecorder for a CD-ROM, /media/usbdisk for a USB stick), and select the patch (s**v**el.jar).

7.

Click on the Open button. This installs the patch and updates the Patch Installer window (wait until the message “Install done” appears). e428 server

e428 (server)

Messages

Figure 3-10

The “Interface Level” field may or may not be incremented, depending on the changes implemented by the patch. To view the Interface Level, click on the top-level (server or client) folder in the Patch Installer window, then click on the Details tab. The Interface Level is used to check for compatibility between Server and Client software each time any user connects to the server (if interface levels do not match, an error message appears and the connection request is rejected). 8.

158

Click on the new patch in the Patch Installer window, then click on the Readme tab for more information on the patch you installed. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Server software patches >

9.

Close the Patch Installer window.

10. If required, type eject in the Terminal window to release the CDROM. 11. Reboot the computer (choose Logout from the main menu bar and then Restart the computer, then click OK). 12. After reboot is complete, power on the LCI-428.

Uninstalling a Server software patch If, for any reason, you wish to uninstall any patches, you must do that in decremental order, starting from the highest number. To uninstall a Server patch: 1.

Power off the server machine and LCI-428.

2.

Power on the server, and wait until log-in is complete.

3.

Open a Terminal window (see Terminal window on page 166). Stop the server by typing in s (wait until “Shutting down Tomcat .....” is displayed).

4.

Open the Server Patch Installer window, either by clicking on the 428 Server Patcher icon on the desktop, or by typing the following in a Terminal window: /export/home/e-428/patch/patcher.sh & The left-hand pane shows which patches are already installed.

5.

Right-click on the patch you want to uninstall, and select Uninstall from the menu that pops up. If any warning window appears, click OK.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

159

3

3

Server software installation Server software patches >

e428 server

e428

Right-click

Messages

Figure 3-11

Wait until the message “Install done” appears.

160

6.

Close the Patch Installer window.

7.

Reboot the computer (choose Logout from the main menu bar and then Restart the computer, then click OK).

8.

After reboot is complete, power on the LCI-428.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Firmware upgrading > Using the Line window’s Download setup

Firmware upgrading After installing a new release of 428XL software (and patches if any), you have to update firmware in LCI-428 boards, or the LCI-G, and in the remote field electronics deployed. Typically, you do that with the Download setup menu in the GUI’s Line window. Alternatively, you can upgrade field electronics firmware via the XDEV (serial) port, for example if you want to upgrade a unit prior to inserting it into the spread.

Using the Line window’s Download setup See The Download setup (page 239) in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1.

Upgrading through serial (XDEV) port LCI-428 or LCI-G PC/LAU cable 1C50079711

LAUX-428 LAUL-428, etc. XDEV1

428XL server computer

Figure 3-12

1.

Open a Terminal window. See Terminal window (page 166).

Note Do not use the “Backspace” or “Delete” key in any of the

commands that follow. 2.

Change directory to “/users/e-428/lcCommon/work”.

3.

Type the following command: rsterm /dev/ttyS0

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

161

3

3

Server software installation Firmware upgrading > Upgrading through serial (XDEV) port

LCI-428 or LCI-G 1.

Unplug the Ethernet cable from the LCI.

2.

Connect the XDEV1 port of the LCI to the server computer’s serial port, using a PC/LAU cable (supplied in the accessory kit).

3.

Power on the LCI.

4.

Type the following commands: ~s rsFiles/rsclean.vx

(wait for the message “rsclean end”).

sysReset

(As a result, a banner should appear, showing the identification of the LCI board).

~s rsFiles/rsCheckHardwareVersion.vx This returns a message indicating the hardware version (in the “value” field): -> #/***************************************************************/ -> #/******** Read Value of Hardware version H ********/ -> #/******** after these comments ********/ -> #/******** ********/ -> #/******** HardwareVersion = 0x......: value = H = ... ********/ -> #/******** ********/ -> #/***************************************************************/ -> HardwareVersion HardwareVersion = 0x1fc010: value = 2 = 0x2

Hardware version in this field

~s rsFiles/rsBurnLci428H V

.vx Software release number, for instance 112 for release 1.0 updated with patch 12. Hardware version

This loads the specified software release to the LCI.

162

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Firmware upgrading > Upgrading through serial (XDEV) port

Wait for the message “MODULE ... /rsBurnLci428H-V- - -.vx end”. You have to type two more commands: sysReset

lgsLoadDefaultConfig

3

Field electronics 1.

Connect the XDEV port of the field unit to the server computer’s serial port, using a PC/LAU cable (supplied in the accessory kit).

2.

Press “Ctrl J” if you don't have any prompt in the command tool window.

3.

Type the following commands: ~s rsFiles/rsclean.vx

(wait for the message “rsclean end”).

sysReset

(As a result, a banner should appear, showing the identification of the field unit).

~s rsFiles/rsCheckHardwareVersion.vx This returns a message indicating the hardware version (in the “value” field). ~s rsFiles/rsBurnLaux428H V

.vx

Software release number, for instance 112 for release 1.0 updated with patch 12. Hardware version

This loads the specified software release to the unit. Wait for the message “.../rsBurnLauxH-V- - -.vx end”. For an LAUX-428, you have to type two more commands: 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

163

3

Server software installation Firmware upgrading > Upgrading through serial (XDEV) port

sysReset

lgsLoadDefaultConfig For the other types of units, do not use those two commands. The “rsBurn” commands to use, depending on the type of unit, are the following: rsFiles/rsBurnLaul428H V rsFiles/rsBurnLruH V

.vx for an LAUL428 .vx

rsFiles/rsBurnLaur428H V

for an LRU. .vx

for an LAUR.

rsFiles/rsBurnLauxH V

.vx for an LAUX.

rsFiles/rsBurnLaulH V

.vx

for an LAUL.

rsFiles/rsBurnLauxsH V

.vx for an LAUXS.

rsFiles/rsBurnLaulsH V

.vx

for an LAULS.

etc.

164

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Firmware upgrading > Upgrading through serial (XDEV) port

428 Lite If the LAUX-428 used as LCI is not visible on the 428 Lite Client computer, please follow step 1, and step 2 if required: 1.

Connect a serial cable (P/N 1C50079711) from the computer's serial port to the XDEV1 port of the LAUX-428.

3

- In a Terminal window on the computer, type minicom - Type the following commands: lgsBootTargetSetI "172.30.201.1" lgsBootStartupSetI "/users/e-428/lcx/binsh/ startLcx.hci428.cmd" lgsBootHostSetI "172.30.128.1" lgsBootBoxSetI 0 sysReset - The LAUX-428 can now be used as an LCI-428 for a 428 Lite configuration. - Open the Config window and click On Line. Open a LINE main window and select Download Setup to load LCI-428 software to the LAUX-428 (use the Update LCI button). 2.

If the LAUX-428 is still not visible after step1, follow the instructions to load 428.3.0 software via the XDEV1 port of the LAUX-428. See Field electronics (page 163). - Upgrading takes about 30 minutes. - When LAUX-428 upgrading is completed, type the following commands: sysReset lgsLoadDefaultConfig sysReset

The LAUX-428 can now be used as an LCI-428 for a 428 Lite configuration. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

165

3

Server software installation Troubleshooting > Terminal window

Troubleshooting When you contact SERCEL’s customer support centre for assistance, you may be requested to supply log files so that support engineers can trace your problem and fix it more quickly. To do that, see System status archive tool (File Packager) on page 60 in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1. Also, you can use the Publish command in the Log window to get a compressed copy of your setup parameters or operator reports, etc., that can be downloaded from the crew’s Web site. See The crew’s Web site on page 61 in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1. Below are a few basics that may help if, for any reason, you are requested to type any Linux command, or to type commands to control a serial port, etc. See also Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 52).

Terminal window To open a Terminal window on a Linux host computer, right-click on the desktop and choose “Open Terminal” from the popup menu.

Terminal window on a serial port To open a Terminal window on a Linux computer’s serial port, type minicom in a Terminal window.

USB stick management Inserting a USB stick causes a removable disk icon to appear on the desktop. Right-click on it and then select the appropriate command from the popup menu (Open, Unmount Volume). WARNING

All USB sticks must be removed when reinstalling Linux or their contents may be erased.

166

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Server software installation Troubleshooting > USB stick management

If for any reason, the USB stick fails to mount, or is not recognized by the system, try the following procedure: 1.

Log in as root.

2.

Open a Terminal window (you can press the Return key to check for the prompt).

3.

Plug in the USB stick.

4.

Type more /etc/fstab

5.

Wait for the USB directory to mount. This can be /media/flash or /media/diskonkey or /media/usbdisk or any other.

6.

If no USB directory appears, type dmesg

7.

Near the end of the display, look for something like “sde : sde1” (sde1 stands for the “DEVICE”).

8.

Type mkdir /media/usb (USB is now the file system).

9.

Type mount /dev/DEVICE /media/usb -t vfat (replace “DEVICE” by the one identified above).

This should mount the USB stick. It should be available from the Desktop environment.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

167

3

3

Server software installation Troubleshooting > USB stick management

(Page intentionally blank)

168

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

4

Client software installation This chapter describes how to install or uninstall 428XL client software on a computer. • Overview (page 170) • Installing RedHat Linux (page 171) • User account (page 184) • Installing Client software (page 189) • Setting the computer’s IP address (page 193) • Client software patches (page 197) • Remote access to Server from a Linux Client (page 200) • Remote access to Server from a Windows Client (page 201)

• First-time log-in (page 206) • Licence codes (page 207) • Uninstalling 428XL Client software (page 210)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

169

4

Client software installation Overview >

Overview The following Operating Software can be used for e428 Client host computers: • Red Hat Linux, recommended by Sercel. If, for any reason, you need to install or reinstall Linux, see Installing RedHat Linux (page 171). • WindowsTM. This manual does not include any specific procedure for installing WindowsTM. If required, contact your system administrator to install WindowsTM. Computer

Operating System

HP Z420

Linux Red Hat 5.8 or Windows 7

HP Z400, HP XW4600

Linux Red Hat 5.4 or Windows XP SP3

Prior to installing e428 Client software, whether on a Linux or a Windows host computer, it is recommended to create a 428 user account (user428) with no administrator privilege. See User account (page 184). Then, log in with that user account to install e428 Client software. See Installing Client software (page 189).

170

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Hardware specific information

Installing RedHat Linux In this section: • Hardware specific information (page 171) • Installing Redhat 5.8 on Client computer (page 171) • Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer (page 177)

4

Hardware specific information Prior to installing RedHat, read hardware specific information supplied by Sercel if any.

Installing Redhat 5.8 on Client computer If for any reason you have to install or re-install the Redhat Linux Operating System on a 428XL Linux Client computer (such as the computer supplied by Sercel), use the procedure below. Otherwise, see Installing Client software (page 189). If this is a re-installation, power off the computer. CAUTION

This installation procedure will erase everything on the hard disk. WARNING

After Redhat Linux is installed, a GRUB boot loader window shows up each time you power up or boot up the computer. Do not press any key (the boot loader window should disappear automatically). 1.

Power up the computer and press the prompted function key to interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F12 on the PC specified by SERCEL).

2.

Insert the SERCEL RedHat V5.8 (64 bit) CD-ROM into the drive.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

171

4

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.8 on Client computer

IMPORTANT

Be sure to use the RedHat DVD-ROM or CD-ROM supplied by SERCEL, rather than the one accompanying the machine.

3.

Depending on the type of machine, select “Onboard or USB CDROM Drive” from the Boot Device menu, and press Return, or choose the IDE-CDROM device option.

4.

When the message “to install or upgrade in graphical mode” appears, press Enter (or wait until the timeout delay has expired).

5.

When the system asks if you wish “To begin testing the media before installation”, choose Skip (using the arrow keys). Press Enter.

6.

In the window that appears, click Next.

7.

In the language selection window, choose English. Click Next.

8.

In the keyboard window, choose as appropriate, for example United Kingdom or U.S. International (if Qwerty) or French (if Azerty). Click Next. Note that with the US International option, you may have to press the space bar after typing a quote or double-quote character to enter that character.

9.

In the “Installation Number” window, choose “Skip entering Installation Number”, and click Ok. In the warning box that pops up, click Skip.

10. If a mouse configuration window appears, leave the default setting unchanged (unless you know which type of mouse to choose). Click Next. 11. If an Upgrade Examine window appears, choose Install RedHat Linux. Click Next. 12. In the disk partitioning window, choose Automatically partition. - Click Next. If a warning box appears, choose Yes.

172

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.8 on Client computer

13. In the partitioning window: - Choose Remove all partitions on this system. - Make sure “Review and modify partitioning layout” is NOT SELECTED. - Leave other options unchanged. - Click Next.

4

- In the warning box that pops up, choose Yes. 14. In the boot loader window, leave the default settings unchanged. Click Next. 15. In the network configuration window: - Select the Active on Boot option (done by default). - Select eth0. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter 172.27.128.2 - Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0 - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - Set the hostname: choose the Manually option. - Leave the hostname field unchanged (localhost.localdomain). - In the Gateway fields, enter the following IP address: 172.27.128.20 - Click Next. A warning box (Error With Data) should show up, warning you that the DNS fields are left blank. Click Continue to dismiss that warnings. 16. In the time zone window: choose your time zone. Click Next.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

173

4

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.8 on Client computer

17. In the Root account window, - Root password: enter the desired Root password (e. g. administrator) for the e428 client and keep it in a safe place. - Confirm: type again your password to confirm. Click Next. 18. In the package group selection window: - In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment. - In the Applications group, remove (unselect) Games. - In the Development group, the following should be selected: - Development Tools; - Development Libraries; - Legacy Software Development; - In the Base System group, - Select System Tools. - Click on Optional packages. Select sysstat. - Click Close. - Select Legacy Software Support. - Leave other settings unchanged. - Click Next. 19. In the installation window, click Next. 20. The installation program installs packages from the RedHat DVDROM or CD-ROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour). 21. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM or CDROM from the drive. 22. Click Reboot. 23. In the Welcome window, click Forward. 24. In the Firewall window, choose No Firewall.

174

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.8 on Client computer

25. From the SELinux drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 26. In the Kdump window, make sure “Enable Kdump” is not selected. Click Forward. 27. In the Date and Time window, set the time and click Forward. 28. In the Set Up Software Updates window, - Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward. - In the window that pops up, click No thanks, I’ll connect later. 29. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward. 30. In the System User window, type user428 in the following four fields: - Username - Full Name - Password - Confirm Password 31. Click Forward. 32. In the Sound Card window click Forward. 33. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This reboots the computer. 34. Log in as root. Enter the root password (e. g. administrator) 35. Click on the “System” menu and select Administration then Services. In the Service Configuration window: - Scroll until the kudzu option is visible. Disable the kudzu option (click to the left to clear the check box). - Scroll until the sendmail option is visible. Disable the sendmail option (click to the left to clear the check box). - From the File menu, select Save Changes, then select Quit. This completes the installation of Redhat Linux. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

175

4

4

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.8 on Client computer

If you wish to use a printer on the Client computer, click on the “System” menu and select Administration then Printing. In the Printer Configuration window: - Click on the New icon. This opens a printer installation wizard. - In the Add a New Printer Queue window, click Forward. - In the Queue Name window, enter the desired Name (with no space characters) and Description (i. e. any comments you think necessary) for the printer attached to the workstation. - Click Forward. In the Queue Type window, choose the appropriate type of printer (“Locally connected” or “Networked”). If none is prompted, be sure a local or network printer is attached, and click on Rescan Devices. - Click Forward.

Click to select manufacturer

Figure 4-1

- Select the printer manufacturer and model from the option button. If the type of printer you wish to use does not appear in the popup menu, choose a similar model from the same manufacturer (for example, if you are using a Deskjet HP6840, choose the 6127 model). - Click Forward. Choose the desired driver (postscript, etc.) if required.

176

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer

- Click Apply. This completes the printer installation. (Then the system should prompt you to print a test page). - From the Action menu, select Quit. - If a save dialog box shows up, choose Save.

Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer If for any reason you have to install or re-install the Redhat Linux Operating System on a 428XL Linux Client computer (such as the computer supplied by Sercel), use the procedure below. Otherwise, see Installing Client software (page 189). If this is a re-installation, power off the computer. CAUTION

This installation procedure will erase everything on the hard disk. WARNING

After Redhat Linux is installed, a GRUB boot loader window shows up each time you power up or boot up the computer. Do not press any key (the boot loader window should disappear automatically). 1.

Power up the computer and press the prompted function key to interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F12 on the PC specified by SERCEL).

2.

Insert the SERCEL RedHat V5.4 (64-bit x86 if Z400, otherwise 32-bit i386) CD-ROM into the drive. IMPORTANT

Be sure to use the RedHat DVD-ROM or CD-ROM supplied by SERCEL, rather than the one accompanying the machine.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

177

4

4

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer

3.

Depending on the type of machine, select “Onboard or USB CDROM Drive” from the Boot Device menu, and press Return, or choose the IDE-CDROM device option.

4.

When the message “to install or upgrade in graphical mode” appears, press Enter (or wait until the timeout delay has expired).

5.

When the system asks if you wish “To begin testing the media before installation”, choose Skip (using the arrow keys). Press Enter.

6.

In the window that appears, click Next.

7.

In the language selection window, choose English. Click Next.

8.

In the keyboard window, choose as appropriate, for example United Kingdom or U.S. International (if Qwerty) or French (if Azerty). Click Next. Note that with the US International option, you may have to press the space bar after typing a quote or double-quote character to enter that character.

9.

In the “Installation Number” window, choose “Skip entering Installation Number”, and click Ok. In the warning box that pops up, click Skip.

10. If a mouse configuration window appears, leave the default setting unchanged (unless you know which type of mouse to choose). Click Next. 11. If an Upgrade Examine window appears, choose Install RedHat Linux. Click Next. 12. In the disk partitioning window, choose Automatically partition. - Click Next. If a warning box appears, choose Yes.

178

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer

13. In the partitioning window: - Choose Remove all partitions on this system. - Make sure “Review and modify partitioning layout” is NOT SELECTED. - Leave other options unchanged. - Click Next.

4

- In the warning box that pops up, choose Yes. 14. In the boot loader window, leave the default settings unchanged. Click Next. 15. In the network configuration window: - Select the Active on Boot option (done by default). - Select eth0. - Click Edit. Set the options as follows: - Click Manual configuration. - IP address: enter 172.27.128.2 - Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0 - Unselect Enable IPV6 support. - Click OK. - Set the hostname: choose the Manually option. - Leave the hostname field unchanged (localhost.localdomain). - In the Gateway fields, enter the following IP address: 172.27.128.20 - Click Next. A warning box (Error With Data) should show up, warning you that the DNS fields are left blank. Click Continue to dismiss that warnings. 16. In the time zone window: choose your time zone. Click Next.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

179

4

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer

17. In the Root account window, - Root password: enter the desired Root password (e. g. administrator) for the e428 client and keep it in a safe place. - Confirm: type again your password to confirm. Click Next. 18. In the package group selection window: - In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment. - In the Applications group, remove (unselect) Games. - In the Development group, the following should be selected: - Development Tools; - Development Libraries; - Legacy Software Development; - In the Base System group, - Select System Tools. - Click on Optional packages. Select sysstat. - Click Close. - Select Legacy Software Support. - Leave other settings unchanged. - Click Next. 19. In the installation window, click Next. 20. The installation program installs packages from the RedHat DVDROM or CD-ROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour). 21. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM or CDROM from the drive. 22. Click Reboot. 23. In the Welcome window, click Forward. 24. In the Firewall window, choose No Firewall.

180

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer

25. From the SELinux drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click Forward, then Yes. 26. In the Kdump window, make sure “Enable Kdump” is not selected. Click Forward. 27. In the Date and Time window, set the time and click Forward. 28. In the Set Up Software Updates window, - Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward. - In the window that pops up, click No thanks, I’ll connect later. 29. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward. 30. In the System User window, type user428 in the following four fields: - Username - Full Name - Password - Confirm Password 31. Click Forward. 32. In the Sound Card window click Forward. 33. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This reboots the computer. 34. Log in as root. Enter the root password (e. g. administrator) 35. Insert the e428 V5.0 DVD-ROM into the drive, then copy (drag and drop) the “allow-executing-by-default.sh” file to the /tmp directory and double-click on that file to run it. You can also do that by opening a Terminal window and typing the following commands (replacing diskname by the label showing on the CDROM drive icon): cp -p /media/cdrom/diskname/e428V5.0/linux/tools/allowexecuting-by-default.sh /tmp ↵ cd /tmp ↵ 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

181

4

4

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer

./allow-executing-by-default.sh ↵ reboot ↵ 36. Click on the “System” menu and select Administration then Services. In the Service Configuration window: - Scroll until the kudzu option is visible. Disable the kudzu option (click to the left to clear the check box). - Scroll until the sendmail option is visible. Disable the sendmail option (click to the left to clear the check box). - From the File menu, select Save Changes, then select Quit. This completes the installation of Redhat Linux. If you wish to use a printer on the Client computer, click on the “System” menu and select Administration then Printing. In the Printer Configuration window: - Click on the New icon. This opens a printer installation wizard. - In the Add a New Printer Queue window, click Forward. - In the Queue Name window, enter the desired Name (with no space characters) and Description (i. e. any comments you think necessary) for the printer attached to the workstation. - Click Forward. In the Queue Type window, choose the appropriate type of printer (“Locally connected” or “Networked”). If none is prompted, be sure a local or network printer is attached, and click on Rescan Devices. - Click Forward.

182

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Installing RedHat Linux > Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer

Click to select manufacturer

4 Figure 4-2

- Select the printer manufacturer and model from the option button. If the type of printer you wish to use does not appear in the popup menu, choose a similar model from the same manufacturer (for example, if you are using a Deskjet HP6840, choose the 6127 model). - Click Forward. Choose the desired driver (postscript, etc.) if required. - Click Apply. This completes the printer installation. (Then the system should prompt you to print a test page). - From the Action menu, select Quit. - If a save dialog box shows up, choose Save.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

183

4

Client software installation User account > Linux user account

User account Prior to installing e428 Client software, it is recommended to create a 428 user account (user428) with no administrator privilege.

Linux user account To create a 428 user account on a Linux host computer, do the following: 1.

In the Login window, type root ↵

2.

Enter the password (e. g. administrator).

3.

Click on the red hat icon and select System Settings then Users and Groups.

4.

In the window that pops up, click on the Add User button.

Figure 4-3

184

5.

Enter user428 as user name and password. Click OK. “user428” should now appear in the list of users on the client computer.

6.

Log out.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation User account > Windows user account

Windows user account Windows XP To create a 428 user account on a Windows XP host, do the following: 1.

Right-click on the “My Computer” icon in the workspace, and choose “Manage” from the popup menu.

2.

In the Computer Management window, expand the “Local Users and Groups” folder.

3.

Right-click on the “Users” folder and choose “New User” from the popup menu.

Figure 4-4

4.

In the New User window, enter user428 as login name in the “User Name” field, and enter user428 as password.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

185

4

4

Client software installation User account > Windows user account

Windows 7 Disable User Account Control as follows: 1.

Open the User Account Control settings dialog box (select Control Panel > User Accounts and Family Safety > User Accounts).

2.

Drag down the slider to the Never Notify position.

3.

Click OK.

Figure 4-5

186

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation User account > Windows user account

Also, turn off the Windows Firewall and uninstall the skyRoom program as follows: 1.

From the Windows 7 start menu, select Control Panel > System and Security > Windows Firewall.

4

Figure 4-6

2.

From the Windows 7 start menu, select Control Panel > Programs.

Figure 4-7 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

187

4

Client software installation User account > Windows user account

3.

In the Uninstall or change a program window, right-click on each “HP” program, especially “HP skyRoom” and select Uninstall.

Figure 4-8

188

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Installing Client software >

Installing Client software If this is a reinstallation, uninstall the former release first. See Uninstalling 428XL Client software (page 210). The procedure below is typically intended for a local user computer running on WindowsTM or Linux, or an extra local user computer, or a remote user. On a Linux host computer, log in with the user428 user account (password: user428). To install 428XL Client software, do the following: 1.

Insert the SERCEL DVD-ROM into the drive.

2.

Use the file browser or explorer to open the Client directory on the DVD-ROM: e428V5.0/linux/client for a Linux host computer (in /media/cdrecorder); or e428V5.0\windows\client for a Windows host computer.

3.

Run the installation file: - On a Linux host computer, double-click on the e-428Clients-v5.0-linux.bin file, or type the following commands in a Terminal window (replacing diskname by the label showing on the CD-ROM drive icon): cd /media/cdrecorder/diskname/e428V5.0/linux/client (or cd /media/cdrom/diskname/e428V5.0/linux/client) ./e-428Clients-v5.0-linux.bin - On a Windows host computer, double-click on this file: e-428Clients-v5.0-win32.exe

4.

Follow the instructions prompted in the Install Shield wizard window. Click Next.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

189

4

4

Client software installation Installing Client software >

V5.0

Figure 4-9

5.

In the successive licence agreement windows, carefully read the terms of each agreement.

Figure 4-10

6.

Choose “I accept”. Click Next.

7.

Select the directory where you want to install 428XL client software or keep the default directory prompted, i. e. on a Linux host: /home/user428/Sercel/e-428v5.0 (on a Linux host computer, the “Browse” button may not work until you type a dot character in the associated path field).

8.

Click Next.

9.

If a message appears that asks you if you want to overwrite the Java Virtual Machine, choose “Yes”.

10. In the summary information window, click Next. 11. After installation is complete, click Finish. 12. Close all windows.

190

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Installing Client software >

- Eject the CD-ROM (on a Linux host, select the “e428 ...” icon on the desktop, right-click and select “Eject” from the popup menu). - Remove the CD-ROM from the drive. 13. On a Linux host, disable the screen saver as follows: - Click on the “System” menu and select Preferences, then Sceensaver. - Untick the “Activate screensaver when computer is idle” option. - Click on the “System” menu and select Preferences > More Preferences > Power Management. - Click on the Running on AC tab. Set the “Put display to sleep when computer is inactive for” slider to “Never”. - Also set the “Put computer to sleep when it is inactive for” slider to “Never”. - Click on the General tab. From the “Sleep type when inactive” dropdown list, select “Do nothing”. 14. Reboot the computer. To open the GUI, double-click on the icon available on your computer’s desktop. See 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1. Install mandatory software patches. See: • Client software patches (page 197) and • Installing a screen management driver for Linux (page 212) Note for Windows XP users:

- Open the Internet Explorer window; - Select Internet Options from the Tools menu; - Click on the Advanced tab; - Scroll until the Security options are visible; 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

191

4

4

Client software installation Installing Client software >

- Choose “Allow active content to run in files on My Computer”.

192

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Setting the computer’s IP address > Linux Client host computer

Setting the computer’s IP address Unless the Client host computer also hosts Server software (as in the case of a 428-Lite laptop) you have to assign an IP address to it so that it can communicate with the server computer.

Linux Client host computer When you installed Linux on the Client host computer you were requested to enter 172.27.128.2 as IP address, but if you want to connect several Client computers, you must choose a different address for each of them. To change the IP address, do the following: 1.

From the System menu, select Administration and then Network. Enter the password for the root user account if the system asks you to do so.

2.

In the Network Configuration window, choose the eth0 network interface and click Configure (enter the password for the root user account if the system asks you to do so).

Figure 4-11

3.

In the Network Configuration window, double-click on the eth0 network interface.

4.

Choose Statically set IP addresses.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

193

4

4

Client software installation Setting the computer’s IP address > Windows Client host computer

5.

In the IP address field, enter the IP address you want to assign to the Client computer on the 172.27.128._ network (e. g. 172.27.128.2). See Networking on page 48.

6.

In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.255.0. Click OK.

172.27.128.2

Figure 4-12

Note In the case of a computer also hosting server software, you may

have to open this window (Ethernet Device) and make sure the Statically set IP addresses option is activated (instead of DHCP).

Windows Client host computer To set the IP address of a Client computer running on WindowsTM, do the following:

Windows XP 1.

From the Start menu, choose Settings, then Network Connections.

Figure 4-13

2. 194

Right-click on the Local Area Connection and select Properties. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Setting the computer’s IP address > Windows Client host computer

3.

Click on Internet Protocol (TCPIP) in the list box and then click on the Properties button.

4.

Choose “Use the following IP address”.

5.

In the IP address field, enter the IP address you want to assign to the Client computer on the 172.27.128._ network (e. g. 172.27.128.2). See Networking on page 48.

6.

In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.255.0.

4

172.27.128.2 255.255.255.0

Figure 4-14

7.

Click OK.

Windows7 1.

Select Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center > Change adapter settings.

Figure 4-15

2.

Double-click on the Local Area Connection interface. In the Local Area Connection Status window, click Properties.

3.

In the Local Area Connection Properties box, select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

195

4

Client software installation Setting the computer’s IP address > Windows Client host computer

Figure 4-16

196

4.

Choose “Use the following IP address”.

5.

In the IP address field, enter the IP address you want to assign to the Client computer on the 172.27.128._ network (e. g. 172.27.128.2). See Networking on page 48.

6.

In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.255.0.

7.

Click OK.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Client software patches >

Client software patches Note To install/uninstall server patches, see Server software patches (page 157).

Installing a Client software patch

4

IMPORTANT

Software patches, if any, provided to you by Sercel must be installed in incremental order. You must install all Mandatory-type patches.

To install a Client software patch: 1.

Log in as user428.

2.

On a Linux host, double-click on the Patcher icon on the desktop. On a Windows host, select the Patcher menu item from the Start > Programs menu.

e-428

e-428 e-428

Windows Start menu bar

e-428

Figure 4-17

This opens the Patch Installer window. The left-hand pane shows which patches are already installed, if any. e-428 client

Click

Figure 4-18 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

197

4

Client software installation Client software patches >

3.

Click on the Install New Patch button in the Patch Installer window.

4.

Click OK to dismiss the warning box saying that you must close the application (you must have done that at step 1).

5.

In the dialog box that shows up, go to the folder containing the patch to install (on a Linux host, choose /media/cdrecorder for a CD-ROM, /media/usbdisk for a USB stick), and select the patch.

6.

Click on the Open button. This installs the patch and updates the Patch Installer window. e-428 client

Click e428 (client)

Figure 4-19

The “Interface Level” field may or may not be incremented, depending on the changes implemented by the patch. To view the Interface Level, click on the top-level folder in the Patch Installer window, then click on the Details tab. The Interface Level is used to check for compatibility between Server and Client software each time any user connects to the server (if interface levels do not match, an error message appears and the connection request is rejected). 7.

Click on the new patch in the Patch Installer window, then click on the Readme tab for more information on the patch you installed.

Uninstalling a Client software patch If, for any reason, you wish to uninstall any patches, you must do that in decremental order, starting from the highest number.

198

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Client software patches >

To uninstall a patch, right-click on it in the Patch Installer window and select Uninstall from the menu that pops up. e-428 client

e428

Right-click

4 Figure 4-20

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

199

4

Client software installation Remote access to Server from a Linux Client >

Remote access to Server from a Linux Client You can use the procedure below to type commands or browse through files on the Server computer from a Linux Client computer, for example if the Server computer has no keyboard or display. 1.

Open a Terminal window on the Client computer (right-click on the desktop and choose “Open Terminal” from the popup menu).

2.

Type the command xhost + 172.27.128.1

(this allows the Server to display text in the Client computer’s Terminal window). 3.

Still in the Client computer’s Terminal window, type the command rlogin 172.27.128.1 –l user428

(in place of “user428”, you can use any other account dedicated to the e428 application). 4.

Type the password for the Server’s user428 account (normally without pressing Return).

5.

After logging in to the Server, type the command setenv DISPLAY 172.27.128.X :0.0

(where 172.27.128.X is the IP address of the Client computer on which you typed the previous commands). 6.

To launch the Linux file explorer, type nautilus &

7.

To log out, type logout

By default, none of the above commands is persistent.

200

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Remote access to Server from a Windows Client > Installing Cygwin software

Remote access to Server from a Windows Client If Client software is hosted on a Windows computer, Cygwin provides a Linux-like interface on the Win32 platform, allowing you to start, stop or restart the server even though the server host has no keyboard or display.

4

WARNING

The Cygwin user interface will not work unless the Windows user account is the same as the Server user account (user428).

Installing Cygwin software 1.

On the 428XL client PC, log in as Administrator.

2.

Open the “cygwinInstaller” directory on the Cygwin CD-ROM. Double-click on the cygwin_setup.exe file.

3.

In the Cygwin Setup window, click Next.

Figure 4-21

4.

Choose “Install from Local Directory”. Click Next.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

201

4

Client software installation Remote access to Server from a Windows Client > Installing Cygwin software

Figure 4-22

5.

You must select the root directory (c:\cygwin) as the directory where to install Cygwin. Choose the recommended options (All users, Unix/binary). Click Next.

Figure 4-23

6.

Use the Browse button to select the CD-ROM drive and the cygwinInstaller directory. Click Next.

Figure 4-24

7.

202

Choose to install all packages (click on the arrow to choose “Install” instead of “Default”). Click Next.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Remote access to Server from a Windows Client > Configuring Cygwin

Click to choose “Install”

4

Figure 4-25

8.

Wait until installation is complete.

Configuring Cygwin To set up Cygwin parameters for the 428XL, do the following: 1.

Log in with the 428 user name. See Windows user account (page 185).

2.

Open the cygwin directory on the e-428v5.0 CD-ROM.

3.

Double-click on the sercel_config.exe file.

4.

Choose to uncompress the file to the C:\cygwin directory.

5.

In the C:\cygwin directory, double-click on the sercel_config directory.

6.

Set up the Sercel configuration by double-clicking on the confX.cmd file. As a result the following icons should be available on the desktop: cygwinmain, startddterm, startdttfile, startSga.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

203

4

Client software installation Remote access to Server from a Windows Client > Working with Cygwin

Figure 4-26

Working with Cygwin Starting the X-server The X-server needs to be started only once, by double-clicking on the cygwinmain icon:

Figure 4-27

As a result the X-server appears in the taskbar.

Opening an xterm Terminal window Double-click on the startxterm (for Linux) icon:

startxterm Figure 4-28

204

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Remote access to Server from a Windows Client > Working with Cygwin

Opening a Nautilus file manager window Double-click on the startNautilus (for Linux) icon:

startNautilus Figure 4-29

4

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

205

4

Client software installation First-time log-in >

First-time log-in If you are using your 428XL system for the first time, see Opening a user session (page 40) in User’s Manual Vol. 1 to launch the e428 GUI and then select the appropriate options and settings in the Install window (licence code, etc.) and in the Configuration window to match your survey requirements.

206

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Licence codes >

Licence codes In the 428XL jInstall window, you have to enter the licence code supplied to you by Sercel for each package you want to use. If you add or move or remove any Ethernet interface card, then you may have to request a new licence code from Sercel. Note that Sercel may deliver temporary licences. Because you have to enter the e-428 licence code again whenever you reinstall e428 software, be sure to save it (e. g. on a USB stick) and keep it in a safe place.

Figure 4-30

e-428 licence The e-428 Password field is used to enter the licence code supplied to you by Sercel for your system. Record the “Server Id” code prompted. You will need that Server Id if, for any reason, you contact Sercel to get a new licence for your system.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

207

4

4

Client software installation Licence codes >

When you contact Sercel to get a password for your system, you have to provide: - The 428XL software version. - The identification code of the server computer (the Server Id code displayed with the Server Id option button); - The number of additional client computers you want to use, - The number of traces;

Plotter licence The Info... button allows you to see if any licence is already installed. When you contact Sercel to get a Plotter licence code for your system, you have to provide the “lmhost” identification code associated with the server after e-428 software is installed. To read that code, log in as user428 on the server, open a Terminal window and type the command: lmhostid The licence for plotters cannot be typed on the keyboard. It may be supplied to you on a floppy disk, or CD-ROM, or USB stick or any appropriate medium. You can also download the licence file and save it to the server computer’s disk (e. g. to the /tmp directory). To install a plotter licence: - Insert the medium (CD-ROM, etc.) containing the licence file, or copy the file to computer’s disk, - Click on the Browse... button and select the licence file. - Click on Install. A warning box may appear, asking you if you wish to install a licence. If you choose to do that and a licence already exists, you are going to overwrite that licence. - Note: If the mention “1-jan-0” appears in the warning box, it should not be understood as an expiry date. Instead, this means the licence is unlimited. - Click OK. This installs the plotter licence.

208

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Client software installation Licence codes >

- Wait for a dialog box to appear to say if installation was successful. - Click Apply. This reboots the server computer.

Guidance licence The Guidance Password field is used to enter the licence code for the VE464 guidance option. When you contact Sercel to get a Guidance licence code for your system, you have to provide: - The identification code displayed in the DPG Host Id field; - The number of vibrators (DSDs) you want to steer. - The Guidance software version.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

209

4

4

Client software installation Uninstalling 428XL Client software >

Uninstalling 428XL Client software If, for any reason, you need to uninstall 428XL Client software, use the following procedure. 1.

Login as user428.

2.

Close all 428XL windows.

3.

On a Linux host, double-click on the Uninstall icon on the desktop. On a Windows host, select Programs > e-428-client > Uninstall from the Start menu

e-428

e-428

Windows Start menu bar e-428

e-428

Figure 4-31

4.

This opens the usual Installshield. Follow the instructions prompted.

Figure 4-32

210

5.

Click Next in the successive windows, and finally click Finish.

6.

Reboot the computer.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

5

Peripherals In this chapter: • Screen management (page 212) • Plotters (page 217) • Tape drives (page 223) • Early-design NAS server (page 241) • NAS4000 (page 258) • FTP server (page 282) • MDR or RVT300 virtual tape recorder (page 286) • Vehicle Tracking box (page 289)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

211

5

Peripherals Screen management > Installing a screen management driver for Linux

Screen management In this section: • Installing a screen management driver for Linux (page 212) • Multi-screen management (page 213) • Updating the NVIDIA driver (page 215)

Installing a screen management driver for Linux After first-time installation of e428V5.0 software, follow the procedure below to run the NVIDIA driver installation script (graphicInstall.sh) from the e428 DVD supplied by SERCEL, located in this folder: /media//e428v5.0/linux/tools To install the driver from the e428 DVD: 1.

At the Linux Login Panel, log in as root and type administrator as password.

2.

Open a Terminal window.

3.

Type cd / media/E428V5.0/e428v5.0/linux/tools/

4.

Type ./graphicInstall.sh nokvm (for example: ./graphicInstall.sh 2 nokvm for 2 screens connected and no “kvm” box installed).

5.

Type reboot

Note To change the number of screens, change 4/3 to wide, etc. see Multi-screen management (page 213).

212

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Screen management > Multi-screen management

Multi-screen management Each computer can be equipped with up to four display screens. You have to install the adequate number of graphic cards in the computer. IMPORTANT

After adding a Graphic card and connecting an additional display unit, or moving a Graphic card to another slot, you need to reinstall the Operating System and e428 software. If you have two or more screens, use the procedure below to configure the system: 1.

Open a Terminal window.

2.

Type: cd /usr/local/binsh ./configureDisplay.sh

where

3.

= number of screens connected, i. e. 1 to 4 (optional) = standard or wide (optional) = linear or matrix (defaults to linear).

Type reboot

Be sure the display screens are connected to the appropriate graphic accelerator card port so that the mouse pointer can jump to the suitable border from one screen to the other when moved horizontally. (Either change the connections or move the screens as required). See Figure 5-1 on page 214. WARNING

Use either SVGA-type or DMI-type cables. Do not mix the two types. Do not use any SVGA/DMI converter. (The display units you purchase from SERCEL are supplied along with the necessary cables). Note It is recommended to connect display screens via DisplayPort

to DVI adaptors and long DVI cables. Do not use VGA ports. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

213

5

5

Peripherals Screen management > Multi-screen management

2

4

“Matrix” setup 1

3

Figure 5-1 : Multi-screen workstation 214

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Screen management > Updating the NVIDIA driver

Updating the NVIDIA driver If for any reason the NVIDIA driver that is already running on the computer, from a previous installation, needs to be updated, a new driver is delivered in an e428 software patch. Copy the patch to a USB stick, then install the new driver as follows: 1.

Boot the computer in Single mode.

2.

Install the driver from the USB stick.

5

Booting in Single mode 1.

Wait for the Linux GRUB window.

2.

Press any key.

3.

Keep the first line selected: Red Hat Enterprise Linux WS (2.6 .... ELsmp)

4.

Press the “e” key (within 10 seconds).

5.

Select the second line.

6.

Press the “e” key.

7.

At the end of the line, type single (with a space character ahead).

8.

Press the Return key. The new line should look like this: Updating the NVIDIA driver

cd /tmp chmod +x graphicInstall.sh ./graphicInstall.sh 1 nokvm umount /media/... (replace /media/... by the file system). 3.

Remove the USB stick.

4.

Type reboot.

See Multi-screen management (page 213).

216

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Plotters > Mount parts

Plotters The switches on the rear panel of the plotter should be set as shown below: 2 (On)

Power On/Off

1 (Off)

5

Ethernet port

AC Power

Figure 5-2 Plotter rear panel

Mount parts

4 screws, M6×50 4 screws, M5×12

Mount plate 756084647

Figure 5-3

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

217

5

Peripherals Plotters > Mount parts

8 screws, M6×16

Mount plate 756084647 4 standoffs, 756085132

4 screws, M6×50

Mount plate 756084647

Figure 5-4

8 mounting holes (dia. 6.2) Mount plate 756084647

242

300

350

492 514

Figure 5-5 Mounting dimensions in mm

218

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Plotters > VERITAS V12 plotter settings

VERITAS V12 plotter settings Note If you want to reuse a plotter from a 408UL system, it must be

upgraded with an Ethernet port (upgrade kit part No. 1L21084066). See Ethernet port upgrade (page 220).

Physical interface configuration - Remove the 2 screws securing the hinged rear panel, and flip it open. - Make sure the 40-pin ribbon cable is connected to the “Short Line” connector. - Make sure the 2-pin jumper (J15) is set to “S”. - Close the rear panel.

Configuration procedure • Power on the plotter. The display should read "IDLE M1". • Press . The display should read "OFF LINE". • Press . The display should (briefly) read the first option label "SEL MODE", and its value "USER M1". • Examine options from "SEL MODE" to "BEEPER" using the following sequence: • Change the current option value if necessary using or blue key, the display should read the new value of the option (see table below). • Press to display next option label. When done press . The display should read "IDLE M1".

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

219

5

5

Peripherals Plotters > V12 / 428XL settings

V12 / 428XL settings (Firmware version 3.1 or higher). Table 5-1 V12 / 428XL settings Option

Label value

Comment

SEL MODE

USER M1

User configuration location

SEL TEST

INACTIVE

Auto test launcher

CONTRAST

C5 (or higher)

Plot contrast

SPEED

4.0 IPS

Paper speed

MEDIA

LT/HV PAPER

Paper thickness. For later-production paper choose “HV Film”.

SCALING

NO SCALE

Plot scaling

VERT EMU

203 spi

Vertical resolution in scans per inch

FF LENGTH

2" LONG

Form feed length in inch

SCANWIDTH

296 bytes

Plot width in bytes per scan (1 byte = 8 dots).

BEEPER

PULSED

Paper out audio beep.

Ethernet port upgrade An Ethernet port is required on the Veritas V12 plotter in order to attach it to the 428XL system. To install the upgrade kit (SERCEL part No. 1L21084066), if required, do the following:

220

1.

Remove the left side cover.

2.

Flip open the rear panel.

3.

Unplug the ribbon cable from the plotter printed circuit board.

4.

Remove the DB37 connector mount bracket. Remove the connector and ribbon cable assembly.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Plotters > Ethernet port upgrade

Remove the two screws securing the rear panel

Notch required for Ethernet card mount bracket

5 Figure 5-6

5.

Remove the slotted plastic strip. Using cutting pliers and a file or a soldering iron, cut off two teeth from the plastic strip as shown in Figure 5-6 in order to make a notch in it so that the Ethernet card can be mounted.

6.

Put the slotted plastic strip back in place.

7.

Slip the ribbon cable from the Ethernet card into the cabinet and then secure the Ethernet card.

8.

Secure the Ethernet port panel and the Ethernet card mount bracket.

9.

Connect the ribbon cable from the Ethernet card to the interface card.

10. Plug the ribbon cable from the interface card into “Short Line” connector on the plotter printed circuit board. 11. Put the self-adhesive interface card mount plate in place and secure the interface card to it.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

221

5

Peripherals Plotters > Ethernet port upgrade

Self-adhesive mount plate

Ethernet port panel

Interface card

Plotter printed circuit board

Ethernet card

L S

J15

Short Line

Figure 5-7

12. Set the J15 jumper to the “S” position. 13. Put the left side cover and rear panel back in place.

222

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Tape drives > Tape drive shock-mount assembly

Tape drives Tape drive shock-mount assembly

5 Figure 5-8 : Tape drive shock-mount parts

For CD490-E: shock-mount assembly part No. 752075848A.

320 340

For CD590: shock-mount assembly part No. 1653077133A.

20

20

0

320 340

0

(Dimensions in mm)

20

0

6 mounting holes (dia. 7)

6 mounting holes (dia. 7)

752075848A (CD490-E)

20

0

1653077133A (CD590)

250

480

300

580 500

600

Figure 5-9 : Tape drive mount plate 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

223

5

Peripherals Tape drives > Supported tape drives

Supported tape drives To see the list of supported tape drives, open the following file in the text editor: /export/home/sn408Xxl/sn408Sol/workSpace/tapes/devices.par This file does not only contain the list of supported devices but also the parameters for each of them. Example: "FUJITSU ",

"M2488ED ",

3490E_CLASS,

2,

0x9005,

0;

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(a)

The following parameters must be supplied: • Vendor Id (a) • Product Id (b) • Device class (c) • Write retry page code (d) • Write retry param code (e) • Space to OEM support (f) The device class should be one of the following: 3592_CLASS, 3480_CLASS, 3490E_CLASS, 3590_CLASS, DLT_CLASS, LTO_CLASS, DAT_CLASS or NEW_CLASS. You can add new devices, with the appropriate parameters. CAUTION

Extreme care is required if you add any device that has not been tested by Sercel, because it may not be exactly compliant with the SCSI standard and may need a software patch to work properly.

224

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Tape drives > FUJI 3490-E or 3590 SCSI address

FUJI 3490-E or 3590 SCSI address Setting 3490-E or 3590 SCSI address The SCSI device address on the cartridge drive is properly set prior to shipment from SERCEL. However, after replacement or after connecting one additional cartridge drive, for example, you may need to change the SCSI address. This can be done using the five keys (SHIFT, TEST, START, UNLOAD, RESET) and the LED display on the front panel of the cartridge drive. The necessary instructions are provided below. • Power up the cartridge drive. • Wait for self-tests to be completed (about 30 seconds). • If any cartridge is loaded in the drive, remove it. At this stage the front panel display should read : * or *0 • Change the target ID. WARNING

With the 428XL system, only addresses 0 to 5 are allowed.

Note Remove medium changer magazine (if mounted) prior to

performing the procedure below. The following procedure describes the steps required to set the Target ID. • Step 1

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Press and hold both the TEST and UNLOAD keys, wait for OFFLINE to be displayed then release both keys (if there is an outstanding SCSI command or if there is a tape loaded in the tape drive then Off-line mode cannot be entered). Once the keys are released then the first item, DIAGMODE, in the main Off-line menu will be displayed. (Keys must be held for approximately 2 seconds before Off-line mode is entered). 225

5

5

Peripherals Tape drives > FUJI 3490-E or 3590 SCSI address

• Step 2

Press the START pushbutton until SETTING is displayed.

• Step 3

Press the TEST pushbutton.

• Step 4

The first option, 70: S.TAR, is displayed. Press TEST to view the setting. The setting may be incremented by pressing START or decremented by pressing SHIFT and START.

• Step 5

Press TEST to return to 70: S.TAR

• Step 6

Press SHIFT and START until 89: (3490-E) or 92: (3590) WTROM is displayed.

• Step 7

Press TEST to view settings at option 89: WTROM.

• Step 8

Press START until y is displayed.

• Step 9

Press the TEST pushbutton to write the setting to ROM.

• Step 10

Press TEST to return to WTROM.

• Step 11

Press RESET twice to return to *.

After self-tests are complete (this takes about 30 seconds), the display should read *0 or * unless the SCSI address display option is enabled (see below). The drive is ready for use with its new address.

Displaying SCSI address on FUJI 3490-E or 3590 operator panel The Target ID (see above) can optionally be displayed on the cartridge drive operator panel when no cartridge is loaded. • Power up the cartridge drive • Wait for self-tests to be completed (about 30 seconds) • If any cartridge is loaded in the drive, remove it. At this stage the front panel display should read: * or *0 (unless the SCSI address display option is already enabled). Note Remove medium changer magazine (if mounted) prior to

performing the procedure below. 226

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Tape drives > FUJI 3490-E or 3590 SCSI address

The following procedure describes the steps required to display the Target ID (SCSI address) on the operator panel. • Step 1

Press and hold both the TEST and UNLOAD keys, wait for OFFLINE to be displayed then release both keys (if there is an outstanding SCSI command or if there is a tape loaded in the tape drive then Off-line mode cannot be entered). Once the keys are released then the first item, DIAGMODE, in the main Off-line menu will be displayed. (Keys must be held for approximately 2 seconds before Off-line mode is entered).

• Step 2

Press the START pushbutton until SETTING is displayed.

• Step 3

Press the TEST pushbutton.

• Step 4

The first option, 70: S.TAR, is displayed. Press START until 74: S.*N is displayed.

• Step 5

Press TEST to view the setting. The setting can be changed by pressing START or SHIFT and START.

The display should read *N: YES for the SCSI address to appear on the operator panel • Step 6

Press TEST to return to 70: S.TAR

• Step 7

Press SHIFT and START until 89: (3490-E) or 92: (3590) WTROM is displayed.

• Step 8

Press TEST to view settings at option WTROM.

• Step 9

Press START until y is displayed.

• Step 10

Press the TEST pushbutton to write the setting to ROM.

• Step 11

Press TEST to return to WTROM.

• Step 12

Press RESET twice to return to *.

After self-tests are complete (this takes about 30 seconds), the display should read *N (where N is the SCSI address).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

227

5

5

Peripherals Tape drives > Resetting M2488 T4 drive initialisation parameters

Resetting M2488 T4 drive initialisation parameters In the event of record errors on a 3490E M2488 T4 FUJITSU drive, use the procedure below to reset the initialization parameters. 1.

Power off the drive.

2.

Connect an RS cable between a PC Com port and the drive Com port. Use one of the following cables according to the PC Com port: DB25 socket to DB9 socket

3.

DB9 socket to DB9 socket

2 (tx)

_______ 2 (rx)

3 (tx)

_______ 2 (rx)

3 (rx)

_______ 3 (tx)

2 (rx)

_______ 3 (tx)

4 (rts)

_______ 8 (cts)

4 (dtr)

_______ 6 (dsr)

5 (cts)

_______ 7 (rts)

5 (gnd)

_______ 5 (gnd)

6 (dsr)

_______ 4 (dtr)

6 (dsr)

_______ 4 (dtr)

7 (gnd)

_______ 5 (gnd)

7 (rts)

_______ 8 (cts)

20 (dtr)

_______ 6 (dsr)

8 (cts)

_______ 7 (rts)

Open a new Hyperterminal session by selecting: Start menu > Programs > Accessories > Communication > Hyperterminal

Figure 5-10

228

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Tape drives > Resetting M2488 T4 drive initialisation parameters

4.

Click on Configure and set the following parameters: - 19200 bauds - 8 data bits - No parity - 1 stop bit - Hardware flow control

5.

Connect to the Com port (Click on the Call icon).

6.

Power on the drive. The display should read the startup internal tests result.

7.

Wait for the final SYSTEM INITIALIZATION COMPLETE message:

5 Figure 5-11

Figure 5-12

8.

Type Help to get help on current menu available commands: >help

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

OPPANEL

Emulate offline operator panel

SERVO

Servo code debug menu

HARDWARE

Hardware support menu 229

5

Peripherals Tape drives > Resetting M2488 T4 drive initialisation parameters

CODELOAD

RS-232 codeload operations menu

DEBUG

Debug menu

CODE_REVISION Print code revision HELP

Display help for current menu

****** MAIN ****** 9.

Type Hardware >hardware ****** HARDWARE ****** q - return to prior menu group

10. To see the Hardware menu available commands, type Help help DDMT

Disable deadman timer

EDMT

Enable deadman timer

NVRAM-DEFAULTS Set NVRAM to default values & reset HELP

Display help

11. To restore the factory configuration and reset the drive, type nvram-defaults >nvram-defaults PROCESSOR RESET (after offline, running from WCS) Copyright (c) 1995-1999 Fujitsu Limited Code built: 990527 04 UCT

230

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Tape drives > LTO drive SCSI address

Version: 7 B01 OS START OS TASK INITIALIZATION COMPLETE SYSTEM INITIALIZATION COMPLETE 12. Power Off the drive.

5

LTO drive SCSI address The SCSI device address on the cartridge drive is properly set prior to shipment from SERCEL. However, after replacement or after connecting one additional cartridge drive, for example, you may need to change the SCSI address. This can be done using the buttons on the rear panel. 1. Power off the drive. 2. Press the + or - button to choose the desired SCSI address.

0

1

5

Press + or - button to set SCSI address

Figure 5-13 : LTO rear panel

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

231

5

Peripherals Tape drives > CYPRESS 3490E-DIF

CYPRESS 3490E-DIF The procedure below is for configuring a CYPRESS 3490E-DIF SCSI tape recorder based on an MP-8400-series cartridge drive. Prior to using the tape drive with the 428XL, the EMULATION parameter must be set to STK, and the COMPRESSION parameter must be set to OFF. All other parameters must be left at the default setting. To do that, use the three buttons available under the display. (For details, refer to the manufacturer’s User Manual). STAND BY

18/36w

OFL

1

2

3

Figure 5-14

Configuring the tape drive - Power up the tape drive. Wait until the self-test is completed. - After “STAND BY” appears on the front panel display, do the following: STAND BY OFL

18/36w Press button 1 to go to Offline.

OFFLINE UNLOADED ONL DEN func

Press button 3 (Func).

SCSI func

Press button 1 (Func).

ID 5 CHG

EXIT

MENU FUNCTIONS CONF DIAG >>> ENTER PASSWORD EXIT ---- ----

232

Press button 1 (Conf).

Press 3, then 2, then 3 (this enters the password). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Tape drives > CYPRESS 3490E-DIF

CONFIGURE SCSI DRIVE

>>>

COMPRESSION ON EXIT CHG >>> COMPRESSION OFF EXIT CHG >>>

Press 2 to select DRIVE

Press 2 (CHG) to turn compression OFF.

Press 3 (>>> ) three times until EMULATION is selected.

EMULATION ECHO EXIT CHG >>>

Press 2 (CHG) to change Emulation to STK.

EMULATION STK EXIT CHG >>>

Press 1 (EXIT).

SAVE SETUP ? YES NO TEMP

Press 1 to save.

ARE YOU SURE ? YES EXIT

Press 1 to confirm.

CONFIGURE SCSI DRIVE

>>>

Press 3 (>>> ) twice.

CONFIGURE 18WRT EXIT

>>>

Press 2 (EXIT).

MENU FUNCTIONS CONF DIAG >>>

Press 3 (>>> ) twice.

MENU FUNCTIONS ---- EXIT >>>

Press 2 (EXIT).

OFFLINE UNLOADED ONL DEN func STAND BY 18/36w OFL

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Press 1 to go to On Line.

233

5

5

Peripherals Tape drives > CYPRESS 3490E-DIF

Changing the SCSI address Power up the tape drive. Wait until the self-test is complete. After “STAND BY” appears on the front panel display, do the following: STAND BY OFL

18/36w Press button 1 to go to Offline.

OFFLINE UNLOADED ONL DEN func SCSI func

ID 5 CHG

EXIT

Press button 2 as many times as necessary to set the desired SCSI address (with the 428XL, only addresses 0 to 5 are allowed).

SCSI func

ID X CHG

EXIT

Press 3 (EXIT).

SAVE SETUP ? YES NO ----

Press 1 to save.

ARE YOU SURE ? YES EXIT

Press 1 to confirm.

SCSI func

Press 3 (EXIT).

ID X CHG

EXIT

OFFLINE UNLOADED ONL DEN func STAND BY OFL

234

Press button 3 (Func).

Press 1 to go to On Line.

18/36w

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Tape drives > 3592 cartridge drive

3592 cartridge drive Firmware revision 3592 Firmware level required: D3I0_4E9 or higher. Note Cartridges may be shipped preformatted. In case of use of

preformatted cartridges, note that the E05 cartridge format is not compatible with J1A tape drives. Using an E05-formatted cartridge with a J1A tape drive will: - either give rise to an error on the tape drive (no operation allowed on the tape).

5

- or cause the tape drive to regard the tape as empty, whatever its actual content. (The behaviour depends on the firmware level).

QLA card installation A QLOGIC Optic FC Dual port PCI card (QLA2342L-CK) must be installed in the 428XL server computer. The card must be equipped with the appropriate bracket for installation in a full-height PCI slot. See also Tape drive interface cards (page 78).

Connecting 3592 drives Note Put dustcaps in place on unused connectors.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

235

5

Peripherals Tape drives > 3592 cartridge drive

Port 0 1

QLA card

Server computer’s rear panel

0

1

LC/LC multi-mode FC cable Power

Figure 5-15 Rear view (2 drives)

Port 0 1

QLA card

Server computer’s rear panel

0

1

LC/LC multi-mode FC cable Power

Port 0 1 0

1

Power

Figure 5-16 Rear view (4 drives)

To set the parameters of each drive, install the Service control panel on top of the enclosure and connect the serial cable from the control panel to the desired drive’s serial connector on the front panel. 236

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Tape drives > 3592 cartridge drive

Service control panel

Service control panel

Navigate Upper drive Serial cable

Lower drive Lower

Software Reset (1)

Upper

Up (3)

Down (4)

Maintenance (2)

Select (Enter) (5)

5

Figure 5-17 Front view

Setting drive parameters 1.

Be sure no cartridge is loaded in the drive.

2.

Use the standard shutdown procedure to power off the 428XL server computer.

3.

Connect the serial cable from the Service panel to the desired drive’s serial connector on the front panel.

4.

Press the software Reset button (see Figure 5-17 on page 237). As a result the OPTIONS menu is available on the Service panel.

Use

to scroll through menu

OPTIONS SERVICES

Use

to select or enter or scroll through options

Figure 5-18 SERVICES menu

WARNING

Do not use the FORCE ERROR DUMP menu. 5.

Press the maintenance button (see Figure 5-17 on page 237). - Select CE OFFLINE MODE.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

237

5

Peripherals Tape drives > 3592 cartridge drive

- Select CONFIG-INSTALL. Be sure “FORCE ER LOG IS OFF” is selected (otherwise fugitive errors might arise during recording). - Select DRV. OPTIONS then DRV. FEATURES. Be sure "J1A RACK" is selected. Note that some tape drive enclosures may require rack mount library information in the DRV. OPTIONS menu. - Press the software Reset button to quit the maintenance menu. This takes you back to the OPTIONS menu. 6.

Select SERVICES.

7.

Select SET ONLINE. - Select PORT 0 (assuming the ports are connected as shown in Figure 5-15 on page 236).

8.

Still from the SERVICES menu, select FIBRE OPTIONS. - Select SET PORT 0. - Select SET SPEED. - Select 2 GB, then YES. - Select SET TOPOLOGY, then L-PORT, YES. - Select SET HARD ADDRESS. SET HARD ADDRESS CANCEL e0

--VALID--

e1 SAVE DATA

Figure 5-19

- Make sure the right-hand column reads “VALID” for the selected address. - Select SAVE DATA, then YES.

238

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Tape drives > 3592 cartridge drive

Note The SCSI address is automatically assigned by Linux itself. If

two or more 3592 tape drives are attached to the system and you want to know which address is assigned to each drive, insert a cartridge into one drive and look at the indicators in the Export window to see which drive has a cartridge inserted (or move the mouse pointer to each Tape indicator to display the status popup). 9.

Press the software Reset button.

10. Power up the computer. See if the drive appears in the Recorder main window.

Manual calibration With firmware code level D3I0_4E9 or higher, automatic calibration is intentionally inhibited in order to preclude any spurious interruption of recording. As a result, if the drive determines that a calibration is required, then a “CALIB” message will appear on the drive message display (on the bezel) and on the Service panel (if connected) every time the tape is unloaded, until a manual calibration is done by using the following procedure: 1.

Connect the control panel to the desired drive (see Figure 5-17 on page 237).

2.

Be sure the drive is powered up, no jobs are running, no tape is loaded.

3.

Push the maintenance button (2).

4.

Select CE OFFLINE. You may get a CONFIRM OFFLINE MENU at this step if drive believes a job might be running.

5.

Select UTILITIES.

6.

Select CALIBRATE DRIVE. This takes you to the LOAD SCRATCH TAPE MENU.

7.

Load a scratch tape in the drive.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

239

5

5

Peripherals Tape drives > 3592 cartridge drive

8.

After the tape is loaded and “Ready”, select PROCESS LOADED TAPE. The CE WAIT MENU should appear. Wait until the procedure is complete (this takes approximately 4 to 5 minutes).

9.

After the procedure is complete, the CE DIAGS GOOD or CE DIAGS FAILED MENU is displayed.

10. Select UNLOAD DRIVE (you need not wait for Unload to complete). 11. Select BACK TO CE MENUS. This takes you back to the CE OPTIONS MENU. 12. Push the settings button (2). 13. Select OPERATOR MODE. Note If a tape is already loaded before you get to step 7, you have to

Unload it before proceeding. Note If the tape loaded is File Protected, a "Tape write prot'd" Status

message will be displayed at step 8. Unload it and then proceed with an unprotected tape. Note The Calibration procedure will write on the tape, but it writes in

an area that does not contain customer data. The tape used does not need to be new or unused, but should be a known “good” tape. Note If the Calibration procedure succeeds, the new values are saved

in non-volatile memory.

Firmware update If, for any reason, firmware needs to be updated, use an FMR cartridge from IBM or created from another 3592 drive. See IBM documentation.

240

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Overview

Early-design NAS server Overview The 428XL NAS (Network Attached Storage) system comes in different versions: Model B (white enclosure), Model C (black enclosure), Model D or later (black enclosure too, with a label mentioning the “Model”). The 428XL NAS system is supplied by SERCEL with the following configuration:

5

Power

USB

Model HX

• Linux (Storiq) Operating System.

Figure 5-20 Model HX

• RAID1 (mirror) mounted disks with a 926 Gbyte storage capacity (Model HX). • Dual-Ports Gigabit network card. • On a Model-B system, the100MB network card on the motherboard is unused. On a Model-C system, the 1-GB network port available from the motherboard is used. On other models, the 1-GB network port is available from the PCI slot. • root login with spider77 as password for console mode general administration and using Webmin. • storiq login with spider77 as password for graphical mode. IMPORTANT

Affix a sticker on the enclosure to identify it as Disk# 1 or Disk# 2. The 428XL NAS system is fully configured prior to shipment from Sercel. Apart from setting networking parameters, you do not normally have any software installation work to do (if required, see Operating System software reinstallation on page 252). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

241

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Shock-mount assembly

IMPORTANT

To power off the NAS system, briefly press the POWER button on the front panel.

Shock-mount assembly Shock-mount assembly part No. 756083303.

Adjustable stop position

See below

Figure 5-21 : NAS shock-mount parts

250

4 mounting holes (dia. 7)

320

230 340

5

(Dimensions in mm)

Figure 5-22 : Lower mount plate 242

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Attaching a NAS system to the 428XL local network

Attaching a NAS system to the 428XL local network

NAS server

eth1 (User Network)

428XL server

(428XL local network)

PCI

eth0

eth2 (User Network)

172.27.128.1 172.27.128.41 (42)

Ethernet switch

5

Figure 5-23 Model HX system (Operating Software version 5.0)

NAS server

eth0 (User Network)

428XL server

(Service port)

PCI

eth2

eth1 (428XL local network)

172.27.128.1 172.27.128.41 (42)

Ethernet switch

Figure 5-24 Model-B system (Operating Software version 1.0)

NAS server (428XL local network)

PCI

428XL server

eth1 (User Network)

eth0

eth2 (User Network)

172.27.128.1 Ethernet switch

172.27.128.41 (42)

Figure 5-25 Model-C system (Operating Software version 1.1 or 2.0)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

243

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Setting up NAS parameters

NAS server eth2

428XL server

PCI

5

eth0 (428XL local network)

(User Network)

eth1 (User Network)

172.27.128.1 172.27.128.41 (42)

Ethernet switch

Figure 5-26 Other models

See also Export mode (page 74) and Exporting to NAS disks (page 483) in User’s Manual Vol. 1. Note To power up the NAS system, press the POWER button

on its front panel. (To power off, briefly press the POWER button).

Setting up NAS parameters To configure the NAS disk, connect a standard PC display, mouse and keyboard to the enclosure.

USB mouse USB keyboard

Display (use DVI cable)

USB

Figure 5-27 Model HX 244

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

PCI

PCI

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Setting up NAS parameters

VGA display USB

VGA display

PS2 mouse PS2 keyboard

Model B

USB

Other than Model B

Figure 5-28

Setting the NAS disk identification number The NAS disk should be identified as Disk# 1 or Disk# 2, by means of a sticker visible on its enclosure. For the host name number to be consistent with the identification number appearing on the sticker, you may have to change the setup parameters by doing the following: 1.

Depending on which model you are using, log in as storiq or root: - On a Model-B system: enter storiq as Username and spider77 as password. Click on the Xterm icon in the toolbar at the foot of the desktop (or select it from the ICEWM menu). In the Terminal window, type: su - root spider77

(press Return). (the password is not viewed). Press Return.

- On other systems, enter root as Username and spider77 as password. 2.

Change directory to /usr/local/binsh, by typing: cd /usr/local/binsh

3.

To configure the disk as Disk# 1, type: ./setNas1Id

or, to configure it as Disk# 2, type: ./setNas2Id

4.

Reboot (type reboot in the Terminal window).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

245

5

5

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Setting up NAS parameters

Note The default assignment of network ports, depending on which

NAS model you are using, is shown in Table 5-2. Table 5-2 Default port assignment NAS enclosure

NAS port

Software version

eth0

eth1

B

1.0

User Network

428XL local network

C

1.1 or 2.0

D

2.0

E

3.0 428XL local Network

User network

Model

XA

3.1

FX

4.0

GX

4.1

HX

5.0

eth2

User Network

Should any malfunction appear on the 428XL local network port, you can use the setNas command to reassign the ethernet ports of the machine, as an interim solution. To do that, use the following syntax: ./setNasEth

replacing

by 1 for Nas1, or 2 for Nas2

by 0 or 2 or 1.

The setNas1Id command returns the system to the default port assignment. Note For Model-B users only:

- It is important to note that only the Gigabit ethernet ports (eth1 and eth0) have been qualified by Sercel. Using the Fast Ethernet port (eth2) may result in lesser performance. - With software version 1.0, the default IP address automatically assigned to the eth1 port (by loading software or using the setNas1Id command) is one for a 408UL network. You have to

246

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Setting up NAS parameters

enter the address for the 428XL network (172.27.128.41 or 42) manually. See Figure 5-31 on page 248.

NAS IP address on the User Network To attach the NAS disk to a network other than the 428XL local network, use the following procedure to configure the User Network port: 1.

Power up the machine.

2.

Unless this is a Model-B system, log in with root as Username and spider77 as password, and then type gdm to get inside “GNOME desktop manager”;

3.

Log in as storiq with spider77 as password.

4.

Launch the Web browser (click on the icon at the foot of the desktop or select it from the ICEWM menu).

5.

In the Mozilla window, click on the “StorIQ Administration” shortcut. Accept licence notifications if any. This opens the Webmin login window.

6.

Log in with root as Username and spider77 as password.

7.

Click on the Networking tab, then on the Network Configuration icon.

5

Networking Logout

Network configuration

Figure 5-29

8.

Click on the Network Interfaces icon.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

247

5

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Setting up NAS parameters

Network Interfaces

Figure 5-30

9.

Depending on which model you have, see Figure 5-31, or Figure 532 below.

Click on eth0 to enter User Network Name address

Type

IP Address

Netmask

Active at boot?

172.27.128.41

255.255.255.0

eth0

eth1 eth2

Figure 5-31 Model B (software version 1.0)

Note With software version 1.0, the IP address automatically

assigned to the eth1 port is one for a 408UL network. You have to enter the address for the 428XL network (172.27.128.41 or 42) manually. Click on eth1 or eth2 to enter User Network address

Name eth0 eth0:1 eth1 eth2

Type (virtual)

IP Address 150.10.128.41

Netmask 255.255.0.0

Active at boot?

172.27.128.41

255.255.255.0

Figure 5-32 All systems except Model-B

Note With software version 1.1 or above, the eth0 interface is visible

to a 408UL or 428XL local network with no need to make any changes. 10. Set the appropriate IP address and Netmask for the ethernet port to be visible to the user’s private network. 248

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Setting up NAS parameters

Figure 5-33

5

Click Save. 11. To set the date and/or time, click on the System tab.

Figure 5-34

- Scroll to System time in the left-hand panel. - Click on the Set time tab. - In the System time panel, enter the correct time. Click Apply. - In the Hardware time panel, click Set Hardware time to system time. Click Save. 12. In the Network Configuration window, click on the Apply Configuration button (see step 8). 13. Click on Logout on the right-hand border of the Webmin window (see step 7). 14. Remove the display, mouse and keyboard. See Attaching a NAS system to the 428XL local network (page 243).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

249

5

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Setting up NAS parameters

WARNING

Your changes are lost after you run the setNas1Id command (used to set the system’s identification number). The setNas1Id command returns the system to the default port assignment (see Table 5-2 on page 246).

NAS 2000HX parameter settings for FTP connection 1.

Power up the NAS2000 HX unit. Wait for the log-in window to appear.

2.

Log in with root as Username and spider77 as password (click OK).

3.

Type gdm to open the “GNOME desktop manager”. In the Welcome window, log in as storiq (click OK) with spider77 as password (click OK).

4.

Launch the Web browser (click on the icon at the foot of the desktop or select it from the ICEWM menu).

5.

In the Mozilla window, click on the “StorIQ Administration” shortcut. This opens the Webmin login window.

6.

Log in with root as Username and spider77 as password.

7.

Click on “Servers”. - Browse to the end and open vsftpd. - Open the Manual entries file (double-click). - Scroll down in order to find the comment line #local_enable=YES and delete the number sign (#) character ahead of it. That line should now read: local_enable=YES - Save the file. - Click on Restart Vsftpd Server.

250

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Attaching a 428XL NAS system to another network

8.

Click on System. - Browse to the end and open Users and groups. - Browse to the end and click on userftp. - Click Normal Password and then enter userftp. - Click Save.

Now you can connect to the FTP server (e. g. via FileZilla).

Attaching a 428XL NAS system to another network The settings of the User Network port (eth0 interface for Model B, eth1 interface for other models), should allow the disk to be visible to the desired external network. See NAS IP address on the User Network (page 247). IMPORTANT

Be sure appropriate network security services are implemented within the user network you are attaching the NAS system to. You can connect the User Network port to an Ethernet port on a UNIX workstation and mount the exported (/mnt/raid) directory at the workstation’s mount point, using the command: mount :/mnt/raid / To copy your SEGD files from the NAS system to a tape, you can also use the Copy+ software tool available from SERCEL on a computer running on Linux or a personal computer running on Windows (and equipped with an SCSI port). See 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3 (“Copy+” software tool on page 21).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

251

5

5

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Operating System software reinstallation

Operating System software reinstallation If, for any reason, you need to reinstall software, connect a standard PC display, mouse and keyboard to the enclosure, then install the appropriate software version, depending on which NAS model you have: • NAS Sercel version 1.0 (page 252) for a Model-B system; • NAS Sercel version 1.1 or above (page 254) for other models.

NAS Sercel version 1.0 1.

Power up the NAS unit.

2.

Insert the NAS Sercel version 1.0 StorIQ CD-ROM into the drive so that the machine can boot on the CD-ROM. To boot on the CDROM, briefly press the Power button, wait until power off is complete, and then briefly press the Power button again.

3.

When “boot” is prompted, press Return (or wait half a minute). The log-in window should appear.

4.

Log in under the following account: - User: storiq - Password: spider77

252

5.

Double-click on the “StoriQ Installation” icon (in the upper right corner of the screen).

6.

Enter the password: spider77

7.

Click OK to dismiss the message that shows up.

8.

When “Installation process is finished” appears (in the “Finished” window), click “OK”.

9.

Wait until the RAID 1 reconstruction is complete (this may take about 2 hours or more). The reconstruction progress can be monitored using the command “cat /proc/mdstat”. The message “resync” followed by a percentage should appear, meaning that the RAID 1 reconstruction is in progress. Periodically relaunch 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Operating System software reinstallation

the “cat” command by simply pressing the up arrow key (), then Return to see if reconstruction is complete. 10. To eject the CD-ROM, briefly press the Power button. Follow the step-by-step instructions prompted and wait until the system power is off. 11. Press the Power button to power up the system. Wait until the StorIQ “Welcome” window appears. 12. Log in with storiq as Username and spider77 as password. 13. Click on the Xterm icon in the toolbar at the foot of the desktop (or select it from the ICEWM menu). In the Terminal window, type: su - root spider77

(press Return). (the password is not viewed). Press Return.

cd /mnt chmod 777 raid

14. Press Ctrl D 15. Press Ctrl D 16. Launch Mozilla (click on the icon at the foot of the desktop or select it from the ICEWM menu). 17. In Mozilla window, click on the “StorIQ Administration” shortcut button. Accept licence notifications if any. This opens the Webmin login window. 18. Log in with root as Username and spider77 as password. Click NO to dismiss the message that shows up. 19. Click on the System tab. 20. Click on Bootup and Shutdown. 21. Use the scrollbar to go to proftpd, and then click on the proftpd link. 22. Choose “Yes” for the “Start at boot time?” option. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

253

5

5

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > Operating System software reinstallation

23. Click on Save. (This should set “proftpd” to “Yes”). 24. Briefly press the Power button to power off the system.

NAS Sercel version 1.1 or above 1.

Power up the NAS unit.

2.

Insert the NAS Sercel version 1.1 (or above) StorIQ CD-ROM into the drive so that the machine can boot on the CD-ROM. To boot on the CD-ROM, briefly press the Power button, wait until power off is complete, and then briefly press the Power button again.

3.

When “boot” is prompted, press Return (or wait half a minute). The log-in window should appear.

4.

Log in under the following account: - User: storiq - Password: spider77 - Click OK.

5.

Double-click on the “StoriQ Installation” icon.

6.

Enter the password: spider77 and click “OK”.

7.

Click OK to dismiss the message that shows up.

8.

Depending on which software version you are installing, do the following: - Version 5.0: wait until you are allowed to click OK in the Storiq installation window (this may take about 1/4 hour). Click OK. - Earlier versions: when “Installation process is finished” appears (in the “Finished” window), click “OK”.

9.

To eject the CD-ROM: - Briefly press the Power button. - Wait for the CD-ROM to be ejected.

254

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > NAS system rescue mode

- Follow the step-by-step instructions prompted and wait until the system power is off. 10. Press the Power button to power up the system. After the system has booted up, the yellow light on the front panel remains on, meaning that RAID 1 reconstruction is in progress. 11. Wait until reconstruction is complete (this may take about 2 hours or more). To see if reconstruction is complete, do the following: - Log in as root, with spider77 as password; - Type the command raid_cli hardinfo (or raid_cli info if earlier version than version 5.0). - You can periodically relaunch the “raid_cli hardinfo” (or raid_cli info) command by pressing both Shift and 1 twice and then Enter. (The command returns the percentage completed, or OK when complete). 12. After reconstruction is complete, reboot the NAS (briefly press the Power button to power down).

NAS system rescue mode If the main system software isn't usable for some reason (hardware of software failure) it's still possible to operate the StorIQ system in “rescue” mode. The system software is installed on both internal disk drives (sda and sdb). “Rescue” mode will boot up from the secondary drive.

How to start in rescue mode If the system is powered but unusable, you may power it down by keeping the power button pressed for 5 seconds. If the primary drive (sda) still works Power up the system. After the "XPC" splash screen, an “intellique” screen is displayed. If the primary drive is working, you'll see a text menu with two options: 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

255

5

5

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > NAS system rescue mode

“storiq” “rescue” Use the keyboard cursor keys to highlight "rescue" and hit "enter" key. The system will start in rescue mode (from the secondary disk drive, sdb). If the primary drive is unavailable (disconnected or unreadable): The system will display only one option at the "Intellique" screen: “rescue-critical” If the screen stays blank If the "INTELLIQUE" screen doesn't show up and the screen stays blank, the disk controller may be locked up by a failed disk drive or cable (hardware failure). Trying disconnecting the primary (sda) drive may help. To do so, power down the system, unplug power cord, open chassis and unplug the primary drive (sda) SATA connector. Identifying the primary (sda) connector Facing the back of the system (model SK22G2), the primary disk is connected to the right SATA connector on the motherboard. See Figure 5-35. Working in rescue mode "rescue mode" should operate normally. However you should immediately proceed to back up your data before reinstalling the system (in case of a software problem) or returning the system for maintenance (in case of a hardware failure).

256

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Early-design NAS server > NAS system rescue mode

Chassis backside

Chassis front

SATA connectors

5

Figure 5-35

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

257

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Introduction

NAS4000 In this section: • Introduction (page 258) • Shock-mount and rack-mount parts (page 261) • Power-on (page 262) • Cabling (page 263) • Display panel (page 265) • Web interface (page 268) • Working with NAS4000 storage systems (page 276) • Power-off (page 279) • Installing the Operating System software or a patch (page 279)

Introduction The NAS4000 is a high-throughput storage unit intended for use with the NFS export mode of the seismic acquisition system. The real-time record capacity of the NAS4000 is 50 000 channels @ 2-ms sample rate.

Figure 5-36 NAS4000 and transportation box

258

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Introduction

The NAS4000 enclosure has a pair of removable disks (DiskRacks) configured for RAID 0+1 recording, which combines the main advantages of both RAID 0 (fast data transfer achieved by stripping) and RAID 1 (fault tolerance and reliability achieved by mirroring). The data is stripped across several disks in one DiskRack, and each disk has a partner disk in the other DiskRack with exactly the same data on it. RAID 1 RAID 0

RAID 0

A

A

B

B

DiskRack # 1

DiskRack # 2

5

Figure 5-37 DiskRack pair

LCD display Power on/off

Menu navigation pad

DiskRacks

Figure 5-38 Front panel Table 5-3 Physical specifications Specifications NAS4000 DiskRack

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

223 (H) × 174 (W) × 451 (D) 12 kg (with 2 DiskRacks) Size: 105 (H) × 82 (W) × 189 (D) Weight: 2.055 kg

259

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Introduction

Table 5-4 Transportation box specifications Specifications Number of DiskRacks Protection type

2 IP65

Weight Size

5 kg (empty) / 9 kg (2 DiskRacks) 377 (L) × 275 (W) × 364 (H)

Table 5-5 Part numbers

260

Item

Part number

NAS4000 (with two DiskRacks) DiskRack

10000973 317090424A

Shock-mount assembly Rack-mount assembly

756089953A 756090006A

Transportation box

10000426

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Shock-mount and rack-mount parts

Shock-mount and rack-mount parts

Adjustable stop position

5 See lower mount plate below

Figure 5-39 NAS4000 shock absorber

285 4 mounting holes (dia. 7)

495

515

265

(Dimensions in mm)

Figure 5-40 Lower mount plate

A rack-mount option (NAS4000 Rack Kit 756090006A) is available that allows installing two NAS4000 units side by side in a 19" cabinet.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

261

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Power-on

Figure 5-41 Rack-mount option

Power-on To power on the NAS4000:

262

1.

Insert the DiskRacks into the NAS4000 enclosure.

2.

Connect the power cord to a 220 VAC power line.

3.

Turn on the power switch on the rear panel of the enclosure. This boots up the NAS4000 and automatically mounts the disks.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Cabling

Cabling

(1), (2), (3), (4): Ethernet ports (see table below)

(1)

(2)

(3) (4)

Mouse

Four USB ports (mouse, keyboard, etc.)

Keyboard

Display screen

AC Power

Power On/Off

Figure 5-42 Rear panel

The NAS4000 is configured as per the table below prior to shipment from Sercel. Table 5-6 Default configuration on shipment from Sercel Ethernet port (1)

eth0

(2)

eth1

(3) (4)

eth2 eth3

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Address 172.27.128.41, selected using the “428XL_NAS#1” profile; 172.27.128.42, selected using the “428XL_NAS#2” profile.

263

5

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Cabling

172.27.128.41 Ethernet switch

172.27.128.1 428XL server with no additional ethernet card (up to 20 000 channels)

Figure 5-43 “428XL_NAS#1” user profile

172.27.128.42 Ethernet switch

172.27.128.1 428XL server with no additional ethernet card (up to 20 000 channels)

Figure 5-44 “428XL_NAS#2” user profile

172.27.127.xx

172.27.128.1

172.27.127.1 428XL server with dedicated additional ethernet card (40 000 channels)

Figure 5-45 User-defined profile

264

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Display panel

Display panel Status: Storage: Raid Hdd: Rack:

(See General status — page 266) OK

OK

Back DiskRacks Profiles Information

5

OK

Profiles

Information DiskRack

Back Profile: xxx Change Information

OS Version: Status Release Date: mm/dd/yyyy

OK

OK

Information

(See Information menu — page 267) Back Mount Unmount Information

Name Status: Link IP OK

Change

Back Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 OK

(See Profiles menu — page 267)

Information

Mount

Unmount

Apply Profile? No Yes OK

Left DiskRack Status Right DiskRack Status OK

Mount DiskRacks? No Yes OK

Unmount DiskRacks? No Yes OK

(See DiskRacks menu — page 267)

Figure 5-46 Quick guide 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

265

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Display panel

General status Table 5-7 Topic

Detail

Description General status of the NAS4000

mounted RW

Two DiskRacks mounted, Read/Write allowed.

mounted RO

One DiskRack mounted, or two DisRacks mounted but each with different content.

Status free rebuild RW

No DiskRack, or DiskRack unmounted. Two DiskRacks mounted, and Verify RAID function launched.

1/100 : 160.8 min Remaining time to complete checking. Status of DiskRacks

Storage

RW

Standard Read/Write mode.

RO

One DiskRack inserted. Read-Only mode.

RW locked

Export activated.

none

No DiskRack, or DiskRack unmounted.

ready

Operationnal for Export (two DiskRacks mounted, synchronized) or operational for Read (one DiskRack mounted).

RAID status

Raid free rebuildabl

No DiskRack, or DiskRack unmounted. Two DiskRacks mounted, but RAID needs rebuilding. Hard disk global status

4/4

Standard. All Hard Disks are operational for Export.

2/4

One DiskRack mounted for RO mode.

0/4

DiskRack unmounted or not inserted.

2/2

Standard. All DiskRacks are operational for Export.

1/2

One DiskRack mounted for RO mode.

0/2

DiskRack unmounted or not inserted.

Hdd

Global status DiskRack insertion Rack

266

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Display panel

Information menu • OS Version: Operating System version. • Release Date: MM/DD/YYYY. • Install Date: MM/DD/YYYY. • Current mode: “Production” or “Factory”.

Profiles menu • Profile: profile used.

5

• Change: used to select the profile to use. • Information: - Name: port identification (eth0, eth1, eth2, eth3). See Figure 542 on page 263 and Table 5-6. - Status: “Up” if active, “Down” if inactive. - Link: “Present” if connected to a network, “None” if not connected to any network. - IP: IP address of this port.

DiskRacks menu • Mount: used to mount DiskRacks. • Unmount: used to unmount DiskRacks. • Information: - Left DiskRack: “OK” or “Missing”. - Right DiskRack: “OK” or “Missing”. - Global Raid: “OK” (RW mode) or “Readable” (RO mode). - Usage: “xxGB / 2TB” where xx stands for the used space, and 2TB is the capacity of a DiskRack.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

267

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Web interface

Web interface On shipment from Sercel the NAS4000 has a default configuration that allows you to open its Web interface as follows: 1.

Connect the eth1 port (see Table 5-6) of the NAS4000 enclosure to the Ethernet port of a PC.

2.

In a Web browser window on the PC, type the IP address of the NAS4000 (172.27.128.41) into the address field.

3.

In the Welcome window, type the user name (qc or observer) and password (usernas).

Figure 5-47

4.

Click Submit. This opens the status page (Figure 5-48) showing the RAID status and the used disk space.

User name Three user names are available for logging in: • observer (password “usernas”): does not allow you to erase SEG-D files from the disks, but lets you use all other menus; • qc (password “usernas”): lets you use all available menus. Also allows you to load software updates. • root (password “administrator”): same as “qc” with “Errors Code” tab for technical support.

268

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Web interface

IP address If changes have been made to the default configuration and you do not remember the IP address, you can read it on the LCD display of the NAS4000 enclosure by selecting the Profiles > Information menu with the front panel keypad.

Status menu

5

Figure 5-48 Status page

Clicking on Details brings up a detailed status page.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

269

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Web interface

Figure 5-49 Detailed Status

Clicking on Logs brings up a page showing the history of messages generated by the system.

Figure 5-50 Message log page

270

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Web interface

Disk management menu • Mount: attaches the DiskRacks to the file system of the NAS4000. If the RAID status is incorrect, the disks are mounted in “read only” mode.

Figure 5-51

• Unmount: separates the DiskRacks from the file system of the NAS4000. If recording is in progress, first click on Unmount in the jExport window of the 428XL GUI to separate the NAS4000 from the server’s file system. • Verify: checks the RAID status of the DiskRacks. You can use this command while recording is in progress. • Erase: only available if you are logged in as “qc” or “root”. This will erase all SEGD files from the mounted DiskRacks but preserve the RAID architecture. Prior to using this command, make sure safe copies of the SEGD files have been made. Typically this command is to be used after transferring the data to another storage system so that you can reuse the same DiskRack pair to record new data.

Choosing YES will erase all data from disks. Be careful: this cannot be undone! Tick to confirm your choice.

Figure 5-52

• Destroy: only available if you are logged in as “qc” or “root”. This will erase all the SEGD files from the mounted DiskRacks and also 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

271

5

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Web interface

delete the RAID architecture, meaning that you will not be able to reuse any of these DiskRacks unless and until you build a new RAID pair by using the Create command (which takes a few hours). Prior to using the Destroy command, make sure safe copies of the SEGD files have been made.

Choosing YES will erase all your SEGD files as well as the RAID architecture. Be careful: this cannot be undone! Tick to confirm your choice.

Figure 5-53

• Create: this command allows configuring two DiskRacks so that they can be used as a pair with a RAID architecture. Prior to launching this command, you must insert the two DiskRacks into the NAS4000 enclosure and mount them. Typically you have to use this command to build the RAID architecture after using the Destroy command, or if you want to build DiskRacks from different pairs into a new pair. This process takes a few hours. Writing to the disks is still allowed but at a slower rate.

Choosing YES will create a new DiskRack pair and build the RAID architecture. Recording is still allowed during this process, but at a slower rate! Tick to confirm your choice.

Figure 5-54

272

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Web interface

Profile management The NAS4000 comes with a number of preset “profiles” (default configurations for its four Ethernet ports). The Profile Management menu allows you to: • Select a profile: used to choose a port configuration from the available dropdown list.

5 Figure 5-55

• Edit a profile: used to view the detailed settings of each port configuration.

Figure 5-56

If you want to make changes to a port configuration, click on the Modify icon.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

273

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Web interface

Figure 5-57

Note that the “Bond” fields are not used in the current software version. • Add a profile: used to create your own Ethernet port configurations. You may want to use this menu to assign different IP addresses to the Ethernet ports, so that you can then quickly attach the NAS4000 to a different network (for example at a base camp) by simply selecting the appropriate “Profile” whenever necessary. For each port you can specify the IP address and netmask, and a gateway address if required.

274

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Web interface

Error codes If you are logged in as root user (the required password is administrator), an “Errors code” tab is available. This allows you to find the description of any error code that may appear on the front panel display in the event of an error or malfunction.

5 Figure 5-58

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

275

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Working with NAS4000 storage systems

Working with NAS4000 storage systems Exporting to a NAS4000 After a NAS4000 is attached to a 428XLlocal network and powered up, and the DiskRacks are mounted, it is ready for use to record SEGD files. In the 428XL GUI, you must select the NFS export mode and “NAS4000” option in jInstall. In the jExport window, select Disk from the Functions menu, enter the IP address of the NAS4000 and click Mount to attach it to the recorder’s file system. For details, see Export mode (page 74) and Exporting to NAS disks (page 483) in User’s Manual Vol. 1.

Swapping DiskRack pairs To replace a DiskRack pair when storage space is running out or you want to transfer your SEGD files to another file system (for example one located at the base camp or the processing centre), follow the procedure below:

276

1.

Click Unmount in the jExport window.

2.

On the NAS4000 front panel, select DiskRacks > Unmount > Yes. Wait until the disks are unmounted, and quit the menu.

3.

Remove the DiskRacks from the NAS4000 enclosure and put them into the transportation box.

4.

If or when you have a DiskRack pair which has been erased, or you are allowed to erase because the data has been copied elsewhere, insert the DiskRacks into the NAS4000 enclosure.

5.

On the NAS4000 front panel, select DiskRacks > Mount > Yes. Wait until the disks are mounted, and quit the menu. If there are files to erase, use the Disk Management menu in the Web interface.

6.

Click Mount in the jExport window. This should let the system resume exporting to the NAS4000.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Working with NAS4000 storage systems

Note that each DiskRack has exactly the same data as its RAID partner, so you can choose to take both or only one to the base camp or processing centre.

Copying from a DiskRack To copy files from a DiskRack, you only have to attach it to another file system, for example using a PC running on Windows as follows: 1.

Insert the DiskRack into a NAS4000 attached to the same network as the PC. On the NAS4000 front panel: - Select Profiles and select a “Profile” that has an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) visible to the PC’s network. (To create a “Profile”, see Profile management on page 273). - Select DiskRacks > Mount > Yes. Wait until the disks are mounted, and quit the menu.

2.

In the Explorer window’s address field on the PC, type the IP address specified in the selected “Profile”: \\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

(Press Return).

3.

In the log-in window that shows up, log in as qc with usernas as password. As a result, the /mnt/raid partition of the NAS4000, with an “segd” directory, is visible to the PC.

4.

Copy the pathname prompted in the address field \\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\segd

Copy

Figure 5-59

5.

Select “Map Network Drive” from the “Tools” menu (Windows XP) or by right-clicking on the Network icon (Windows 7) in the Explorer window.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

277

5

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Working with NAS4000 storage systems

6.

Paste the pathname into the “Folder” field.

Paste

Figure 5-60

As a result, the NAS4000 DiskRack is attached to the computer’s file hierarchy.

Figure 5-61

Then you can use the “Copy+” tool (see User’s Manual Vol. 3) or whatever other way you like to make safe copies of the files from the DiskRack. After the SEGD files have been safely copied from the DiskRack, use the Disk management menu (page 271) menu in the Web interface to delete them. Note that you have to delete files from the DiskRack’s RAID partner too. 278

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Power-off

Power-off To power off the NAS4000, press the power on/off button on the front panel (see Figure 5-38 on page 259). This automatically unmounts the disks and turns power off.

Installing the Operating System software or a patch The Operating System is stored on two Disk On Module (DOM) chips and can be updated direct from a USB stick. • One DOM (Factory) contains a rescue release (initial software and updates) that can be used if the Operating System needs to be reinstalled or updated. • The other DOM (Production) contains the Operating System normally used at power-on as the NAS4000 boots up. To load a software update: 1.

Log in with “qc” as user name (password “usernas”).

2.

Click Update.

Figure 5-62

3.

Click Browse and select the file to load.

4.

Click Apply. This installs the software patch on both the Factory DOM and the Production DOM. When the NAS4000 is next booted up, it will automatically use the updated OS from the Production DOM.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

279

5

5

Peripherals NAS4000 > Installing the Operating System software or a patch

To reinstall the OS software, with or without updates, you only need to have the NAS4000 boot up on the Factory DOM rather than the Production DOM. To do that: 1.

Connect a display screen and keyboard to the NAS4000 (see Figure 5-42 on page 263). Note that in order to select the desired options or menus in the procedure below you must use that keyboard (move with up/down/left/right arrow keys, select with the space bar).

2.

Power on the NAS4000. Wait for two boot options to be prompted on the screen: - Production (default boot option). - Factory.

3.

Choose Factory (within 3 seconds). The following menu appears: - Installation - Live

4.

Choose Installation. This copies the initial OS from the Factory DOM to the Production DOM. The following message should appear on the display panel: Sercel Nas Copying file

and on the external screen: -------------- Installation ----------------------Are you sure to install SquareOS X.X You are going to format the system !

5.

Choose YES. --------------------- Copy ------------------------Copying… ... Waiting for data syncing on DOM

6.

280

Then the system prompts you to install the patches available from the Factory DOM: 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals NAS4000 > Installing the Operating System software or a patch

-------------upgrade Installation------------If you want to install a backuped upgrade Please select it in the list (X) tess_upgrade_X.X.2 ( ) tess_upgrade_X.X.1



- If you do not want to install any patch, choose Cancel. After rebooting automatically, the NAS will boot on the “Production” DOM with the new OS (with no patch, for example 1.0.0). - If you want to install a patch, use the up or down arrow key to move to that patch, and press the space bar to select it, then choose OK. As a result the patch is copied to the “Production” DOM. After rebooting automatically, the NAS will boot on the “Production” DOM with the updated OS (for example 1.0.1). -------------upgrade Installation------------The upgrade installation applied successfully

-------------------finished-----------------------The installation is finished The system will reboot

------------------------------------------------------

Note that after installing the OS, you have to select which “Profile” to use. You can choose one of the default profiles (for example “428XL_NAS#1”) if appropriate, or use the web interface to create a specific profile.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

281

5

5

Peripherals FTP server > Installing server software

FTP server Installing server software 1.

Insert the 428XL CD-ROM into your PC’s drive and open the PCTOOLS directory. Double-click on the FILEZILLA_SERVER_x_x_x.exe file.

2.

In the Licence Agreement window, click “I accept”.

3.

In the Choose Components window, click Next.

4.

In the Choose Install Location window, choose the folder in which to install server software. Click Next

Figure 5-63

5.

In the Startup Settings window, click Install. Follow the instructions prompted. After FTP server software is installed, see Server settings (page 283).

Figure 5-64

282

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals FTP server > Server settings

Server settings 1.

Double-click on the FTP server user interface icon on the desktop. In the Connect to Server window, click OK. This opens the server user interface window.

5 Figure 5-65

2.

From the Edit menu in the FileZilla Server window, select Users.

3.

In the General page, click on the Add button to create a user account.

Figure 5-66

4.

In the User account window, enter the same User Account name as in the 428XL GUI Export window. See 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1.

Figure 5-67

Click OK. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

283

5

Peripherals FTP server > Server settings

5.

Still in the General page, choose Password and enter the same Password as in the 428XL GUI Export window. Be sure Enable Account is enabled.

Click to enter password

Figure 5-68

6.

Select the Share Folder page. Be sure the Show Relative Path option is enabled.

Set permissions

Be sure “H” appears here

Set as Home directory

Enable “Show relative path”

Figure 5-69

Note Be sure the letter “H” appears ahead of the shared folders. If

that is not the case, click on the “Set as Home dir” button.

284

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals FTP server > Server settings

7.

From the Edit menu in the FileZilla Server window, select Settings.

5

Enter 0

Figure 5-70

8.

Be sure the No Transfer timeout setting reads 0.

9.

Click OK to save your settings.

To export to an FTP server, see Export mode (page 74) and FTP server (page 471) in User’s Manual Vol. 1.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

285

5

Peripherals MDR or RVT300 virtual tape recorder >

MDR or RVT300 virtual tape recorder Instead of writing and reading to and from tape, the Mirage Data Recorder (MDR) or Removable Virtual Tape recorder (RVT300) utilizes two Removable Disk Modules (RDMs) with RAID 1 protection against data lost. The RDM pairs can be written to, dumped from, stored, erased, and returned to the field for re-use like conventional tape cartridges.

Key locks

Disk 1 Disk 2

Power switch

Figure 5-71 Front panel

The MDR (RVT300) attaches to the 428XL server computer via an SCSI port, and emulates a standard tape cartridge system. It allows you to create cartridges that are 100% inter-changeable with a conventional tape cartridge drive, by archiving to an IBM3590 or LTO tape drive attached to its Archive (LVD SCSI) port.

HOST (Port 0) to 428XL server computer

ARCHIVE (Port 1) to tape drive

Figure 5-72 Rear panel 286

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals MDR or RVT300 virtual tape recorder >

The table below shows a typical way of handling acquired seismic data in the field with two pairs (A and B) of Removable Disk Modules. Recording truck

Base camp

1 - Record to MDR. Upper (pair A Disk 1)

5

Lower (pair A Disk 2) 2 - Remove pair A and take Disk 1 to base camp. - Insert Disk 1 (from pair A) into upper slot. 3 - Insert pair B.

- Launch Archive function. Upper (pair B Disk 1)

Upper (pair A Disk 1)

3590

Lower (pair B Disk 2) - Erase volume when Archive complete. - Remove Disk 1; take it to recording truck.

- Record to MDR.

3 - Remove pair B and take Disk 1 to base camp. - Insert Disk 1 (from pair B) into upper slot. 4 - Insert pair A.

- Launch Archive function. Upper (pair A Disk 1)

Upper (pair B Disk 1)

3590

Lower (pair A Disk 2) - Record to MDR.

5 and so on

- Erase volume when archive complete. - Remove Disk 1; take it to recording truck. and so forth.

The first time two blank disks are installed in an MDR (RVT300), they are configured with identical ID numbers to run in mirrored mode. Each disk should be marked with whatever convention you like, specifying 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

287

5

Peripherals MDR or RVT300 virtual tape recorder >

which pair and which slot it is assigned to (Disk1 in the upper slot / Disk2 in the lower slot). For example, you might affix a sticker reading “A1” and standing for “Pair A, upper disk”. If one disk fails during acquisition, recording is allowed to continue so long as the other disk keeps working properly. After the disk pair is removed from the MDR (RVT300), for example because recording space is running out, only one of the mirrored disks should be transported (e. g. to the base camp) at any time. This prevents any accidental loss of data if the disk is damaged during transport. You cannot reuse a disk pair until one of its disks has all its data volumes marked as archived, verified and erased by using the Archive function. The other disk in the pair does not need to be erased. If, for any reason, you need to reconfigure a disk pair, use the “Configuration” menu on the MDR (RVT300). For details on how to use each menu, see the Users Guide supplied together with the MDR (RVT300).

288

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Peripherals Vehicle Tracking box >

Vehicle Tracking box The tracking box connects to the computer through a serial line (A and/ or B port of the server computer). Position Port A

Waypoint, service message

Port A

Tracking box

Server computer Port B

Service message

5

or printer

Figure 5-73 : Vehicle tracking box serial ports

See also 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 (Positioning -Vehicle tracking).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

289

5

Peripherals Vehicle Tracking box >

(Page intentionally blank)

290

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

6

Handheld PC software In this chapter: • PSION Workabout Pro3 (page 292) • Installing 428XL software on Workabout Pro3 (page 298) • Intermec CN3e (page 302) • Installing 428XL software on CN3e (page 308) • Installing GoBook PC applications (page 317)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

291

6

Handheld PC software PSION Workabout Pro3 > General information

PSION Workabout Pro3 In this section: • General information (page 292) • Connecting the Workabout Pro3 to a PC (page 295) • Workabout Pro3 network address (page 296)

General information Stylus

Spare Battery charge well

Client USB Port Host USB Port

Power on/off

DC IN Socket

Figure 6-1 PSION Workabout Pro3 and docking station

Battery Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN socket on the docking station. Slide the hand-held into the docking station. Allow the Workabout Pro3 to charge for 6 hours.

Power on Press the Power button for a few seconds.

292

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software PSION Workabout Pro3 > General information

Power Off Press the Power button. Note that pressing and holding down the Power button causes a Shutdown screen like the one below to be displayed.

6 Figure 6-2

• Choosing Suspend places the hand-held into a power-saving suspend state. In this state, all radios remain on, but the display, keyboard backlight and processor are switched off. When the Workabout Pro3 is turned on from this state, operation resumes within a few seconds in the screen in which you were working prior to suspend. • If you choose Standby, the display is turned off, the keyboard is locked and the touchscreen is locked. The processor remains on so that any running applications will continue while the hand-held is in a Standby state. In addition, the radios remain on. You should be aware that because the processor continues to run, Standby mode consumes more power than Suspend mode.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

293

6

Handheld PC software PSION Workabout Pro3 > General information

Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen If your touchscreen has never been aligned (calibrated) or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the steps below. • Tap on Start > Settings. Tap on the System tab to display the Screen icon. • Tap on the Screen icon to display the Alignment tab. • Tap on the Align Screen button, and follow the directions on the screen to align (calibrate) the screen.

Start Menu To display the Start menu: • Tap on the Start button in the upper-left corner of the Navigation Bar. • Tap on the Start menu item with which you want to work. Start Button

Navigation Bar

Windows Mobile command centre

Figure 6-3

294

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software PSION Workabout Pro3 > Connecting the Workabout Pro3 to a PC

Warm Reset A warm reset completely reloads and restarts the operating system. Registry settings, installed programs and any data files that reside in flash memory are all preserved through the reset. Files and data stored in the RAM Drive partition are not preserved during a reset. To protect files stored in the RAM Drive through a reset procedure, you must create a Total Recall profile and store it on the flash (“My Device”) file system. To perform a warm reset, press and hold down the [FN/BLUE] key and the [ENTER] key simultaneously for a minimum of two seconds. When the screen goes blank, release the keys.

Connecting the Workabout Pro3 to a PC Use the USB cord to connect the PC to the USB port on the docking station. Slide the hand-held into the docking station.

USB cord

Figure 6-4 Workabout Pro3 connected to a PC 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

295

6

6

Handheld PC software PSION Workabout Pro3 > Workabout Pro3 network address

Workabout Pro3 network address The following steps only need to be performed if you have to connect the Workabout Pro3 to any network: 1.

On Workabout Pro3: - Tap on Start > Settings. - Tap on Connections tab, then Network Cards.

Figure 6-5

296

2.

Tap on ASIX AX88772 USB 2.0 Fast Ethernet.

3.

Select Use specific IP address and enter the desired network address:

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software PSION Workabout Pro3 > Workabout Pro3 network address

6 Figure 6-6

4.

Click ok twice, then the x in the top-right corner to exit Settings.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

297

6

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on Workabout Pro3 > Overview

Installing 428XL software on Workabout Pro3 In this section: • Overview (page 298) • From a Windows 7 PC (page 299)

Overview You may need the information contained in this section if you did not purchase your Workabout Pro3 handheld PC from SERCEL, or if it fails to start up, or on a first-time startup, or to install the latest release of 428XL software (e. g. LT428, etc). You may need to reinstall 428XL software to install a new release, or prior to starting using a Workabout Pro3 PC that was formerly used in another crew.

298

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on Workabout Pro3 > From a Windows 7 PC

From a Windows 7 PC To install 428XL software from a Windows 7 PC: 1.

Connect the PC to the USB port on the docking station, using the USB cord (see Figure 6-4 — page 295). This window should appear:

6 Figure 6-7

2.

Hover over the File Management panel and click on Browse the contents of your device. This opens a Windows folder.

3.

Open RAM Disk.

Figure 6-8

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

299

6

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on Workabout Pro3 > From a Windows 7 PC

4.

Drag and drop the lt428WMV_.cab or SSMonWMV_.cab file from the e428 DVD-ROM to the RAM Disk directory.

Figure 6-9

5.

On Workabout Pro3: - Tap on Start > Programs. - Tap on the File Explorer icon. - Tap on RAM Disk.

Figure 6-10

- Tap on lt428WMV_ or SSMonWMV_.

Figure 6-11

- Tap on Device then Install. Wait until the installation process is complete.

300

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on Workabout Pro3 > From a Windows 7 PC

6 Figure 6-12

- Tap on ok.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

301

6

Handheld PC software Intermec CN3e > General information

Intermec CN3e In this section: • General information (page 302) • Resetting the CN3e (page 304) • Connecting the CN3e to a PC (page 307)

General information

Navigation bar Scroll up/down buttons Command bar (onscreen keyboard icon, icons to any applications that are running) Shortcut to “LT428” application

Shortcut to “Term428” application

Figure 6-13 Intermec CN3e

Battery You must fully charge the battery before you can use the CN3e. The battery is fully charged when the battery status LED shows a steady green. Battery status LED

Figure 6-14

302

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Intermec CN3e > General information

Battery Status

Description

Steady green

The battery is more than 95% charged and CN3e is on a charger.

Blinking red

The battery is low. CN3e goes into Suspend mode. Charge or replace the battery.

Steady red and the CN3e is attached to external power.

The battery is charging.

Steady red and the CN3e is not attached to external power.

The software is not working properly.

Steady amber

The battery is missing or is unable to charge because the temperature is outside of the charging range.

Off

The CN3e is not on external power and the battery is operating normally.

6

Stylus Your computer has a stylus for selecting items and entering information on the touch screen. Action

Description

Tap

Touch the screen once with the stylus to select options, open or close applications, or launch menus from the Command bar.

Drag

Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select text and images.

Tap and hold

Tap and hold the stylus on an item to see a menu of actions available for that item. On the pop-up menu that appears, tap the action you want to perform.

Touch screen If the touch screen does not respond when you tap it with the stylus, you may need to calibrate the screen. To calibrate the touch screen: 1.

Tap Start > Settings > the Systems tab > Screen.

2.

Tap Align Screen and follow the instructions to align the screen.

3.

Click ok.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

303

6

Handheld PC software Intermec CN3e > Resetting the CN3e

If the touch screen is so out of alignment that you cannot open the Start menu, you may need to align the screen menu using only the keypad or as a last resort you can perform a clean boot. For more information about performing a clean boot, see Clean Booting the CN3e (page 305) To align the touch screen using the keypad: 1.

Press the Windows button on the upper left of the keypad.

2.

Press the Down button to select Settings.

3.

Press Enter.

4.

Press the Tab button until the Settings tabs are highlighted.

5.

Press the Right Arrow button to select the System tab (on some keypads this will be the orange button and down button).

6.

Press tab until the Screen icon is highlighted.

7.

Tab to Align Screen and press Enter follow the instructions to align the screen.

8.

Click ok.

Resetting the CN3e You rarely need to reset the computer. If the computer does not resume after pressing the Power button, or if the computer or an application lock up, you may need to reset the CN3e. The CN3e uses the configuration currently saved in flash memory during the boot process. There are three ways to reset the CN3e: • Warm Booting the CN3e (page 304). • Cold Booting the CN3e (page 305). • Clean Booting the CN3e (page 305).

Warm Booting the CN3e You may need to perform a warm boot to correct conditions where an application stops responding to the system.To warm boot the computer:

304

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Intermec CN3e > Resetting the CN3e

• Press and hold the Power button for 10 seconds or right-click on the CN3e via the SmartSystems Console and select Intermec Power Tools > Warm Boot Device. The computer systematically shuts down, restarts, and goes through the initialization process.

Cold Booting the CN3e In some cases where the computer completely stops responding, it may be necessary to perform a cold boot. Because cold booting may result in data loss, only use this method if all other recovery methods have failed. To cold boot your CN3e: 1.

Press the Power button to suspend the CN3e.

2.

Remove the battery pack from the CN3e.

3.

Press the Reset button on the back of the CN3e.

6

Reset button

Figure 6-15

Clean Booting the CN3e When you clean boot the CN3e, it loads only those files and programs that are absolutely required by the operating system. Use the clean boot to troubleshoot the CN3e by getting it up and running so that you can perform diagnostic tests to determine which elements of the normal boot process are causing problems.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

305

6

Handheld PC software Intermec CN3e > Resetting the CN3e

WARNING

The clean boot process will erase the memory in the mobile computer, including all applications and data files found in the object store. You will have to enter the LT428 licence code again. To clean boot the computer:

306

1.

Press the Power button to suspend the CN3e.

2.

Remove the battery pack from the back of the CN3e.

3.

Use the stylus to press the Reset button on the back of the CN3e.

4.

Insert the battery back into the CN3e, and immediately press and hold the Power button and both blue buttons on the left side.

5.

Continue to hold the Power button and both buttons on the left side until a Warning message appears on the display.

6.

Release the Power button and both buttons on the left side, read the message, and press either button on the right side to continue.

7.

Wait for the CN3e to load files from its ROM.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Intermec CN3e > Connecting the CN3e to a PC

Connecting the CN3e to a PC Use the USB cord to connect the PC to the USB port on the CN3e dock adapter.

Dock adapter

6

USB cord

Figure 6-16 CN3e connected to a PC

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

307

6

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on CN3e > Overview

Installing 428XL software on CN3e In this section: • Overview (page 308) • From Windows XP PC (page 308) • From Windows 7 PC (page 314)

Overview You may need the information contained in this section if you did not purchase your CN3e handheld PC from SERCEL, or if it fails to start up, or on a first-time startup, or to install the latest release of 428XL software (e. g. LT428, etc). You may need to reinstall 428XL software to install a new release, or prior to starting using a CN3e PC that was formerly used in another crew.

From Windows XP PC Prerequisites First remove the former software release. (Select Settings from the Start menu. Select the System tab, then Remove Programs. Select the “LT428” program. Tap on the Remove button). When the system asks you if you want to delete existing files, choose to delete all.

Figure 6-17

308

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on CN3e > From Windows XP PC

To install LT-428 software on a CN3e handheld PC, the following is required: - A desktop or laptop PC, to be used to copy the lt428WMV_.cab file (from the e-428 software DVD-ROM or any other medium) to the CN3e. - A USB communication cord. IMPORTANT

Make sure the “Read Only” option is selected in the “Properties” of the _.cab file you are going to copy to the CN3e.

ActiveSync must be installed on the desktop or laptop PC (ActiveSync is a free Microsoft utility that allows you to share and update information between your CN3e and a PC under Windows®). To install ActiveSync: - Using Windows® Explorer, open the appropriate directory on the e-428 CD-ROM (\lt428V_._). - Double-click on the MSASYNC.EXE file. This launches the ActiveSync installation wizard. Follow the instructions prompted.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

309

6

6

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on CN3e > From Windows XP PC

Installing 428XL software 1.

Connect the PC to the USB port on the CN3e dock adapter, using the USB cord. See Figure 6-16 — page 307. This window should appear:

Figure 6-18

2.

Click Cancel.

Figure 6-19

3.

Click on Explore.

Figure 6-20

4.

310

Click on My Windows Mobile-Based Device directory, then Flash File Store > UserAutoInstall.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on CN3e > From Windows XP PC

Figure 6-21

5.

Drag and drop the lt428WMV_.cab file from the e428 DVDROM to the UserAutoInstall directory.

6

Figure 6-22

6.

Click OK on the “File Conversion” popup window.

Figure 6-23

7.

On CN3e: - Tap on Start > Programs. - Tap on the File Explorer icon.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

311

6

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on CN3e > From Windows XP PC

Figure 6-24

- Tap on the dropdown menu button and choose My Device. - Tap on Flash File Store.

Figure 6-25

- Choose the UserAutoInstall folder. Tap on lt428WMV_.

Figure 6-26

- Tap on Device then Install. Wait untill the installation process is complete.

312

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on CN3e > From Windows XP PC

Installing shortcuts After installing a new release, you have update the preset shortcuts (see Intermec CN3e on page 302) as follows: 1.

Uninstall the former shortcuts (select Settings from the Start menu. Select the System tab, then Remove Programs. Select the “LT428 Shortcuts” program. Tap on the Remove button).

6 Figure 6-27

2.

Install the shortcuts .cab file from the e428 DVD-ROM, using the same procedure as for Installing 428XL software (page 310).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

313

6

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on CN3e > From Windows 7 PC

From Windows 7 PC 1.

Connect the PC to the USB port on the CN3e dock adapter, using the USB cord. Figure 6-16 — page 307. This window should appear:

Figure 6-28

2.

Hover over the File Management panel and click on Browse the contents of your device. This opens a Windows folder.

Figure 6-29

3.

314

Click on Flash File Store, then UserAutoInstall.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on CN3e > From Windows 7 PC

Figure 6-30

4.

Drag and drop the lt428WMV_.cab file from the e428 DVDROM to the UserAutoInstall directory.

Figure 6-31

5.

On CN3e: - Tap on Start > Programs. - Tap on the File Explorer icon.

Figure 6-32

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

315

6

6

Handheld PC software Installing 428XL software on CN3e > From Windows 7 PC

- Tap on the dropdown menu button and choose My Device.

Figure 6-33

- Tap on Flash File Store. - Choose the UserAutoInstall folder. Tap on lt428WMV_.

Figure 6-34

- Tap on Device then Install. Wait until the installation process is complete. - Tap on ok.

316

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Installing GoBook PC applications > GoBook PC touch screen calibration

Installing GoBook PC applications You may need the information contained in this section if you did not purchase your GoBook from SERCEL, or if it fails to start up, or on a first-time startup, or to install the latest release of 428XL software (e. g. FDPA428, LT428), etc.

GoBook PC touch screen calibration On a first-time startup, or after a hardware reset, the GoBook automatically launches the touch screen calibration procedure. Simply follow the instructions prompted on the display.

6

GoBook Q200 For detailed information, see the manufacturer’s documentation.

Start menu Turns on/off backlight (if white function key is pressed)

Press this function key prior to typing any orange character

White function key (enables blue keypad or backlight on/off key)

Decreases backlight (if orange function key is pressed)

Power On

Increases backlight (if orange function key is pressed)

Figure 6-35 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

317

6

Handheld PC software Installing GoBook PC applications > GoBook Q200

Resetting your GoBook Q200 PC If your GoBook gets stuck or fails to start up, try one of the following. Software Reset Press and hold down the power-on key along with the function key used to type orange characters, for about 5 seconds (until the screen flips). This performs a software reset. No information is lost. Hardware Reset Press and hold down the power-on key along with the function key used to type orange characters, plus the key used for the blue keypad, for about 5 seconds. This performs a hardware reset. Information normally saved in the Operating System and in the RAM memory is lost (configuration parameters, touch screen calibration, etc.). Use hardware reset only as a last resort.

GoBook Q200 connection parameters Connection parameters MUST be set on a first-time startup, or after a hardware reset, BEFORE installing 428XL software. - From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel. - Double-click on the PC Connection icon. - Choose the “Enable direct connections to the desktop computer” option (under the PC Connection tab). - The “USB default” connection option is selected by default. - If USB is not supported by the Operating System (e. g. NT4), click on the “Change Connection” button and select the “Com1 @ 115200” option. - Click on OK (in the upper right corner of the window). 318

Figure 6-36

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Installing GoBook PC applications > GoBook Q200

GoBook Q200 battery conservation parameters - From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel. - Double-click on the Power icon. - Click on the Schemes tab. - From the “Power Scheme” option button, select “Battery Power”. - From the “Switch state to Suspend” option button, select the desired time option for entering reduced power states (1 to 30 minutes or Never). The time choices represent the amount of time that must pass before the system will switch to the next power conservation state. Shorter times will help conserve batteries.

6

- Click on OK.

GoBook Q200 display backlighting - From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel. - Double-click on the Display icon. - Click on the Backlight tab. Choose the desired options (these options save battery life by automatically turning off the backlight when not needed). - Click on OK. - To decrease the backlight, press both the orange function key and 7. - To increase the backlight, press both the orange function key and the letter O.

About the batteries in the GoBook Q200 The handheld computer’s primary battery is a rechargeable Lithium-Ion pack. Charge at least 7 hours to ensure the internal backup battery is also fully charged. If the main battery pack is fully discharged or removed, the internal backup battery will only last for 24 hours. If this happens, the unit will hard reset the next time it is powered up. A hard reset will cause loss of 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

319

6

Handheld PC software Installing GoBook PC applications > Installing 428XL software on Q200

data and custom data. To ensure data integrity, the main battery should always be kept charged, and important data should be saved in nonvolatile memory, such as the system Compact Flash card. Charge installed Li-ion battery packs every 21 days to maintain their charge capacity. Charge uninstalled packs every 6 months. To backup and restore the contents of files and registry, use iRescue (from the Start menu, select Programs > iRescue). See the manufacturer’s documentation for details.

Installing 428XL software on Q200 You may need to reinstall 428XL software to install a new release, or prior to starting using a GoBook PC that was formerly used in another crew, reinstall 428XL software. When the system asks you if you want to delete existing files, choose to delete all. Prerequisites: To install 428XL software on a GoBook handheld PC, the following is required: - A desktop or laptop PC. A USB port is recommended (Windows®98 or higher). Installation through a serial port is allowed but lengthy. - A USB or serial communication cable (supplied along with your GoBook PC). - e-428 software CD-ROM. 1.

Installing Microsoft ActiveSync Use the procedure below to install ActiveSync on the desktop or laptop PC (ActiveSync is a Microsoft utility that allows you to share and update information between your GoBook and a PC under Windows®). - Using Windows® Explorer, open the appropriate directory on the e-428 CD-ROM (e. g. /fdpa428V_._ or /lt428V_._). - Double-click on the MSASYNC.EXE file. This launches the ActiveSync installation wizard.

320

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Installing GoBook PC applications > Installing 428XL software on Q200

Figure 6-37

- Click Next. A default installation folder is prompted.

6

Figure 6-38

- Click Next. - Power on your GoBook PC so that it can be detected. - Connect the GoBook PC to the USB port of the desktop or laptop computer (or use a serial port, depending on your connection parameter settings).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

321

6

Handheld PC software Installing GoBook PC applications > Installing 428XL software on Q200

Figure 6-39

- Click Next.

Figure 6-40

- In the Set Up a Partnership window, choose No and click Next. - As a result, the GoBook gets connected as a Guest.

322

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Handheld PC software Installing GoBook PC applications > GoBook Q200 backup procedure

Figure 6-41

2.

Installing 428XL software Still in the same directory on the e-428 CD-ROM, double-click on the setup.exe file. This causes the following window to appear:

6 Figure 6-42

- Click Yes. - Do not click on OK until the GoBook screen remains still. After downloading is complete, click OK. This completes the installation of 428XL software.

GoBook Q200 backup procedure After a hardware reset, or in the event of a low battery, you will have to use a PC to reinstall 428XL software, unless you save a backup copy of your program files and registry to the Compact Flash memory of your GoBook Q200. It is advisable to set your GoBook Q200 for an automatic backup. To do that: • Select Programs > iRescue (from the Start menu) and choose the Backup tab.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

323

6

Handheld PC software Installing GoBook PC applications > GoBook Q200 restore procedure

• Choose the option for automatic backup on a hardware reset, and also the option that does an automatic backup in the event of a low battery; • Click the Schedule button and choose the daily, or weekly, or monthly backup option, and choose the week’s day on which to do the backup. • Click OK. Use the Help button for details on the available options.

GoBook Q200 restore procedure You will need to reinstall 428XL software on your GoBook Q200 after a hardware reset or if any program file has been damaged, or if your GoBook was formerly used in another crew. When the system asks you if you want to delete existing files, choose to delete all. If you have saved a backup copy of your program files to the Compact Flash memory (using the above procedure), you do not need to use the e-428 CDROM. Instead, do the following: • Select Programs > iRescue (from the Start menu) and choose the Restore tab. • From the available backup dates, choose the copy to restore. • If the intent is to reinstall 428XL software, choose to restore all files (Registry and program files). • Click OK. Use the Help button for details.

324

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

7

Field equipment deployment This chapter only covers wireline telemetry (for radio telemetry, see Chapter 9). It includes the following sections: • Warnings and Cautions (page 326) • Wireline telemetry equipment (page 329) • Power supply requirements (page 352) • Auxiliary channels (page 356) • Spread layout conventions (page 358) • Submersible (ULS) field electronics (page 362) • Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) (page 373) • Quick Tester (page 378)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

325

7

Field equipment deployment Warnings and Cautions >

Warnings and Cautions WARNING

It is highly recommended to disconnect Line and Transverse cables in case of impending lightning, in order to protect personnel and equipment. To provide an easy path for any bolt of lightning from a telemetry line to earth, the metal parts of each LAUL or FDU should be in contact with the ground. The ground nut of the LAUX should be connected to a ground stake. To ensure correct electrical connection between both ends of an FDU428, the coupling nut should be tightened to 2.2 Nm torque (4 Nm for an FDU408). In areas susceptible to lightning, it is advisable to check each FDU’s ground nut for adequate tightening.

WARNING

Connector sockets are tightened with optimal torque and locked with glue prior to shipment from the factory. Do not attempt to re-tighten the sockets of any unit!

IMPORTANT

Whenever any connector is unused, put its connector protective cap in place.

326

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Warnings and Cautions >

CAUTION

To disconnect a battery from an LAUL or LAUX, do not disconnect the battery cord from the battery terminals unless and until you have unplugged it from the 12V connector on the LAUL or LAUX. (Damage to the LAUL or LAUX may result if the battery cord is left connected and its conductors are inadvertently shorted while hot-swapping the battery).

YES

NO

12 V battery

12 V battery

7

12 V battery

CAUTION

Do not rest the metal housing of any unit (e. g. LAUL, LAUX, LRU) on the positive terminal of the battery or this will blow the ground circuitry inside the unit. In order to minimize the risk of damages, we recommend to use batteries with plastic protective caps over their terminals, or to place batteries inside adequate plastic containers.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

327

7

Field equipment deployment Warnings and Cautions >

IMPORTANT

In order to clean FM4 plugs, only use fresh water. Do not use any aggressive chemicals (like petrol or gasoline) liable to attack plastic. Prior to connecting any plug, make sure there is no water inside connectors.

IMPORTANT

Cleanse units with fresh water after shallow-water operations.

WARNING

In shallow-water operations, any unused Line or Transverse connector should be terminated with a watertight end-of-line plug.

WARNING

For sacrificial anodes to provide effective protection against corrosion, it is essential to keep them free of mud. Brush and/or wash off mud whenever possible. Avoid conductive contact between any metal body (especially stainless steel attachments) and the metal housing of an LAUL or LAUX, etc.

328

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > FDU-428

Wireline telemetry equipment In this section: • FDU-428 (page 329) • Links (page 332) • SH Sercel geophone string connectors (page 333) • DSU-428 (page 334) • LAUL-428, LAUX-428 (page 347) • Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI) — page 348 • Transverse Repeater (TREP-428) — page 351 • End-of-line plug (page 351)

7

FDU-428 LCK2 socket

LED Grounding clamp

Figure 7-1 FDU-428

• Operating temperature: -40° to +70°C • Storage temperature: -40° to +70°C • Maximum water depth: 15 m with WPSR cable, 1 m with ST+ type cable. The FDU is equipped with an LCK2 socket used to connect the input sensor. After an FDU is inserted into a line, its LED indicator is: • normally off; 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

329

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > FDU-428

• slowly blinking if self-test errors are encountered; • rapidly blinking if field test errors are encountered (e. g. because no geophone is connected). Note If the LSI option is enabled (in the Install main window on the

GUI), the LED on FDUs involved in serial communications between the recorder and the distant blaster controller is not indicative of any errors. Instead, it means (when blinking) that the operator is allowed to plug or unplug the LSI box. IMPORTANT

To provide protection against lightning, the grounding clamp must be in contact with the ground. WARNING

For optimal performance, keep FDUs at least 25 m away from any LRU relay antenna, and at least 10 m away from any LAUR.

IMPORTANT

For shallow-water operations, use only watertight (lock-type) plugs on the LCK2 socket.

330

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > FDU-428

CAUTION

Prior to turning and tightening the locking ring of the geophone plug, be sure correct mating is achieved or else damage to the connector may result. Do not fumble about for the mating position! Do not try to tighten the locking ring until mating is correct!

1.

Mate the connectors without fumbling about.

2.

Push the plug straight in and press firmly against the socket. 1

7

2

Figure 7-2

3.

Tighten the locking ring by hand.

3

Figure 7-3

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

331

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > Links

Links Links are made up of one or more FDUs, with customized cable lengths. Below are three typical examples of links. For assembly instructions, see 428XL Technical Manual.

FM4 plug

FM4 plug 27.5 m

27.5 m

55 m 1-FDU Link

FM4 plug

FM4 plug 55 m 165 m 3-FDU Link

FM4 plug

FM4 plug

55 m 330 m 6-FDU Link

Figure 7-4 : FDU links

WARNING

FDU links are not designed for use on cable drums.

332

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > SH Sercel geophone string connectors

SH Sercel geophone string connectors SH17 SH2

Figure 7-5

When used in severe environmental conditions, SH connectors should be lubricated periodically. 1.

Area to lubricate

7

Clean the area to lubricate with a dry wiper. Clean with dry wiper

2.

Spray the area to lubricate with SIL JET RHODORSIL or equivalent silicone oil.

3.

Check for a silicone film deposit all round the mating areas and in between. Spray all round and in between

4.

Put the protective cap in place. (Lubricated areas should not be exposed to dirt or sand).

Figure 7-6

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

333

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

DSU-428

DSU3-428

DSUGPS

DSU3BV-428 Early-design Later-design DSU1-428

Figure 7-7

Line segments made up of DSUs can be incorporated anywhere into a 428XL spread (“line segment” refers to any portion of line delimited by two LAUs). DSU line segments should be homogeneous, i. e. not including any FDUs, but an LSS can be inserted into a DSU segment. Within a DSU segment, you can use both DSU3-428 and DSU3BV-428 links, but you cannot use both DSU1-428 and DSU3-428 links. Also note that a DSU segment should not include both DSU-408 and DSU428 links, or both early- and later-design DSU1-428 links. To optimize the noise performance of the DSU when using a GPS receiver to synchronize the system, it is mandatory to use LCI-428 version C and 428XL firmware V4.13 or above. In that case, either a Trimble Acutime Gold (Sercel P/N 10006166) or a Novatel Propak (Sercel P/N 3310233 — PROPAK-V3-OCXO-L1-A[SRCL]) GPS receiver must be connected to the LCI-428. For DSUGPS units, the Propak type is mandatory. With no GPS receiver, LCI-428 version B can be used with 428XL firmware V4.13 or above. In both cases, it is recommended to limit the number of lines connected on either side of the LCI-428 to 14. Additional LCI-428's can be used 334

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

to connect more lines if necessary. In multi-LCI-428 configuration, only the master LCI-428 needs to be a version C if a GPS receiver is connected. The number of DSUs (DSU3-428, DSUGPS, DSU1-428, DSU3BV-428) on either side of a LAUX-428 should not exceed 300.

LAUX

14 lines max

LAUX

LAUX

GPS

7

LAUX

14 lines max LAUX

300 DSUs max

300 DSUs max

Figure 7-8

For the maximum allowable number of DSUs between two LAUs, see LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing on page 354. If an LSS is used, remember it is equivalent to two FDU channels in terms of power drain. Remember the maximum real-time capacity for each LCI-428 is 20000 channels @ 4 ms, 10000 channels @ 2ms, 5000 channels @ 1ms. The maximum real-time capacity for an LCI-G is 200 000 channels @ 4 ms, 100 000 channels @ 2ms, 50 000 channels @ 1ms. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

335

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

The maximum allowable number of lines on either Transverse port of an LCI-G is 28, but you can overcome that limitation by using more GPS receivers (one GPS receiver every 29th LAUX-G along the Transverse). Note that DSUGPS is not supported if the LAUX-G has a GPS receiver. Likewise, the number of DSUs on either side of the LAUX-G should not exceed 300. To attach more DSUs (except DSUGPS) along a line, use an additional LAUX-G with a GPS receiver (one LAUX-G and GPS receiver after every 300th DSU). 300 DSUs max LAUX-G

28 lines max LAUX-G

GPS

LCI-G

LAUX-G

28 lines max LAUX-G

GPS

GPS LAUX-G

LAUL

LAUX-G

28 lines max

GPS LAUX-G

300 DSUs max (no DSUGPS)

LAUL

300 DSUs max (no DSUGPS)

LAUX-G

300 DSUs max (no DSUGPS)

Figure 7-9

336

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

DSU3-428 and DSU1-428 A drilling tool kit (P/N 1T44086184) for DSU1 and DSU3 units (except DSU3BV-428) is available from SERCEL, including a driller (P/N 0060176) and an auger (diameter: 29 mm; P/N 0110231).

Figure 7-10 Drilling tools

When boring a hole to plant a DSU3-428 (or early-design DSU1-428), the auger should be held as vertical as possible. To help adjust the verticality of drilling, the use of a spirit level (attached to the drilling tool) is recommended. Most of the time, planting a later-design DSU1-428 does not require any prior drilling.

41.9 89 mm 26.5 dia. 37 dia. 35.9 71.1 70 mm dia. 35.9 20.5

Figure 7-11 Spike dimensions (mm)

In order to make sure DSUs are properly planted, it is advisable to do a Tilt test from time to time. This can be automated with the AutoLook option (see 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

337

7

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

If the tilt angle of the DSU3 or DSU1 exceeds the limit set up on the GUI for the Tilt test, the indicator light (LED) on the cable takeout overmould is blinking, and the DSU is displayed in red (instead of green) in the Instrument view on the GUI. With no tilt error the indicator remains off and the DSU is green on the GUI. Unlike for a DSU3-428, the orientation of a DSU1-428 does not matter. Only its tilt angle is important. For a DSU1-428, the maximum allowable Tilt angle on the GUI is 10°. A planting tool is available that allows juggies to adjust the orientation of a DSU3-428, which is denoted by the arrow engraved on the cable takeout overmould. The system will regard the direction of the arrow as the “Inline” direction. Note A “Ty-rap” cable tie is fitted close to the cable takeout

overmould of each DSU3, facing the head of the arrow pointing to the In-line direction, that can be used to determine the In-line direction more easily (for example, if the arrow is covered with mud). In-line

Figure 7-12 DSU3

338

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

Planting tool

Indicator is Off if no tilt, otherwise blinking

Figure 7-13 Planting tool for DSU3-428

All DSU3 units within a link are connected in the same direction. When planting DSU3s, juggies should make sure all arrows point to the same direction, using the compass on the planting tool.

ch1 (V)

Low or High port

ch1 (V)

ch2 (I)

ch3 (C)

Ty-rap

ch2 (I)

ch1 (V )

ch2 (I)

ch3 (C )

High or Low port

ch3 (C)

ch2 (I)

ch1 (V )

ch3 (C )

Figure 7-14

DSU3-428 links are reversible, meaning that the orientation of the link itself does not matter. Only the orientation of the DSU3 units is important (all arrows should point to the same direction). The control unit (LAU) will automatically place the channels in the correct order

ch1 (V)

ch2 (I)

ch3 (C)

ch1 (V)

ch2 (I)

ch3 (C)

Figure 7-15

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

339

7

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

DSUGPS When using DSUGPS links, no staking is required, and there is no need to use a compass to finely adjust the orientation. The system takes care of that itself, using the data from the built-in dual-antenna GPS receiver to do the necessary position calculations.

220 mm

185 mm

Figure 7-16

In case of poor satellite reception, in obstructed areas such as dense woodland, the DSUGPS may need to remain stationary for up to 24 hours in order to achieve the expected positioning accuracy. An area providing unobstructed satellite visibility must be found for the GPS reference station attached to the LCI-428. Line cable

300 max

300 max 600 max

Figure 7-17 Maximum number of DSUGPS receiver points on a Line 340

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

The following deployment rules must be respected: • A Novatel Propak GPS receiver (Sercel P/N 3310233 — PROPAKV3-OCXO-L1-A[SRCL]) must be connected to the LCI-428. (LCI-428 version C is required). • Each LAUX-428 can control up to 600 DSUGPS units (with a maximum of 300 on either Line port). See also LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing (page 354). • Each DSUGPS line segment (between two LAULs) should be homogeneous: DSU3-428 and all other types of 428 field electronics are allowed in the same line, but they should not be mixed with DSUGPS within the same segment. • The following equipment is not allowed within the same line: LAUX-G with a GPS receiver, Line Radio Bridge, 408 field electronics. • The DSUGPS does not allow the use of an Ethernet Radio Bridge. Like the DSU3, the DSUGPS has a “Ty-rap” cable tie on one side that can help pointing all sensors to the same direction.

DSU3BV-428 Designed for burying at depths of up to 15 m, the DSU3BV-428 provides increased coupling with the ground. It can be used in all sorts of land areas, including marshes and shallow water. The diameter of the DSU3BV-428 canister is 62 mm, therefore a 62-mm diameter drilled hole will provide ideal coupling. Note that if the temperature is below freezing, the canister should be inserted soon after drilling the hole, otherwise the hole might need drilling again as the low temperature will cause it to shrink. For burying depths of more than 50 cm, it is advisable to drill to a wider diameter (63 mm) so that the canister can be inserted to the desired depth more smoothly.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

341

7

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

In-line direction

FM4 plug

Takeout

Line cable

Nameplate Wide slot Drop cable

Pull-out cord

DSU-428-BV canister

Figure 7-18 DSU3BV-428

It is also advisable to fit a small slanting blade at the top of the drill in order to enlarge the top of the hole and prevent lumps of earth from tumbling into the hole. Compass

Blade Cam-cleat

Planting tool stick

Pull-out cord

Figure 7-19

342

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

A special planting tool is available from SERCEL, to be used as explained below. 1.

Release the lock knob on the compass, and then rotate the compass dial until the blue arrow agrees with the In-line bearing specified for the seismic survey (North in the example below). Tighten the knob again to lock the dial at the desired bearing. In-line direction

Lock knob Blue arrow

Compass adjustable dial

7

Cam-cleat

Figure 7-20

2.

Fit the end of the planting tool onto the top end of the DSU3-428-BV canister. At the end of the planting tool are two docking pins, different in width, to be engaged into the matching slots at the top end of the canister.

Docking pin

Figure 7-21 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

343

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

End of planting tool

Docking pin Top end of DSU3BV-428 canister

Docking slot

Docking slot

Figure 7-22

344

3.

Push down the canister to the desired depth into the prepared hole, stretching the pull-out cord and wedging it into the cam-cleat in order to hold it tensioned so that the tool remains docked to the canister (see Figure 7-23).

4.

Keeping the compass away from any nearby metal parts such as keys, belt buckle, etc., grasp the handles of the planting tool and rotate the DSU3BV-428 until the magnetic needle points to 0° (North) on the compass dial.

5.

Release the cam-cleat.

6.

Lift the planting tool to undock it from the canister without rotating it, and remove it from the hole.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

Cleat pull-out cord to keep it tensioned

7

Figure 7-23 Planting tool docking to DSU3BV-428 canister

To prevent the drop cable and pull-out cord from picking up any surface vibration (caused by wind for example) and transmitting it to the DSU3BV-428, it is advisable to pin them to the ground, for example by placing a sand bag over the hole.

Sand bag

Figure 7-24 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

345

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > DSU-428

To remove the DSU3BV-428 from the hole, use the pull-out cord. Do not pull abruptly. Be careful not to damage the drop cable. Clean the unit with fresh water. Do not bang it against anything. Stow it into a protective case. Maintenance information The sacrificial anode on a DSU3BV-428 should be replaced after 50% of its volume is eaten away. Be sure to put lockwashers back in place. Torque to 0. 9 Nm. Except for the sacrificial (zinc) anode, pull-out axle, pull-out cord and the spike, the DSU3BV-428 has no user-serviceable part. To prevent damage to the DSU3BV-428 and the compass during transportation, use the special carrying box provided. See page 223 in 428XL Technical Manual for maintenance instructions. The planting tool comes in two standard lengths: 1 m or 2 m. The 2-metre model is expandable as shown in Figure 7-25.

Two M5 hex head screws

Notch in joint sleeve should line up with orientation groove on stick

Orientation groove towards In-line direction

Match locating rib and groove

Two M5 hex head screws

Figure 7-25

346

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > LAUL-428, LAUX-428

Item

Part No.

Description

1

36J64190353

Top stick, 1m.

2

36J64190355

Middle stick, 1 m.

3

36J64190354

Bottom stick, 1m.

4

36J64190356

Joint sleeve.

You can extend the length by removing the four M5 hex head screws, fitting as many 1-m sticks as required, and putting the screws back in place. When using two or more sticks, be sure to line up the orientation grooves on all sticks. To lock the joint sleeve, turn as indicated by the “lock” arrow.

LAUL-428, LAUX-428 • Operating temperature: -40° to +70°C.

7

12 VDC 12 VDC

• Storage temperature: -40° to +70°C.

FM4 plugs

• Maximum water depth: 15 m. • LAUL weight: 2.4 kg (5.3 lbs.)

Figure 7-26 LAUL-428

• LAUX weight: 5.5 kg (12.1 lbs.)

12 VDC

• LAUX size (HxWxD): 137 x 312 x 242 mm (5.4 x 12.3 x 9.5 in.). The amber LED indicator may be blinking or frozen: • Blinking if the LAUL or LAUX is working properly.

12 VDC

Figure 7-27 LAUX-428

• Frozen if internal errors are occurring. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

347

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI)

Check the green LED indicator associated with each 12 VDC socket on the LAUL or LAUX, to see if the battery connected to it is low (i. e. below 10.3 V). The green LED is flashing if a battery is connected and its voltage is above 10.5 VDC. Note To prevent the line from being disrupted when you are

replacing a low battery on an LAUL or LAUX, first connect the fresh battery to the spare 12 VDC connector, then remove the low battery. The line portion delimited by two LAUs is referred to as “Line segment”. Note that as a general rule, a line segment should be homogeneous, i. e. include a single type of unit. FDU-428, DSU3-428, FDU-408 are examples of types of units that can be used in different line segments, but never to be used jointly within the same line segment. Also note that if any line segment includes 408-technology units, then you have to use the Form Line setup in the Line window to set the data rate to 8 Mbit/s on that segment. See also LAU spacing Vs FDU spacing (page 353) and Spread layout conventions (page 358).

Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI) The fibre optics extender (TFOI) is available in different lengths (550 m, 600 m, 750 m, 1000 m, 2000 m, up to 10 km). Fibre optics cable (up to 10 km) TFOI interface (one at either end)

FM4 plug

Figure 7-28 TFOI fibre optics interface and cable

The wireline end of the TFOI interface box must be connected direct to one of the Transverse ports of an LAUX-428 or LCI-428, or the wall348

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI)

mount input panel on the recording cab. Do not use any other cable in between (because the LAUX-428 or LCI-428 needs to be informed of the presence of a fibre optics extender, by sensing a special device inside the FM4 plug of the TFOI interface box). Because a different interface card is used at either end, the colour of the interface box is different (green/red), but you can connect it in either direction: you can connect, say, the green end to a Right Transverse port (then connect the red end to a Left port), or the other way round. In transition zone operations, the Transverse equipment may be subjected to high tension as a result of currents exerting stress on cables and terminations: the longer the cable length between anchoring points, the higher the tension. Therefore, it is recommended to clamp 5-kg ballast blocks on the fibre optic cable every 50 m, using bend-stiffeners. It is also recommended to pull on the rigging of the LAUX-428 rather than the fibre optic cable when retrieving the Transverse equipment.

Buoy

Warning Pull on rigging rather than TFOI cable when retrieving!

5 kg ballast block 12 VDC

Bend stiffener

TFOI-428 50 m

50 m

Figure 7-29

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

349

7

7

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI)

10-contact plug

Patch cords

TFOI-G interface hull Fibre optic cable (up to 2000 m)

Figure 7-30 TFOI-G

See Technical Manual to install TFOI-G strain-relief rigging (page 402) on an LAUX-G.

Strain-relief anchor rings

TFOI-G strain-relief spool (3 turns)

Figure 7-31 LAUX-G fitted with TFOI-G strain-relief rigging

350

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Wireline telemetry equipment > Transverse Repeater (TREP-428)

Transverse Repeater (TREP-428) The TREP-428 is a repeater unit used between two standard Transverse (SRHRF) cables to extend the Transverse. Between two Transverse ports (i. e. between two LAUX-428 units or between the LCI-428 and the next LAUX-428), you can connect up to six 125-m lengths of Transverse (SRHRF) cable, with five repeaters. Figure 7-32 TREP-428

LAUX

125 m

TREP

125 m

TREP

125 m

TREP

125 m

TREP

125 m

TREP

125 m

LAUX 5 TREPs max.

Figure 7-33 Max. length between Transverse ports

End-of-line plug In shallow-water operations, any unused Line or Transverse connector should be terminated with an end-of-line plug. (Part Number 512210121). End-of-line plug Dustcap

Figure 7-34

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

351

7

7

Field equipment deployment Power supply requirements >

Power supply requirements The LAUX-428 or LAUL-428 operates from a standard 12 V battery (9 to 13.5 V). It is equipped with two power input connectors that allow battery replacement without causing any disruption in the power supply. FDUs and DSUs operate from the DC voltage supplied by the next LAUL or LAUX or LAUR on one side or the other. To determine the maximum allowable number of channels between an LAUX and an LAUL, or between to LAULs, you cannot simply divide the available power output by the power drain per channel. Three limiting factors need to be considered: • Software: the transmission protocol is designed for a maximum of 120 channels with a line data rate of 16 Mbits/s, 60 channels @ 8 Mbits/s; • Hardware: the voltage drop in cables increases with the cable length; • The line data rate: the power drain per channel is higher at 16 Mbits/s. See also: • LAU spacing Vs FDU spacing (page 353) • LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing (page 354).

352

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Power supply requirements > LAU spacing Vs FDU spacing

LAU spacing Vs FDU spacing The table below gives the maximum allowable number of FDU-428s between two LAULs or between an LAUX and an LAUL (inclusive of passive channels if any), depending on the cable length and on the Line data rate. Table 7-1 FDU spacing Max. cable length between FDUs 5m

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Max. number of FDUs between LAUs @ 16 Mbps

@ 8 Mbps

102

60

10 m

90

60

15 m

81

60

20 m

74

60

25 m

68

60

30 m

64

60

35 m

60

60

40 m

57

59

45 m

55

56

50 m

52

54

55 m

50

52

60 m

48

50

70 m

45

47

80 m

43

44

90 m

40

42

100 m

NA

38

110 m

NA

37

7

353

7

Field equipment deployment Power supply requirements > LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing

LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing The tables below give the maximum allowable number of DSU units between two LAULs or between an LAUX and an LAUL (inclusive of passive channels if any), depending on the cable length and on the Line data rate. Table 7-2 Max. number of DSU3-428’s between LAUs Max. cable length between DSU3-428’s

@ 16 Mbps

@ 8 Mbps

5m

40

20

10 m

40

20

15 m

40

20

20 m

40

20

25 m

40

20

30 m

40

20

35 m

40

20

40 m

40

20

45 m

39

20

50 m

37

20

55 m

36

20

60 m

34

20

70 m

32

20

80 m

30

20

90 m

29

20

100 m

NA

20

110 m

NA

20

Table 7-3 Max. number of DSUGPS’s between LAUs

354

Max. cable length between DSUGPS’s

@ 16 Mbps

@ 8 Mbps

20

34

15

25

32

15

30

30

15

35 m

28

15

40 m

26

15

55 m

24

15

70 m

20

15

90 m

18

15

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Power supply requirements > LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing

Table 7-4 Max. number of DSU3BV-428’s between LAUs Max. cable length between DSU3BV-428’s 15 m

@ 16 Mbps @ 8 Mbps 5-m drop cord

15-m drop cord

36

26

20

25 m

32

24

20

40 m

28

22

20

60 m

26

NA

20

Table 7-5 Max. number of DSU1-428’s between LAUs Max. cable length between DSU1-428’s

@ 16 Mbps

@ 8 Mbps

5m

78

60

10 m

71

60

15 m

66

60

20 m

61

60

25 m

58

60

30 m

55

56

35 m

52

54

40 m

50

51

45 m

48

49

50 m

46

48

55 m

45

46

60 m

43

44

70 m

41

42

80 m

38

40

90 m

37

38

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

7

355

7

Field equipment deployment Auxiliary channels > Wireline auxiliary channels

Auxiliary channels Wireline auxiliary channels The signals to be recorded as auxiliary traces can be connected to the LCI-428 via an AXCUL-428 box. For each channel, a sticker indicates the Serial Number of the associated FDU-428 unit. The FDU Serial Number is associated with the auxiliary signal on the GUI, in the “Aux” Layout Setup. Signals from source controller

To other AXCUL-428 (or FDU link)

Low Line (typically)

FDU-428 Serial Number

Figure 7-35 AXCUL-428

You can also use an Auxiliary Interface Box (AIB, Part No. 1C14079115). The AIB box is equipped with four pairs of banana jacks used as inputs, and four output cords that connect to the auxiliary FDUs. Signals from source controller Low Line or High Line

AIB

Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4 (banana jacks) Aux 1, 2, 3, 4

Auxiliary channels (max. 120)

Figure 7-36 AIB

FDUs anywhere in the spread can also be used as Auxiliary channels. For input voltage specifications, see FDU-428 input connector on page 545. 356

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Auxiliary channels > Vibrator signal recording (VSR)

Vibrator signal recording (VSR) See Rooftop-mount whip antenna (page 439)

VE464 DSD

LAUX

Similarities

Vibrator motion signals from SIMILARITIES connector Wireline to recorder truck

AIB Battery

LRU GND LAUR

12 V

7

Battery

Figure 7-37 Auxiliary channels from VE432 DSD

Some vibratory seismic techniques require the recording of vibrator motion signals on each vibrator. The 428XL allows the signals picked up on the vibrators to be radioed to the central control unit in real-time (as soon as each sweep is complete), using standard radio telemetry units (LAUR), so that they can be recorded as auxiliary channels in the SEGD file. See also Operating Mode (page 283) in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1. The case of the LAUR should be tied to the case of the DSD and grounded (use the grounding wing nut). • Ref and Force scales:

31833 daN/V (differential outputs). Max ~56000 daN: 1.76 Vpeak-peak.

• Acceleration scale:

Max 70 ms-2: approx. 1.6Vpeak-peak. –2 318330 /V Mass_mass –2 318330 Baseplate: --------------------------ms / V Base_mass

Mass: ---------------------------ms

(1 daN = 2.248089431 lbf) 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

357

7

Field equipment deployment Spread layout conventions >

Spread layout conventions WARNING

Be sure the Low/High and Left/Right ports of each LAUX are properly oriented. When looking for the elements in the spread, the central unit will identify every element and determine the geometry of the spread in relation to the Low/High and Left/Right ports of the LAUX units it encounters.

Unlike the LAUX, links and LAULs are reversible with no effect upon the identification of the elements in the spread.

n+1

Towards lower receiver positions

Left Transverse port

n+2

n+3

Towards higher receiver positions

High Line port

LAUL-428 LAUX-428

Right Transverse port Left Transverse

• 125 m max with no repeater; • up to 6 × 125 m with five TREP-428 repeaters

Figure 7-38 (2-D spread) 358

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Spread layout conventions >

Each line can handle up to 2000 active channels with a 16 Mbits/s data rate (with FDU-428 field electronics). Each LCI-428 unit can control up to 10 000 active channels. n+1

Toward lower receiver positions

Left Transverse port

n+2

n+3

Toward higher receiver positions

High Line port

7

Right Transverse port Left Transverse

• 125 m max with no repeater; • up to 6 × 125 m with five TREP-428 repeaters

Right Transverse

Left Transverse port

Right Transverse port

Figure 7-39 (3-D spread)

See also GigaTransverse (page 39). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

359

7

Field equipment deployment Spread layout conventions >

LAUX

100 Mbps

Figure 7-40 Snaking layout

Secondary Transverses can be used in order to provide redundant data paths, allowing the data to be retrieved even though a line is disrupted. LAUX

Secondary Transverse

LAUX

LAUX

100 Mbps

Figure 7-41 Secondary Transverse

LAUX

LAUX

LAUX

LAUX

Figure 7-42 Data path redundancy

360

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Spread layout conventions >

Note In case of a disruption along a Line, the Auto Look function (if

selected) automatically rewakes the spread and reroutes the data if necessary. In contrast, a disruption along the Transverse is not recovered the same way: the Auto Look will not reform the crashed spread and reroute the data (instead, a Field Off/ Field On is required).

7

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

361

7

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Deployment

Submersible (ULS) field electronics Deployment Submersible line units (FDU2S and LAULS) are reversible, meaning that their Line connectors can be used indiscriminately as Low or High ports. The LAUXS-428 supports a 16 Mb/s data rate on its Transverse ports, so it does not connect to the 100 Mb/s Transverse directly but via a LAUX-428 (through one of its Line ports). This creates a secondary Transverse, on which both LAUXS-428 and LAUXS-408 units are allowed. See Figure 7-43 and Figure 7-44 — page 363. You can place a maximum of 30 FDU2S units between two LAUs, with a maximum of 110 m between the FDU2S units. You can insert a submersible segment anywhere in a standard 428XL telemetry line, using a ULS Adapter at either end. The following jumpers and adapters are available: - LAULS/FDU2S jumper cable (3 m, P/N 512500211); - LAUX/FDU2S jumper (55 m, P/N 512500210); - ULS back-to-back adapter (P/N 1P42081654); - ULS adapter (P/N 1P41081653); - FM4-FM4 jumper (2 m, P/N 512100122). WARNING

On line segments where you are deploying 408ULS field electronics, you have to set the Line data rate to 8 Mbit/s, using the Form Line setup in the Line window, or else they will not be visible to the system (408ULS field electronics does not support the 16-Mbit/s Line data rate). Note Unused channels at standard/submersible junctions are

automatically skipped by the system (they do not need to be entered into the Detour setup on the GUI). 362

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Deployment

100 Mb/s Transverse P/N 512500210 (55 m) or adapter 1P41081653 + jumper 512100122 (2 m)

LAUXS-428

Line (16 Mb/s) LAUX-428

Secondary Transverse (16 Mb/s)

Immersed spread (max. water depth: 50 m.) Line (8 Mb/s) See detail on next page

7

Hydro

Line (8 Mb/s) FDU2S

Figure 7-43 LAUXS-428 in immersed secondary Transverse

LAUXS-428

Secondary Transverse (16 Mb/s)

LAUX-428 Line (16 Mb/s) LAUXS-408 Line (8 Mb/s)

LAUXS-428 Line (8 Mb/s)

Hydro

FDU2S

Figure 7-44 LAUXS-408 and LAUXS-428 in immersed secondary Transverse 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

363

7

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Deployment

Left Trans (blue)

Power (red)

LAUXS-428

Low Line (blue)

XDEV (black)

High Line (blue)

IMPORTANT Unused connectors should be protected with watertight caps: - P/N 512210065 for Line and Trans connectors; - P/N 354700035 for XDEV connector.

Right Trans (blue)

LAUXS-428 or LAUXS-408

3 m Jumper (P/N 512500211) 104 FDU2S

105 FDU2S

Low Line

FDU2S

High Line Transverse cable P/N 512300032 (550 m)

Figure 7-45 Connecting to an LAUXS-428 or LAUXS-408

This channel is not used 159

160 FDU2S

161 FDU2S

FDU2S

162

FDU

FDU

55-m jumper (512500210) or 3-m jumper + ULS adapter (512500211 + 1P41081653)

Figure 7-46 Connecting to an FDU 364

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Deployment

ULS-matable connectors (8-pin)

Standard 428XL connector

ULS-matable connectors (8-pin) ULS adapter (1P41081653)

Back-to-Back adapter (1P42081654)

Figure 7-47 Adapters

Jumper P/N 512500210

Jumper P/N 512500210

LAUX-408 This channel is not used

7

This channel is not used

104 FDU2S

105 FDU2S

FDU2S

FDU2S

Figure 7-48 Connecting to an LAUX-408

LINE (blue)

POWER (red)

XDEV (black)

102

LINE (blue)

3 m Jumper (P/N 512500211)

FDU2S

103

LAULS

104 FDU2S

Figure 7-49 Connecting to LAULS 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

365

7

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Deployment

IMPORTANT

Unused connectors should be protected with watertight caps: - P/N 512210065 for Line connectors; - P/N 354700035 for XDEV connector.

Note You can use an LAULS in place of an LAUL in a standard FDU

8 Mbit/s line segment.

FDU

FDU

LAULS

FDU

FDU

55-m jumper (512500210) (or 512500211 + 1P41081653)

Figure 7-50

366

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Deployment

End of line If a line ends with an ULS segment, it must end with an FDU2S unit

101

Unused channels

102

End FDU2S of Line (cap P/N 512210065)

FDU2S

101

102

103

End FDU2S of Line (cap P/N 512210065)

FDU2S

101

102 FDU2S

Unused channel

103

End of Line (cap P/N 512210065)

FDU2S

Unused channel End FDU2S of Line (cap P/N 512210065)

Unused channel

FDU2S

103

104 FDU2S

Figure 7-51

See how to configure the Line Survey setup window in 428XL User’s manual Vol. 1.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

367

7

7

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Handling and service information

Handling and service information Connector mating When connecting a cable to an LAUXS-428, LAUX-408, LAULS or FDU2S, it is important to make sure the threads are free of any scraps or sand grains. Also, be sure the plug and socket are perfectly aligned prior to trying to turn the locking ring. This will ensure correct mating and prolonged connector life.

Push straight in

Right

Wrong

Figure 7-52

Unless the plug and socket are perfectly aligned, the locking ring will fail to grasp both thread ends on the socket, which may tear off the threads and/or crack the receptacle (Figure 7-53).

Thread end (one on either side)

Crack

Figure 7-53 368

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Handling and service information

Protection against corrosion Protection against corrosion on FDU2S and LAULS units is provided by a sacrificial anode which should be replaced after 50% of its volume is eaten away. Be sure to put lockwashers back in place. Torque to 0. 9 Nm. Avoid conductive contact between any metal body (especially stainless steel attachments) and the housing of an FDU2S or LAULS. WARNING

For sacrificial anodes to provide effective protection against corrosion, it is essential to keep them free of mud. Brush and/or wash off mud whenever possible.

Line, Trans, Power, XDEV connectors Prior to any underwater mating, lubricate Line connectors with corn oil.

Spare parts for ULS cable repair • 1-m cable with Line connector: P/N 512500296. • 1-m cable with Transverse connector: P/N 512210263.

GeoSpace-production takeouts Prior to any underwater mating, lubricate takeout connectors with corn oil.

AG-production takeouts In order to prevent conductor fatigue and ultimate failure of AG-production takeouts, avoid sharp bends at the takeout connectors, by fitting a stiffener on each takeout and clamping it as shown below. Tools and materials required: - Ty-Rap cable tie tool (P/N 257 300 016). - Ty-Rap 25M cable ties (P/N 316 070 007).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

369

7

7

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Handling and service information

- Stiffeners (P/N 316 900 029). - Adhesive tape, BULLDOG GEOREX (P/N 186 300 016). 2

1

Push cable into stiffener

4

3

Push stiffener against locking ring

Press line cable against groove in stiffener

5

Cut flush

6

Wrap in adhesive tape

Attach in the middle with cable tie

7

Tie a double knot. Cut end of adhesive tape

Split end of adhesive tape in two halves about 20 cm long

Figure 7-54 370

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Handling and service information

IMPORTANT INFORMATION MATING Before shipment, AG-production takeout connectors are lightly sprayed with an AEROSOL nonwater soluble silicon lubricant, in preparation for the first connection.

For subsequent matings, the connectors should be cleaned to remove any contamination and silicon build-up, then re-lubricated. This procedure will insure correct mating as well as prolonged connector life. Only use SILICON SPRAY approved for POLYURETHANE application. DO NOT use WD40, CRC or any other organic-based solvent spray. DO NOT use heavy silicon greases like DC111.

7

LOCKING RINGS Mating of Locking Rings should be DONE BY HAND only Use of a wrench or pliers can cause thread damage and lead to failure of the locking rings. For trouble-free service, use a light machine oil or anti-seize DIELECTRIC product to lubricate threaded portion of the stainless steel locking rings.

PULLING APART

Do not BEND or TWIST.

Pull STRAIGHT across connectors, or anchor with foot and pull STRAIGHT up.

Figure 7-55

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

371

7

Field equipment deployment Submersible (ULS) field electronics > Handling and service information

Strain-relief rigging WARNING

Be sure to tie strain-relief rigging at each plug when laying out or picking up the ULS field electronics.

Figure 7-56

Figure 7-57

372

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) >

Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) The LSS (Line Shooting System) allows you to use the 428XL telemetry network rather than a radio link to synchronize a remote shooting system with the recording truck, for example in situations and over stretches of land where radio communications are difficult. Shooting with an LSS does not require any audio communications between the observer in the recording truck and the shooter. The LSS consists of an LSI unit associated with an HSU. • The LSI (Line/Source Interface) allows you to connect a blaster controller along an acquisition line instead of connecting it to the control unit’s Blaster connector. It acts as a remote Blaster connector. • The HSU (Hand-Shake Unit) is used by the shooter to supply the status of the firing device and the number of the corresponding shot point to the central unit. All types of extensions are still allowed where an LSI is used (LRU relay, Fiber Optics Link, Laser Link).

LRU

LSI HSU

Blaster controller

You can connect another shooting system on the second Blaster connector

Figure 7-58 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

373

7

7

Field equipment deployment Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) > Power supply requirements

Note: With two or more LCI-428 modules (multimodule configuration), you cannot use the LSS system.

Power supply requirements The power for the LSI is supplied by the line and is equivalent to the power drain of four FDUs. As a result the maximum allowable number of FDUs between two LAUs, specified on page 353, must be decreased by 4 if an LSI is inserted. When the LSI is supplied with power, its "Line OK" indicator is lit. The HSU operates from a 12 V battery.

Connecting an LSI When FDUs are blinking, you are allowed to disconnect an FDU link in order to plug an LSI. The LSI comes with two FM4 plugs so that you can insert it between two FDU links, or between an FDU link and an LAUL or LAUX, close to the shot point.

LSI HSU

Blaster controller

140 m cable

Blaster

Figure 7-59

Do not connect more than one LSI between any two LAUs. The resulting maximum distance from the LSI to the blaster depends on the number of FDUs making up the links, on the trace spacing and on 374

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) > Connecting an HSU

the line spacing. For example, with links made up of four FDUs spaced by 60 m, you will be able to insert the LSI within about 140 m of the shot point. 30 m

60 m

60 m

60 m

30 m

120 m max.

120 m max.

Shot point Figure 7-60

Connecting an HSU The blaster can be any shooting system, other than Opseis 815 RF blaster, compatible with the Firing Order generated by the LSI (see page 538).

7

The following signals from the blaster controller can be input to the LSI: • Analog signal from Up-Hole geophone, converted to digital on the first channel in the LSI; • CTB (Confirmed Time Break) analog signal, converted to digital on the second channel in the LSI; • ASCII message with a format supported by the 428XL (e. g. Macha). See 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3 (Source controller formats). WARNING

You can connect a Shot Pro blaster controller to the LSS but the serial line normally required between the LCI-428 and the Shot Pro Encoder is not supported. As a result, the Shot Pro Encoder does not return any ASCII message via the serial ports of the HSU.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

375

7

Field equipment deployment Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) > Connecting an HSU

MACHA blaster controller

CONTROL A F DATA (C wired to D)

+ A Controller - B

FM4

LSI

LINE OK

FO

RS232

+ C - D

HSU

UH

+ E - F

1 2 3 4 5 6

FTB

+ G - H

A B

SYSTEM C D Macha E Controller F

AB

FO

DISCONNECT EN

ARM-EN UH (Analog) FTB (Analog)

ARM EN

ARM SET

SEND

LSI

RS422 CTS

LINE

See Chapter 13 FM4

A B LINE Macha Blaster

Firing UH

140 m cable, P/N 512000196. See pin assignment in Chapter 13

+12V

Figure 7-61

See the wiring diagram on page 558. Use a radio link between the Macha Controller and Blaster in preference to a wireline link.

Shot Pro Encoder/Decoder

K W

Shot Pro Encoder

FO

L M g R J X N

RS232

Controller + A - B

+ C - D + + -

UH TB

E F G H

FM4

LSI

LINE OK

FO

HSU

DISCONNECT EN

ARM-EN

1 2 3 4 5 6

Analog Aux 1 NISO TB Aux 2

ARM EN

ARM SET

SEND

LSI

RS422 CTS

See Chapter 13 FM4

Shot Pro Decoder

Firing UH

+12V

140 m cable, P/N 512000196. See pin assignment in Chapter 13

Figure 7-62

See the wiring diagram on page 559. Use a radio link between the Shot Pro Encoder and Decoder in preference to a wireline link. 376

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Field equipment deployment Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) > Operating instructions

Operating instructions The two indicators on the LSI are used as follows: • Line OK: lights up when the LSI is connected and supplied with power. • Disconnect En: lights up when the shooter is allowed to unplug an LSI. The controls on the HSU are used as follows: 1.

The shooter dials the shotpoint number with the rotary switches, and then presses the Send pushbutton to send the shotpoint number to the recording truck.

2.

The Arm En indicator lights up after the source is selected in the recording truck and the spread is formed, meaning that the shooter is allowed to arm the firing device.

3.

The shooter presses the Arm Set pushbutton to tell the recording truck the firing device is armed.

Note For detailed calibration and operating instructions, see 428XL

User’s Manual Vol. 1 (Operation main window).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

377

7

7

Field equipment deployment Quick Tester >

Quick Tester You can connect the QT-400 quick tester anywhere on a line to check transmission and power supply at a glance. The QT-400 has three green indicators: • A “Voltage” indicator (blinking if the power supply is correct). • Two “Transmit” indicators, one of them blinking if transmission is correct (one for the 8 Mbps data rate and the other for 16 Mbps). The QT-400 automatically determines which data rate is used. The QT-400 is counted as an FDU channel in the GUI’s Line window. For submersible (ULS) line segments, a specific quick tester must be used (QT408ULS).

Figure 7-63

ULS-matable connector

Figure 7-64 QT408ULS

378

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

8

LT428 Line Tester This chapter is a guide to using an LT428 line tester. It includes the following sections: • Introduction (page 380) • Connecting the handheld PC (page 382) • Getting started (page 383) • The main menu (page 386) • Running Line tests (page 396) • Running Transverse tests (page 406) • DSU line segments (page 409) • Working with results (page 410) • Auxiliary functions (page 416)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

379

8

LT428 Line Tester Introduction >

Introduction The LT428 is a pocket terminal (a handheld PC with LT428 software) that connects to the XDEV connector of an LAUL-428 or LAUX-428, used to check the performance of a line section. The test results are displayed on the pocket terminal. Note Noise or distortion measurements performed with an LT428

should not be used as acceptance tests. To check FDUs for compliance with acceptance specifications, launch those tests on the 428XL GUI computer instead.

Navigation bar Scroll up/down buttons Command bar (onscreen keyboard icon, icons to any applications that are running) Shortcut to “LT428” application

Shortcut to “Term428” application

Figure 8-1 Intermec CN3e

380

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Introduction >

Start menu

Press this function key prior to typing any orange character

Turns on/off backlight (if white function key is pressed)

White function key (enables blue keypad or backlight on/off key)

Decreases backlight (if orange function key is pressed)

Power on

8

Increases backlight (if orange function key is pressed)

Figure 8-2 GoBook

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

381

8

LT428 Line Tester Connecting the handheld PC >

Connecting the handheld PC Note Prior to connecting the handheld PC to any LAU, be sure the

LT428 application on the PC is not running and the LAU is disconnected from the 428XL network. 1.

Connect a 12 VDC voltage to one of the 12VDC inputs of the LAUL or LAUX.

2.

Connect the handheld PC to the XDEV socket on the LAUL-428 or LAUX-428, using the cable provided (see Connectors and cables on page 537). This turns on the power supply in the LAUL or LAUX. P/N 1D17082539

CN3e snap-on adapter

12 VDC

LAUL-428 Use right-hand (ruggedized) port of Gobook PC

12 VDC

LAUX-428

P/N 1C50079711 (1C50081865 if LAULS)

Figure 8-3

Note The handheld PC operates from its built-in rechargeable

battery. See Getting started (page 383). 382

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Getting started > Launching the LT428 application

Getting started WARNING

Be sure the battery inside the handhled PC is properly charged. See the manual that came with your handhled PC for detailed information on the battery (checking, storage, charging, replacement, etc.). Prior to starting using a handhled PC that was formerly used in another crew, remove and then reinstall LT428 software. When the system asks you if you want to delete existing files, choose to delete all. To install LT428 software on your handhled PC, see Handheld PC software (page 291).

Launching the LT428 application 1.

Connect the handhled PC to an LAU (see page 382).

2.

Power up the handhled PC.

3.

Select the LT428 program from the Start menu.

8

Note Every time you start the LT428, the

program checks for licence information Enter the Licence (on a Gobook PC the licence information code here is saved in a key.dat file in the “\” directory). If for any reason the licence information has been deleted or is incorrect, you have to enter the licence code that came with your LT428. If you have any difficulty recovering that code, Figure 8-4 you can get it again from SERCEL: you simply have to supply the Serial Number displayed on the handhled PC.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

383

8

LT428 Line Tester Getting started > Launching the LT428 application

Note It is a advisable to save the key.dat file to a safe, non-volatile

medium, e.g the integrated compact flash memory card on a Gobook PC, using the File Explorer (data in the compact flash memory is not erased by a hardware reset). Afterwards, if the system asks you to enter the licence code, as will be the case when launching the LT428 application after a hardware reset, you’ll simply have to copy the key.dat file from the compact flash memory to the “\” directory (then you can launch the LT428 application). On a CN3e, you have to enter the licence code if you are launching the LT428 application after a Clean Boot.

Figure 8-5

Note If you launch the LT428 application with an LAU already

connected, then a message appears asking you to unplug the computer and plug it back (Please disconnect and reconnect the PDA plug). Note If the VXWorks boot program fails, unplug the power cord

from the LAUL or LAUX, then plug it back in.

384

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Getting started > Launching the LT428 application

A window shows up after you launch the LT428 tool, prompting the IP address (172.30.201.1 by default) to assign to the LAUX-428 attached to the palmtop computer. You do not normally need to change that address (unless an LCI-428 is present on the network). You can choose any of the nine addresses from 172.30.201.1 to 172.30.201.9 (tick the "Connect to Remote LAU" option and enter the desired address into the "Host IP Address" field).

Figure 8-6

After the boot is completed successfully, the LAUL or LAUX generates a POWER UP report containing information about the identity of the LAUL or LAUX, its power supply voltage and the results from its selftests. Pressing ↵ (clicking OK) takes you to the main menu.

8

Figure 8-7

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

385

8

LT428 Line Tester The main menu >

The main menu The main menu includes three pages. One is used to set parameters, another one to run tests and the third for utility functions. Note: On a CN3e, the tabs for the different pages are displayed at the foot of the window

Virtual keypad

Figure 8-8

Note The Tap Test function is not available until you perform Power

On or Form Line. It can only be used on the line the LT428 is attached to, not on a remote line. Note The About menu displays the LT428 software version.

386

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester The main menu > Parameter setups

Parameter setups

Figure 8-9

Note The Rcv Nb Incr parameter is only available if the Advanced

mode is enabled in the General Parameters menu.

Set LT Position Used to specify the position of the Line Tester within the spread. If you wish to test a line other than the one which the Line Tester is connected to, you have to change the Tested Line Number parameter.

Set General Parameters Used to specify a few parameters normally supplied by the central control unit (Sample Rate, Filter Type, Gain) and an operating mode for the LT428. If you choose the Advanced mode, then another menu page is available.

Set Test Limits Used to specify the limits for the battery voltage, Field tests and Instrument tests. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

387

8

8

LT428 Line Tester The main menu > Test functions

Field units Used to choose the FDU type.

Test functions

Figure 8-10

Exec Line Test Opens a secondary menu used for testing lines.

Exec Transverse Test Opens a secondary menu used for testing Transverses.

Tap Test Used to determine the polarity of the signal generated by a sensor. It is not available until a Power On or Form Line is performed. It can only be used on the line the LT428 is attached to, not on a remote line.

388

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester The main menu > The LT428 Position menu

The LT428 Position menu Selecting Set LT Position from the main menu opens the following menu page that allows you to specify the position of the Line Tester within the spread. Advanced mode only (defaults to 1)

Figure 8-11

Note See the General Parameters menu for the Advanced mode.

Low side

Transverse

8 100

Line Tester Position: Adjacent receiver number on its Low side: #148 High side 101

Line

148

FDU-428

12 VDC

LAUL-428 12 VDC

LAUX-428

Figure 8-12

LT Line Nb (1 to 99999) Number of the line which the Line Tester is connected to. The Line Tester assumes the line number of the first stake encountered on the Low side of the LAUL or LAUX it is connected to.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

389

8

LT428 Line Tester The main menu > The LT428 Position menu

Line Nb Inc. (1 to 99999) Increment of line numbering.

LT Rcv Nb (1 to 99999) The Line Tester assumes the number of the first topographic stake encountered on the Low side of the LAUL or LAUX it is connected to. Note If the LAUL or LAUX is located at the very beginning of a line,

then it assumes the number of the first stake encountered on the High side, minus the Rcv Nb Increment (see below). Line Tester Position: Adjacent receiver number on its Low side: #99

Low side 100

LAUL-428

101

FDU-428

12 VDC

12 VDC

Figure 8-13

Rcv Nb Increment (1 to 99999) Increment of topographic stake numbering. This parameter is only prompted if the Advanced mode is enabled. See The General Parameters menu (page 391).

Tested Line Nb (1 to 99999) Line to be tested. If the Line Tester is implemented on an LAUX, you can test a line other than the one it is connected to (except for a Tap test of a Save RCV Tilt Model function). • To specify the adjacent line on the left side, simply decrease the LT Line Nb by one step (Line Nb Inc.). • To specify the adjacent line on the right side, simply increase the LT Line Nb by one step (Line Nb Inc.). 390

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester The main menu > The General Parameters menu

The General Parameters menu Selecting Set > General Parameters from the main menu opens the following menu page that allows you to enter a few parameters normally supplied by the central control unit:

Figure 8-14

• Sample Rate: The following options are available: 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 or 4 ms. • Filter: The following options are available: 0.8 Lin, 0.8 Min or Eagle. • Gain: The following options are available: 1600 mV input (0 dB) or 400 mV input (12 dB). • Mode: The following options are available: Normal or Advanced. The Normal option is for simple field patterns (one type of sensor, one sensor on each topographic stake). If you choose Advanced, then the parameters in the third page allow more complex field patterns to be tested. • Nb Sensor/Rcv Pt: (1 to 9) Used to specify the number of sensors implemented on each topographic stake. • Nb Sensor Type: (1 to 9) Used to specify the number of sensor types used. • Receiver Type Layout: (Regular/Irregular). • LT Sensor Type Nb: (1 to 9).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

391

8

8

LT428 Line Tester The main menu > The General Parameters menu

Below are examples of field patterns with the associated mode (Normal or Advanced).

Configuration: One sensor per receiver point, one sensor type

Normal Mode

FDU #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Sensor Type

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Rcv Number

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

Configuration: One sensor per receiver point, two sensor types, regular

Advanced Mode

FDU #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Sensor Type

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

Rcv Number

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

Configuration: Two sensors per receiver point, two sensor types, regular

Advanced Mode

FDU #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Sensor Type

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

Rcv Number

101

102

103

8 2 104

Figure 8-15

Note If the line segment includes an LSI unit, the LSI will be seen by

the Look function, but it cannot be tested by LT428.

392

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester The main menu > The Test Limits menu

The Test Limits menu Selecting Set > Test Limits from the main menu from the main menu opens the following menu page that allows you to set alert threshold for battery tests, field tests and instrument tests.

8 Figure 8-16

Battery limit Use this menu to enter the alert threshold for Low battery voltage tests.

Figure 8-17

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

393

8

LT428 Line Tester The main menu > The Test Limits menu

Field test limits Use this menu to specify alert thresholds for field tests. Only those tests which are selected in this menu will be performed by the Field Test function (see Running Line tests on page 396). To select a test, choose the appropriate check box.

Figure 8-18

Enter the desired limits into the appropriate fields. If the Advanced mode is enabled and two or more types of sensors are used (see The General Parameters menu on page 391) then this menu is available for each sensor type. In that case, if you select a test then you select it for all sensor types.

394

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester The main menu > The Test Limits menu

Instrument test limits Use this menu to view alert thresholds for instrument tests. Only those tests which are selected in this menu will be performed by the Instrument Test function (see Running Line tests on page 396). To select a test, choose the appropriate check box.

Figure 8-19

8

The preset thresholds are displayed. You cannot change them.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

395

8

LT428 Line Tester Running Line tests >

Running Line tests

Figure 8-20

Note The Direction option is only for the Form Line function on an

LAUL. With an LAUX, both Low and High branches are looked up. Note Save Rcv Tilt Model can only be used on the line the LT428 is

attached to, not on a remote line. To run line tests, select Exec > Line Test from the main menu. This opens the following menu pages. See Note (1) below

See Note (2) below

Figure 8-21

Note (1) This menu toggles between “Power On” and “Power Off”

functions. At the outset, “Power On” is prompted. Then, running the function prompted causes the menu to toggle to the other function.

396

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Running Line tests >

Note (2) Save Rcv Tilt Model can only be used on the line the

LT428 is attached to, not on a remote line. WARNING

The Power On and Form Line functions identify a set of field units on which the other tests (field, instrument, Xmit) are performed. For these tests, LT428 software sends a command to all LAUs connected, then it collects the corresponding results sequentially, jumping from one LAU to the next. If any LAU fails to respond, the message Wait for LAUL/X #xxxx field/instrument/xmit test on low/high is displayed continually. In that case, you have to depress ESC twice to quit the test and display the results collected from those LAUs which responded properly. To preclude that message from appearing, use Power Off then Power On to have the connected units properly re-identified.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

397

8

8

LT428 Line Tester Running Line tests > LAUL Orientation

LAUL Orientation With an LT428 implemented on an LAUL, an Orientation parameter is prompted when you launch the Power On or Form Line function. You have to choose the appropriate orientation (Direct or Reverse), depending on how the LAUL is connected in the line.

(for LAUL only)

Figure 8-22

The Low port of an LAUL is on the same side as the 12 VDC B connector. Choose Direct if the Low port of the LAUL is connected toward “Low” receiver points, Reverse otherwise. 12 VDC B “Low” port

Toward “High” receiver points

Toward “Low” receiver points

Figure 8-23 Direct-oriented LAUL-428

398

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Running Line tests > Power On

Power On The Power ON function identifies all the elements encountered on the line. Transmit tests, Field tests and Instrument tests run subsequently will address all of the elements identified (LSI units are viewed by the LT428, but not tested). With an LAUL, a secondary menu appears that allows you to choose the orientation of the unit and the branch (High/Low) to be turned on and tested. See LAUL Orientation (page 398). Whatever the display mode enabled, the location (Receiver number) of the first FDU and last FDU in the line section is displayed in the foot row. Errors are denoted by an asterisk.

8 Figure 8-24

Power Off Selecting Power Off turns off the selected branch (High/Low). Power off takes about five seconds to complete (the message Wait for Power Off is displayed while the LAUs are being turned off).

Form Line The Form Line function only identifies the elements encountered in the receiver section you specify. You have to choose the branch (Low or High) and the stake number of the farthest unit in the section.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

399

8

LT428 Line Tester Running Line tests > Xmit Test

Figure 8-25

For an LAUL, see also LAUL Orientation (page 398). Transmit tests, Field tests and Instrument tests you run subsequently will only address the elements identified in that receiver section. The Farthest Rcv Nb parameter is reset each time a Power On function is performed. Form Line returns the same kind of results as Power On. (See Working with results on page 410).

Xmit Test The Xmit Test function transmits random data and checks the associated CRC codes in real time. The test applies to all the elements identified by the Power On or Form Line function. Select Run Xmit to start the test. To end the test, select Stop Xmit. The total count of CRC errors and the elapsed time since the function was launched are displayed.

400

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Running Line tests > Xmit Test

Figure 8-26

If no error is encountered, pressing ESC takes you back to the previous menu without any results being displayed.

8 Figure 8-27

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

401

8

LT428 Line Tester Running Line tests > Save Receiver Tilt Model

Save Receiver Tilt Model The Save Rcv Tilt Model function is used to measure the response of a sensor to a pulse and save it as a model for tilt tests on that type of sensor. Be sure the sensor used as a model is planted properly. Note Save Rcv Tilt Model can only be used on the line the LT428 is

attached to, not on a remote line. If two or more Sensor Types are used (i. e in Advanced mode with Irregular as Receiver Type Layout option, or in the case of a receiver with two or more types of sensors), the Rcv Type Nb parameter allows you to choose a type of sensor. A model should be saved for each type of sensor used, or else you will not be able to run the Tilt Test function.

Click OK

Figure 8-28

After you perform Power On or Form Line, this function is also available from the main menu’s auxiliary functions.

402

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Running Line tests > Instrument Test

Instrument Test The Instrument Test function runs those tests you selected using the Set Test Limits menu. (See The Test Limits menu on page 393).

1 1

Figure 8-29

Unless no cell is selected, you can use the scrollbar or the horizontal arrow keys on the keypad to scroll through the result fields. The following result fields are displayed: • RCV: topographic stake number of each FDU. • CH: always 1 for FDU-428; channel number for a multi-channel unit. • TEST: Pass/Fail decision. • Result value for each test selected: the value is expressed in the same unit as in the Set Instr Test Limits menu. - Those results which exceed the programmed alert threshold are highlighted. - If the value is too large to fit in the result display field, then the maximum value of the field is displayed instead (e. g. 9999 in the case of a four-digit result field).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

403

8

8

LT428 Line Tester Running Line tests > Field Test

Field Test The Field Test function runs those tests you selected using the Set Test Limits menu. (See The Test Limits menu on page 393). Only those receivers that were identified on the latest LOOK or FORM LINE are tested.

1

1

1

1

Figure 8-30

WARNING

If the Tilt test is selected and no model is saved for any one of the different sensor types used, then you cannot run the function. If two or more Sensor Types are used (i. e in Advanced mode with Irregular as Receiver Type Layout option) then the Line Tester requests you to choose one sensor type prior to running the tests. Unless no cell is selected, you can use the scrollbar or the horizontal arrow keys on the keypad to scroll through the result fields. The following result fields are displayed: • RCV: topographic stake number of each FDU. • TEST: Pass/Fail decision according to your field test limits. • TYPE: Only appears in Advanced mode if two or more sensor types are used. • Result value for each test selected: the value is expressed in the same unit as in the Set Test Limits menu. 404

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Running Line tests > Field Test

- Where relevant, the + sign is implicit (i. e. not displayed). - Those results which exceed the programmed alert threshold are highlighted. - If the value is too large to fit in the result display field, then the maximum value of the field is displayed instead (e. g. 9999 in the case of a four-digit result field).

8

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

405

8

LT428 Line Tester Running Transverse tests >

Running Transverse tests To run Transverse tests, select Exec Transverse Test from the main menu. This opens the following menu page. See Note below

Figure 8-31

Note This menu toggles between “Power On” and “Power Off”

functions. At the outset, “Power On” is prompted. Then, running the function prompted causes the menu to toggle to the other function.

406

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Running Transverse tests > Power On/Off

Power On/Off When you launch the Power On or Power Off function, a Look function is performed too.

Figure 8-32

Form Transverse The Form Transverse function only identifies the elements encountered in the Transverse section you specify. You have to specify the stake number of the farthest line in the section. After a Power On is performed on a Transverse, the farthest line identified earlier is prompted by default. Transmit tests you run subsequently will only address the elements identified in that Transverse section. Form Transverse returns the same kind of results as Power On. Figure 8-33

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

407

8

8

LT428 Line Tester Running Transverse tests > Xmit Test

Xmit Test The Xmit Test function transmits random data and checks the associated CRC codes in real time. The test applies to all the elements identified by the Look or Form Transverse function. Select Run Xmit to start the test. To end the test, select Stop Xmit. The total count of CRC errors and the elapsed time since the function was launched are displayed.

Figure 8-34

Figure 8-35

408

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester DSU line segments >

DSU line segments The following tests can be performed on DSU line segments: Field Tests: • Noise; • Tilt; Instrument tests: • Gain; • Phase; • Distortion; • Gravity (DSU3 only); • Crosstalk.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

8

409

8

LT428 Line Tester Working with results > Display mode

Working with results After test results are displayed on the palmtop computer, you can scroll up or down using the up/down or left/right arrow key to select any result row. With test results displayed, you can change the display mode, enter comments, view details, save and export results.

Save or export Search

Display mode

Figure 8-36

Display mode In the normal display mode, all results are viewed. The Mode button allows you to filter the results. • Normal: All results are displayed (passed, failed, errors). Note If an LSI is encountered on the

line segment, it is viewed as two FDUs. The serial number of the LSI is displayed in the “RCV” field with “LS” as a prefix. Neither the LSI nor the HSU can be tested by the LT428.

410

Figure 8-37

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Working with results > Error details

• Condensed: The Condensed mode is only allowed where appropriate. In Condensed mode, all results are displayed, but a single result row appears for each FDU link. The number of FDUs in the link is displayed in place of the Serial Number. An error flag appears in the error field if any one of the FDUs in the link is at fault.

1

Failed test Number of FDUs in the Link

Figure 8-38

• Error: Only faulty results are displayed.

8 Figure 8-39

Error details Selecting any “FAIL” status field in results from a Xmit, Field or Instrument test may cause error details (e. g. FWD_CRC) to appear at the foot of the display, depending on the type of error encountered.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

411

8

LT428 Line Tester Working with results > Searching through the results

Searching through the results The Search button in the result display opens a menu that allows you to jump to a topographic stake or an element (FDU, LAUL or LAUX). Choose the desired Search Info option (Rcv point, FDU, LAUL, LAUX). In the Search Value field, type the receiver point or serial number to find. Choose Go. Figure 8-40

Comments Selecting a result row then pressing the Enter key allows you to enter a comment (one row on the display) that will be attached to the selected result row.

1 1 1

Comment input field

Use the virtual keypad at the foot of the display to type your comment text. As you type it, the comment appears at the top of the display. Press Enter again to save the comment. Figure 8-41

412

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Working with results > Saving and exporting results

After you enter a comment, it appears in the status row at the foot of the display whenever the result row is selected again. It will also appear in the file saved or exported.

1

1

1

1

1

Comment

Figure 8-42

Saving and exporting results The File button allows you to save and/or export the results currently displayed to a file in the palmtop computer’s memory.

1

1

1

1

8

1

Save This button opens a Save as dialog box that saves the results to a binary file, with the “.lt” extension, so that you can read back that file at a later in the LT428 application, using the Utility menu (see Playing back a result file on page 415). Attached comments, if any, are saved too. Unless you wish to use the default name prompted (e. g. “field_save.lt” for Field tests), use the virtual keypad to enter a name for the file. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Figure 8-43

413

8

LT428 Line Tester Working with results > Saving and exporting results

Export This button saves the results to a text file so that you can open that file at a later date in a spreadsheet application (a Tab character is used as separator). Attached comments, if any, are saved too. The Export button opens a comment input box that allows you to enter general comments about the test results (using the virtual keypad). After typing the desired comments, press the Enter key and choose OK. This opens a Save as dialog box. Unless you wish to use the default name prompted (e. g.“field_xprt.txt” for Field tests) use the virtual keypad to enter a name for the file. You can rename the file with the xls extension.

Figure 8-44

414

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Working with results > Playing back a result file

Playing back a result file To open a result file saved in the palmtop computer’s memory, select “Load result” from the “Util” main menu and choose the desired file from the list prompted (files with the “.lt” extension). This allows you to view the results but you cannot export them.

Figure 8-45

The “Power Up Result” button allows you to go back to the power up results.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

415

8

8

LT428 Line Tester Auxiliary functions > Tap Test

Auxiliary functions Tap Test The Tap Test function is not available until you perform Power On or Form Line. Note Tap Test can only be used on the line the LT428 is attached to,

not on a remote line. It allows you to determine the polarity of the signal generated by a sensor, by tapping on top of the sensor and looking at the shape of the signal recorded by the LT428. The sensor should not be tied to any fixture. Instead, hold it in one hand and gently tap the top with one of your other hand’s finger tips. For the signal to be easy to interpret, the tap should not be so strong as to cause the coil to override its allowable stroke. Tap here with finger tip

Figure 8-46

• Specify the topographic stake number of the receiver to be tested (Rcv Nb parameter). • In the case of a receiver with two or more sensors, the Sensor Nb parameter allows you to specify the sensor to be tested. • After a beep is generated by the palmtop terminal, tap the sensor as explained above. The Tap Test function performs a 5-second 416

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester Auxiliary functions > Tap Test

acquisition, isolates the pulse resulting from the tap, and displays the pulse and the region on either side of it. The time appears on the horizontal axis and the level (in mV) on the vertical axis.

Figure 8-47

If the signal is clipped on either side (i. e. exceeding the -565 to 565 mV range), repeat the test with a lighter tap. The peak value of the signal is positive if the sensor’s coil is in the correct direction.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

417

8

8

LT428 Line Tester Auxiliary functions > Serial port parameters

Serial port parameters Select Com Setup from the Util main menu.

COM4 for Gobook COM1 for CN3e

Figure 8-48

418

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester The Link configuration update tool > Overview

The Link configuration update tool Overview In the non-volatile memory of each FDU or DSU unit is information (location of the unit within the link, assembly type) that is used for graphic views on the 428XL GUI. If you need to update that information, for instance after changing the number of units in a link, launch the “Term428” program instead of “lt428” on your Line Tester.

Example Assuming you have several links with four FDUs or DSUs and you want to change them into links with two FDUs or DSUs. 1.

Make the necessary changes to the cable, to remove two FDUs or DSUs from each 4-unit link.

2.

Connect a 2-unit link to the Low line port of an LAUL or LAUX.

3.

Power on the handhled PC.

4.

On a Gobook PC, select “Term428CE” from the Start menu. On a CN3e select My Device > Program Files > LT428 > Term428, or use the shortcut (right-hand blue) button.

5.

Connect the handhled PC to the LAU.

6.

Wait for the boot end message "proto---end" and press 'Yes (↵)' twice.

7.

Choose “Link”. The following messages should appear: ***************************** **** UPDATE A LINK **** ***** ON LOW PORT ***** ***************************** How many units per link do you want ?

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

419

8

8

LT428 Line Tester The Link configuration update tool > Example

8.

Type the desired number of FDUs or DSUs (in this example 2) and press 'Yes'. (Use whichever keypad is more convenient to you). Messages

Entry field

Link

Virtual keypad

The following messages should appear: Identification Wait a few seconds Identification completed Updating Wait a few seconds Updating completed Checking Wait a few seconds Identification completed ***************************** ** Successful updating! ** **** LINK UPDATE END ***** *****************************

9.

420

If you want to update another link, start over at step 8.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LT428 Line Tester The Link configuration update tool > Example

The following errors may arise: • If you have connected too many or too few FDUs or DSUs: ***************************** **** ERROR ***** **** n units connected **** *****************************

• If updating is not correct: ***************************** **** ERROR ***** **** Updating failed ***** *****************************

• If the Update Link utility finds more than one type of unit in the link: ***************************** **** ERROR ***** **** A single type ***** **** of unit ***** **** is allowed ***** *****************************

8

• If the Update Link utility finds a type of unit that is not supported: ***************************** **** ERROR ***** **** Unsupported unit ***** *****************************

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

421

8

LT428 Line Tester The Link configuration update tool > Example

(Page intentionally blank)

422

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

9

428XL Radio telemetry In this chapter: • Radio telemetry equipment (page 424) • Theory of operation (page 429) • Typical setups (page 434) • Antennas (page 438) • Antenna mast (page 448) • Deployment using the FDPA428 (page 453)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

423

9

428XL Radio telemetry Radio telemetry equipment >

Radio telemetry equipment The 428XL radio telemetry equipment includes a data acquisition unit (LAUR-428) and a transceiver unit (LRU) that can be used in difficult areas to avoid all types of obstacles and achieve greater field efficiency. The LRU (Line Remote Unit) is used as a long range point-to-point radio relay, or as master transceiver in a radio cell. It can be inserted anywhere in a spread as an element of the 428XL network to relay the data transmission on a Line. It connects to any type of 428XL field electronics (LAUX, LAUL, FDU Link, etc.), except for 100 MHz Ethernet ports. Built in the LRU is a full performance LAUX, optimizing the deployment of field hardware. Note If you want to use any early-production LRU (version A or B),

you have to return it to Sercel for upgrading. The LAUR-428 is capable of acquiring up to 30 channels of seismic data at 2 ms sampling rate in real-time. It is controlled by a master LRU, which can collect up to 240 channels at 2ms in real-time. You can choose between various configurations, depending on the required data rate and on the expected transmission range. Using a pocket terminal (FDPA428 Field Deployment Aid), the radio link can be set up adequately prior to connecting the LRU to the 428XL network. The parameter settings can also be changed through the 428XL GUI (in the LINE main window). The allowable temperature range for both operating and storage is -40°C to +70°C. The power supply used shall be compliant with the rules and regulations of the FCC, of Canada or with other local regulations. A 12 VDC battery can be used as a power supply. The LAUR and LRU operate in a relatively low radio frequency band (215 MHz to 250 MHz) featuring strong propagation characteristics. Within that band, they use a minimum 200-kHz bandwidth, on one or two channels, each with a 800-kHz maximum bandwidth, depending on

424

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Radio telemetry equipment > The LRU

the selected data rate. The user is responsible for inquiring about local radio frequency regulations and using the frequency band accordingly. Note The available frequency band depends on the regional settings

chosen by the user when installing software on the 428XL GUI and on the FDPA428 terminal. For compliance with Canadian and US communications regulations, the frequency band is limited to respectively: • Canada: 217 to 218 MHz and 219 to 220 MHz. • USA: 217 to 220 MHz (and 216 to 217 MHz by licence prior to January 01, 2002).

The LRU Whether it is used in “relay” mode or in “cell” mode, the LRU is a halfduplex transmission system. With “Field ON” activated in the Line main window on the 428XL GUI, the unit connected to the side towards the Central Unit continuously transmits a time tick signal (every 50 ms) that allows the other end to keep clock-synchronized. The LRU unit comes with standard 428XL Transverse (except 100 MHz Ethernet port), Line, Power and XDEV connectors. The Type-N, radio connector is waterproof when connected. Attention should be paid to put the cap in place on the radio connector whenever the unit is not in use, in order to keep the connector clean and the unit waterproof. The LRU operates from a 10.5 VDC to 15.0 VDC power supply voltage, with the following power consumption figures: • Master:

23 W,

• Slave:

80 W when retrieving,

• Sleep state:

1.2 W.

The weight of an LRU is 12.6 kg (27.8 lbs.)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

425

9

9

428XL Radio telemetry Radio telemetry equipment > The LRU

7-element Yagi antenna

12 V 6- to 8-m telescopic portable mast (less than 20 kg)

High Line

12 VDC A

Low Line

Tx

LAUX

Rx

High Line

12 VDC B

GND

XDEV

Figure 9-1 LRU

Two types of antenna can be used with the LRU: • A 7-element directional antenna and 6- to 8-m telescopic portable mast, typically intended for use in “relay” mode; • An omnidirectional antenna and mast extender (the same as with an LAUR), typically intended for use in “cell” mode. 426

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Radio telemetry equipment > The LAUR-428

The antenna impedance to be used is 50 Ohm. The maximum VSWR measured at the transceiver output must be less than 1.5:1 at the operating frequencies.

The LAUR-428 The LAUR allows seismic data acquisition and retrieval on radio line segments with true zero dead time, real-time QC (seismonitor) just like you were using wireline telemetry channels through an LAUL. You can deploy and check your radio line channels while taking shots. The LAUR is used in a radio cell, replying to queries from the LRU present in that cell and using a half-duplex transmission protocol. The clock in the LAUR is locked on that of the associated LRU, which continuously transmits a time tick signal (every 50 ms) for that purpose. The LAUR unit comes with standard 428XL Line, Power and XDEV connectors. The Type-N, radio connector is waterproof when connected. Attention should be paid to put the cap in place on the radio connector whenever the unit is not in use, in order to keep the connector clean and the unit waterproof. You can connect up to 30 channels on either side of the LAUR.

30 channels max.

30 channels max. Battery

Low Line port

High Line port

n+1 Toward lower receiver positions

n+2 Toward higher receiver positions

Figure 9-2 LAUR radio line segment

The LAUR’s built-in non-volatile data memory allows local storage of acquired channels, precluding any loss of data in the event of transmission or power supply failures. With lossless compression, up to 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

427

9

9

428XL Radio telemetry Radio telemetry equipment > The LAUR-428

1 hour of seismic data can be saved in the LAUR (with 18 channels @2 ms and a recording-to-operating time ratio of 6/10). Supplied along with each LAUR is an omnidirectional antenna. A mast extender is also supplied.

Antenna

The antenna impedance to be used is 50 Ohm. The maximum VSWR measured at the transceiver output must be less than 1.5:1 at the operating frequencies. A rooftop-mount kit including a whip antenna is also available (Part No. 1C61085838). See Rooftop-mount whip antenna (page 439).

The weight of an LAUR is 12.2 kg (26.8 lbs.).

mast extender

12 V

The LAUR operates from a 10.5 VDC to 15.0 VDC power supply voltage, with the following power consumption figures:

Figure 9-3 LAUR and antenna

• When retrieving:

40.6 W with 30 FDUs connected,

• Sleep state:

2.4 W with receive ON, 0.2 W without receiving,

428

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Theory of operation > Half-duplex

Theory of operation The 428XL radio telemetry equipment uses a half-duplex transmission protocol.

Half-duplex NCS DTS (Master)

(Slave)

LRU

LRU Figure 9-4 Radio Relay

NCS

DTS

(Master)

(Slave)

LRU

9

LAUR Figure 9-5 Radio Line segment cell

In the 428XL radio transmission protocol, time is shared between transmission of Master-to-Slave messages and transmission of Slaveto-Master messages. Master-to-Slave messages are called Network Control Sequences (NCS), used for synchronization, zero-time transmission and control. Slave-to-Master messages are called Data Transfer Sequences (DTS), used for data retrieval, seismonitor and collecting test results. Radio frame

(50 ms) NCS

DTS

(50 ms) NCS

DTS

time

Figure 9-6 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

429

9

428XL Radio telemetry Theory of operation > Frequency management

Typically, NCS messages are transmitted every 50 ms. In reply to an NCS message, the LAUR transmits a DTS message (1.5 to 40 ms long). The LAUR does not transmit its DTS until and unless its clock is locked onto that of the LRU.

Frequency management The RF transceiver in the LRU or LAUR uses a single 2-MHz band for both transmission and reception. That band is selected between 216 MHz and 249 MHz using the “Center Frequency” parameter. Note The available frequency band depends on the regional settings

chosen by the user when installing software on the 428XL GUI and on the FDPA428 terminal. For compliance with Canadian and US communications regulations, the frequency band is limited to respectively: • Canada: 217 to 218 MHz and 219 to 220 MHz. • USA: 217 to 220 MHz (and 216 to 217 MHz by licence prior to January 01, 2002). Within the 2-MHz bandwidth, you can choose which channel(s) to use for NCS and DTS messages, by specifying: • a Control Channel Frequency for NCS messages, • one or more Data Channel Frequencies for DTS messages (one for a radio relay, up to eight for a radio cell). Note Because the LRU or LAUR uses a half-duplex protocol, you

can choose the same frequency for the Control Channel and the Data Channel. The necessary bandwidth (0.2 to 0.8 MHz) for a Data Channel depends on the expected Data Rate (256, 512, 1024 or 2048 kbps). See the diagram on page 431.

430

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Theory of operation > Frequency management

Default channel

Center Freq.

Available channels

Control Freq.

NCS

Center F. -1 MHz

- 0.8

- 0.6

- 0.4

- 0.2

0.2 MHz

+0.4

+0.6

+0.8

+0.4

+0.6

+0.8

Center F. +1 MHz

Data Channel Freq. # 1

DTS 256 k Center F. -1 MHz

- 0.8

- 0.6

- 0.4

- 0.2

+0.2

Data Channel Freq. # 1

Center F. +1 MHz

Data Channel Freq. # 2

DTS 512 k Center F. -1 MHz

- 0.8

- 0.6

- 0.4

- 0.2

+0.2

+0.4

+0.6

+0.8

Center F. +1 MHz

Data Channel Freq. # 1

DTS 1024 k Center F. -1 MHz

- 0.8

- 0.6

- 0.4

- 0.2

+0.2

Data Channel Freq. # 1

+0.4

+0.6

+0.8

Center F. +1 MHz

Data Channel Freq. # 2

DTS 2048 k Center F. -1 MHz

- 0.8

- 0.6

- 0.4

- 0.2

+0.2

+0.4

+0.6

+0.8

Center F. +1 MHz

Figure 9-7 LRU Relay data channels 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

431

9

9

428XL Radio telemetry Theory of operation > Frequency management

IMPORTANT

The two LRU units making up a radio relay should have the same frequency and data rate settings, and the same Cell Number. Each LAUR should have the same Cell Number and Center Frequency as its master LRU. The LAUR uses QPSK modulation @ 256 kbps, or DQPSK modulation @ 1024 kbps. The LAUR must have the same frequency and data rate settings as the associated master LRU. Center Freq.

Default channel

Available channels

Control Freq. NCS

Center F. -1 MHz

DTS

- 0.8

- 0.6

- 0.4

- 0.2

0.2 MHz

+0.4

+0.6

+0.8

+0.4

+0.6

+0.8

Center F. +1 MHz

Data Channel Freq. # 1

256 k (QPSK)

Center F. -1 MHz

- 0.8

- 0.6

- 0.4

- 0.2

+0.2

Center F. +1 MHz

Data Channel Freq. # 1 DTS 1024 k (DQPSK) Center F. -1 MHz

- 0.8

- 0.6

- 0.4

- 0.2

+0.2

+0.4

+0.6

+0.8

Center F. +1 MHz

Figure 9-8 LAUR data channels

432

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Theory of operation > Desensitization

Desensitization Note that the maximum covered range may be shorter on desensitized channels (i. e. channels on which the strength of the received signal is normally decreased by the presence of spurious signals from the 8-MHz and 33-MHz master oscillators in the LRU). In the table below are the channels that may be affected by desentization, depending on the selected Data Rate.

Centre Freq. (MHz)

Data Rate (kb/s)

Desensitization

256 & 512

affects NCS & DTS

1024 & 2048

DTS

256 & 512

NCS & DTS

1024 & 2048

DTS

256 & 512

NCS & DTS

1024 & 2048

DTS

256 & 512

NCS & DTS

1024 & 2048

DTS

256 & 512

NCS & DTS

1024 & 2048

DTS

221.184

229.376

233.309

237.568

245.760

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

on channels 221.2 221.0 221.1 221.2 221.3 221.4 229.4 229.2 229.3 229.4 229.5 229.6 233.3 233.1 233.2 233.3 233.4 233.5 237.6 237.4 237.5 237.6 237.7 237.8 245.7 245.8 245.6 245.7 245.8 245.9 246.0

9

433

428XL Radio telemetry Typical setups >

Typical setups CAUTION

If you wish to test a radio relay through a wireline link between the coaxial connectors of two LRUs, use a 70 dB (minimum), 20 W attenuator.

Attenuator

20 W 70 dB min. 12 V

12 V Figure 9-9 Test setup

CAUTION For optimal performance of the radio link, do not place any electric device (including LRU, FDPA428, etc.) on the same side as the radiating elements!

NO

Do not raise any antenna near electric power distribution lines!

LRU

LRU

12 V

12 V

The antenna should be at the top the mast.

YES

8m

8m

9

LRU LRU 12 V

Use the whole cable length to keep clear from the antenna.

12 V

Figure 9-10 434

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Typical setups > Basic Radio Relay

CAUTION

Antenna height is limited to 6.1 metre near airports. WARNING

LRU antennas should be kept at least 25 m away from any FDU. LAUR antennas should be kept at least 10 m away from any FDU

Below are typical examples of setups along with the associated specifications in terms of covered range and transmission capacity.

Basic Radio Relay 7-element Yagi antenna

Performs LAUX and radio functions 1 See below

(Master) Wireline to recorder truck

(Slave)

LRU

9

LRU 12 V

Coax downlead

Battery

12 V

Figure 9-11 LRU in “Relay” mode

Typical performance (Ground-Wave propagation above flat terrain): 1

- Range: 24 km, 60 Ch @ 2 ms, Real time. - Range: 10 km, 240 Ch @ 2 ms, Real time. See CAUTION on page 434. For the Left/Right and Low/High ports of the LRU, connect as usual (Left to Right; Low to High). The LRU with a wireline connection to the recorder truck must be set to the “Master” mode. See LRU Main Menu (page 459). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

435

9

428XL Radio telemetry Typical setups > Basic Radio Line Segment Cell

Basic Radio Line Segment Cell Omnidirectional antenna

Performs LAUX and radio functions 2 See below (Master) Wireline to recorder truck

LRU Coax downlead

Line (30 channels max)

12 V

LAUR

Line (30 channels max)

12 V

Battery

Figure 9-12 Radio Line Segment Cell

Typical performance (Ground-Wave propagation above flat terrain): 2

- Short Range: 2 km to 3 km, 60 Ch @ 2ms, Real time, using 2.5-m high LRU antenna. - Medium Range: 3 km to 8 km, 60 Ch @ 2ms, Real time, using 8-m portable LRU antenna mast. - Long Range: 8 km to 16 km, 60 Ch @ 2ms, Real time, using 30-m LRU antenna mast. See CAUTION on page 434. The LRU must be set to the “Master” mode. See LRU Main Menu (page 459).

436

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Typical setups > Radio relay in series connection

Radio relay in series connection To extend the relay range, you can use two radio relays in series connection as shown below. Requirements - At least 300 m between antennas, - At least 13 MHz frequency separation. Wireline to recorder truck

3 See below 3 See below

(Master)

LRU 12 V Battery

(Slave)

(Master)

LRU

LRU

12 V For optimal performance, use vertical polarization in one cell and horizontal in the other.

12 V

(Slave)

LRU 12 V

Line or Transverse ports

9

Figure 9-13 Two-mast series setup

Typical performance of each radio relay (Ground-Wave propagation above flat terrain): 3

- Range: 24 km, 60 Ch @ 2 ms, Real time. - Range: 10 km, 240 Ch @ 2 ms, Real time. Setups with more than two radio relays in series connection have not been tested yet. See CAUTION on page 434.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

437

9

428XL Radio telemetry Antennas > OWFD1.5 antenna

Antennas The LRU is used as a point-to-point radio relay, or as a master transceiver in a radio cell. For a stationary relay, directional antennas are used, allowing maximum performance and protection from interference. Where one of the two LRUs involved in a radio relay is subject to roving (Marine, Shallow-water operation, etc.), or for an LAUR mounted on a vibrator, omni-directional antennas are more suitable.

OWFD1.5 antenna • Electrical specifications - Single band, 215 to 250 MHz, no tuning required. - Impedance: 50 Ω. - VSWR: < 1.5. - Gain: 0 dBd, tilt 0°. - Polarization: vertical. - Pattern: omnidirectional, ripple < 1dB. - No ground plane required, apart from LAUR housing (380x380x150, aluminium, lying flat on the ground). - Static electricity dissipation to ground. - Connection: N-type connector, male, modified. - Max input power: 40 W. • Physical specifications - Operating temperature: -40 to + 70°C. - Height: 1.68 m (66 inches). Withstands 80 km/hr wind. - Sealing: IP 66 standard (antenna connected). Salt spray resistant. 438

Figure 9-14

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Antennas > Rooftop-mount whip antenna

Rooftop-mount whip antenna For an LAUR to record vibrator motion signals, a rooftopmount kit is available (Part No. 1C61085838) including: - a whip antenna (P/N 99-102202); - an N-type coaxial adapter (P/N 99-100800); - two N-type coaxial plugs (P/N 5050296); - a 10-m length of coaxial cable; - a DC/DC 24/12V, 15A converter (P/N 364000007).

N- adapter. See details in Figure 9-17 on page 440

Figure 9-15

N-plug. See details in Figure 9-18 on page 441

DC/DC 24/12V converter

9 Ground

Battery (24V)

LAUR

Figure 9-16

Specifications - Single band, 215 to 230 MHz, no tuning required. - Impedance: 50 Ω. - VSWR: < 1.5:1. - Gain: 2 dB with a ground plane, otherwise unity. - Polarization: vertical. - Pattern: omnidirectional. - Height: 0.68 m (66 inches). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

439

9

428XL Radio telemetry Antennas > Rooftop-mount whip antenna

Installation 1.

Drill a 16 mm hole in the mounting surface (10 mm thick max.).

2.

Thread the hex nut onto the bulkhead connector and place the lockwasher onto the nut.

3.

Insert the bulkhead connector into the hole from underneath.

4.

Place the O-ring onto the bulkhead connector.

5.

Screw the brass mount flush onto the bulkhead connector.

6.

Tighten the hex nut in place.

7.

Place the gasket onto the brass mount.

8.

Screw the antenna base to the brass mount. Gasket O-ring Antenna base

Brass mount Contact pin Gasket

O-ring Brass mount flush with bulkhead connector Rooftop mount bracket

Lockwasher Hex nut Bulkhead connector

Figure 9-17 Bulkhead connector assembly instructions

440

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Antennas > Rooftop-mount whip antenna

A

Nut

B

Washer

C

Gasket

D

Top hat

E

F

Insulator

Contact pin

G

H

Insulator

Body

4.3 (.169)

1. Strip as shown.

A

B

C

2. Slide "A" "B" "C" over cable.

5.0 (.197)

Braiding C

3. Wrap the braiding backward over "C". 4. Strip the dielectric as shown.

9 D Braiding

E

F

5. Slide "D" between braiding and dielectric. 6. Put centre pin "F" and Teflon "E" on center conductor Y

7. Solder centre pin in "Y". A

G

H

8. Slide "G" into connector body "H". 9. Finally screw "A" on the connector body "H".

Figure 9-18 N-plug assembly instructions (JYEBAO)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

441

9

428XL Radio telemetry Antennas > Rooftop-mount whip antenna

Clamp nut

Washer

Gasket

Stripping a inch 0.394

b 0.177

c 0.059

mm

4.5

1.5

10

Braid clamp sleeve

Contact pin

Body

a

1. Strip the cable as shown (a). 2. Slide the clamp nut, washer and gasket onto the cable.

c

3. Slide the braid clamp sleeve over the braid. 4. Fold back the braid and trim off surplus braid.

b

5. Trim back the inner jacket as shown (b). Solder

6. Solder the inner conductor into the contact pin.

7. Screw the sub-assembly into the body. (Recommended torque 44.25 in.lb).

Figure 9-19 N-plug assembly instructions (Radiall)

442

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Antennas > Directional antenna

Directional antenna Below are the specifications of a wide-band, 7-element Yagi antenna available from SERCEL. This directional antenna can be used either horizontally or vertically. A 50-ohm impedance coax cable should be used to connect the antenna to the LRU. To increase the system performance, a low-attenuation, double-shield coax cable is recommended. Prior to using the antenna, especially after assembly, a VSWR check should be done, including the coax cable. The maximum VSWR within the bandwidth of interest should be less than 1.5:1 to work in good conditions.

Specifications • Type:

Wideband 7-Element Yagi (Sercel P/N: 07-820070-001).

• Frequency:

215 to 240 MHz.

• Power Gain:

10.5 dBi, Center frequency.

• VSWR:

1.6:1 Max.

9

1.3:1 Center frequency. • Front-to-back Ratio:

20.45 dB, Center frequency

• 3-dB beamwidth:

E = 48 degrees. H = 57 degrees

• Feed Impedance:

50 ohm.

• Connector type

Type UHF.

• Antenna Boom length:

1.9 m (75").

• Longest Element:

68 cm (26.772").

• Shortest Element:

48 cm (18.898'').

• Weight:

900 g (2 lb).

• Maximum mast OD:

5 cm (2").

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

443

9

428XL Radio telemetry Antennas > Directional antenna

Assembly Instructions Your 7-Element antenna exhibits full gain and low VSWR across the entire rated bandwidth. No re-tuning is necessary or desirable.

Before you begin… Select an assembly area large enough and comfortable to accommodate overall antenna dimensions. Some simple tools are required: a tape measure, screwdriver, 9 mm and 12.7 mm nutdrivers. To avoid damage to antenna components, be aware that most components need only be moderately hand-tightened with screwdriver, not to over-torque nuts and damage components. Thoroughly unpack shipping box and check components and hardware against the parts list.

444

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Antennas > Directional antenna

Description

Qty

Description

Qty

Boom Element #1 Element #2 Element #3 Element #4 Element #5 Element #6 Element #7 5/16” (.8 cm) I.D. lockwasher 5/16” (.8 cm) I.D. hex nut 5/16” (.8 cm) I.D. flat steel washer #10-24 x 2” (5.0 cm) machine screw

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 6

#10-24 hex nut 7/8” (2.2 cm) formed aluminum bracket Aluminum half washer #10 internal-tooth lockwasher 2” (5.0 cm) I.D. x 4” (10.1 cm) U-bolt Mast clamp for 2” (5.0 cm) x 4” (10.1 cm) U-bolt Boom clamp for 2” (5.0 cm) x 4” (10.1 cm) U-bolt 1” (2.5 cm) plastic cap ½” (1.2 cm) plastic cap

6 6 6 6 1 1 1 2 2

Element #1 (Reflector)

Element #2 (Driven)

Element #3

Element #4

Element #5

Element #6

Element #7

Figure 9-20 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

445

9

9

428XL Radio telemetry Antennas > Directional antenna

Reflector Element Assembly The reflector (longest element) with a number of 1 is mounted at the U-bolt end of the boom.

Boom

Plastic cap

Figure 9-21

Driven Element Assembly Orient the coax connector to the U-bolt end of the boom.

Driven element

Figure 9-22

Director Element assembly Director elements 3 to 7.

446

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Antennas > Directional antenna

Mast Mount The antenna uses a single U-bolt and bracket assembly.

Mast clamp

Boom clamp

The antenna may be mounted for horizontal or vertical polarization.

Figure 9-23

For vertical polarization. Mount driven element with the ReddiMatch rod pointing up. Keep the mast mount bracket on the opposite side of the boom from the elements. This will help to minimize pattern distortion from metallic mast.

9

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

447

9

428XL Radio telemetry Antenna mast > MTB1590S list of material

Antenna mast A portable 6- to 8-metre telescopic mast is available from SERCEL. It is easily and rapidly raised (less than half an hour).

MTB1590S list of material Item

Qty

Description

Reference

1

1

Base plate

11255

2

1

Telescopic mast pillar

75540C5

3

1

Guy collar

11265

4

3

Guy stake coupler

12046C5

5

6

Guy stake

61730C5

6

3

Lower guy cable

63656

7

3

Upper guy cable

63655

8

1

Protection canvas

11481C5

9

1

Accessories bag

15764

10

1

Inventory for accessories bag

31210

11

3

Sand bag

11257C5

12

1

2kg hammer

9981801

13

1

Operator’s manual in English language

NM76606

14

2

Cable strap (Velcro)

9981409

15

1

Pin for stake removal

12623C5

8

9

11

12

13

10 7 6 5 4

3 2 1

Figure 9-24 Figure 9-25 448

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Antenna mast > Mast installation instructions

Mast installation instructions Preliminary checks Proceed with a full inventory of mast parts and check: • The condition of the guy cables (no cut yards). • The condition of the stakes and mast sections.

Site selection • Night and day, avoid the deployment of the mast under or near electrical power lines • Check ground stability. The field must be the more stable and the flattest possible.

Mast preparation • Place the base plate at the centre of the deployment site.

9

Align

• Drive the three anchor stakes in the holes of the base plate. • Insert the mast on the base plate and turn the mast half round. • Install the guy collar (must rest on top of bigger tube).

Figure 9-26 Installation of base plate

• Hook the lower guys on the guy collar, passing the knots through the slots. • Unreel the three guy cables in three directions at 120° (use the directions given by the base plate). • Drive in the guy stakes through the stake coupler, giving an inclination to the stakes of about 30°, the point directed to the mast.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

449

9

428XL Radio telemetry Antenna mast > Mast installation instructions

• Attach the lower guys to the stake couplers. • Attach the top guys to the mast top section (the knots must fit in the slots). • Unreel the top guys but do not attach them to the anchorage points. Figure 9-27 Anchor point

• Install the antenna and its coaxial cable on the mast.

Mast deployment The deployment begins with the top section (dia. 40 mm). • Lift the tubes one by one and lock each section by turning it clockwise a quarter of turn, holding the next section below it. Make sure each section is well locked before continuing the deployment.

Figure 9-28 : Locking of elements through bayonets system

• When all sections are secured, attach the guy cables to the stake couplers.

450

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Antenna mast > Mast installation instructions

Mast recovery • Release the top guy cables. • Lower the mast, beginning with the lower section. • Remove the guy cables (top and lower) from the mast top section. • Remove the guy collar. • Extract the guy stakes from the ground. CAUTION: do not slam on stake sides with the hammer.

Crosspin

2 Pull

2

Twist

Stake head

(+/- 30°)

1

Hole

Rotate (+/- 180°)

Guy position anchor stake

Figure 9-29 : Stake removal procedure

• Reel the guy cables on their support. • Protect the mast pillar in its canvas. • Remove the anchor stakes.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

451

9

9

428XL Radio telemetry Antenna mast > Mast installation instructions

• Store all accessories in the bag, proceeding to the inventory and, if necessary, to the washing of the material.

Troubleshooting The most important problem on the field might be the locking of an element, caused by: • The ice: lightly slam on the mast tubes with the hammer to break the ice. • Dust or sand between the tubes: wash the mast. It might be necessary to dismount the different tubes. This operation is performed easily by removing the four screws on mast bottom and the protection cap. When there are one or two sections locked, you can always try to deploy the mast with the remaining sections.

452

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The Field Deployment Aid Terminal for LRU and LAUR

Deployment using the FDPA428 The Field Deployment Aid Terminal for LRU and LAUR The Field Deployment Aid (FDPA) 428 is a pocket terminal (GoBook Q200 handheld PC with FDPA428 software) that connects to the XDEV port of an LRU or LAUR (Figure 9-30). It allows you to set the radio frequency (RF) communication parameters of the radio unit (LRU or LAUR), run basic radio tests, set remote units to a sleep or wakeup state (if LRU master), and/or set marker information (if LAUR). Note The handheld PC complies with FCC part 15, Canada ICS-003

class B and NMB-003 class B regulations.

Connecting the FDPA428 Connect the right-hand port of the handheld PC (ruggedized port of the GoBook Q200) to the XDEV socket of the radio unit, using the cable provided. This connection turns on the power supply in the radio unit. Note Be sure the LRU or LAUR is disconnected from the 428XL

network (no radio or wireline link). Note A 12 VDC voltage should be fed to one of the 12 VDC inputs

of the radio unit. Note The GoBook operates from its built-in rechargeable battery. For

information about batteries in the GoBook, see GoBook Q200 (page 317).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

453

9

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > Connecting the FDPA428

GoBook XDEV Port

12 VDC LAUR 12 VDC

XDEV Port

LRU

12 VDC

Figure 9-30 FDPA428 with LRU or LAUR

IMPORTANT

Be sure the handheld PC’s built-in batteries are properly charged; otherwise, it will not be able to turn on the power supply in the radio unit.

454

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > Getting Started

Getting Started To install FDPA428 software on the handheld PC, see Installing GoBook PC applications (page 317).

On a GoBook Q200, select the FDPA428 icon from the Start menu as shown in Figure 9-31. This selection launches the FDPA428 application. The Sercel FDPA splash screen (Figure 9-32) briefly appears, followed by the serial communication screen (Figure 9-33).

Figure 9-31 Launching the FDPA428 Application

9

Figure 9-32 Splash Screen 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

455

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > Getting Started

Figure 9-33 Serial Communication Screen

Serial Menu When the radio unit is connected, the operating system boots up, displaying a succession of messages (see Figure 9-34). Notice that the Serial Port Status LED temporarily turns yellow while the radio unit is booting.

Figure 9-34 Booting Up

456

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > Getting Started

If no serial information is received within 15 seconds, an error message appears, prompting the user to Retry or Cancel (Figure 935). Cancelling closes the FDPA428 application. Retrying allows the user more time to power on or reconnect the radio unit.

Figure 9-35 No Serial Communication Found

License Menu Note Every time you start the

9

FDPA428, the program reads license information from a file (key.dat) saved on the hard disk. If for any reason the key.dat file has been deleted or the license information is incorrect, the Enter License screen appears (Figure 9-36): If this screen appears, enter the license code that came with your FDPA428 and click OK. If you Figure 9-36 Enter License Screen have any difficulty recovering the code, you can get it again from SERCEL; you simply have to supply the Sercel Serial Number displayed on the GoBook. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

457

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > Getting Started

Note If you restart the FDPA428 with a radio unit already connected,

a message may appear asking you to unplug the computer and plug it back. (Connect the FDPA to the radio unit. If already connected, disconnect and reconnect). Note If the boot program fails, unplug the power cord from the radio

unit and then plug it back in.

Power Up Menu After the boot is completed successfully, the radio unit generates a POWER UP command containing information about the identity of the radio unit, its power supply voltage, and the results from its self-tests. If any self-test fails, additional error information displays. Figure 9-37 shows examples of the results from POWER UP from an LRU and LAUR. Click OK to close the screen. Click Refresh to re-retrieve the POWER UP information, notably the battery level.

Figure 9-37 Power Up Results

IMPORTANT

See Set Radio Area on page 469 to select the appropriate frequency band for compliance with local regulations. 458

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > LRU Main Menu

LRU Main Menu After the POWER UP has completed and the FDPA428 is connected to an LRU, the LRU main menu (Figure 9-38) appears. If the FDPA428 is connected to an LAUR, go to LAUR Main Menu on page 471. Note that an LRU begins in Slave mode. If the Master mode is desired to control another LRU in Relay mode (see Figure 9-11 on page 435) or LAURs in Cell mode (see Figure 9-12 on page 436), click the Set Master button.

9 Figure 9-38 LRU Main Menu

From the main menu, you can change the LRU RF parameters by clicking the Set Parameters button and entering information in the Set Parameters menu (see Figure 9-39 on page 460).

Other Main Menu Screens Clicking the Utility tab brings up the Utility screen described in The Utility Menu on page 466. The Wakeup/Sleep tab is enabled if this is an LRU Master. Clicking this tab brings up the Wakeup/Sleep screen described on The Wakeup/Sleep Menu on page 470.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

459

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The LRU Set Parameters Menu

The LRU Set Parameters Menu An LRU can be set up to be in either Relay mode or Cell mode (Figure 939). In Relay mode, the LRU is either a Master unit communicating to an LRU Slave unit, or a Slave unit communicating to an LRU Master unit. No other radio units are allowed. In Cell mode, the LRU is a Master unit communicating to a cell of LAURs.

Figure 9-39 LRU Set Parameters Menu

In either Relay or Cell mode, the User option in the Advanced Params menu allows the user to modify additional parameters. The Default option displays these parameters, but does not allow the user to change them (Figure 9-40 and Figure 9-41).

460

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The LRU Set Parameters Menu

Figure 9-40 Relay Mode Frequency Display

9

Figure 9-41 Cell Mode Frequency Display

Click Flash to permanently save the RF parameters into non-volatile memory (flash). Thus, if the LRU is powered off and on again, the latest modifications are recalled. A popup question appears to confirm this 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

461

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The LRU Set Parameters Menu

action, as shown in Figure 9-42. Click Yes to continue with the Flash operation. Click No to abort this operation. If this LRU is a Master (Relay or Cell Mode), the confirmation button and question are “Flash LRU Cell.” Clicking this button and confirming the popup question saves the RF parameters in the Master LRU, as well as all LAURs currently linked in this radio cell.

Figure 9-42 Confirming Flash LRU

Click OK to temporarily save the parameters to local memory. That is, the LRU will use the modified parameters, but these parameters are not stored into flash. The next time the LRU is powered off and on again, the current modifications are lost, and the previously stored RF information in flash will be used. Click Cancel to close this screen and not save any modifications made.

462

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > LRU Parameters

LRU Parameters See also Theory of operation (page 429).

Cell Number (Allowable range 1 to 31). You must enter a distinct Cell Number for each LRU radio relay or cell in the 428XL network so that it can be identified by the 428XL GUI. That is, the two LRUs (Master and Slave) in a radio relay must have the same Cell Number that is different from any other Cell Number used in the 428XL network. Likewise, all radio units in a radio cell (LRU Master and LAURs) must have the same Cell Number, but that Cell Number must be different from any other Cell Number used in the 428XL network.

Center Frequency (Allowable range 216.0 to 249.0 MHz, in 0.1-MHz steps). Center frequency of the 2-MHz band within which to choose the transmission channels for the radio relay or cell, depending on the frequencies used by other radio relays or cells and on the desired data rate. See Figure 97 on page 431.

Data Rate (Available options: 256, 512, 1024, 2048 kbps for Radio Relay, 256 kbps for Radio Cell). • For a radio relay, the 512 and 2048 options require two data transmission channels. See Figure 9-7 on page 431. • For a radio cell, the 256 kbps option requires up to 8 data transmission channels. See Figure 9-8 on page 432.

TX Power Level (Available options: Standard, Low; defaults to Standard). • Low: Transmit power is 1 mW (0 dBm) for all radio units in this cell. This option is helpful for tests over a short range. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

463

9

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > LRU Parameters

• Standard: Transmit power is 6 W (38 dBm) for all radio units in this cell. For standard RF transmission conditions.

Number of Subframes (Future release, available options: 1, 2 or 4.).

Subframe Number (Future release, available options: 1 to the value specified for the “Nb of Radio Subframes.”).

Privacy Code (Available options: 0 to 7). Address number you assign to your crew in order to distinguish it from any other crew with radio units in the vicinity.

Control Frequency (Relay Mode Only) (Adjustable from Center Freq –0.8 to Center Freq +0.8 MHz in 0.2MHz steps; defaults to Center Freq). Center frequency of the 0.2-MHz channel is used to transmit network control messages (NCS). Example: if Center Freq = 218 MHz, the list of available Control frequencies are 217.2, 217.4, 217.6, 217.8, 218.0, 218.2, 218.4, 218.6, 218.8 MHz. See Figure 9-7 on page 431.

Data Channel #1 Frequency (Relay Mode Only) Center frequency of the 0.2-MHz channel is used to transmit data retrieval messages (DTS) (Table 9-1). See Figure 9-7 on page 431. Table 9-1 Data Channel #1 Frequency Data Rate 256

512

1024

2048

Data From Channel #1 Center Freq 0.8 Freq to Center Freq +0.8 in 0.2 MHz steps

From Center Freq 0.8 to Center Freq +0.8 in 0.2 MHz steps

From Center Freq 0.5 to Center Freq +0.5 in 0.2 MHz steps

From Center Freq 0.5 to Center Freq +0.5 in 0.2 MHz steps

Default

Center Freq

Center Freq + 0.1 MHz

Center Freq –0.3 MHz

464

Center Freq

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > LRU Parameters

Data Channel #2 Frequency (Relay Mode only) Center frequency of the second 0.2-MHz channel is used to transmit data retrieval messages (DTS), depending on the selected data rate (Table 9-2). See Figure 9-7 on page 431. Table 9-2 Data Channel #2 Frequency Data Rate 256

512

1024

Data Not required Channel #2 Freq Default

From Center Freq 0.8 to Center Freq +0.8 in 0.2 MHz steps Center Freq +0.2 MHz

Not required From Center Freq 0.5 to Center Freq +0.5 in 0.2 MHz steps Center Freq +0.3 MHz

2048

Where Data Channel #2 Freq is required, the system checks that the difference between Data Channel #1 Freq and Data Channel #2 Freq is at least 0.2 MHz at 512 kbits/s and 0.8 MHz at 2048 kbits/s. Note The available frequency band depends on the regional settings

chosen by the user when installing software on the 428XL GUI and on the FDPA428 terminal. For compliance with Canadian and U.S. communications regulations, the frequency band is limited to

9

• Canada: 217 to 218 MHz and 219 to 220 MHz • USA: 217 to 220 MHz (and 216 to 217 MHz by licence prior to January 01, 2002).

Frequency (Cell Mode Only) List of frequencies used to transmit control messages (NCS) from the LRU to LAURs or transmit data retrieval messages (DTS) from LAURs back to the LRU. See Figure 9-8 on page 432.

Control (Cell Mode Only) Selection that specifies which one frequency is to be used as the control frequency (NCS). This frequency is used to send messages from the LRU to the LAURs. See Figure 9-8 on page 432.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

465

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The Utility Menu

Data (Cell Mode Only) Selection(s) that specify which frequencies (maximum of eight) are to be used to transmit data retrieval messages (DTS) from LAURs back to the LRU.

The Utility Menu On the main menu, clicking the Utility tab (Figure 9-43) brings up a screen that allows the user to start a Loop Test (see The LRU Loop Test Menu on page 467), Set Radio Area (see Set Radio Area on page 469), or Run RF Spectrum (future button, not shown).

Figure 9-43 Utility Menu

466

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The LRU Loop Test Menu

The LRU Loop Test Menu This menu lets you check RF communications between the attached LRU and any distant radio unit. If communications are established with a distant radio unit, the Loop test returns the attenuation of the signal (in dB) and rate of retries. If the LRU is a Master, a list of LAURs and Slave LRU displays in the Remote Unit # selection box. If no LAUR or Slave LRU has been detected, the message “Waiting for Remote Unit” displays. Select the desired Remote Unit and click the Start button to initiate the Loop test. You can abort the Loop test by clicking Stop. See Figure 9-44 and Figure 9-45 on page 468. If the LRU is a Slave, click the Start button to initiate the Loop test and Stop to abort it. If communications can be established with the master LRU, the Loop test returns the identification of the Master LRU, the attenuation of the signal (in dB), and the rate of retries. The Reset button resets the information displayed. The Close button closes this menu.

9

Figure 9-44 Starting an LRU Loop Test

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

467

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The LRU Loop Test Menu

Figure 9-45 LRU Loop Test

IMPORTANT

The Loop test is not possible on a distant radio unit that is in Sleep mode. To cancel the Sleep mode, disconnect the radio unit and connect it back or wake up the radio unit with the Individual Wakeup button (see The Wakeup/Sleep Menu on page 470).

468

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > Set Radio Area

Set Radio Area Use this menu to choose the appropriate frequency band for compliance with the local regulations of the country in which the radio unit is to be used (Figure 9-46): • Canada: 217 to 218 MHz and 219 to 220 MHz • USA: 217 to 220 MHz (and 216 to 217 MHz by licence prior to January 01, 2002). • Other: 215 to 250 MHz

9 Figure 9-46 Set Radio Area Menu

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

469

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The Wakeup/Sleep Menu

The Wakeup/Sleep Menu If the LRU is in Master mode, the Wakeup/Sleep tab is enabled and allows the user to put remote radio units into sleep or wakeup states (Figure 9-47). This menu allows the user to put a whole radio cell or individual LAURs to sleep and then wake them back up again. When LAURs are detected by the LRU, they are put in the Individual Sleep list. The user may select one of the LAURs displayed in this list and then click the Individual Sleep button to put this one LAUR to sleep. This LAUR is then added to the Individual Wakeup list. Likewise, if an LAUR is asleep, the user may click the Individual Wakeup button to wake up this one LAUR. To put a whole radio cell to sleep, the user may click the Cell Sleep button. To wake up the radio cell, click the Cell Wakeup button. Note The Individual Sleep and Cell Sleep methods cannot be used

together. All cells in Individual Sleep should be woken up before Cell Sleep can be used.

Figure 9-47 Wakeup/Sleep Menu

470

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > LAUR Main Menu

LAUR Main Menu After the POWER UP has completed and the FDPA428 is connected to an LAUR, the main LAUR menu appears (Figure 9-48). If the FDPA428 is connected to an LRU, go to LRU Main Menu on page 459.

9

Figure 9-48 LAUR Main Menu

From the main menu, you can change the LAUR RF parameters by clicking the Set Parameters button and entering information in the Set Parameters menu. (See The LAUR Set Parameters Menu on page 472). Specific to the LAUR is marker information—Receiver Line and Receiver Point. On startup, the existing marker information is retrieved from the LAUR and displayed on the main menu. To change this information, modify the Receiver Line and Point numbers and click the Set Marker button. When the LAUR is reconnected to the 428XL network, this information is reported back to the 428XL GUI. Like the main menu for LRU, the Utility tab contains Loop Test and Set Radio Area buttons (see Figure 9-43 on page 466). Click these buttons to bring up the associated menus.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

471

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The LAUR Set Parameters Menu

The LAUR Set Parameters Menu The LAUR Set Parameters menu (Figure 9-49) contains many of the same parameters as for the LRU. See LRU Parameters on page 463 for details on these parameters. Note An LAUR is a slave of a master LRU that is configured in Cell

mode. The Cell Number and Center Frequency must be the same as the master LRU.

Figure 9-49 LAUR Set Parameters Menu

Click Flash to permanently save the RF parameters into non-volatile memory (flash). Thus, if the LAUR is powered off and on again, the latest modifications are recalled. A popup question appears to confirm this action, as seen in Figure 9-50. Click Yes to continue with the Flash procedure. Click No to abort this procedure.

472

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The LAUR Set Parameters Menu

Figure 9-50 Confirming Flash LAUR

Click OK to temporarily save the parameters to local memory. That is, the LAUR will use the modified parameters, but these parameters are not stored into flash. The next time the LAUR is powered off and on again, the current modifications are lost, and the previously stored RF information in flash will be used. Click Cancel to close this screen and not save any modifications made.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

473

9

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > The LAUR Loop Test Menu

The LAUR Loop Test Menu This menu lets you check RF communications between the attached LAUR and the master LRU (Figure 9-51). If communications are established with the master LRU, the Loop test returns the identification of the Master LRU, the attenuation of the signal (in dB), and the rate of retries. Click the Start button to initiate the Loop test, Stop to abort it.

Figure 9-51 LAUR Loop Test Menu

474

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > Main Menu Pulldown Items

Main Menu Pulldown Items Figure 9-52 shows the Main Menu pulldown items.

Figure 9-52 Main Menu Pulldown Items

Click Setup and then Show Power Up to redisplay the last POWER UP results or to retrieve POWER UP results again. One purpose for this selection would be to re-examine the battery level of the connected unit. Click Setup and then Get Marker to get the Receiver Line and Point information from an LAUR. Normally, this function is not used because the Get Marker function is automatically run on startup. Click Setup and then Set Password to display the License menu to update the license with a newer one. Click Help and then About to display the FDPA428 version currently running on this GoBook.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

475

9

9

428XL Radio telemetry Deployment using the FDPA428 > Closing the FDPA428 Application

Closing the FDPA428 Application To close the FDPA428 application, either click the X in the upper right corner of the screen or click Setup and then Quit from the menu bar. The user is prompted to confirm whether the application should be closed, as shown in Figure 9-53.

Figure 9-53 FDPA428 Close

476

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

10

LLX400 laser link This chapter describes the LLX400 laser link and provides the necessary instructions to implement it as a wireless link in an 8 or 16 Mbps Line or a 100 Mbps Transverse. It includes the following sections: • Introduction (page 478) • Installation (page 481) • Setting up an LLX400 laser link (page 486) • Specifications (page 493)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

477

10

LLX400 laser link Introduction >

Introduction The LLX400 comes complete with two laser transceivers, each associated with an LXIU-400 interface unit.

LXIU

Laser transceiver

Figure 10-1 LLX400

The LLX400 is a wireless bridge relying on infrared laser transceivers, therefore not requiring any frequency licensing. It can be used to relay the data from an 8 or 16 Mbps Line or a 100 Mbps Transverse, across a river or a canyon for instance, over ranges from 200 m to 3000 m in clear conditions. At either end of the link, each laser unit is equipped with both a transmitter and a receiver (laser transceiver), allowing full duplex communications. The laser transceiver comes in two designs: • Later-design: A2000 from CableFree,Wireless Excellence. • Early-design (discontinued): Terescope (MRV); WARNING

The laser transceiver is designed, built, and tested to be eye safe, even if the output beams are viewed directly, provided that no magnifying optics are used. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS (BINOCULARS OR TELESCOPES).

478

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LLX400 laser link Introduction >

A2000 laser transceiver from CableFree

TereScope laser transceiver

Figure 10-2 Laser transceiver

10 Figure 10-3 LXIU-400

The laser unit connects to the telemetry Line or Transverse through an LXIU-400 (Laser Transceiver Interface Unit) secured to the laser transceiver, used for interfacing the laser transceiver with an LAUL or LAUX. When inserted in a Line, the LLX400 also allows remote control of the power supply for the part of spread located on the other side of the wireless link. In a Transverse, the power to the associated LAUX is turned on as you connect the red plug of the cord between the LXIU and the LAUX. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

479

10

LLX400 laser link Introduction >

Below is the part list for each type of laser link. Table 10-1 CableFree laser link (Part Number 10002158) Item

Part No.

Quantity

Tripod stand LLX-400 transport case

10002030 10002233

2 2

A2000 CableFree transceiver LXIU-400 box Rev C

10001059 10002159

2 2

Figure 10-4

Table 10-2 Terescope laser link (Part Number 1LAK082710) Item

Part No.

LXIU-400 box

1L48083937

Quantity 2

Terescope 4000 transceiver 334088131 Tripod stand 759087238

2 2

LLX-400 transport case Screw, M10x30 stainless

790084660 10000839

2 8

Washer, flat, M 10 Washer, grower W10

10000896 10000897

8 8

Figure 10-5 480

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LLX400 laser link Installation > The LXIU

Installation In this section: • The LXIU (page 481) • A2000 CableFree laser unit (page 484) • Terescope laser unit (page 485)

The LXIU

Data rate selector

10 Figure 10-6

The LXIU is used as an electric/optic interface between an LAUX or LAUL (408 or 428) and the laser unit. The interface is fitted with an optical transmitter and an optical receiver operating at 1310 nm and matching with the laser system used. The LXIU relays the battery voltage to the laser transceiver electronics. A switch is used to choose the data rate, depending on whether the LXIU is attached to a Line (8 or 16 Mbps) or a Transverse (100 Mbps).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

481

10

LLX400 laser link Installation > The LXIU

The laser link connects to the telemetry Line (8 or 16 Mbps) or Transverse (100 Mbps) through a special 2-metre jumper cable (SRHRF, P/N 512500270) equipped with a red FM4 plug at one end, and a black one at the other end.

12 VDC Ground

512500270

To LAUX-428 (or LAUL-428)

Figure 10-7

If you are installing the LXIU in a Transverse, you have to connect the red FM4 plug to the LAUX-428, and the black plug to the LXIU (because in the red plug are magnets that tell the LAUX that an LXIU is attached to it and it must turn on the power to that LXIU). See Figure 10-8 — page 482. Laser transceiver Black FM4 plug

Red FM4 plug

SRHRF cable (2 m)

LAUX-428 FDU Link 12 V battery

Figure 10-8 Connecting the LXIU-400 to a Transverse.

Note The LLX is always placed close to an LAUX or LAUL and so

does not need a battery monitoring circuitry of its own. It is 482

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LLX400 laser link Installation > The LXIU

recommended to use the same battery for the LLX and the adjacent LAUX or LAUL, so as to benefit from the battery monitoring function of that LAUX or LAUL for the laser link. Note For protection from lightning, use the ground cord provided to

connect the grounding wing nut of the LXIU-400 box to the grounding wing nut of the LAUX-428 (itself to be connected to a grounding stake). Table 10-3 Accessory kit (P/N10002160) for CableFree Part No.

Description

Qty

1L48085445

LLX-400 ground cable

2

512500144 512500270

LAUX Power cable LLX 2-m cable, SRHRF

1 1

791080262 9330277

Gasket, LXIU Screw, hex head, M 6 X 12

2 4

9920026

Lockwasher, dia. 6

4

Table 10-4 Accessory kit (P/N 1L48084295) for Terescope Part No.

Description

Qty

1L48085445

LLX-400 ground cable

2

512500144 512500270

LAUX Power cable LLX 2-m cable, SRHRF

1 1

756084494 791080262

Mount plate, LXIU-400 Gasket, LXIU

1 2

9330277 9920026

Screw, hex head, M 6 X 12 Lockwasher, dia. 6

4 4

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

10

483

10

LLX400 laser link Installation > A2000 CableFree laser unit

A2000 CableFree laser unit The A2000 laser unit comes complete with a tripod stand, three hex head M8×22 screws and lockwashers. Three hex head M8×22 screws and lockwahers

Figure 10-9

The laser unit operates from 12 VDC supplied through the LXIU. A standard battery can be used. Main power supply Flag (red)

Mechanical sight for coarse alignment

Fibre optic Rx Flag (green)

10-stage RSSI meter

Laser status (green)

Air Rx Flag (green)

Figure 10-10 A2000 rear panel

For details, see Setting up an LLX400 laser link (page 486). 484

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LLX400 laser link Installation > Terescope laser unit

Terescope laser unit The TereScope laser unit comes complete with a tripod stand, four 3/8” mounting screws, and “Manuals and User Guides” CD-ROM from the manufacturer. The laser unit operates from 12 VDC supplied through the LXIU. A standard battery can be used. The DIP Switches on the rear panel should be set as shown in Figure 1011 — page 485. If you need to change DIP switch settings, undo the four screws securing the back door (two on each side). Laser transceiver

Dip Switch (set to Open Protocol: 1, 2, 3 OFF; 4 ON)

Dip Switch (All OFF)

12 VDC from LXIU

10

Tx and RX Fibre Optic ports

Tx and RX Fibre Optic ports

Alignment Device

LXIU

Figure 10-11 Rear view

For details, see Setting up an LLX400 laser link (page 486). 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

485

10

LLX400 laser link Setting up an LLX400 laser link > A2000 CableFree laser unit

Setting up an LLX400 laser link In this section: • A2000 CableFree laser unit (page 486) • Terescope laser unit (page 489)

A2000 CableFree laser unit Line of sight The two mounting sites for implementing an LLX400 laser link must be within a clear sight of each other.

Orientation Avoid as far as possible any link path orientation that could cause direct sunlight to saturate the airlink receiver and give rise to outages.

Aiming For the point-to-point connection to work properly, the orientation face to face of both “transceiving” ends of the link should be done as accurate as possible (the beam must be positioned symmetrically all around the remote laser transceiver). The laser transceiver will not be able to achieve the maximum range unless it is protected from vibrations (it must be protected from twists of 1 mrad). The whole setup must be sheltered against strong winds. The alignment procedure below makes use of the mechanical sight and the RSSI meter on the rear panel (see Figure 10-10 — page 484). Since this alignment procedure does not require any LAUL or LAUX to be present, aiming can be adjusted before deploying the Line or Transverse. Only the power supply is required.

486

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LLX400 laser link Setting up an LLX400 laser link > A2000 CableFree laser unit

Coarse alignment Coarse aiming is firstly done by rotating the tripod stand to the right or left, and adjusting the height of its legs, then using the following procedure: • Be sure the power to the LXIU is connected and the red Power indicator on the rear panel of the laser transceiver is on.

Four lock knobs for vertical aiming

Two lock knobs for horizontal aiming

Pan & Tilt bracket

10 Figure 10-12

• Rotate the transceiver left and right, up and down, holding it by the box and looking through the mechanical sight until you can see the opposite site. • If it is difficult to see the opposite site due to the distance or haze, slowly rotate the transceiver to the right and to the left, up and down, until the RSSI meter (see Figure 10-10 — page 484) reads at least 2 or 3 stages. You may have to clean the lens of the laser unit with a dry cloth (if dew is forming on the lens).

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

487

10

LLX400 laser link Setting up an LLX400 laser link > A2000 CableFree laser unit

Horizontal aiming • Loosen the two lock knobs inside the Pan & Tilt bracket, and turn the laser transceiver to the left/right. Vertical aiming • Loosen the four vertical aiming lock knobs (two on either side of the Pan & Tilt bracket), and tilt up/down the laser transceiver. Fine alignment • Adjust the orientation until the number of stages on the RSSI meter is maximum. • Tighten all aiming lock knobs. When the LAUL or LAUX at either end of the link is connected and the telemetry line is On, the green Fiber Optic Rx Flag indicator and green Laser Status light indicate that the laser transmitter is On. If the two laser units are properly aligned, the green Air Rx Flag indicator should also light up. The RSSI meter should read between 2 and 9 stages, depending on the length of the laser link. Note If the RSSI meter reads in excess of 10 stages, this means the

receiver is saturated. This causes a limiter circuitry to switch off the receiver, and also turns off the Air Rx Flag indicator.

488

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LLX400 laser link Setting up an LLX400 laser link > Terescope laser unit

Terescope laser unit Line of sight The two mounting sites for implementing an LLX400 laser link must be within a clear sight of each other.

Orientation Avoid as far as possible any link path orientation that could cause direct sunlight to saturate the airlink receiver and give rise to outages.

Aiming For the point-to-point connection to work properly, the orientation face to face of both “transceiving” ends of the link should be done as accurate as possible (the beam must be positioned symmetrically all around the remote laser transceiver). The laser transceiver will not be able to achieve the maximum range unless it is protected from vibrations (it must be protected from twists of 1 mrad). The whole setup must be sheltered against strong winds. The alignment procedure below makes use of the telescope and Optical Power display on the rear panel (see Figure 10-14 — page 491). The telescope is fitted with an infrared filter and so does not pose any risk of injury to the operator’s eyes. Since this alignment procedure does not require any LAUL or LAUX to be present, aiming can be adjusted before deploying the Line or Transverse. Only the power supply is required. WARNING

On the back side of the Alignment Device (Figure 10-13 — page 490) are two knobs (B and C) used for horizontal and vertical fine alignment. Do not turn these knobs when the coarse alignment screws (J, L, E) are locked, as this may damage the fine alignment mechanism.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

489

10

10

LLX400 laser link Setting up an LLX400 laser link > Terescope laser unit

Coarse alignment Coarse aiming is firstly done by rotating the tripod stand to the right or left, and adjusting the height of its legs, then using the following procedure: 1.

Be sure the power to the LXIU is connected and the green Power indicator on the rear panel of the laser transceiver is on. Do not touch these screws

J(Front_Left) J(Back_Left)

J(Front_Right) J(Back_Right) L

Red Ref point

E(Front_Left)

Front (far side)

M E(Back_Left) B

C E(Front_Right)

Four mounting screws (used to fasten to tripod stand)

E(Back_Right)

Figure 10-13 Alignment Device

490

2.

Loosen all screws (J, L, E).

3.

Screws E should be positioned in the middle of the slots, and the Red Ref. point (M) positioned so that its distance from the movement range end closer to the front panel is about 1/3 the total movement range.

4.

Rotate the transceiver left and right, up and down, holding it by the box and looking through the telescope until you can see the 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LLX400 laser link Setting up an LLX400 laser link > Terescope laser unit

opposite site. You may have to clean the lens of the laser unit with a dry cloth (if dew is forming on the lens). 5.

If it is difficult to see the opposite site due to the distance or haze, slowly rotate the transceiver to the right and to the left, up and down, until the Optical Power display (see Figure 10-14 — page 491) reads at least 20 to 30.

6.

Tighten screw L and then follow the fine alignment procedure below.

Fine alignment 7. Loosen screws J and E. 8.

Use the alignment knobs B & C to place the opposite Tranceiver exactly in the center of the target of the telescope. Adjust the knobs until the reading on the Optical Power display is maximum.

9.

Tighten all screws.

L1, L2, L3 Air Rx Flag

10

Optical Power readout

Fiber Optic Flag

Main power supply Flag

Telescope

Figure 10-14 Rear panel indicators

When the LAUL or LAUX at either end of the link is connected and the telemetry line is On, the Fiber Optic Rx Flag indicator and red L1, L2, 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

491

10

LLX400 laser link Setting up an LLX400 laser link > Terescope laser unit

L3 Laser Status lights indicate that the laser transmitter is On. If the two laser units are properly aligned, the green Air Rx Flag indicator should also light up. The Optical Power display reading should between 200 and 1000, depending on the length of the laser link.

492

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

LLX400 laser link Specifications > Terescope laser unit

Specifications Laser transceiver Specifications

CableFree A2000 Terescope 4000

Minimum range

200 m

200 m

Maximum range (clear conditions, tripod stand protected from vibrations)

2000 m

3000 m

Laser wavelength

980 nm

830 – 860 nm

Total output power (typical)

25.4 dBm

21 mW

Size (L x W x H), mm

523x371x311

790x390x556

Weight, not including tripod stand

12 kg

32 kg

Power supply • From a 12 V battery. • Power required for each unit: - CableFree A200: 30 W. - Terescope 4000: 20 W. - LAUX (or LAUL), including FDU link: 15 W.

10

• Total power drain from the 12 V battery: - CableFree A200: about 45 W. - Terescope 4000: about 35 W.

Temperature • Operating:

-40°C to +60°C.

• Storage:

-40°C to +70°C.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

493

10

LLX400 laser link Specifications > Terescope laser unit

(Page intentionally blank)

494

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge This chapter includes the following sections: • Overview (page 496) • Connections (page 498) • Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge (page 501) • Moving an Ethernet Radio Bridge (page 505) • Arming the Installation Agent (page 506) • Changing the IP address (page 509) • Advanced settings (page 511) • Licence and frequency regulations (page 513) • Maintenance (page 514)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

495

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge Overview >

Overview The 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge is a 75 Mbps wireless datalink that can be used in place of a 428XL Transverse cable (each end connects to the Transverse port of an LAUX-428, or an LCI-428). It can be upgraded to 150 Mbps by software (subject to a licence fee). Either end includes: - an interface box developed by SERCEL (428 Ethernet Radio Bridge box), with a carrying backpack. - a 5.4 GHz antenna unit (ODU) equipped with a lightning protection box, - a GPS receiver (AcuTime Gold2000), - a tripod stand. A 12 V battery is required at either end (each can use the same battery as the LAUX-428 it is attached to). GPS receiver

GPS cord P/N 1L66085197

RF bridge antenna (ODU)

428 Ethernet Radio Bridge interface box (later-design)

Lightning protection unit

Figure 11-1 Later-design 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge

496

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Ethernet Radio Bridge Overview >

The maximum range of the wireless link, typically around 3 km (line of sight), is dependent on RF transmission conditions and local RF communications regulations. The least stringent RF communications regulations allow longer maximum ranges (up to 40 km) to be achieved. See Licence and frequency regulations (page 513). Note that a GPS receiver is required in the recording truck too, to be connected to the XDEV2 port of the LCI-428, using the specific cable supplied (10 m max., P/N 1L13087062). The Ethernet Radio Bridge interface box comes in two versions which are only different in size (the later-design box is smaller).

11 Figure 11-2 Early-design 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge interface box

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

497

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge Connections >

Connections Black plug Connect Red plug to LAUX

Two 12 VDC inlets allow for battery hot-swapping

Ground stake

Slave box only XDEV2

Transverse

must be connected to XDEV2

GPS receiver RF bridge antenna (ODU)

12 V battery (1) (1 m max.)

Figure 11-3 Connecting a later-design box

Note (1): A 72 Ahr (minimum) battery is recommended (the minimum power consumption is typically 70 W).

Transverse from recorder Master (2)

)))

Slave

(((

LAUX

Ethernet Radio Bridge box (see detail above)

Ground (3)

Distant Transverse

Figure 11-4 Recommended setup 498

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Ethernet Radio Bridge Connections >

Note (2): Each end is configured as “Master” or “Slave” prior to shipment from SERCEL and tagged accordingly so that you can distinguish between the two. Preferably connect the “Master” end to the wireline Transverse leg attached to the recorder, as this will allow you to use advanced frequency channel control features. Note (3):Connect the lightning protection unit to a separate ground stake.

Ground stake

Figure 11-5

In order to prevent the tripod stand from toppling in the event of wind gusts, it is recommended to use guy ropes and adequate anchor points to hold it firmly in place.

11

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

499

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge Connections >

Connect Red plug to LAUX

Ground stake

RF bridge antenna

Black plug

GPS receiver

XDEV2

Transverse

12 V battery (1) (1 m max.)

Slave box only must be connected to XDEV2

Figure 11-6 Connecting an early-design box

Transverse from recorder Master (2)

Slave

(((

))) LAUX

Ethernet Radio Bridge box (see detail above)

Ground (3)

Distant Transverse

Figure 11-7

Note (1): A 72 Ahr (minimum) battery is recommended (the minimum power consumption is typically 70 W).

500

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Ethernet Radio Bridge Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge >

Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge Prerequistites: If you want to use two or more Ethernet Radio Bridges in your crew, first see Changing the IP address (page 509). To install an Ethernet Radio Bridge, do the following: 1.

Connect both ends of the Ethernet bridge as shown above (see Overview on page 496). After power is applied, point each antenna to the other end of the wireless link. An audible signal should sound, intended for assisting the installer in pointing the antenna to the other end. If no signal is heard, make sure the Installation Agent is “Armed” (see Arming the Installation Agent on page 506). At both ends, adjust the direction of the antenna for the highest pitch of the audible tone, until the tone is continuous.

2.

In the Line main window, go to Field On.

3.

Launch the Web browser on the server computer. In its address field, type the IP address of the slave Ethernet Radio Bridge box (http://172.30.210.3 by default). This should open the following page:

11

Figure 11-8

NOTE: you cannot access the Web server if the bridge is located in a secondary Transverse. Also, the default address may not work (if you

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

501

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge >

are using two or more Ethernet Radio Bridges, different addresses are required). See Changing the IP address (page 509). With the antennas precisely pointing to each other, the Wireless Link Status in the Home page should go to Up (with a green background).

Figure 11-9

4.

Select “System Administration” from the left-hand side menu. Click on Login.

Figure 11-10

5.

502

Open the Installation Wizard page. Click on Disarm Installation Agent.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Ethernet Radio Bridge Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge >

Figure 11-11

6.

Open the Configuration page.

11 Figure 11-12

- Be sure the Ethernet Capped Max Wireless Speed option is Enabled. - From the Max Receive Modulation Mode option button, select “256 QAM 0.81”. - Click Submit Updated System Configuration. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

503

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge >

7.

Likewise, disarm the Installation Agent at the other end of the bridge and check the configuration (type the other IP address in the address field and then repeat steps 5 and 6).

8.

Open the Status page.

Figure 11-13

Of particular interest is the “Link Capacity”, especially if the wireless link has many traces to convey. The capacity depends on the quality of the datalink, which may be affected by the link length, RF interferences, etc.

504

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Ethernet Radio Bridge Moving an Ethernet Radio Bridge >

Moving an Ethernet Radio Bridge Whenever you want to move an Ethernet Radio Bridge to another place, first you must use the “Installation Wizard” menu to enable the “Installation Tones” and return each end of the wireless link to the “Armed” mode. As a result, the “Installation Tones” will be enabled by default when you next power on the radio bridge, making it easier to point each antenna to the other end accurately. See Arming the Installation Agent (page 506). WARNING After moving the radio bridge and installing it again, be sure to return it to the “Disarmed” mode, or else you will not get the maximum “Link Capacity”. See Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge (page 501).

11

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

505

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge Arming the Installation Agent >

Arming the Installation Agent Prior to moving an Ethernet Radio Bridge to another place, use the procedure below to return each end of the wireless link to the “Armed” mode. This will make it easier to point each antenna to the other end accurately when you next power on the radio bridge. 1.

Launch the Web browser on the server computer. In its address field, type the IP address of the Ethernet Radio Bridge box (172.30.210.2 or 172.30.210.3 by default). - If the link status is “Up”, e. g. if you are arming the Installation Agent prior to moving the Ethernet Radio Bridge to another place, arm the farthest (slave) end first (172.30.210.3 by default). - You cannot connect to the farthest end unless the antennas are properly oriented. In that case, momentarily connect it to the wireline Transverse leg attached to the recorder (or direct to the LCI-428). - Also, the default address may not work (if you are using two or more Ethernet Radio Bridges). See Changing the IP address (page 509).

2.

Select “System Administration” from the left-hand side menu. Click on Login.

Figure 11-14

506

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Ethernet Radio Bridge Arming the Installation Agent >

3.

Open the Installation Wizard.

Figure 11-15

- Click Next. 4.

Set the Installation Tones option to Enabled.

11

Figure 11-16 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

507

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge Arming the Installation Agent >

- Click Next.

Figure 11-17

5.

Click “Confirm Configuration, Arm Installation Agent and Reboot”. As a result the Install Armed status in the Home page should go to “Armed”.

Figure 11-18

6.

Likewise, arm the Installation Agent at the other end of the bridge (type the other IP address in the address field and then repeat the above steps). WARNING

After moving the radio bridge and installing it again, you will have to return it to the “Disarmed” mode, or else you will not get the maximum “Link Capacity”. See Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge (page 501). 508

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Ethernet Radio Bridge Changing the IP address >

Changing the IP address If you want to use one more Ethernet Radio Bridges in your crew, you have to increment the IP address of each wireless unit (the default address is 172.30.210.2 or 172.30.210.3). For example you can use 172.30.210.4 or 172.30.210.5 for the second bridge, and so on. To do that: - Connect either of the 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge interfaces direct to the LCI-428 (XDEV2 port); - Launch the Web browser. In its address field, type the default IP address of the box (172.30.210.2 or 172.30.210.3); - Select the LAN Configuration menu;

11

Figure 11-19

- Change the IP address; - Click Submit Updated System Configuration. 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

509

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge Changing the IP address >

- Place a tag mentioning the new address on the box. - Likewise, change the IP address of the other unit.

510

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Ethernet Radio Bridge Advanced settings >

Advanced settings The system automatically finds and selects a frequency channel for the datalink, but you can connect to the Master unit and use the “Spectrum Management” menu to choose which channels to enable or disable.

Frequency channel displayed in green if OK

Figure 11-20

The frequency channel is displayed in green if the datalink quality is correct (otherwise orange or red).

11

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

511

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge Advanced settings >

Padlock meaning that the frequency channel is disabled

Figure 11-21

You can enable/disable a frequency channel by clicking on it. To save your changes, click “Submit configuration changes”.

512

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Ethernet Radio Bridge Licence and frequency regulations >

Licence and frequency regulations The MOTOROLA licence key controls the maximum transmission power for compliance with the frequency regulations applicable in the country for which it was generated. To update the licence key for another country, visit http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ptp

11

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

513

11

Ethernet Radio Bridge Maintenance >

Maintenance In the event of a malfunction, first check the performance of each 428-ERB interface box as follows: - Connect either of the 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge interfaces direct to the LCI-428 (XDEV2 port); - Launch the Web browser. In its address field, type the default IP address of the box (172.30.210.2 or 172.30.210.3) or any other address you may have assigned to the box. If you can access the Web server (Figure 11-22) then this means the interface box is in good repair. Check the other box the same way.

Figure 11-22

If none of the interface boxes is at fault, successively replace the ODU antenna or lightning protection box or GPS receiver by a spare one, on either side of the bridge, until you identify the faulty unit. None of these units has any repairable parts (replace the whole unit if at fault).

514

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) This chapter includes the following sections: • Overview (page 516) • List of equipment (page 517) • Specifications (page 519) • Cabling (page 520) • Deployment (page 522) • Signal Strength Monitor (page 527)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

515

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Overview >

Overview The 428 Line Radio Bridge (LRB) is a data acquisition unit and wireless data link that can be used in place of an LAUL428 to wirelessly connect a Line over obstacles or impasses, such as rivers or highways. This allows for greater field efficiency. Two of these can be inserted anywhere in a spread as an element of the 428XL network to relay the data transmission on a Line. The wireless data link operates at 5.1-5.3 GHz band. The maximum range is typically around 1 km in an area with good wireless propagation characteristics. Note that the user is responsible for inquiring about local radio frequency regulations and using the frequency band accordingly. The LRB is capable of acquiring up to 60 channels of seismic data. The wireless link provides the necessary bandwidth for retrieving 1000 channels @ 2ms SR in real time (8 or 16 Mbps). A handheld PC (provided by Sercel) may be used to monitor the signal strength of the paired radio bridges. See Signal Strength Monitor (page 527).

Terminology • ODU: Outdoor Unit — radio unit (1/2 of a radio bridge). • Radio Bridge: pair of (ODU) radio units. • LRB: Line Radio Bridge — consists of an LRBU, ODU, and associated cables. • LRBU: Line Radio Bridge Unit — box containing the 428 electronics. The LRBU manages the channels attached to its line port, performs acquisition and tests, just like an LAUX-428 would do along a line. It also monitors the quality of the wireless link, which shows in the LRB “Properties” view in the jLine window and can be read out on a PDA via the “Remote” connector. The LRBU can be put to sleep mode and waken up through software commands. • LRB Pair: two LRBs with matched radio units used to connect a Line wirelessly. 516

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) List of equipment >

List of equipment GPS receiver

GPS cord P/N 10004379

ODU radio unit Interface box (LRBU) hooked on tripod stand

“Left” or “Right” cable

12 Line port

Ground

12 VDC battery

Figure 12-1 Line Radio Bridge (Master end) 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

517

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) List of equipment >

The LRB pair (Part No. 10002428) includes the following parts: Part No.

Description

Qty

1L68089771

LRBU interface box developed by SERCEL, with a carrying backpack. The LRBU box connects to the radio unit through a Power Over Ethernet cable which relays both the power supply and Ethernet communications to the radio unit.

2

512500144

Two LAUX Power cables.

2

10004379

GPS cable, 3m

2

1L66085382

Ground stake, with 10-m ground lead.

2

10000180

ODU radio unit from Wireless Excellence.

2

7790007

Tripod stand.

2

1L13087062

GPS receiver (AcuTime Gold2000). The GPS receiver operates from the power supply voltage conveyed through the GPS cord (Part No. 10004379) used to connect it to the LRBU. It ensures synchronization between LRBUs.

1

6520233

Clamp

2

0450102

Strap

2

10001156

LRBU-PDA cable.

1

10004375

ODU Right cable.

1

10004376

ODU Left cable.

1

10009905

Guying kit.

2

756085189

Guy-rope anchoring.

2

756089527

Tripod extender.

2

A 12 V battery is required at either end of the wireless link to power on the LRBU-428, which in turn powers on the ODU and GPS. Note A GPS receiver is required in the recording truck too, to be

connected to the XDEV2 port of the LCI-428, using the specific cable supplied (10 m max., P/N 1L13087062).

518

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Specifications >

Specifications ODU • Data throughput: 20 Mbps • Range: up to 1 km. • Frequency band: 5150-5350 MHz. • Operating temperature: –40°C to +60°C. • Power consumption: 6 W.

LRBU • Allowable temperature range for both operating and storage: –40°C to +70°C. • Waterproofness rated at IP 65. • Power supply voltage: 12 VDC. • Power consumption: 10 W. A 72 Ahr (minimum) battery is recommended. The minimum power consumption is typically 16 W when the LRBU is up and running, plus the power consumption of the electronics in the line segment controlled by the LRBU. In Field Off mode, the LRBU is still supplied with power and the power drain is about 7 W.

Mechanical Equipment

Weight (kg)

Size (cm)

Volume (dm3)

LRBU

7.55

43×41×15

26.5

Tripod stand

6.7

19×19×135

48.7

Accessories

4.94

28×13×61

22.2

ODU

1.9

34×34×10

11.6

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

519

12

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Cabling >

Cabling GPS

GPS Master (or Slave)

Slave (or Master)

Ground Ground

LRBU box (see detail below)

Distant line segment

Wireline datalink to recorder

Figure 12-2 Line Radio Bridge setup

Note that only the distant end requires a GPS receiver. However, it is recommended to set up a GPS receiver at the other end too, so that the Transverse can be moved with no need to make any changes to the line radio bridge. REMOTE: XDEV for Line Tester (LT428) or Signal Strength Monitor (SSMon) operation via handheld PC. Connect to GPS receiver HL/LL: use this selector to set the line port as required (High or Low)

Connect to ODU (radio bridge)

Line segment Ground

Two 12 VDC inlets allowing battery hot-swapping

(1 m max.) 12 V battery

Figure 12-3 Connecting the LRBU box 520

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Cabling >

Connect the radio unit to a ground stake, using the 10-m ground lead provided. Also connect the ground wing nut of the LRBU to the ground stake. Ground lead

Ground stake

12

Figure 12-4 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

521

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Deployment > Location

Deployment In this section: • Location (page 522) • Setting up the wireless link (page 523) • Workabout Pro3 network address (page 525)

Location The LRB is typically used between two segments along a line if, for any reason, the line is interrupted (in areas where it is not easy or not possible to use a cable, such as rivers, highways, etc.). You can use any number of radio bridges in a spread, but only two on a same line (this restriction is due to radio latency). Because the LRBU performs like an LAUL-428 or LAUX-428 on the Line, it is able to control as many Receiver Positions as a standard LAUL-428 or LAUX-428. See LAU spacing Vs FDU spacing (page 353). To achieve maximum range, it is always advisable to place each end of the wireless link on a high point on the terrain where possible. Note that the wireless range can be drastically reduced by line-of-sight obstructions such as buildings or very thick trees. The nature of the broadband wireless signal is such that it will not penetrate buildings and very poorly penetrate trees. Therefore such solid line-of-sight obstructions will effectively limit the wireless range. The same applies to topographical features such as hills. The GPS receivers should be located in as clear a sight of the sky as possible, without overhead foliage or other obstructions such as power lines. Use the extender pole to adjust the mast height as required. In order to prevent the tripod stand from toppling in the event of wind gusts, it is recommended to use guy ropes and adequate anchor points to hold it firmly in place. 522

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Deployment > Setting up the wireless link

Setting up the wireless link Each LRB contains an ODU (outdoor unit). The ODU is a radio unit that is paired with another radio unit (ODU) that is part of a second LRB. Although most parameters in the radio units are preconfigured by Sercel, specific parameters, such as country and allowable frequencies, should be configured by the customer before each deployment in the field in order to comply with local FCC requirements. These parameters may be configured by the customer using the documentation from the manufacturer. The two LRBUs of a given LRB pair must use different cables to connect to the ODU. One should use the cable labelled “Right”, and the other should use the cable labelled “Left”. To connect both ends of the Line Radio Bridge, see Cabling (page 520). A selector is available to choose the orientation (Low or High) of the LRBU connected on the Line. The other LRBU should use the alternate orientation (select “LL” if the LRBU is attached to a High Line port, “HL” if attached to a Low Line port).

Left Transverse port

High Line port

Set switch to “LL” (Low Line)

Set switch to “HL” (High Line)

12

LAUX-428 LRBU (Master or Slave)

LRBU (Slave or Master)

Figure 12-5

The LRBU on the distant line segment must have a GPS receiver. It is recommended to use a GPS receiver at the other end too.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

523

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Deployment > Setting up the wireless link

After power is applied, the BAT 1 or BAT 2 LED should be blinking, depending on which connector the battery is connected to. The GPS and ODU are powered on when a battery is connected. When the system is in Field Off mode, the power is still applied to the GPS and ODU. The SW LED is blinking (indicative of software activity) when the LRBU is booting up. It stays On if any error arises. The LRBU stays in sleep mode until one of these three conditions occurs: power is detected on its line port, when it receives a message through the radio bridge, or when a connection is made to the XDEV plug. Point each antenna to the other end of the wireless link. To adjust the direction of the antenna, rotate the tripod stand or its mast. The Signal Strength Monitor (SSMon) application, running on a handheld PC (provided by Sercel) may be used to assist in the deployment of radio bridges if the recorder is not yet linked to the radio bridges. It may help in determining the proper angle to set the antenna mast in relationship with the other LRB. See Signal Strength Monitor (page 527). Note that the distant line segment requires a Marker entry in the Layout setup so that the receiver positions can be associated with the correct stakes on that segment (see Layout > Marker setup in User’s Manual Vol. 1). In contrast, the LRBU on the segment attached to the Transverse is automatically identified by the Look function and does not need any specific marker.

524

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Deployment > Workabout Pro3 network address

Workabout Pro3 network address In order to run the SSMon application, the Workabout Pro3’s network address must first be set to be compatible with radio bridge network addresses. The following steps only need to be performed one time to configure the Workabout Pro3’s host IP address: 1.

On Workabout Pro3: - Tap on Start > Settings. - Tap on Connections tab, then Network Cards.

Figure 12-6

2.

Tap on ASIX AX88772 USB 2.0 Fast Ethernet.

3.

Select Use specific IP address and enter this information:

12

- IP address: 172.30.210.80 - Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 - Default gateway: 172.30.210.0

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

525

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Deployment > Workabout Pro3 network address

Figure 12-7

4.

526

Click ok twice, then the x in the top-right corner to exit Settings.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Signal Strength Monitor > Overview

Signal Strength Monitor In this section: • Overview (page 527) • Connecting the SSMon (page 528) • Getting Started (page 529) • Signal Strength monitoring (page 531) • View / Change Country and/or Frequency (page 532) • ODU Information (page 533) • Ethernet connection information (page 534) • Auxiliary Screens (page 535)

Overview The Signal Strength Monitor (SSMon) is a pocket terminal application (handheld PC with SSMon software) that connects to the “Remote” connector (XDEV port) of an LRB. It allows you to monitor the signal strength of the radio bridge and to set a few radio parameters. You may want to use this tool for RF propagation/interference troubleshooting or for adjusting the orientation of the antenna. Note that the signal strength also shows in the Properties available by right-clicking on the radio path in the jLine window’s Instrument view

12

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

527

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Signal Strength Monitor > Connecting the SSMon

Connecting the SSMon Connect the handheld PC to the “Remote” connector (XDEV port) on the LRBU with the cable provided.

P/N 10001156

Connect to ODU

(No line)

12 V battery

Figure 12-8

Note The LRBU should be connected to the ODU, but it should be

disconnected from the 428XL network (no cable link). Note A 12 VDC voltage should be fed to one of the 12 VDC inputs

of the LRBU. Note The handheld PC operates from its built-in rechargeable

battery. For information about batteries in the handheld PC, see PSION Workabout Pro3 (page 292).

528

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Signal Strength Monitor > Getting Started

Getting Started 1.

Install SSMon software on the handheld PC if not already installed. See Installing 428XL software on Workabout Pro3 (page 298).

2.

Power on the LRB if not already powered on.

3.

Connect the XDEV cable. See Connecting the SSMon (page 528). See also Workabout Pro3 network address (page 525).

4.

On the handheld PC, select SSMon from the Start menu. The Summary tab of the SSMon application appears.

Figure 12-9

The SSMon application attempts to establish a connection to each ODU to determine which ODU is local and which ODU is remote.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

529

12

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Signal Strength Monitor > Getting Started

When the local ODU is determined, only one PDA image will be shown on the screen. See Figure 12-10 (right).

Figure 12-10

There are 5 tabs near the bottom of the screen which contain the various operations available in SSMon. Tap on the left or right arrow on the bottom-right part of the screen in order to scroll through the tabs. At the bottom of the screen is a status bar which displays the current status message. Previous status messages may be seen by tapping on the down arrow attached to the status bar. Just to the right of the status bar is a button containing a question mark. Tapping on this button displays addition information about the status message if available. To close SSMon, tap on the ok button on the top-right portion of the screen.

530

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Signal Strength Monitor > Signal Strength monitoring

Signal Strength monitoring Tap on the Signal Strength tab. Select which ODU to collect the signal strength from — local, remote, or both. Tap on the up/down arrows on the left side of the plot to select the minimum/maximum dBm. Tap on the Start button to start collecting signal strength values from the ODU(s).

Out of range

Figure 12-11

The signal strength is retrieved from the ODU every 2-5 seconds and the plot is updated accordingly with the current value displayed at the bottom of the plot. If an ‘x’ appears at the top or bottom of the plot, the value is not within the range of the plot. Stop the plot, adjust the min/max scale appropriately, and restart the plot.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

531

12

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Signal Strength Monitor > View / Change Country and/or Frequency

View / Change Country and/or Frequency Tap on the Config tab. This screen shows the country, band, and frequency used by each ODU. To modify one of these values, choose the appropriate value(s) and tap Save. The settings are sent to the local or remote radio chosen and then read back for verification. Note that the list of Frequencies depends on the Band value chosen. WARNING

This may make this pair of radio bridges incompatible. These settings are best made prior to deploying in the field with the application supplied by the manufacturer.

Figure 12-12 Country Frequency

532

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Signal Strength Monitor > ODU Information

ODU Information Tap on the Status tab. This screen allows the user to monitor other values from the radio. Note that not all values are available from both local and remote radios.

Figure 12-13 ODU Info

12

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

533

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Signal Strength Monitor > Ethernet connection information

Ethernet connection information Tap on the Connect tab. This screen displays the connection status between the ODU and LRBU. Additionally, for troubleshooting purposes, the user can Ping the IP address of the local or remote ODU.

Figure 12-14 Ethernet Connection

534

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Signal Strength Monitor > Auxiliary Screens

Auxiliary Screens Plot Setup Access the plot setup screen by tapping on Info > Plot Setup from the main screen. The screen below left appears. The user may change the refresh rate (Timer Interval) and colours of the plot. (Note that the refresh rate is not deterministic). Tap on Pick Colors to choose the two plot colours. First tap on one of the squares on the lower right part of the screen, and then tap on the desired colour. Tap on Ok to accept the new colours or Cancel to continue using the existing colours.

12

Figure 12-15

Help Tap on the question mark (?) on the bottom-right corner of the screen to get additional information about the current message in the status bar. You can select a message in the status bar and then tap on the question mark. See the example below.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

535

12

Line Radio Bridge (LRB) Signal Strength Monitor > Auxiliary Screens

Figure 12-16

About Tap on the About button on the bottom right part of the screen to display the software version.

Figure 12-17

536

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Chapter

13

Connectors and cables In this chapter: • LCI-428 (page 538) • 428-Lite Break-Out Box (page 543) • Field electronics (page 545) • Cables (page 551)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

537

Connectors and cables LCI-428 > BLASTER

LCI-428 BLASTER LCI-428

CR0_B1

BL CR1

CR1_B1

BLEN1 S_FO

BLASTER1

BLEN1 BL CR0

FO_B1 S_FO1

FO1B1 FO2B1

BLEN1

p S T M N

Vcc

_EGOINB1

EGOIN1B1

EXT_GO

470 ohm _EGOINB2

EGOIN2B1

From BLASTER 2

5 to 12 V H J

External

GO GND

BLEN1

Vcc

_TBINB1

S_TB_PLUGS

TBIN1B1

470 ohm _TBINB2

TBIN2B1

From BLASTER 2

S_TBOUT1

S_TB

K

TB L

U

BLEN1 CLKO1B1 PILOT_CLK

PLL 17.9 MHz

CLKOUT17.9 CLKO2B1 TXB1 RXB1

A B C D

BLEN1

Vcc

_RDYINB1 EXT_RDY

From BLASTER 2

RDYIN1B1 RDYEN

_RDYINB2

470 ohm RDYIN2B1

F G

RDYENB2

From BLASTER 2

RDYENB1

Vcc

13

GNDB1

E

Jumper in cable R

Figure 13-1 Blaster1 connector

538

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables LCI-428 > BLASTER

LCI-428 BL CR0

CR0_B2

BL CR1

CR1_B2

BLEN2 S_FO

BLASTER 2

BLEN2

FO_B2 S_FO2

FO1B2 FO2B2

BLEN2

To BLASTER 1

S T M N

Vcc

_EX_GO2

_EGOINB2

p

EGOIN1B2

470 ohm EGOIN2B2

5 to 12 V H J

External

GO GND

BLEN2

_TBINB2

To BLASTER 1

Vcc

_ETBIN2

TBIN1B2

470 ohm TBIN2B2

S_TBOUT2

S_TB

K

TB L

U

BLEN2 CLKO1B2

From BLASTER 1

CLKOUT17.9 CLKO2B2 TXB2 RXB2

A B C D

BLEN2

_RDYINB2

To BLASTER 1

_EXT_RDY1

Vcc RDYIN1B2 470 ohm RDYIN2B2

To BLASTER 1

F G

RDYENB2 Vcc

RDYENB2

GNDB2

E

Jumper in cable R

13

Figure 13-2 Blaster2 connector

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

539

13

Connectors and cables LCI-428 > BLASTER

BLASTER signals EGOIN1 External GO command (Signal). EGOIN2 External GO command (Ground). Used to trigger an acquisition cycle from an external device. Trigger current;

Min.: 2 mA Max.: 50 mA

A 470 Ω resistor is in series connection with the optoisolator. The diagram below illustrates the case where the command is generated by a relay.

5 VDC

LCI-428

470 Ω

External Go command

EGOIN EGOUT

0 VDC

Figure 13-3

TBIN1

External TB (Signal)

TBIN2

External TB (Ground) Time Break input, from a firing device. Used to synchronize the detonation with the recording system. Trigger current: Min.: 2 mA Max.: 50 mA A 470 Ω resistor is in series connection with the optoisolator. Minimum pulse duration: 20 μs.

540

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables LCI-428 > BLASTER

FO1 FO2

External Firing Order. Relay contact closed by the Firing Order generated by the 428XL. (pulse duration: 200 ms). Contact rating:

50 mA Max.

Contact resistance: 100 Ω max. See also Source controller interfacing (page 97) in 428XL User’s Manual Volume 3. Note: for Micro-seismic operations, pin T must be wired to pin K, and pin L wired to ground (pin R).

Serial port (TXB, RXB): • 9600 Bd. • 8 data bits. • 1 Start bit. • 1 Stop bit. • No parity.

13

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

541

13

Connectors and cables LCI-428 > XDEV2

XDEV2

542

Pin

Signal

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S

GND CPS_1S GPS_CLK_P GPS_CLK_N CTS_RS232_OUT RTS_RS232_IN TX_RS232 RX_RS232 READY_IN1 READY_IN2 FO_OUT1 FO_OUT2 TB_IN1 TB_IN2 AUX_OUT1 AUX_OUT2

A

L M

B

K

N

S

C

J

R

P

H

D G

E F Viewed from wiring side

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables 428-Lite Break-Out Box > XDEV2

428-Lite Break-Out Box Blaster Pin

Signal

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V

CLK01B1 CLK02B1 TXB1 RXB1 RDYENB1 RDYIN1B1 RDYIN2B1 EGOIN1B1 EGOIN2B1 TBIN1B1 TBIN2B1 FO1B1 FO2B1 CR0_B1 GNDB1 CR1_B1 FO_B1 S_TBOUT1 not connected

M L K

A N

U J

B P

V

T H

G

C R

S F

D E

Viewed from front face

XDEV1 connector Pin

Signal

A C B D E G H I J F

GND 9V5 RX_ETH_P RX_ETH_N CTS_PC TX_BL RX_BL TX_ETH_P TX_ETH_N Earth ground

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

A G

B F

H

C

C D

E I

J

D

B E

J

A F

I

G H

13 Viewed from pin side

Viewed from wiring side

543

13

Connectors and cables 428-Lite Break-Out Box > XDEV2

XDEV2 Pin

Signal

A C D G H J K L M N P S

GND GPS_1S_P GPS_1S_N GPS_RX_RS232_P GPS_TX_RS232_P READY_IN1_BL READY_IN2_BL FO_OUT1_BL FO_OUT2_BL TB_IN1_BL TB_IN2_BL Earth ground

A

L M

B

K

N

S

C

J

R

P

H

D G

E F

Viewed from wiring side

GPS Pin

Signal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

RX_GPS_N RX_GPS_P TX_GPS_P TX_GPS_N GND GND GPS_1S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

9V5

Earth ground

Serial port

544

Pin

Signal

5 7

GND CTS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Field electronics > FDU-428 input connector

Field electronics FDU-428 input connector The female (hollow) pin is the positive terminal.

+

+

+

-

-

Figure 13-4

Applying a positive voltage to the positive terminal, with respect to the negative terminal, results in a positive sample in the SEGD file and an upward signal on the camera record. Auxiliary channel differential input voltage: • Linear operation: 2.26 V max. with G1600 (0 dB) gain; 565 mV max. with G400 (12 dB) gain. • Maximum allowable (safe but clamped): 5 V regardless of gain. • Destructive: 10 V regardless of gain. See also Trace Polarity (page 42) in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3.

AXCUL-428 4 mm Input sockets (banana) Pin

Signal

RED

Input +

BLACK

Input -

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

13

Line FM connector Pin

Signal

A

TP OUT +

B

TP OUT -

C

TP IN -

D

TP IN +

545

13

Connectors and cables Field electronics > LAUL-428 connectors

LAUL-428 connectors Power connectors (12VDC-A & 12VDC-B) Pin

12VDC A

12VDC B

A B C

PW-RC1 Vbat1 + Vbat1 -

PW-RC2 Vbat2 + Vbat2 -

XDEV connector

546

Pin

Signal

A B C D E F G H I J

GND CTS2 Charger_Out RTS2 CTS1 RTS1 XD_TX1 XD_RX1 XD_TX2 XD_RX2

A G

B F

H

C D

E I

J

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Field electronics > LAUX-428 connectors

LAUX-428 connectors Power connectors (12VDC-A & 12VDC-B) Pin

12VDC A

12VDC B

A B C

PW-RC1 Vbat1 + Vbat1 -

PW-RC2 Vbat2 + Vbat2 -

LINE connector Pin

Signal

A C B D case

Lout+ LoutLin+ LinGround

TRANSVERSE connector Pin

Signal

A C B D case

TPOut+ TPOutTPIn+ TPInGround

13

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

547

13

Connectors and cables Field electronics > LAUX-428 connectors

XDEV1 connector Pin A B C D E F G H I J

Signal GND ETH_RX+ Charger_Out ETH_RXXDEV1_CTS XDEV1_RTS XDEV1_TX XDEV1_RX ETH_TX+ ETH_TX-

A

B

G

F H

C

C E

I

D

D J

B E

F I

J

Viewed from pin side

A G H

Viewed from wiring side

XDEV2 connector

548

Pin

Signal

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S

GND CPS_1S GPS_CLK_P GPS_CLK_N CTS_RS232_OUT RTS_RS232_IN TX_RS232 RX_RS232 READY_IN1 READY_IN2 FO_OUT1 FO_OUT2 TB_IN1 TB_IN2 AUX_OUT1 AUX_OUT2

A

L M

B

K

N

S

C

J

R

P

H

D G

E F Viewed from wiring side

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Field electronics > ULS

ULS FDU2S takeout connector Applying a positive voltage to the positive terminal, with respect to the negative terminal, results in a positive sample on the tape and an upward signal on the camera record.

+ 2 1

AGMU 1002F Figure 13-5 Mono-sensor takeout connector

+ To red plug

+

3

2

4

1

To yellow plug

AGMU 1004F

13

Figure 13-6 Dual-sensor takeout connector

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

549

13

Connectors and cables Field electronics > ULS

8-pin Input socket Pin G F C B A H D E

Signal Transmission pair Transmission pair Power pair Geophones pair

Power socket Pin

Signal

G

12 V

H

0V

XDEV socket Pin

Signal

A

Gnd

B C

550

Tx2

D

Rx2

E

CTS1

F

RTS1

G

Tx1

H

Rx1

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Cables > SGD-S Blaster Controller to 428XL

Cables SGD-S Blaster Controller to 428XL

13 Figure 13-7 Later-design SGD-S (v9.0)

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

551

13

Connectors and cables Cables > SGD-S Blaster Controller to 428XL

1 2 3 4

Cannon DB9 (not used)

5 6 7 8 9 KCK2 plug Analog Uphole +-500 mV to SYSTEM plug of Controller SGD-SP D TxD

H

1

R

RxD

2

C

ExtGo

3

H

GND

4

J

A

AngUH

5

G

ConfTB

6

K

N

GND

7

L

P

TB

8

FO

9

M

L

Shield

10

N

M

LCI-428 BLASTER port

LAUX-428 XDEV2 port

Figure 13-8 Earlier-design SGDS

See also Source controller interfacing (page 97) in 428XL User’s Manual Volume 3.

552

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Cables > ShotPro to 428XL

ShotPro to 428XL 2 kΩ

UH

D B

+ 500 Ω

2 kΩ

+

Auxiliary channels

200 Ω

-

TB

J

K

N

GND

K

L

P

FO

E

M

L

F

N

M

R

R

A

GND TxD

P

D

H

RxD

N

C

G

Shot Pro Blaster connector

LCI-428 BLASTER port

LAUX-428 XDEV2 port

See also Source controller interfacing (page 97) in 428XL User’s Manual Volume 3.

13

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

553

13

Connectors and cables Cables > ShotPro I to 428XL

ShotPro I to 428XL

110 kΩ

+ 36 Ω

Auxiliary channel

-

TB

J

K

N

GND

N

L

P

FO

w

M

L

K

N

M

R

A

D

H

GND TxD

L

Shot Pro I Blaster connector

LCI-428 BLASTER port

LAUX-428 XDEV2 port

See also Source controller interfacing (page 97) in 428XL User’s Manual Volume 3.

554

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Cables > Macha to 428XL

Macha to 428XL

UH

RFTB Macha System connector START

Macha Control connector

+

D

-

E

+

F

-

G

H

Auxiliary channels

H

J

TB

A

K

N

GND

B

L

P

FO

A

M

L

F

N

M

B

R

A

GND Macha Data connector

C

TxD

A

D

H

C

C

G

D LCI-428 BLASTER port

LAUX-428 XDEV2 port

See also Source controller interfacing (page 97) in 428XL User’s Manual Volume 3.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

13

555

13

Connectors and cables Cables > BoomBox to 428XL

BoomBox to 428XL 2 kΩ

UH

30

+ 100 Ω

2 kΩ

+

Auxiliary channels

200 Ω

-

TB

16

K

N

GND

20

L

P

FO

10

T

L M

R

A

TxD

8

D

H

RxD

9

C

G

BoomBox Blaster connector

LCI-428 BLASTER port

LAUX-428 XDEV2 port

See also Source controller interfacing (page 97) in 428XL User’s Manual Volume 3.

556

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Cables > LSI/HSU cable – P/N 512000196

LSI/HSU cable – P/N 512000196 SC16S plug

SC16S plug

A

CTS +

A

B

CTS -

B

C

Tx +

C

D

Tx -

D

E

UH+

E

F

UH-

F

CTB+

G

G H J K L M

CTB-

H

FO +

J

FO -

K

ARM-En +

L

ARM-En -

M

N

N

P

P R

R S

Length: 140 m

S

13

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

557

13

Connectors and cables Cables > HSU/Blaster controller cable

HSU/Blaster controller cable HSU to Macha blaster controller box Cable part No. 1C30080806 to Macha blaster box

to HSU A

Red

A F

B

White

C

Green

D

White

E

Yellow

F

Control (PT06A-14-12S) P/N 5011421

A

White

B

G

Blue

C

Data

H

White

D

(PT06AB-8-4S) P/N 5011347

I J C (P/N 512210061)

D 150 Ω

470 Ω

E

System

F

(KPT06B-16-8S) P/N 5011422

Control viewed from wiring side

viewed from wiring side

Data viewed from wiring side

System viewed from wiring side

558

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Cables > HSU/Blaster controller cable

HSU to Shot Pro Encoder The HSU should be wired to the Spider cable of the Shot Pro Encoder as shown below. Shot Pro Encoder Spider cable

HSU A

K

B

W

+5 VDC (red) Start Act

C D E

L

F

M

G H

2 kΩ

I J

150 Ω

g R

2 kΩ 2 kΩ 150 Ω

J X

TX (blue) RX (purple)

Analog (red) COM (black)

NISO TB (green) Start Ret (black)

N

Plug P/N 512210061 viewed from wiring side

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

13

559

13

Connectors and cables Cables > HSU/Blaster controller cable

HSU to SGDS The HSU should be wired to the SGDS Blaster Controller as shown below. SGDS

HSU FO GND Rx GND Up Hole

A

9

B

4

C

1

D E

GND

F

CTB GND

G H

5 470 Ω 150 Ω

I

(Not used)

J

(Not used)

6 7

Plug P/N 512210061 viewed from wiring side

560

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Cables > ULS

ULS LAUX/FDU2S jumper (P/N 512500210) FM 4-pin

8-pin Geospace

A

B

C

C

B

G

D

F A D E H

LAULS/FDU2S jumper cable (P/N 512500211) 8-pin Geospace

8-pin Geospace

A

H

B

G

C

F

D

E

E

D

F

C

G

B

H

A

13

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

561

13

Connectors and cables Cables > PC XDEV cable

PC XDEV cable P/N 1C50078588 2m PC

C B A D J

E

5 9

F G I

1 6

H (Viewed from solder side)

(Viewed from solder side) DB9

Pin

Signal

ETHERNET RJ45

H

XDEV1_RX

2

G

XDEV1_TX

3

A

GND

5

E

XDEV1_CTS

8

F

XDEV1_RTS

7

I 6

562

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Cables > PC/LAU cable

PC/LAU cable PC/LAU cable Part No. 1C50079711 A G

B C F

H

2.5 m

E D I

PC

J 5 9

(Viewed from solder side)

Pin

1 6

Viewed from solder side

ETHERN5

G

2

H

3

A

5

DB9 (socket)

6 F

8

E

7

PC/LAULS cable Part No. 1C50081865 A

G

2.5 m

H F E

PC 5 9

(Viewed from solder side)

Pin

Viewed from solder side

ETHERN5

G

2

H

3

A

1 6

5

13

DB9 (socket)

6

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

F

8

E

7

563

13

Connectors and cables Cables > LRBU/PDA cable

LRBU/PDA cable LRBU/PDA cable Part No. 10001156 2m

A G H

B C F

E D I

J

(Viewed from solder side)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(Viewed from front face)

564

Pin

Signal

B

ETH_TX+

Connecteur USB femelle

RJ45 1

D

ETH_TX-

2

I

ETH_RX+

3

J

ETH_RX-

6

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Connectors and cables Cables > Mater/Slave Y cable

Mater/Slave Y cable 3m

To VE464 DPG (RECORDER)

To Master LCI-428 BLASTER connector

14-19S plug solder side 5010952

14-19S plug solder side 5010952

To Slave LCI-428 BLASTER connector

13

Length: 1m

k L

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

565

13

Connectors and cables Cables > Mater/Slave Y cable

(Page intentionally blank)

566

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Appendix

A

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms

A AC

Alternating Current.

Acq.

An abbreviation for Acquisition.

ADC

Analog-to-Digital Converter.

ADS-TA

Ancillary Data Standard for Trace Attributes data. Used to exchange trace and shot domain attributes, in conjunction with ADS-TE records.

ADS-TE

Ancillary Data Standard for Trace Edit data. Used in conjunction with ADS-TA records, to track trace exclusion information for a seismic data volume.

AGC

Automatic Gain Control.

AIB

Auxiliary Interface Box. Used to connect analog pilot signals from a DPG to FDUs used as auxiliary channels.

API

American Petroleum Institute.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

567

A

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

APS

Attribute Processing Support format. A standard for exporting shot point attributes for source Quality Control tools.

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange.

Aux.

An abbreviation for Auxiliary.

Avg.

An abbreviation for Average.

AWD

Accelerated Weight Drop.

AWG

American Wire Gauge.

Bacc.

An abbreviation for Base plate Acceleration (vibrator).

BCD

Binary-Coded Decimal.

BOB

Break Out Box.

BOT

Beginning Of Tape.

Bvel.

An abbreviation for Base plate Velocity (vibrator).

CD

Compact Disk.

CD490E

Sercel-packaged 3490E cartridge drive.

CD590

Sercel-packaged 3590 cartridge drive.

CDP

Common Depth Point. The situation where the same portion of subsurface produces reflections at different offset distances on several profiles.

CDU

Cabinet Distribution Unit.

Chan.

An abbreviation for Channel.

CMP

Common Mid-Point.

B

C

568

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

CMRR

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio. Expresses the ability of a device to reject the effect of a voltage that is applied simultaneously to both input terminals.

COG

Centre Of Gravity.

Config.

An abbreviation for Configuration.

Coord.

An abbreviation for Coordinates.

Correl.

An abbreviation for Correlation.

CR

Carriage Return.

CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Code. An error correction code used to catch errors in the data.

CT400

428XL Cable Tester. Used to check a length of cable for compliance with the input/output specifications of 428XL field electronics.

CTB

Confirmed Time Break.

Ctrl.

Abbreviation for Control.

DAC

Digital-to-Analog Converter.

dB

Decibel.

DC

Direct Current.

DFT

Discrete Fourier Transform.

DGPS

Differential GPS. The DGPS technique uses a fixed ground-based reference station to broadcast the difference between the position indicated by the satellite system and the known fixed position. The base station broadcasts the difference between the measured satellite pseudoranges and actual (internally computed) pseudoranges, so that receiver stations can correct their pseudoranges by the same amount.

D

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

569

A

A

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (protocol for automating the configuration of computers that use TCP/IP)

DIP

Dual Inline Package.

DMZ

Demilitarized Zone (PCs directly connected online).

DPG

Digital Pilot Generator (VE432/VE464). A control unit for the vibrator electronics (DSD). Connects to the LCI-428.

DPR

Dual Port RAM.

DQPSK

Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (transmission encoding).

DSCSI

Differential SCSI. See SCSI.

DSD

Digital Servo Drive (VE432/VE464). Performs real-time control of the energy imparted into the earth by a vibrator. Communicates with a DPG via a radio link.

DSP

Digital Signal Processor.

DSU

Digital Sensor Unit. An integrated package including station electronics and three digital accelerometers based on the MEMS technology.

DTS

Data Transfer Sequence.

DVD

Digital Versatile Disc.

DXF

(1) Drawing Interchange Format (2) Data Exchange Format (3) AutoCAD File (file extension).

e-428

Sercel’s seismic network software based on a client/server architecture. Totally controls the spread and the operations, and also performs all the requested computations (stacks, correlations) before recording data onto tapes or disks.

EEPROM

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory.

EOF

End Of File.

E

570

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

A

EOM

End Of Media.

EOT

End Of Tape.

ESD

Electrostatic Discharge.

eSQC-Pro

Seismic Quality Control software.

Explo.

An abbreviation for Explosive.

FC

Fibre Channel.

FDPA428

Field Deployment Aid for LRU.

FDU

Field Digitizing Unit. An analog-to-digital converter for a seismic or auxiliary channel. Includes a digitally controlled test signal generator.

FDU2S

ULS technology, dual-channel FDU.

FFT

Fast Fourier Transform. A Fourier Transform method for calculating the frequency spectrum, in both magnitude and angle, for any function of time.

Flt.

An abbreviation for Fleet.

FM4

Hermaphrodite connector (4-pin, male and female).

FO

Firing Order sent to a source controller.

FPS

File Per Source (file including vibrator attributes plus SEGD file number)

Freq

An abbreviation for Frequency.

FT

FT analysis: Frequency vs Time representation of the amplitude of a signal. Alternately, an abbreviation for Fourier Transform.

FTP

File Transfer Protocol.

F

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

571

A

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

G GIS

Geographical Information System.

GMT

Greenwich Mean Time.

GPS

Global Positioning System. A satellite-based global navigation system that consists of a constellation of 24 satellites orbiting the Earth, several in-orbit spares, and a ground-based control segment. The GPS is owned and operated by the U.S. Department of Defense but is available for general use around the world. The satellites transmit signals that are used for extremely accurate threedimensional (latitude, longitude, and elevation) global navigation (position determination), and for the dissemination of precise time. GPS-derived position determination is based on the arrival times, at an appropriate receiver, of precisely timed signals from the satellites that are above the user's radio horizon. The location accuracy is anywhere from 100 to 10 metres for most equipment. Accuracy can be pinpointed to within one meter with special military-approved equipment.

GUI

Graphical User Interface.

HC

High Cut (RF filtering).

HDOP

Horizontal Dilution Of Precision (GPS).

Hex.

An abbreviation for Hexadecimal.

HFVS

High Fidelity Vibratory Seismic. A method for improving the fidelity of data acquired with a vibratory source. Involves the measurement and recording of suitable motions from each vibrator so that these actual motions can be used to separate simultaneous sources and process the data.

HSU

Hand-Shake Unit. An interface between an LSI and a blaster controller, used by the field operator to tell the central unit when a firing device is armed and tell the number of the corresponding shot point.

H

572

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

A

HV

High Voltage.

HVD

High Voltage Differential (SCSI interface).

ID

(1) Identification, identity. (2) Inner Diametre.

Ident.

An abbreviation for Indentity.

Incr.

An abbreviation for Increment

Info.

An abbreviation for Information

Init.

An abbreviation for (1) Initialize (2) Initialization.

Instr.

An abbreviation for Instrument.

IP

Internet Protocol.

ITB

Internal Time Break.

kN

1000 Newton.

LAN

Local Area Network. A data communications system that (a) lies within a limited spatial area, (b) has a specific user group, (c) has a specific topology, and (d) is not a public switched telecommunications network, but may be connected to one.

Lat.

An abbreviation for Latitude.

LAUL

Line Acquisition Unit, Line. An interconnecting unit along an acquisition line. Used to control the data flow from the acquisition lines to the recording truck, and for power management on the line.

LAULS

ULS-technology LAUL.

I

K

L

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

573

A

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

LAUR

Line Acquisition Unit, Radio telemetry, capable of acquiring up to 30 channels of seismic data at 2 ms sampling rate in real-time on radio line segments.

LAUX

Line Acquisition Unit, Crossline. An interconnecting unit along an acquisition Transverse or a line. Used to control the path of the data flow from the acquisition lines to the recording truck, and for power management on line sections.

LAUX-G

GigaTransverse LAUX (supports 1 Gb/s data rate).

LAUXS

ULS-technology LAUX.

LC

Low Cut (RF filtering).

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display.

LCI-428

Line Controller Interface (428XL control module that can handle up to 10 000 channels in real-time at 2 ms sampling rate).

LCI-G

GigaTransverse Line Controller Interface, supporting 1 Gb/s data rate (can handle up to 100 000 channels @ 2 ms in real time, equivalent to ten LCI-428 units).

LED

Light Emitting Diode.

LF

Line Feed.

LLX400

428XL Laser Link. Consists of two laser transceivers for licensefree, line-of-sight, infrared data transmission over obstacles within a Line or a Transverse. Connects to the wireline electronics via two LXIU interface boxes.

Long.

An abbreviation for Longitude.

LRU

Line Remote Unit, used as a long range point-to-point radio relay, or as master transceiver in a radio cell. It can be inserted anywhere in a spread as an element of the 428XL network to relay the data transmission on a Line. Connects to any type of 428XL field electronics (LAUX, LAUL, FDU Link, etc.), except for 100 MHz Ethernet ports.

574

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

LSI

Line Source Interface. A remote blaster connector box used to connect a blaster controller along an acquisition line instead of connecting it to the control unit’s Blaster connector. The blaster controller connects to the LSI via an HSU unit.

LSS

Line Shooting System. An LSI connected to an HSU.

LT428

428XL Line tester. A pocket terminal that connects to the XDEV connector of an LAUL or LAUX, used to check the performance of a line section. The test results are displayed on the pocket terminal.

LVD

Low Voltage Differential (SCSI interface).

LXIU-400

Laser Transceiver Interface Unit. Interfaces an LAUX or LAUL

with a laser unit.

M MAC

Media Access Control data communication protocol. Provides addressing and channel access control mechanisms that make it possible for several terminals or network nodes to communicate within a multipoint network, typically a Local Area Network.

Macc.

An abbreviation for Mass Acceleration (vibrator).

Max.

Abbreviation for Maximum.

MB

Megabyte.

Mbps

Megabits Per Second.

MDR

Mirage Data Recorder.

MEMS

Micro-machined Electro-Mechanical Sensor.

MGA

Multipurpose Geophone Analyzer.

Min.

An abbreviation for (1) Minimum (2) Minute.

Misc.

An abbreviation for Miscellaneous.

MRU

Mobile Receiver Unit. A radiopositioning transceiver used for service vehicle tracking.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

575

A

A

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

MSI

Multi-Slave Interface box. Used to connect several (up to four) VE432 DPG units to a 428XL control module (LCI-428).

MTB1590S

8-metre portable telescopic mast.

Mvel.

An abbreviation for Mass Velocity (vibrator).

NA

Not Available.

NAN

Not A Number.

NAS

Network Attached Storage system

NB

An abbreviation for “Number”.

NC

Not Connected.

NCS

Network Control Sequence

NFS

Network File System.

NMEA

National Marine Electronics Association.

NMO

Normal Move-Out. The variation of reflection arrival time because of variation in the shotpoint to geophone distance (offset) which causes an increase of the length of the reflection travel path.

Num.

An abbreviation for (1) Number (2) Numerical.

Obs.

An abbreviation for Observer.

OD

Outer diametre.

OS

Operating System. Software designed to control the hardware of a specific data-processing system in order to allow users and application programs to make use of it.

OVC

Open Vibrator Controller.

N

O

576

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

P

A

PB

Play Back.

PC

Personal Computer

PCB

Printed Circuit Board.

PDF

Portable Document Format

PN

Part Number.

POSC

Petroleum Open Standards Consortium.

PPM

Parts Per Million.

PPS

Pulses Per Second

PRM

Processing Module in a 428XL system. Software running on the server computer, for formatting the data to and from the recording media, to the plotters and eSQC-Pro, and for noise editing, correlation and stacking.

Proc

An abbreviation for (1) Processing (2) Process (3) Processor.

PWB

Printed Wiring Board.

QC

Quality Control.

QPSK

Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (transmission encoding).

QT400

Quick Tester. Allows quick checks for transmission and power supply on a 428XL line (wireline telemetry).

RAID

Redundant Array of Independent Disks.

RAM

Random-Access Memory.

Rcv.

An abbreviation for Receiver.

Q

R

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

577

A

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

RDM

Removable Disk Module.

Rdy.

An abbreviation for Ready.

Rec.

An abbreviation for (1) Record (2) Recorder.

Ref.

An abbreviation for Reference.

RF

Radio Frequency.

RJ45

Registered Jack - 45 (8 wire connector used in networking).

RMS

Root-Mean-Square. The square root of the average of the squares of a series of related values (for a sine wave, 0.707 times the peak value).

RP

Receiver Position.

RTK

Real-Time Kinematic (GPS). The RTK technique allows centimetric accuracy to be achieved.

Rtv.

An abbreviation for (1) Retrieve (2) Retrieval.

RVT

Removable Virtual Tape.

Rx.

An abbreviation for Receive.

SCSI

Small Computer Systems Interface. SCSI is a system level interface and as such it uses high level commands, and logical block addressing. This considerably simplifies the task of the device driver and saves CPU time on every single I/O. Moreover, because the SCSI device does operations like “rewind the tape” or “format this disk” without host intervention, the host saves even more CPU time.

SD or SDev.

Standard Deviation.

SE

Single-End.

SEG

Society of Exploration Geophysicists. The SEG promotes the science of geophysics and the education of exploration geophysicists.

S

578

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

SEG-D

One of the formats developed by the SEG for recording seismic data, used in processing and interpretation software to determine how the tape should be read.

Seq.

An abbreviation for Sequence.

SGA

Signal Graphic Analyzer. Software used to analyse radio or wireline-similarity signals acquired on Sercel systems. Allows the user to monitor the phase, distortion or force of the vibrator source signal (on auxiliary traces) in real time.

SGT

Sercel Geophone Tester.

Simult.

An abbreviation for Simultaneous.

SMT

Surface-Mount Technology.

SN

Serial Number.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol.

SNR

Signal-to-Noise Ratio.

SP

Shot Point.

SPL

Source Point Line.

SPN

Source Point Number.

SPS

SHELL Processing Support format. A standard for the transfer of positioning and geophysical support data from land field crews to seismic processing centres.

SR

Sample Rate. The sampling interval in a seismic acquisition.

SRHRF

Strain Relief High Rate Flex telemetry cable.

ST

Standard Telemetry cable.

Stat.

An abbreviation for Statistics.

STSR

Standard Telemetry cable, Strain Relief.

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

579

A

A

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

SWR

Standing Wave Ratio. The ratio of the maximum to the minimum amplitudes of corresponding components of a field, voltage or current along a transmission line or waveguide in the direction of propagation and at a given frequency. Alternately, the reciprocal of this ratio.

TB

Time Break. A time mark indicating the shot instant or the time at which the seismic wave was generated.

TBP

Tape By-Pass.

TCP

Transmission Control Protocol (with Internet Protocol, the main protocol of the Internet).

TCXO

Temperature-Controlled Crystal Oscillator.

TDM

Time-Division Multiplex.

TDMA

Time Division Multiple Access.

TE

Transmit Error.

TFOI

Transverse Fibre Optics Interface.

TFOI-G

GigaTransverse Fibre Optics Interface (supports 1 Gb/s data rate).

TMS428

428XL Test and Maintenance system. A PC computer and an interface unit (TMU428), the core of which is an LAUX fitted with specific software, used for testing 428XL field electronics.

TMU428

TMS428 system's interface unit.

Topo.

An abbreviation for Topographical.

TREP-428

428XL Transverse Repeater.

Tx.

An abbreviation for Transmit.

T

580

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

U UH

Up-Hole. (1) Uphole geophone: a geophone placed a few feet from a shothole to detect the Uphole time. (2) Uphole time: the time for the first wave from an explosion to reach the surface at or near the shotpoint.

UL

Sercel Ultra-Link product line.

ULS

Sercel Ultra-Link Submersible technology.

UPS

Uninterruptible Power Supply.

URL

Uniform Resource Locator (world wide web address).

USB

Universal Serial Bus.

UTC

Universal Time Coordinated. Greenwich Mean Time updated with leap seconds each year to compensate for changes in the rotation of the earth.

Util.

An abbreviation for Utility.

Var.

An abbreviation for Variable.

VE432, VE464

Vibrator Electronics, consisting of a control unit (DPG) connecting to the 428XL control module (LCI-428), and a vibrator control unit (DSD) installed in each vibrator truck.

Vib.

An abbreviation for Vibrator.

VLSI

Very Large-Scale Integration.

VP

Vibrator Point. The Shot Point when a vibratory source is used.

VQC88

A standalone field system used for vibrator maintenance or troubleshooting, capable of acquiring 7 analog channels (including two independent accelerometer sensors).

VSR

Vibrator Signal Recording. A function used to record actual vibrator motions from each vibrator.

V

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

581

A

A

Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms >

VSWR

Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. The ratio of the electronic field or voltage at a voltage minimum to that at the adjacent maximum in a stationary-wave system, as in a coaxial cable.

W WGS84

World Geodetic System 1984.

WPSR

Water-Proof, Strain-Relief telemetry cable.

WZ

WZ velocity: the propagation velocity of the shot wave in the ground.

XDEV

A connector used to connect an external device (e. g. an LT428) on field electronics.

Xdump.

Extra Dump.

Xmit.

An abbreviation for Transmit or Transmitter.

Xtalk.

An abbreviation for Crosstalk. The signal picked up by an acquisition channel because of undesired coupling to another channel.

X

582

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z

Index

· weight drop U1: 73

Acceleration · baseplate, monitoring, VE432 U1: 644 · mass, monitoring, VE432 U1: 644

Acceptance · tests U3: 263 Account IM: 184 Acquisition

428XL manuals IM = Installation Manual U1 = User’s Manual Vol. 1 U2 = User’s Manual Vol. 2 U3 = User’s Manual Vol. 3 TM = Technical Manual

Numerics 3592 cartridge drive IM: 235 3C · polarity, SEGD U3: 277 408ULS · Handling IM: 368 428-Lite · connectors IM: 521 · installing IM: 68 · installing, operating system IM: 113,

IM: 135

A Abort · button, Operation U1: 254 · Plot U1: 598 · TMS428 tests TM: 57

Absolute · spread U1: 146 · Spread, tests U1: 219

Accelerated 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

Error description (SEGD) U2: 28 graphic view, normal, OVC U1: 694 graphic view, normal, VE432 U1: 675 graphic view, normal, VE464 U1: 561 index, process type U1: 261 Length U3: 289 Length (SEGD) U2: 25 local, VE432 U1: 659 local, VE464 U1: 554 Nb, APS U2: 162 normal, OVC U1: 694 normal, VE432 U1: 674 normal, VE464 U1: 560 Number (SEGD) U2: 28 numeric view, normal, OVC U1: 696 numeric view, normal, VE432 U1: 678 numeric view, normal, VE464 U1: 564 test, TMS428 TM: 109 type, OVC U1: 690 type, Process type U1: 261 type, VE432 U1: 639 type, VE464 U1: 520

Acquisition type tables (SEGD) U2: 27 Action (see Shortcuts) Active · swath U1: 99 Activity · window U1: 100 ADC · test, TMS428) TM: 105 Add · button U1: 33 · to query U1: 456 · to quick launch, TMS428 TM: 63 Additional · blocks (SEGD general header) U2: 19 · effects U1: 451 583

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z Address · · · · ·

428XL local network IM: 48 Client computer IM: 193 FUJI 3x90, changing IM: 225 FUJI 3x90, displaying IM: 226 Intranet IM: 101, IM: 109, IM: 116, IM: 123, IM: 124, IM: 131, IM: 138, IM: 145, IM: 173,

IM: 179 · · · · ·

LCI-428, changing IM: 51 LCI-428, selecting U1: 68 LTO, changing IM: 231 MAC U1: 73 TMS428 TM: 46

Adjusting · clock, LCI TM: 20

Administration · server U1: 44 Advance II U3: 100 Advanced · connection parameters U1: 40 · mode, LT428 IM: 391, IM: 402,

IM: 404 · process type U1: 259

Again · Plot U1: 598

AGC · plotter U1: 608

Air · gun (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 126 · pressure psi (SPS) U2: 92, U2: 142

Alarm · Positioning U1: 446

Alert · system U1: 446

Alias filter · Frequency at - 3dB point (SEGD)

U2: 24 · Slope (SEGD) U2: 24

Angle from skew (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 86, U2: 122, U2: 136 Annotation · logging U1: 91 Antenna · Height, format U2: 166 584

Append · VE432 vib (Look) U1: 657

Apply · All, Survey setup U1: 127 · button U1: 34 · Sensor, Survey setup U1: 127

APS · File format U2: 159 · report U1: 591

Archiving · configuring U1: 74 · DSUT TM: 171 · system status U1: 60

Array · Forming (SEGD) U2: 24 Arrays, sub, number of U2: 92, U2: 142 Assembly · Location (SEGD) U2: 39 · Serial number (SEGD) U2: 39 · Type (SEGD) U2: 39 Authorization · granting U1: 45 Auto · Corr Peak Time U1: 264 · Export U1: 464 · Level, VE432 vib drive U1: 670 · Level, VE464 vib drive U1: 548 · Lift, VE432 U1: 641 · Lift, VE464 U1: 522 · Look U1: 151 · noise editing U1: 304 · saving TMS428 reports TM: 63 Auto/Manual · noise editing threshold U1: 304 · VE432 U1: 654 · VE464 U1: 538 Autocorrelation peak time (SEGD) U2: 28 Automatic · Saving, DSUT TM: 161 Automation · Continuous, shooting U1: 285 · Discontinuous, shooting U1: 285 · Look U1: 289 · Manual, shooting U1: 286 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · shooting U1: 284 Autonomous · mode, enabling U1: 284 · mode, using U1: 376 Aux · Channel contents (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 88, U2: 123, U2: 138 · Line U1: 139 · Process Descriptor U1: 265 · Traces, number of U2: 25 Auxiliary · channel, description U1: 139 · channels U1: 139 · channels, Comments U1: 141 · channels, deploying IM: 356 · channels, Gain U1: 140 · channels, Instrument tests U1: 220 · trace scaling U1: 610 · trace, description U1: 265 Average · distortion, APS U2: 160 · force, APS U2: 160 · ground stiffness, APS U2: 160 · ground viscosity, APS U2: 160 · phase, APS U2: 160 AWD U1: 73

B Backup · GoBook Q200 IM: 323 · setup U1: 95

Backward · playback U1: 476

Banner · setup, plotter U1: 599

Base · Tracs TDMA U1: 526 Base scan interval (SEGD) U2: 20 Baseplate · acceleration, monitoring, VE432

U1: 644 · velocity, monitoring, VE432 U1: 644

Basic · pilot signal, VE432 (Acquisition type)

U1: 640 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· sweep signal, VE432 (Acquisition type)

U1: 640 · sweep signal, VE464 (Acquisition type)

U1: 521 Basic Type · · · · · · · · · ·

LOG, dB/Hz, VE432 U1: 626 LOG, dB/Hz, VE464 U1: 506 LOG, dB/octave, VE432 U1: 629 LOG, dB/octave, VE464 U1: 509 Setup, VE432 U1: 623 Setup, VE464 U1: 503 Taper, VE432 U1: 623 Taper, VE464 U1: 504 Tn, VE432 U1: 630 Tn, VE464 U1: 510

Batteries (Show/hide) U1: 115 Battery · GoBook Q200 IM: 319 · LED TM: 102 · Limit, LT428 IM: 393 · polarity test (TMS428) TM: 103 · test TM: 103 · voltage limit U1: 115 Baud · rate, Raveon radio (VE464) U1: 529 · rate, Tracs TDMA U1: 526 Bearing · source line, VE432 U1: 652 · source line, VE464 U1: 536 Beginner U1: 52 Blaster · Advance II U3: 100 · connector, LCI-428 IM: 516, IM: 517 · controller, in line IM: 373 · controllers U1: 307 · id (SEGD) U2: 26 · MACHA U3: 107 · SGDS U3: 108 · Shallow Sequencer U3: 105 · Shot Pro U3: 101 · signals IM: 518 · status (SEGD) U2: 26 · type U1: 72 Blasters · interfacing U3: 97 Blocking 585

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · trace U1: 469 Blocks in General Trailer U2: 21 BoomBox U1: 72 · wiring IM: 534 Box · type, detour U1: 143 Break · Point U1: 278 Bridge · radio, ethernet IM: 495 Browser · settings U1: 42 Buffer U1: 68 Build · feature query U1: 455 Built-in · LAUX, upgrading TM: 119 Button U1: 26 Bypass · file exports U1: 465 Bytes per scan (SEGD) U2: 19

C Cable · · · · · · · · · ·

BoomBox IM: 534 calibration TM: 58 length, Line IM: 352, IM: 353 Line cable length IM: 352, IM: 353 Macha IM: 533 path U1: 121 replacing, LAUL TM: 224 SGD-S Blaster IM: 529 ShotPro IM: 531, IM: 532 tester TM: 195

Cables IM: 515 Calibration · clock, LCI TM: 20 · DSUT TM: 130 · FDU U3: 127, TM: 95 · meter and test cables TM: 58 · multimeter, TMS428 TM: 34 · TMU428 TM: 122 Camp · distance to, alarm U1: 449 586

Capacitance · · · ·

error (SEGD) U2: 38 high limit (SEGD) U2: 38 low limit (SEGD) U2: 38 value (SEGD) U2: 38

Capacity · Processing U3: 287

Cartridge · insertion U1: 494 Cartridge drive · Shock-mount parts IM: 223 Cartridge drive. See Tape drive CDU · configuration IM: 87 Centre · button (mouse) U1: 117 Change · button U1: 33 Changing · LCI-428 U1: 66 Channel · auxiliary, description U1: 139 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

data error overscaling (SEGD) U2: 41 edited status (SEGD) U2: 42 filter (SEGD) U2: 41 filter response U3: 55 gain control method (SEGD) U2: 23 gain scale (SEGD) U2: 41 increment (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 97, U2: 129, U2: 147 number (SEGD) U2: 39 process (SEGD) U2: 42 Raveon radio U1: 529 sample to mV conversion factor (SEGD) U2: 42 Set End Time (SEGD) U2: 23 Set Number (SEGD) U2: 33 set number (SEGD) U2: 23 Set Starting Time (SEGD) U2: 23 set, number of channels in U2: 23 sets per record U1: 93, U2: 20 skipping U1: 155 Tracs TDMA U1: 526 type (SEGD) U2: 40 type id (SEGD) U2: 42 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · Type Identification (SEGD) U2: 23 · type, Log shooting setup U1: 580 Channels, number of (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 87, U2: 123, U2: 137

Charge · Depth U2: 91, U2: 141 · Length U2: 91, U2: 141

Chat U1: 64 Check · Line U1: 228 Checkerboard · view U1: 120 Circular bearing of H256 (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 85, U2: 122, U2: 136 Cleaning · boxes IM: 328 · plugs IM: 328, TM: 293 Click U1: 26 · right, Line window U1: 119 Client · installing IM: 169 · main window U1: 52 · SPS U2: 73, U2: 83, U2: 121, U2: 133 Clipping · method (noise elimination) U1: 392 · noise editing type U1: 302 · plotter U1: 613 Clock · internal U1: 90 · LCI TM: 20 · time w.r.t. GMT (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 83, U2: 121, U2: 134 Cluster U1: 296 CMRR · geophone string U3: 242 · Instrument (TMS428) TM: 94 · Instrument test U1: 222 · test record result recovery U3: 123 · test, FDU U3: 180 · test, Field (TMS428) TM: 90 · test, Sensor U3: 202 CN3e IM: 302 · Getting started IM: 383 · installing LT428 software IM: 308 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· network address IM: 296 · resetting IM: 304

Code · Producer U1: 93

COG · · · · · · · · ·

Easting, format U2: 166 elevation, format U2: 166 file, format U2: 166 log file U1: 591 Northing, format U2: 166 radius threshold U1: 416 source position (estimated) U1: 439 status, format U2: 166 to source deviation, format U2: 166

Comments · · · · ·

Auxiliary channels U1: 141 LT428 results IM: 412 observer, setup U1: 306 SEGD U2: 31 setup, Operation window U1: 280

Common · · · ·

Mode Rejection U1: 222 mode, Field (TMS428) TM: 90 mode, Instrument (TMS428) TM: 94 mode, test network, FDU calibration

U3: 150 Common mode · rejection ratio, geophones U3: 242

Communications · protocol, source controllers U3: 97

Compound · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 636 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 517

Computation Domain, APS U2: 163 Connecting · FDU link, TMS428 TM: 71 · FDU2S, TMS428 TM: 72 · LAUL, TMS428 TM: 73 · LAULS, TMS428 TM: 74 · LAUX, TMS428 TM: 75 · LAUXS, TMS428 TM: 81 · LAUXS-428, TMS428 TM: 79 · LT428 IM: 382 · TMS428 device under test TM: 70 Connection 587

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · crew Web site U1: 61 · opening a session U1: 40

Connector (see Replacing) Connectors IM: 515 428-Lite Break-Out Box IM: 521 Blaster1 IM: 516 Blaster2 IM: 517 FDU Input IM: 523 FDU2S takeoutt IM: 527 LAUL XDEV IM: 521, IM: 524 · LAUL-428 IM: 524 · LAUX LINE IM: 525 Power IM: 525 TRANSVERSE IM: 525 XDEV IM: 526 · · · · · ·

Consumption · port, TMS428 TM: 106

Continuity · test limit U1: 132

Continuous · shooting U1: 285

Control · type (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 91, U2: 125,

U2: 141 · unit serial number (SEGD) U2: 41 · unit type (SEGD) U2: 41

Controller · source, time management U1: 91

Conversion · sample to mV U2: 42

Converting · coordinates U1: 457 · samples to mV U3: 235

Coord. status final/prov (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 92, U2: 126, U2: 142 Coordinate location (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 83, U2: 121, U2: 133 Coordinates · converting U1: 457 Copy · and Paste U1: 36 · function (Export window) U1: 477 · tape, file U3: 16 588

Copy+ software tool U3: 21 Copying · files to tape U1: 488 CopyMedia U3: 16 Copyrights U1: 85 Correction · factor, FDU calibration U3: 128, TM: 95 · rate, DGPS (Raveon) U1: 529 · rate, DGPS (Tracs TDMA) U1: 525 Correlation · After Stack, process type U1: 272 · After stack, theory of U1: 394, U1: 396 · Before Stack, process type U1: 270 · data distribution U1: 401 · Frequency domain U3: 232 · more about U1: 399 · pilot, choosing U1: 262 · Time domain U3: 232 Correlator, noise supp (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 91, U2: 125, U2: 141 Corrosion IM: 369 CRC errors U3: 249 Create · selection U1: 456 Crew · name U1: 88 · name, Comment (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 87, U2: 123, U2: 137 · number, VE432 U1: 620 · number, VE464 U1: 500 · setup U1: 88 · VE464 vibrators U1: 500 · vibrators, OVC U1: 689 · vibrators, VE432 U1: 620 Crossline · spacing, AGC U1: 610 Crosstalk · Instrument test U1: 221 · Instrument, FDU U3: 183 · test record result recovery U3: 124 Crosstalk test · DSU3 U3: 218, U3: 228 CT400 TM: 195 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z Custom · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 633 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 512 · sweep file, VE432 (how to load)

U1: 635 · sweep, loading to VE464 DPG U1: 550

Customer · support U1: 85 Customizing · TMS428 tests TM: 82 Cut off · error (SEGD) U2: 38 · high limits (SEGD) U2: 38 · low limit (SEGD) U2: 38 · value (SEGD) U2: 38 Cygwin IM: 201

D DAC · Common-Mode resistance, FDU calibration U3: 150 · line current correction, FDU calibration

U3: 141 · rough current correction, FDU calibration U3: 135

Damp coeff, natural freq. (SPS) U2: 76, U2: 124 Damping coeff, natural freq (SPS) U2: 89, U2: 139 Data · archive, DSUT TM: 171 · Bypass U1: 465 · computation domain, VE432 vib QC

U1: 647 · computation domain, VE464 vib QC

U1: 532 · record sorting order (SPS) U2: 70,

U2: 118 Data rate · Line U3: 287 · Transverse U3: 287 Date · of survey (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 82, U2: 121, U2: 132 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· SEGD U2: 28 Datum U1: 458 · type, setup U1: 410 Datum Type setup · Datum U1: 458 · Ellipsoid U1: 458 · Geoid U1: 458 Day · of year (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 95, U2: 127, U2: 145 · of Year, APS U2: 163 Dead seis traces, number of U2: 25 Deboost · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 637 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 518 Default · Channel type, Log U1: 580 Delay · at end of Acq. U1: 297 · at end of VP U1: 297 · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 637 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 516 · lift up, VE432 U1: 671 · lift up, VE464 U1: 549 · no-move alarm U1: 449 · radio, measuring, VE432 U1: 666 · radio, VE432 U1: 664 · refraction, process type U1: 260 · setup, Operation window U1: 297 · speed alarm U1: 450 Delete · button U1: 34 Deploying · field equipment IM: 325 Depth · charge U2: 91, U2: 141 · towing U2: 92, U2: 142 Descale Multiplier (SEGD) U2: 23 Description · absolute spread U1: 146 · Auxiliary channels U1: 139 · Channels (Aux), Instrument tests

U1: 220 · Channels (tests) U1: 219 · Generic Line U1: 149 589

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · Generic spread U1: 150 · of grid units (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 84, U2: 121, U2: 135 · of survey area (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 82, U2: 121, U2: 132 · Receiver section U1: 129 · Survey U1: 128 Desensitization IM: 433, U1: 207

Desktop U1: 43 Detect · end of tape U1: 494 Detection · fiber, TMS428 TM: 107 Detour U1: 141 · skipped receiver points U1: 159 Deviation, COG to source, format U2: 166 Dialog box U1: 26 Digital · pilot, additional U1: 522 · pilot, choosing U1: 521 · pilot, correlation U1: 262 · Sensor Unit, deploying IM: 334 Directories · DSUT TM: 143 Disable · radio U1: 215 Disassembling · DSU TM: 214 · FDU TM: 209 · FDU2S TM: 268 · LAUL TM: 225 · LAULS TM: 272 · LAUR TM: 249 · LAUX-428 TM: 231 · LAUX-G TM: 237 · LAUXS TM: 243, TM: 278 · LRU TM: 257 · TFOI TM: 364 · TFOI-G TM: 353 · TREP-428 TM: 264 Discharge · ESD protection TM: 18 Discontinuous · shooting U1: 285 590

Disk · buffer U1: 68 · record, setup U1: 95 · space, monitoring U1: 495

Disk space · DSUT TM: 143 Display · mode, LT428 IM: 410 · Traces per inch U1: 613 Distance · no-move alarm U1: 449 · simultaneous sources U1: 287 Distortion · Instrument test U1: 221 · Sensor test U3: 207 · test record result recovery U3: 116 · test, FDU U3: 177 · test, TMS428 TM: 94 Distortion test · DSU U3: 217, U3: 227 Distortion, APS U2: 160 Diversity · enhanced (theory of) U1: 396 · stack U1: 300 · stack (theory of) U1: 394 Dongle IM: 207, U1: 69 Double-click U1: 26 Download · DSUGPS firmware U1: 171 · from crew Web site U1: 62 · setup (firmware) U1: 239 DPG · number of U1: 72 · Slave, VE432 U1: 621 · Slave, VE464 U1: 501 · status code, VE464 U1: 566 DPG Hosd Id U1: 69 Drag U1: 26 Drag and drop · base camp U1: 430 · recording unit U1: 430 · source (Positioning) U1: 432 Drilling · tool, DSU-428 IM: 337 Drive 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · · · · · · ·

level, APS U2: 160 level, high, VE432 U1: 670 level, high, VE464 U1: 549 level, low, VE432 U1: 670 level, low, VE464 U1: 549 tape, install U1: 74 transfer to U3: 287

Drive. See Tape drive Driver · graphic, Linux IM: 212 DSD · Get, VE432 U1: 661 · Get, VE464 U1: 545 · Network, Navigation U1: 311 · network, VE432 U1: 621 · network, VE464 U1: 502 · reference signal, VE432 U1: 644 · setting, OVC U1: 694 · setting, VE432 U1: 660 · setting, VE464 U1: 543 · status code, VE464 U1: 566 · VE432 status, get U1: 643 · VE464 status, get U1: 533 DSP · DRAM & DPR test TM: 101 DSU · Deploying IM: 334 · disassembly instructions TM: 214 · Re-assembly instructions TM: 217 · tests TM: 177 DSU1-428 · test specifications U3: 298 DSU3 · theory of tests U3: 211 · tilt correction U1: 179 · trace correction formula U3: 261 DSU3-428 · in Line window U1: 162 · test specifications U3: 298 · tester (DSUT428) TM: 127 DSU3BV-428 · deploying IM: 341 · specifications U3: 284 DSUGPS · acquisition U1: 164 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· · · · · · · · · ·

deploying IM: 340 firmware upgrading U1: 171 GPS Base Position station IM: 62 in Line window U1: 162 in Positioning window U1: 434 Instrument view U1: 175 instrument view U1: 175 Setup menu U1: 169 specifications U3: 284 SPS positions U1: 588

DSUT · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

Archiving TM: 171 Getting started TM: 146 Installation, hardware TM: 131 installation, software TM: 136 Log-in TM: 146 password TM: 146 Repair assistant TM: 164, TM: 166 Repair log file TM: 166 Running tests TM: 156 Specifications TM: 128 Statistics TM: 169 Test report TM: 172 Test sequence editor TM: 154

Dump · Output button U1: 262 · to SQC U1: 284

Dump stacking fold (SEGD) U2: 28 Duplicating, tape, file U3: 16 Duplication, sample U3: 249 DXF format U1: 425 Dynamic · grouping, fleets U1: 288

E e428 software · licence U1: 69 Earth · ground resistor, FDU calibration

U3: 156 Easting, COG, format U2: 166 Edit menu · DSUT TM: 154 Editing · Noise U1: 300 591

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · · · · · ·

number of windows (noise) U1: 302 Spike U1: 391 system parameters (Log) U1: 578 type (noise) U1: 302 Zeroing Length (noise) U1: 302 Zeroing Taper Length (noise) U1: 302

Effect · speed alert U1: 451

Electrostatic · discharge TM: 18

Elevation · antenna height, format U2: 166 · COG, format U2: 166 · reference U1: 414

Ellipsoid U1: 458 Ellipsoidal · model U1: 414 Emergency · alarm U1: 446 Enable · instruments U1: 68 · radio U1: 215 Enabled · export U1: 456 End · colour map scale U1: 453 · line plug IM: 351 · of media U1: 473 · of tape, detecting U1: 494 End-of-line plug IM: 351 EOF U1: 472 EOM U1: 473 Error · leakage U1: 153 · only, TMS428 report TM: 64 · recovery, Micro-seismic U1: 375 Errors · CRC U3: 249 · DSUT TM: 181 ESD TM: 18 eSQC Pro IM: 35 Esri format U1: 425 Estimated · source COG U1: 439 Ethernet 592

· port, identifying IM: 52 · port, testing (TMS428) TM: 111 · radio bridge IM: 495

Event · log viewer U1: 593 Excitation Overload, APS U2: 163 Expanded file number (SEGD) U2: 21, U2: 22 Explosive · source type setup U1: 292 Explosive (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 126 Exponent, subscans U2: 23 Exponential · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 630 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 510 · time, plotter U1: 609 Export · Auto/Manual U1: 464 · client window U1: 459 · enabled U1: 456 · mode U1: 74 Exporting · LT428 results IM: 413 · SPS files U1: 587 · to NAS U1: 483 Exports · configuring U1: 74 Extended · channel set number (SEGD) U2: 24, U2: 33 · Channel Sets/Scan Types (SEGD)

U2: 21 · · · · · · · · · ·

file number (SEGD) U2: 33 header (SEGD) U2: 25 header blocks (SEGD) U2: 21 header flag (SEGD) U2: 24 header length (SEGD) U2: 20 QC, VE432 vib U1: 647 QC, VE464 vib U1: 533 receiver line number (SEGD) U2: 34 receiver point number (SEGD) U2: 35 Record Length (SEGD) U2: 21

Extender · TFOI, connecting IM: 348

External 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · · · · ·

header (SEGD) U2: 31 header blocks (SEGD) U2: 21 header length (SEGD) U2: 20 label U1: 468 tape label U1: 94

Field · computer system(s) (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 83, U2: 121, U2: 133 · electronics, upgrading U1: 239 · electronics, upgrading via XDEV

IM: 161

F Factor to metre (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 85, U2: 121, U2: 135 Farthest · Rcv Nb, LT428 IM: 400 FDPA428 · connecting IM: 453 · operating guide IM: 455 FDU · Calibration U3: 127 · connector, replacing TM: 284 · disassembly instructions TM: 209 · INPUT connector IM: 523 · Input polarity IM: 523 · Max number between LAUs IM: 353, IM: 354 · Number in link, LT428 IM: 419 · Number in link, TMS428 TM: 123 · Power supply IM: 352 · reassembly instructions TM: 210 · unit type (SEGD) U2: 39 FDU2S · Disassembly instructions TM: 268 · Input polarity IM: 527 · Re-assembly instructions TM: 269 · Takeout connector IM: 527 FDU-428 · deploying IM: 329 · test specifications U3: 296 Feature · property names U1: 453 Fiber · detection, TMS428 TM: 107 Fibre Optics · allowable loss TM: 342 · connector, replacing TM: 392 · repairs TM: 341 · splices, number of TM: 342 · TFOI, connecting IM: 348 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· on/off U1: 109 · record increment (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 97, U2: 129, U2: 147 · record number (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 97, U2: 129, U2: 147 · tape number (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 97, U2: 129, U2: 147 · test limits, LT428 IM: 394 · test, automation U1: 289 · test, LT428 IM: 404 · update U1: 151 · update mode U1: 105, U1: 223,

U1: 224 Field Units (see Instruments) File · count (SEGD) U2: 28 · duplicating U3: 16 · Header block (SEGD) U2: 19 · Load/Save U1: 597 · menu (TMS428) TM: 56 · number (SEGD) U2: 19, U2: 33 · number, recording U1: 98 · packager U1: 60 Files · per tape U1: 469 · per tape (SEGD) U2: 28 Filter · alias Hz, dB pnt, slope (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 87, U2: 123, U2: 137 · low Hz, dB pnt, slope (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 88, U2: 123, U2: 138 · LT428 IM: 391 · notch Hz, -3 dB points (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 123 · notch Hz, -3dB points (SPS) U2: 88, U2: 138 · playback U3: 43 · response, channel U3: 55 · servo control, VE432 U1: 669 · servo control, VE464 U1: 548 593

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · type U1: 89 · type (SEGD) U2: 28

Filters · plotter U1: 611

Firing · Order (FO), process type U1: 259

Firmware · · · · ·

updating U1: 239 updating, TMS428 TM: 57 updating, via XDEV IM: 161 upgrading (TMS428) TM: 113 version, reading (TMS428) TM: 112

First · Notch Frequency (SEGD) U2: 24 · Timing Word (SEGD) U2: 33 · waypoint U1: 419

Fleet · · · · · ·

cluster U1: 330 group, dynamic U1: 288 Ready U1: 295 VE464 vibrator, crew U1: 502 vibrator, APS format U2: 160 vibrator, VE432 crew U1: 621

Floppy disk · specifications (SPS) U2: 70, U2: 71, U2: 118, U2: 119

FM4 plug assembly · SRHRF cable TM: 309 · ST+ cable TM: 298 · WPSR cable TM: 322 FO Window · VE432 U1: 649 Folders · DSUT TM: 143 Force · ground, monitoring, VE432 U1: 644 · Overload, APS U2: 163

Force, APS U2: 160 Form · Line, LT428 IM: 399 · Transverse, LT428 IM: 407 Format · APS U2: 159 · code (SEGD) U2: 19 · instrument test limit U2: 53 594

· SEGD U2: 15 · SEGD, Rev 2.1 U2: 45 · Source controllers U3: 97 · SPS, initial U2: 65 · SPS, Rev. 2.1 U2: 111 · SPS-like U2: 159 · synthetic file U2: 57 · version num. (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 82, U2: 121, U2: 132

Forward · playback U1: 476

Fourier · Transform U3: 232

Frequency · domain U3: 232 · LRU IM: 430, U1: 203 · Nyquist U1: 89

From channel (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 97, U2: 129, U2: 147 From receiver (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 98, U2: 129, U2: 148 FTP · exporting U1: 463 · server U1: 74 · server setup U1: 471 · server, installing on PC IM: 282 FUJI 3x90 · address, changing IM: 225 · address, displaying IM: 226 Functions · Test U1: 217 · VE432 U1: 654 · VE464 U1: 538

G Gain · · · · · · · ·

Auxiliary channels U1: 140 code U1: 147 code, absolute spread U1: 146 error, Instrument test U1: 222 geophone string U3: 241 Instrument tests U1: 220 LT428 IM: 391 Preamplifier, 0 dB, FDU calibration 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z U3: 131 · Preamplifier, 12 dB, FDU calibration

U3: 160 · · · · ·

Seismonitor U1: 116 shooting setup, Log U1: 580 test record result recovery U3: 117 test, FDU U3: 173 test, TMS428 TM: 94

Gain test · DSU U3: 216, U3: 226

Gap U1: 129 · between receiver sections U1: 136

General · Header block 1 (SEGD) U2: 19 · Header block 2 (SEGD) U2: 21 · Header block 3 (SEGD) U2: 22 · Header Block Number (SEGD) U2: 21,

U2: 22 · LT428 parameters IM: 387, IM: 391 · Trailer blocks, number of U2: 21

Generate · report U1: 456

Generic · spread U1: 148 · spread, description U1: 150

Geodetic datum · parameters (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 84, U2: 121, U2: 134 · spheroid (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 84, U2: 121, U2: 134

Geographic · AGC U1: 609 Geographic (see Topographic) Geoid U1: 458 Geoidal · model U1: 414 Geophone · arrangement U3: 243 · number per trace U3: 240 · parallel U3: 241 · series U3: 241 · strings U3: 240 Geophysical contractor (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 83, U2: 121, U2: 133 Geotiff format U1: 425 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Geozone · alarm U1: 447

Get · · · · ·

Similarities, VE464 U1: 557 VE432 DSD U1: 661 VE432 DSD status U1: 643 VE464 DSD U1: 545 VE464 DSD status U1: 533

Getting started · · · · ·

428XL GUI U1: 39 DSUT TM: 146 FDPA428 IM: 455 LT428 IM: 383 TMS428 TM: 50

Giga Transverse IM: 39 · DSU IM: 336 GIS U1: 452 Global · rendering, plotter U1: 613 Go · starting a shot U1: 253 · to waypoint U1: 382 · Topographic view U1: 111, U1: 113 GoBook IM: 317 · connecting IM: 382 · Getting started IM: 383 · Q200 IM: 381 GoBook Q200 · Backup IM: 323 · Battery IM: 319 · installing IM: 320 · quick guide IM: 317 · Reinstalling IM: 324 · resetting IM: 318 GPS · differential corrections, Raveon radio

U1: 528 · differential corrections, Tracs TDMA

U1: 525 · time management U1: 91

Grabbing · VP U1: 416 Graphic · driver, Linux IM: 212 · view, normal acquisition, OVC 595

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z U1: 694 · view, normal acquisition, VE432

Help TM: 60 · language U1: 42

U1: 675 · view, normal acquisition, VE464

· send, emergeny alarm U1: 447

Hide

U1: 561

· layer (Positioning) U1: 424

· view, Positioning window U1: 420

High

Graphic view (see Topographic) Graphics · how to select U1: 36 Gravity · test U1: 222 Gravity test, DSU U3: 224 Grid · coord. at origin (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 85, U2: 122, U2: 135 · origin (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 85, U2: 122, U2: 135 Ground · earth resistor, FDU calibration U3: 156 · force, monitoring, VE432 U1: 644 · stiffness, APS U2: 160 · TMS428 TM: 35 · viscosity, APS U2: 160 · wing nut, replacing TM: 284 Group · geophone string U3: 245 Guest · privileges U1: 46 Guidance · overview U1: 381 · set, VE464 U1: 556 · vibrator, enabling U1: 288

· · · · · · ·

H Hardware · installing IM: 47

HDOP, APS U2: 163 Header · external, size U1: 93 Header record · description (SPS) U2: 82, U2: 132 · specification (SPS) U2: 72, U2: 120 Height · antenna, format U2: 166 596

box, detour U1: 143 channel, detour U1: 143 Line, sync, VE432 U1: 641 Line, sync, VE464 U1: 522 SN, detour U1: 143 VE432 drive level U1: 670 VE464 drive level U1: 549

High-cut · filter, plotter U1: 611 · playback filter U3: 44

Hilbert · transform, VE432 U1: 635

Histogram · view U1: 125 Historic · · · · ·

editing type (SEGD) U2: 27 range (SEGD) U2: 27 taper length (SEGD) U2: 27 threshold Init value (SEGD) U2: 27 zeroing length (SEGD) U2: 27

Historical · Noise Editing U1: 300

History · Line window U1: 124 Hold/Var U1: 304 Hot · Line U1: 85 Hour of day (SEGD) U2: 19

I Icon U1: 27 ID · VE464 vibrator U1: 501 · vibrator, VE432 U1: 621

Identity · card U1: 86 Identity Card U1: 61 Immersible 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · electronics IM: 362 · electronics, strain-relief IM: 372

Impedance · geophone string U3: 241

Importing · SPS files U1: 585

Impulse · Sensor test U3: 205

Impulsive · process type U1: 268 · Stack process type U1: 269

Inactive · units (detour) U1: 141

Increment · · · ·

LT428 Rcv num IM: 390 Marker U1: 138 Shot U1: 292 VP to do U1: 294

Index · box U1: 27 · Source Point U1: 248

Indicator · replacing TM: 290

Init · Thresh U1: 304 Initialization, DSUT hardware TM: 147 Inline · spacing, AGC U1: 610 Input · resistance, FDU calibration U3: 135 · servo control loop, VE432 U1: 669 · servo control loop, VE464 U1: 548 Inserting · cartridge U1: 494 Install · window U1: 66 Installing · 428-Lite IM: 68 · Client software IM: 169, IM: 189 · DSUT hardware TM: 131 · DSUT software TM: 136 · Ethernet plotter IM: 217 · FDPA428, GoBook IM: 320 · FTP server on PC IM: 282 · Handheld PC software IM: 291 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· · · · · · · · · · · · ·

hardware IM: 47 laser link IM: 481 LT428 software, CN3e IM: 308 LT428, GoBook IM: 320 patch (client) IM: 197 patch (server) IM: 157 Redhat, client IM: 171 Redhat, server IM: 96, IM: 119 server software IM: 149 TMS428 hardware TM: 35 TMS428 software TM: 37 TMS428 software new release TM: 40 Vehicle tracking box IM: 289

Instrument · Code (I) tables (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 123 · Code (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 97, U2: 129,

U2: 147 · Crosstalk U1: 221 FDU U3: 183 · Distortion U1: 221 · Gain error U1: 222 · Noise U1: 221 · Phase error U1: 222 · Pulse test U1: 222 · test limits U2: 53 · test limits, LT428 IM: 395 · test record recovery U3: 113 · test specifications U3: 296 · tests U1: 220 · tests, CMRR (FDU) U3: 180 · tests, Distortion (FDU) U3: 177 · tests, FDU U3: 168 · tests, Gain&Phase U3: 173 · tests, LT428 IM: 403 · tests, Noise U3: 170 · tests, Offset U3: 172 · tests, Pulse (FDU) U3: 186 · tests, Resistance U3: 168

Instrument tests · Crosstalk DSU3 U3: 218, U3: 228

Instruments · Colour U1: 113 · Show/hide U1: 113 Interfacing · source controller U3: 97 597

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z Internal · ADC, testing (TMS428) TM: 105 · clock U1: 90 · time break (SEGD) U2: 27

Interpolation U1: 614 · sample U3: 249 Intranet · address, configuring IM: 101, IM: 109, IM: 116, IM: 123, IM: 124, IM: 131, IM: 138, IM: 145, IM: 173, IM: 179

IP address · 428XL local network IM: 48 · Client computer IM: 193 · Intranet IM: 101, IM: 109, IM: 116, IM: 123, IM: 124, IM: 131, IM: 138, IM: 145, IM: 173,

IM: 179 · LCI-428, changing IM: 51 · TMS428 TM: 46

Irregular · LT428 layout IM: 402, IM: 404

J jConfig window U1: 83 jExport window U1: 459 jInstall window U1: 65 jLine window U1: 103 jLog window U1: 571 jOperation window U1: 245 jOVC U1: 687 jPlotter window U1: 595 jPositioning window U1: 405 Julian · day, backup setup U1: 96 Julian day (SEGD) U2: 19 jVE432 window U1: 617 jVE464 window U1: 497 jVibOther window U1: 683

K Kit · tools TM: 206 598

L Lab · distance to, alarm U1: 449

Label · external U1: 468 · properties U1: 452 · tape, external U1: 94

Landscape · plotter U1: 612 Language · help U1: 42 Laser Link IM: 477 · Installing IM: 481 · Specifications IM: 493 Last · record, playback U1: 475 Lat. Long · initial line (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 85, U2: 122, U2: 136 · scale factor (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 85, U2: 122, U2: 135 Lat. of standard parallel(s) (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 85, U2: 121, U2: 135 Latitude · reference, vibrator guidance U1: 288 LAU tests · Transmission TM: 107 · XILINX loading TM: 102 LAUL-428 · cable replacement TM: 224 · connectors IM: 521, IM: 524 · deploying IM: 347 · disassembly instructions TM: 225 · Power supply IM: 352 · reassembly instructions TM: 226 · spacing IM: 352, IM: 353 LAULS · Disassembly instructions TM: 272 · Re-assembly instructions TM: 274 Launch · quick, TMS428 tests TM: 63 Launcher · bar, customizing U1: 51 · icons U1: 50 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z LAUR U1: 200 · disassembly instructions TM: 249 · reassembly instructions TM: 250

LAUR-428 IM: 424 LAUX · in TMS428 test system IM: 37

LAUX-428 · · · · ·

connectors IM: 525, IM: 526 deploying IM: 347 disassembly instructions TM: 231 Power supply IM: 352 reassembly instructions TM: 232

LAUX-G IM: 39 · · · ·

disassembly instructions TM: 237 GPS receiver for DSUGPS IM: 336 reassembly instructions TM: 238 TFOI-G strain-relief TM: 400

LAUXS · Disassembly instructions TM: 278 · Re-assembly instructions TM: 279

LAUXS-428 · disassembly instructions TM: 243 · reassembly instructions TM: 244

Layer · rename (Positioning) U1: 424 · show/hide (Positioning) U1: 424

Layout · LT428 IM: 391 · setup U1: 134

LCI · oscillator, adjusting TM: 20

LCI-428 address, selecting U1: 68 installing IM: 55 IP address, changing IM: 51 repairing TM: 21 replacing U1: 66 LCI-G IM: 39, IM: 336 · installing IM: 54 · · · · ·

Leak · testing TM: 292

Leakage · error U1: 153 · error (SEGD) U2: 38 · limit (SEGD) U2: 38 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· · · · · · ·

Line port, TMS428 TM: 106 Sensor test U1: 224 test U3: 197 Test circuitry (LAU) U1: 153 Test limit U1: 132 test, Field (TMS428) TM: 91 value (SEGD) U2: 38

LED · Run, testing (TMS428) TM: 104

LED test · DSU TM: 177

Length · · · · · · · · ·

pilot, other vibrator systems U1: 685 pilot, OVC U1: 690 record (SEGD) U2: 28 record, process type U1: 259 sweep, other vibrator systems U1: 684 sweep, OVC U1: 690 time, plotter U1: 614 Zeroing (noise) U1: 302 Zeroing Taper (noise) U1: 302

Level · alert, used disk space U1: 496 · auto, VE432 vib drive U1: 670 · auto, VE464 vib drive U1: 548

Licence · · · · ·

client IM: 207, U1: 69 information about U1: 48 LT428 IM: 383 Plotter IM: 208, U1: 70 VE464 Guidance IM: 209, U1: 71

Lift · up delay, VE432 U1: 671 · up delay, VE464 U1: 549

Limit · instrument test U2: 53 Limits (see Test limits) Line · check U1: 228 · data rate U3: 287 · end plug IM: 351 · Error Recovery U1: 375 · Generic U1: 149 · mapping to a logical line U1: 157 · name (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 80, U2: 93, U2: 97, U2: 98, U2: 127, 599

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z

· · · · ·

U2: 129, U2: 143, U2: 147, U2: 148 name, APS U2: 160, U2: 169 name, COG, format U2: 166 Nb Inc, LT428 IM: 390 number U1: 128 number format (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 86, U2: 122, U2: 136 port, leakage test (TMS428) TM: 106

· · port, transmission test (TMS428)

TM: 108 · power polarity (TMS428) TM: 111 · sequence number, SPS U2: 121,

U2: 133 · · · · ·

skipping U1: 150 socket, replacing TM: 285 splitting U1: 138 Test, LT428 IM: 388 troubleshooting U1: 229

LINE connector · LAUX IM: 525 Line Tester · operating guide IM: 379 Linear · · · ·

basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 625 basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 505 Phase U1: 90 phase filter U3: 56

Link · FDU-428, examples IM: 332 · Number of FDUs, update (LT428)

IM: 419 · Number of FDUs, update (TMS428)

TM: 123 Linux · graphic driver IM: 212

List · box U1: 27 Listening · time U1: 260 Lite · connectors IM: 521 · installing IM: 68 · installing, operating system IM: 113,

IM: 135 · Process Type settings U1: 259 600

Live seis traces, number of U2: 25 LLX400. See Laser Link LLX400. See Laser link Load · Thresh U1: 304 Loading · Custom sweep (VE464 DPG) U1: 550 · DSUT software TM: 136 · system parameters U1: 579 · TMS428 software TM: 37 Local · acquisition, VE432 U1: 659 · acquisition, VE464 U1: 554 · disk U1: 68 · ellipsoidal model U1: 414 · network IM: 41 · oscillator, testing (TMS428) TM: 107 · user U1: 41 LOG · dB/Hz, VE432 U1: 626 · dB/Hz, VE464 U1: 506 · dB/octave, VE432 U1: 629 · dB/octave, VE464 U1: 509 Log · file, DSU repair TM: 166 · files, compressing IM: 166 Log in · connecting to server U1: 40 · DSUT TM: 146 · installing server software IM: 150 · name U1: 42 Logging · post-annotation U1: 91 Logging in · first time IM: 206 Logical · line mapping U1: 157 Login IM: 184 Long. of central meridian (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 85, U2: 122, U2: 135 Look · Automatic U1: 289 · automatic U1: 151 · manual U1: 151 · properties U1: 151 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · sensors U1: 111, U1: 113 · test (TMS428) TM: 112 · VE432 DSD U1: 655

Look&Feel U1: 43 Loop · LRU U1: 216 · servo control, VE432 U1: 669 · servo control, VE464 U1: 548

Loss · Fibre Optics repairs TM: 342

Low · · · · · · · · · ·

box, detour U1: 143 channel, detour U1: 143 SN, detour U1: 143 stacks, number of U2: 42 Trace U1: 303 Trace Percentage (SEGD) U2: 27 Trace Value U1: 303 Trace Value (SEGD) U2: 27 VE432 drive level U1: 670 VE464 drive level U1: 549

Low-cut · · · ·

Filter frequency (SEGD) U2: 24 Filter slope (SEGD) U2: 24 filter, plotter U1: 611 Playback filter U3: 44

LP traceability, DSU TM: 166 LRB · in jLine U1: 180 LRU IM: 424 · Desensitization IM: 433, U1: 207 · disassembly instructions TM: 257 · Frequency IM: 430, U1: 203 · Half-duplex IM: 429 · reassembly instructions TM: 258 · Sleep U1: 215 · Time Division Multiplex U1: 208 LSI IM: 31, IM: 373 · Instrument tests U1: 321 · Shooting U1: 314 · TB widow calibration U1: 315 LSS IM: 31 · channel Instrument tests U1: 321 · Instrument tests U1: 321 · Shooting U1: 314 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· TB window calibration U1: 315

LT · · · ·

Line Nb IM: 389 Position IM: 387, IM: 389 Rcv Nb IM: 390 Sensor Type Nb IM: 391

LT428 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

connecting IM: 382 Exec Line Test IM: 388 Exec Transverse Test IM: 388 Field test IM: 404 Getting started IM: 383 Instrument test IM: 403 main menu IM: 386 operating guide IM: 379 Power-on IM: 383 results IM: 410 running Line tests IM: 396 running Transverse tests IM: 406 Save Rcv Tilt model IM: 402 Self-test IM: 385 Set general parameters IM: 387,

IM: 391 · Set LT position IM: 387, IM: 389 · Set Test Limits IM: 387, IM: 393 · Tap test IM: 388, IM: 416

LTO address, changing IM: 231 LXIU. See Laser link LXIU-400. See Laser Link

M MAC address U1: 73 MACHA U3: 107 Macha · wiring IM: 533 Macha blaster U1: 73 Maintenance · field electronics TM: 205 · Field equipment TM: 20 · TCXO on LCI board TM: 20 Management · sessions U1: 47 · time U1: 90 Manual · Export U1: 464 601

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · · · ·

Look U1: 151 noise editing U1: 304 scale, Line window U1: 125 shooting U1: 286

Manual/Auto · noise editing threshold U1: 304 · VE432 U1: 654 · VE464 U1: 538

Manufacturer’s · code (SEGD) U2: 19 · serial nb (SEGD) U2: 19

Map grid · easting (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 94, U2: 127, U2: 144 · northing (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 94, U2: 127, U2: 144

Mapping · line U1: 157 Marker · FDU2S channels U1: 186 · increment U1: 138 · Line Layout setup U1: 135

Marking, stop U1: 144 Mass · acceleration, monitoring, VE432

U1: 644 · overload, APS U2: 163 · velocity, monitoring, VE432 U1: 644 · warning, APS U2: 162

Master · Ethernet radio bridge IM: 499 · oscillator, LCI TM: 20

Master/slave · cabling IM: 66 · operation U1: 387 Max · number of FDUs IM: 353, IM: 354 · number of traces U3: 289 · of max, Aux (SEGD) U2: 28 · of max, Seis (SEGD) U2: 28 · speed U1: 450 · speed, scale U1: 418 MDR IM: 286 Media · copy U3: 16 602

Meter · calibration TM: 58 · reset TM: 57

Micro-seismic · enabling U1: 284 · usage U1: 374 Min · · · ·

High Drive, VE432 U1: 671 High Drive, VE464 U1: 549 Low Drive, VE432 U1: 670 Low Drive, VE464 U1: 549

Minicom IM: 166 Minimum · Phase U1: 90 · phase filter U3: 76 Minute of day (SEGD) U2: 19 Mode · display, plotter U1: 613 · LT428 display IM: 391 · operating U1: 283 Model · ellipsoidal U1: 414 · geoidal U1: 414 Monitoring · disk space U1: 495 Monoline U1: 157 Mounting · parts IM: 72 Mouse · Buttons U1: 27 · buttons U1: 27 · Centre button U1: 117 Move · alarm U1: 449 MRU · configuring U1: 76 Multi-component · recording (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 88, U2: 123, U2: 138 Multi-DPG configuration IM: 58 Multi-gun U1: 384 Multimeter · calibration, TMS428 TM: 34 Multimodule IM: 60 Multiple 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · tests U1: 226 Multi-screen IM: 213 Mute · channel U1: 144

N Name crew U1: 88 feature, colour map U1: 453 Log in U1: 42 plotter U1: 73 property, query builder U1: 455 user U1: 61 NAS system IM: 35, IM: 241 · archiving system U1: 75 · connecting IM: 243 · exporting to U1: 483 · FTP connection IM: 250 · IP address on user network IM: 247 · reinstalling IM: 252 · Rescue mode IM: 255 · shock-mount parts IM: 242 · user network IM: 251 · · · · · ·

NAS4000 · cabling IM: 263 · shock-mount parts IM: 261

Navigation · option U1: 312 · shooting mode U1: 311 Nb · Sensor/Rcv Pt, LT428 IM: 391 Network · DSD, Navigation U1: 311 · VE432 DSD U1: 621 · VE464 DSD U1: 502 Networking · 428XL local network IM: 48 · Client computer IM: 193 · TMS428 TM: 46 Next · Plot U1: 598 · record, playback U1: 476 NFS · disk setup U1: 470 · server U1: 74 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

NFS disk · exporting to U1: 463

No · move U1: 449 · reply U1: 448

No. sub arrays, nom depth (SPS) U2: 92, U2: 142 Noise · Editing U1: 300 · editing, setup U1: 299 · elimination type (SEGD) U2: 27 · Instrument test U1: 221 · Sensor test U1: 224 · Test limit U1: 132 · test record result recovery U3: 115 · test, FDU (Instrument) U3: 170 · test, Field (TMS428) TM: 90 · test, Instrument (TMS428) TM: 93 · test, Sensor (FDU) U3: 191 Noise test · DSU U3: 215, U3: 225, TM: 178 Noisy · stacks, number of U2: 42 · Trace % U1: 303 · trace percentage (SEGD) U2: 27 Nominal towing depth U2: 92, U2: 142 Normal · acquisition OVC U1: 694 · acquisition, VE432 U1: 674 · acquisition, VE464 U1: 560 · mode, LT428 display IM: 391 Normalization · plotter U1: 609 Northing, COG, format U2: 166 Notch U1: 611 · frequency (SEGD) U2: 24 · playback filter U3: 44 Num · Sensor Type, LT428 IM: 391 Number of · Auxes (SEGD) U2: 25 · blocks of General Trailer (SEGD)

U2: 21 · channel sets per record (SEGD) U2: 20 · channels (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 87, 603

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z U2: 123, U2: 137 · channels in this channel set (SEGD) U2: 23 · dead Seis traces (SEGD) U2: 25 · DPG modules U1: 72 · FDUs between LAUs, max IM: 353,

IM: 354 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

FDUs in link, LT428 IM: 419 FDUs in link, TMS428 TM: 123 geophones per trace U3: 240 live Seis traces (SEGD) U2: 25 plotters U1: 73 sample skew 32 byte extensions (SEGD) U2: 20 samples in trace (SEGD) U2: 25 samples per trace U2: 32 samples per trace (SEGD) U2: 34 Seis traces (SEGD) U2: 25 splices, Fibre Optics TM: 342 stacks low (SEGD) U2: 42 stacks noisy (SEGD) U2: 42 subscans exponent (SEGD) U2: 23 traces (SEGD) U2: 25 traces, max U3: 289 vibrators in pattern, VE432 U1: 650 vibrators in pattern, VE464 U1: 534 windows (SEGD) U2: 27 windows, noise editing U1: 302

Numeric · · · · ·

pilot, additional U1: 522 pilot, choosing U1: 521 pilot, correlation U1: 262 view, Line window U1: 123 view, normal acquisition, OVC

U1: 696 · view, normal acquisition, VE432

U1: 678 · view, normal acquisition, VE464,VE464 U1: 564

Nunits, len, width (SPS) U2: 76, U2: 77, U2: 89, U2: 90, U2: 124, U2: 125, U2: 139, U2: 140 Nut · wing, replacing TM: 284 NVIDIA IM: 215 Nyquist U1: 89 604

O Observer · comments, setup U1: 306 · privileges U1: 46 · reports U1: 589

ODU IM: 496 Off · Line U1: 100 Offset · removing U3: 238 · test U3: 172 · test, Sensor U3: 193 · to coord. location (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 83, U2: 121, U2: 133

On · Line U1: 100

Only · errors, TMS428 report TM: 64

Open · session U1: 40 · Test plan TM: 56 · test report, TMS428 TM: 69

Operating · mode U1: 283 Operation · table U1: 248 Optical Fibre · TFOI, connecting IM: 348

Option · button U1: 27

Options · Navigation U1: 312 · Slip-sweep U1: 286, U1: 337

Organization · code U2: 171 Orientation · LT428 IM: 398 · pattern, VE432 U1: 651 · pattern, VE464 U1: 535 · plotter page U1: 612 · test, LAUL (TMS428) TM: 110 Oscillator · local, testing (TMS428) TM: 107 · Master (LCI) TM: 20 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z Output · Dump U1: 262 · stack U1: 262 · Xdump U1: 262

OVC U1: 687 Overload, APS U2: 163

P Page · setup, plotter U1: 612

Parallel · geophone U3: 241

Parameters · · · ·

loading (Log) U1: 578 saving (Log) U1: 578 saving/loading IM: 154 system, editing U1: 578

Parts · · · · ·

DSU-428, spare TM: 214 FDU, spare TM: 208 LAUL-428, spare TM: 223 LAUX-428, spare TM: 230 LAUXS-428, spare TM: 243

Password · DSUT TM: 146 · expiry date U1: 45 · opening a session U1: 42

Paste U1: 36 Patch · client IM: 197 · server IM: 157 Path · colour U1: 121 Pattern · · · · · · ·

number, creating, VE432 U1: 650 number, creating, VE464 U1: 534 orientation, VE432 U1: 651 orientation, VE464 U1: 535 setup, VE432 U1: 650 setup, VE464 U1: 534 vibrator, choosing U1: 279

PC · Handheld, installing IM: 291

PCMCIA 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· tools, VE432 U1: 671

Peak · distortion, APS U2: 160 · force, APS U2: 160 · phase, APS U2: 160

Peg (see Topographic stake) Period · monitoring, used disk space U1: 496 Periodical verification, DSUT TM: 130 Peripherals IM: 211 · Install setup U1: 72 Permission U1: 46 Phase · angle (SEGD) U2: 22 · Control (SEGD) U2: 22 · error (Instrument test) U1: 222 · Linear U1: 90 · Minimum U1: 90 · test, FDU U3: 173 · test, TMS428 TM: 94 Phase test · DSU U3: 216, U3: 226 Phase, APS U2: 160 Pilot · basic signal, VE432 U1: 640 · digital, additional U1: 522 · digital, choosing U1: 521 · digital, correlation U1: 262 · length, other vibrator systems U1: 685 · length, OVC U1: 690 Pilot length (SEGD) U2: 28 Ping IM: 52 Planting · tool, DSU3BV-428 IM: 345 · tool, DSU-428 IM: 339 Plate Warning, APS U2: 162 Playback · filters U3: 43 · record U1: 474 Plot U1: 612 · abort U1: 598 · Again U1: 598 · Next U1: 598 Plotter · AGC U1: 608 605

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · · · · · · · · · · ·

banner U1: 599 ethernet, installing IM: 217 general IM: 35 licence IM: 208, U1: 70 mode, display U1: 613 name U1: 73 number of U1: 73 parameters U1: 608 processing U1: 608 scaling U1: 610 type U1: 73

Plug · cleaning IM: 328, TM: 293 · process type, FO U1: 259

Plug, FM4 · SRHRF cable TM: 309 · ST+ cable TM: 298 · WPSR cable TM: 322

Point · Code, FDU2S channels U1: 185 · Number (Marker) U1: 137

Point (to) U1: 28 Point Code · DSU channels U1: 165 · FDU channels U1: 130 · SPS U2: 79, U2: 93, U2: 127,

U2: 143 Point Depth (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 93, U2: 127, U2: 143 Point Index · SPS U2: 79, U2: 80, U2: 93, U2: 97, U2: 127, U2: 129, U2: 143, U2: 147 Point Index, APS U2: 160, U2: 169 Point Index, format U2: 166 Point number · COG, format U2: 166 · SPS U2: 79, U2: 80, U2: 93, U2: 97, U2: 127, U2: 129, U2: 143, U2: 147 Point number, APS U2: 160, U2: 169 Point record · description (SPS) U2: 93, U2: 143 · specification (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 127 Polarity 606

· · · · · · · ·

3C U3: 277 battery, test (TMS428) TM: 103 FDU input IM: 523 FDU2S takeout IM: 527 SEGD U2: 20 test, FDU (TMS428) TM: 92 test, line power (TMS428) TM: 111 trace U3: 42

Port · consumption, TMS428 TM: 106 · switching test (TMS428) TM: 110 · voltage, testing (TMS428) TM: 104

Portrait · plotter U1: 612 Pos. proc. contractor (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 83, U2: 121, U2: 133 POSC U2: 171 Positioning · contractor (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 83, U2: 121, U2: 133 · layers U1: 407 Post-annotation · logging U1: 91 Post-plot date of issue (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 82, U2: 121, U2: 132 Power · connector, LAUL-428 IM: 524 · connector, LAUX IM: 525 · polarity, line (TMS428) TM: 111 · requirements IM: 53 · socket, replacing TM: 287 · test, LAU TM: 102 Power supply · field electronics IM: 352 Power-off · Line, LT428 IM: 399 Power-on · Line, LT428 IM: 399 · LT428 IM: 383 · test, LT428 IM: 399 · Transverse, LT428 IM: 407 Power-up · TMS428 TM: 51 P-P bar/m,prim/bubble (SPS) U2: 92, U2: 142 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z Preamplifier · 0 dB gain, FDU calibration U3: 131 · 12 dB gain, FDU calibration U3: 160

Pressure · sensor, enabling, VE464 U1: 555 Pressure Overload, APS U2: 163 Prestack within field units (SEGD) U2: 27 Preview · colour mapped attributes U1: 453 Printer IM: 35 Privileges U1: 46 Process · Type setup, generating U1: 276 · type, Log shooting setup U1: 581 · type, overview U1: 258 · Type, SEGD U2: 27 · Type, setup U1: 279 Processing · capacity U3: 287 · Crossline spacing, plotter U1: 610 · filter, plotter U1: 611 · Geographic AGC, plotter U1: 609 · Inline spacing, plotter U1: 610 · Normalization, plotter U1: 609 · plotter U1: 608 · Time, exponential U1: 609 · Window length (AGC) U1: 609 · Wz velocity, plotter U1: 609 Producer · code U1: 93 Project code and description (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 86, U2: 122, U2: 136 Projection U1: 458 · type (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 84, U2: 121, U2: 134 · type, setup U1: 413 · zone (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 84, U2: 121, U2: 135 Projection Type setup · Projection U1: 458 Properties · in graphic view, Line U1: 119 · Look, Line U1: 151 · object label U1: 452 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· test plan, TMS428 TM: 62

Property · name, query builder U1: 455

Protocol · source controllers U3: 97

Pseudorandom · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 632 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 511

Pulse · · · · ·

basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 631 basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 515 Instrument test U1: 222 Sensor test U1: 225 test, FDU U3: 186

Q Q200 IM: 381 · Backup IM: 323 · Battery IM: 319 · connecting IM: 382 · Getting started IM: 383 · installing IM: 320 · quick guide IM: 317 · Reinstalling IM: 324 QC · choice, VE432 vib U1: 647 · choice, VE464 vib U1: 532 · data (How to view) U1: 118 · extended, VE432 vib U1: 647 · extended, VE464 vib U1: 533 · limits, OVC U1: 692 · limits, VE432 vib U1: 646 · limits, VE464 vib U1: 531 QT-400 IM: 378 Quadrant bearing of H256 (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 86, U2: 122, U2: 136 Quality · COG radius threshold U1: 416 · Control IM: 35 · Vib position accuracy U1: 417 · warning setup U1: 415 Quality Control · check records (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 126 Query · add to U1: 456 607

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · builder U1: 455

Quick · Launch, TMS428 tests TM: 63 · tester, QT-400 IM: 378

R R,S,X file quality control (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 126 Radio · bridge, ethernet IM: 495 · delay, measuring, VE432 U1: 666 · Delay, VE432 U1: 664 · delay, VE432 U1: 668 · management, VE432 vib U1: 643 · management, VE464 vib U1: 524 · telemetry, deployment IM: 423 · telemetry, setting up U1: 200 Radius · alarm, distance to camp U1: 449

Re-assembling · DSU TM: 217 · FDU2S TM: 269 · LAULS TM: 274 · LAUXS TM: 279 Reassembling · FDU TM: 210 · LAUL TM: 226 · LAUR TM: 250 · LAUX-428 TM: 232 · LAUX-G TM: 238 · LAUXS TM: 244 · LRU TM: 258 · TFOI TM: 373 · TFOI-G TM: 357 · TREP-428 TM: 265 Reboot · server U1: 49 Receiver · code (Rx) tables (SPS) U2: 76,

· alarm, distance to recording unit

U1: 449

U2: 124 · index (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 98, U2: 129,

· shooting setup, Log U1: 581

Random · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 632 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 511 · Lift up delay, VE464 U1: 549

Rate · refresh U1: 56 · sample U1: 89

Raveon radio · setup U1: 528 Raw · · · · ·

Impulsive Stack process type U1: 269 process type, Correlation U1: 271 servo control, VE432 U1: 670 servo control, VE464 U1: 548 Vib Stack process type U1: 274

Rcv · Nb Increment, LT428 IM: 390

Read · traceability, FDU (TMS428) TM: 97 · traceability, LAU (TMS428) TM: 116 · user info (TMS428) TM: 113

Ready · fleet U1: 295 608

U2: 148 · · · · · · · · · · · ·

line number (SEGD) U2: 34 point easting (SEGD) U2: 36 point elevation (SEGD) U2: 36 point index (SEGD) U2: 34 point northing (SEGD) U2: 36 point number (SEGD) U2: 34 point, skipping U1: 149, U1: 159 position history U1: 592 section U1: 129 section, marking U1: 136 Tilt model, LT428 IM: 402 Type Layout, LT428 IM: 391

Record · disk, setup U1: 95 · identification (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 80, U2: 127, U2: 129 · identification, APS U2: 160, U2: 169 · identification, COG, format U2: 166 · Instrument tests U1: 218 · last, playback U1: 475 · length (SEGD) U2: 28 · length, Intrument tests U1: 221 · length, process type U1: 259 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · next, playback U1: 476 · test result recovery U3: 113 · type (SEGD) U2: 20

Record length U3: 289 · SEGD U2: 20 Recovering · instrument test records U3: 113

Recovery · line error, Micro-seismic U1: 375

Redhat · installing, client IM: 171 · installing, server IM: 96, IM: 119

Reference · · · · · · ·

DSU3, DSUT TM: 131, TM: 158 latitude, vibrator guidance U1: 288 resistors, calibration U3: 129 signal, VE432 DSD U1: 644 voltage, calibration U3: 129 voltage, FDU (TMS428) TM: 95 voltage, FDU calibration U3: 131

Refraction · delay, process type U1: 260 · delay, SEGD U2: 26

Refresh · rate U1: 56 Registering · user U1: 45 Reinstalling · TMS428 software TM: 40

Relation record · description (SPS) U2: 97, U2: 147 · specification (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 129

Release · tape drive U1: 473

Remote · connection to server, Linux IM: 200 · connection to server, Windows

IM: 201 · network IM: 42, IM: 43, IM: 44 · user U1: 41 · user, installing IM: 189

Rename · layers (Positioning) U1: 424

Rendering · global, plotter U1: 613 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· setup, plotter U1: 612

Repair · assistant, DSU TM: 164, TM: 166 · LCI-428 TM: 21 · log file, DSUT TM: 166

Repairing · · · ·

SRHRF cable TM: 303 ST cable TM: 294 ST+ cable TM: 294 WPSR cable TM: 303

Repeater · · · ·

LAUX-428, Marker setup U1: 136 Raveon radio U1: 529 Tracs TDMA U1: 527 Transverse IM: 351

Replacing · · · · · · · · · · · ·

cable, LAUL TM: 224 cable, TFOI TM: 363 cable, TFOI-G TM: 352 connector, Fibre Optics TM: 392 FDU connector TM: 284 ground wing nut TM: 284 indicators TM: 290 LCI-428 U1: 66 Line & Trans sockets TM: 285 Power socket TM: 287 TFOI board TM: 368 XDEV sockets TM: 288

Reply · alarm U1: 448

Report APS U1: 591 COG U1: 591 errors only (TMS428) TM: 64 generate, query U1: 456 Observer U1: 589 publishing Publish reports U1: 575 · receiver position U1: 592 · test, TMS428 TM: 67 · · · · · ·

Repository U1: 68 Rescue · NAS system IM: 255 Reset · button U1: 34 609

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · Meter TM: 57 · queries and classification U1: 454 · Tester Unit TM: 57

· Line tests, LT428 IM: 396 · Tests DSUT TM: 156 · tests, TMS428 TM: 65 · Transverse tests, LT428 IM: 406

Resetting · CN3e IM: 304 · GoBook Q200 IM: 318

Reshoot U1: 290 Reshot U1: 290 Resistance · · · · · · · · · · ·

error (SEGD) U2: 37 high limit (SEGD) U2: 37 input, FDU calibration U3: 135 low limit (SEGD) U2: 37 Sensor test U1: 223 test network, FDU calibration U3: 144 test, FDU U3: 168 test, Field (TMS428) TM: 92 test, Instrument (TMS428) TM: 93 test, Sensor U3: 194 value (SEGD) U2: 37

Response, Channel filter U3: 55 Restart · server U1: 49 Retrieval · Wireline telemetry U1: 101 Return · Pilot, VE432 U1: 644 · signal, VE432 DSD U1: 643 · sweep, VE432 vib U1: 644 Reverse · button U1: 34 Reversed · Marking option U1: 138 Revision · SEGD U1: 93 Revision Number (SEGD) U2: 21 Rewind · tape U1: 473 Right · click, Line window U1: 119 Role U1: 46 Run · LED, testing (TMS428) TM: 104 · TMS428 tests TM: 57 Running 610

RVT300 IM: 286

S S N (serial number) · detour U1: 143 Sample · conversion to mV U3: 235 · int. Record Len. (SPS) U2: 75,

U2: 123 · int., Record Length (SPS) U2: 87,

U2: 137 · · · · · ·

interpolation U3: 249 Rate U1: 89 Rate, LT428 IM: 391 skew extensions, number of U2: 20 skew, SEGD U2: 33 to mV conversion factor U2: 42

Sample Rate · SEGD U2: 25 Samples · in trace, number of U2: 25 · per trace, number of U2: 32, U2: 34

Save · Rcv Tilt Model, LT428 IM: 402 · Thresh U1: 305

Saving · automatic, TMS428 reports TM: 63 · results, LT428 IM: 413 · system parameters U1: 579

Saving, automatic · DSUT TM: 161 Scalability · installation settings U1: 77

Scale · button U1: 28 · factor (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 85, U2: 122,

U2: 135 · histograms U1: 125

Scaling · plotter U1: 610 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z Scan Type · Header (SEGD) U2: 23 · Number (SEGD) U2: 33 · per record (SEGD) U2: 20

Scrollbar U1: 28 Sealing TM: 292 Searching · LT428 results IM: 412

Second · Notch Frequency (SEGD) U2: 24 · of minute (SEGD) U2: 19

SEGD · · · · · · ·

3C polarity U3: 277 Code U1: 133 format U2: 15 format, Rev 2.1 U2: 45 revision, choosing U1: 93 setup U1: 92 Trace Blocking U1: 469

Seis traces, number of U2: 25 Seismic · datum (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 94, U2: 127, U2: 144 · instrument header records (SPS) U2: 87, U2: 137 · receiver header records (SPS) U2: 89,

U2: 139 · setup, Operation U1: 283 · source header records (SPS) U2: 90,

U2: 140 · trace scaling U1: 610

Seismonitor U1: 116 · DSUT TM: 159 · gain U1: 116 · Sensor test U1: 227 Select U1: 28 · VE432 vib (Look) U1: 655 Selecting · graphical objects U1: 36 · in graphic view U1: 117 · table cells U1: 35 · text U1: 35 · traces to plot U1: 605 Selection · create U1: 456 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Self-test · LAU (TMS428) TM: 101 · LT428 IM: 385

Senior · Observer, privileges U1: 46

Sensor · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

Coulour code U1: 111 Leakage test U1: 224 Noise test U1: 224 num/Rcv pnt, LT428 IM: 391 Pulse test U1: 225 Resistance test U1: 223 Seismonitor U1: 227 sensitivity (SEGD) U2: 40 show/hide U1: 111 test limits U1: 131 tests U1: 223 tests, CMRR U3: 202 tests, Distortion U3: 207 tests, FDU U3: 191 tests, Impulse U3: 205 tests, Leakage U3: 197 tests, Look U1: 152 tests, Noise (FDU) U3: 191 tests, Offset U3: 193 tests, Resistance U3: 194 tests, Tilt U3: 200 Tilt model U1: 224 Tilt test U1: 224 Type, FDU2S channels U1: 185 Type, LT428 IM: 391

Sensor Type · · · ·

DSU channels U1: 164 FDU channels U1: 131 Number (sensor tests) U2: 36 SEGD code U2: 35

Sequence · Line, SPS U2: 121, U2: 133 · test, DSUT TM: 154

Sequencer · Shallow U3: 105

Sequential · time, plotter U1: 613 · trace, plotter U1: 613

Serial · number, detour U1: 143 611

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · number, tape U1: 94

Series · geophones U3: 241

Server administration U1: 44 connectors IM: 73 FTP U1: 74 log on to U1: 40 NFS U1: 74 software, installing IM: 95, IM: 149 start/stop U1: 49 Server ID IM: 207, U1: 69 · · · · · · ·

Servo · · · ·

input, VE432 U1: 669 input, VE464 U1: 548 setting, VE432 U1: 669 setting, VE464 U1: 547

Session · manager U1: 47 · opening U1: 40

Set · · · · · · · · ·

channel, number per record U1: 93 DSD, OVC U1: 694 Guidance, VE464 U1: 556 Servo, VE432 U1: 669 Servo, VE464 U1: 547 tape U1: 98 tape, creating U1: 467 VE432 DSD U1: 660 VE464 DSD U1: 543

Sets, channel U2: 20 Settings · browser U1: 42 · help U1: 42 Setup · Crew, OVC U1: 689 · DSUT TM: 152 · Observer comments U1: 306 · VE432 Crew, vibrators U1: 620 · VE464 Crew, vibrators U1: 500 SFL · Spread First Line U1: 279 SFN · Spread First Number U1: 279 SGD-S 612

· Blaster cable IM: 529

SGDS U3: 108 SGS · shooting system U1: 73 SH geophone IM: 333 Shallow · mode, enabling U1: 284 · Sequencer U3: 105 Shallow-water U1: 384 Shapefile U1: 425 Shock · mount parts IM: 72 Shock-mount · Cartridge drive IM: 223 · NAS system IM: 242 · NAS4000 IM: 261 Shooter U1: 307 Shooting U1: 307 · LSI IM: 373 · LSS IM: 31, U1: 314 · Navigation mode U1: 311 · setup, Log U1: 580 · system U1: 72 · system, connecting IM: 59 · systems, interfacing U3: 97 Shortcut · Line window U1: 119 Shortcuts · tests TM: 60 Shot · automation U1: 284 · Depth, charge len. (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 126 · depth, charge len. (SPS) U2: 91, U2: 141 · Id U1: 277 · Id, Log shooting setup U1: 581 · increment U1: 292 · Nb, APS U2: 162 · number (SEGD) U2: 25 · starting U1: 253 ShotPro · install U1: 72 · interfacing U3: 101 · wiring IM: 531, IM: 532 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z Show · layer (Positioning) U1: 424

Shutdown · server U1: 49

Signal · return sweep, VE432 U1: 644

Similarities · VE464, radio U1: 557

Similarity · test, radio, VE432 U1: 644 Simultaneous mode U3: 287 Single · mode, recording specifications U3: 287

Size · external header U1: 93 · vert. stk fold (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 125 Size, vert. stk fold (SPS) U2: 90, U2: 140

Skew, sample, number of extensions U2: 20 Skip · channel U1: 155 Skipping · lines (spread description) U1: 150 · receiver points U1: 149 · receiver points (detour) U1: 159 Slave · 428XL U3: 98 · Ethernet radio bridge IM: 499 · VE432 DPG U1: 621 · VE464 DPG U1: 501 Slave. See Master/Slave. Sleep · LRU U1: 215 Slip · time U1: 337 · time, selecting U1: 297 Slip-sweep IM: 58, U1: 337 · enable U1: 286 · mode used (SEGD) U2: 28 Snaking U1: 138 · DSU U1: 167 · FDU U1: 160 · FDU2S U1: 196 Software · e428, licence U1: 69 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· · · · · · · ·

Handheld PC, installing IM: 291 installing, GoBook IM: 320 installing, TMS428 TM: 37 New release TM: 46 patch (client) IM: 197 patch (server) IM: 157 updating U1: 239 version (SEGD) U2: 28

Software, installing · CN3e IM: 308 · server IM: 149 Soil, drill method (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 91, U2: 126, U2: 141 Source · aux nb (SEGD) U2: 28 · code (Sx) tables (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 125 · COG file, format U2: 166 · control, LSS IM: 31, IM: 373 · controller, in line IM: 373 · controller, time management U1: 91 · easting (SEGD) U2: 28 · elevation (SEGD) U2: 28 · Explosive U1: 292 · Line U1: 278 · line bearing, VE432 U1: 652 · line bearing, VE464 U1: 536 · Line Number (SEGD) U2: 22 · northing (SEGD) U2: 28 · Point Index U1: 248 · Point Index (SEGD) U2: 22 · Point Number (SEGD) U2: 22 · point setup, generating U1: 282 · point, setup U1: 277 · Receiver U1: 278 · Set Number (SEGD) U2: 22 · type, setup U1: 291 Source controllers U3: 97 Space, disk · DSUT TM: 143 Spacing · crossline (AGC) U1: 610 · DSU3 IM: 354 · FDU IM: 353 · inline (AGC) U1: 610 · LAU IM: 353 613

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z Spare · · · · ·

DSU-428 parts TM: 214 FDU parts TM: 208 LAUL-428 parts TM: 223 LAUX-428 parts TM: 230 LAUXS-428 parts TM: 243

Spatial · filtering, Positioning window U1: 408 · query U1: 423

Specifications · 428XL U3: 281 · DSUT TM: 128 · Instrument tests U3: 296 · laser link IM: 493 · TMS428 TM: 31 Speed · alarm U1: 451 · maximum U1: 450 · maximum, scale U1: 418 Spike · editing U1: 391 Splicing · SRHRF cable TM: 303 · ST+ cable TM: 294 · WPSR cable TM: 303 Split · line U1: 138 Spread · absolute U1: 146 · generic U1: 148 · layout conventions IM: 358 · number (SEGD) U2: 25 · setup U1: 145 · SFL U1: 279 · SFN U1: 279 · Superspread U1: 280 · Superspread, Line window U1: 147 · type U1: 278 · type (SEGD) U2: 26 SPS · exporting U1: 587 · format, initial U2: 65 · importing U1: 585 · Rev. 2.1 U2: 111 · Sercel (over 10000 traces) U2: 108 614

SPS-like file format U2: 159 SQC · dump to U1: 284 · dump, VE432 U1: 364 · dump, VE464 U1: 351 SQC Dump mode U1: 351 SRHRF cable · splicing TM: 303 SSMon · software, installing IM: 299, IM: 314 ST cable · splicing TM: 294 ST+ cable · splicing TM: 294 Stack · Correlation after, process type U1: 272 · Correlation before, process type

U1: 270 · · · · ·

distance, VE432 U1: 651 distance, VE464 U1: 535 Impulsive, process type U1: 269 Output button U1: 262 Vibroseismic, process type U1: 274

Stacking Fold · SEGD U2: 27 Stacking Fold, APS U2: 163 Stacks, number of · Low U2: 42 · Noisy U2: 42 Stake (see Topographic stake) Standard · process type U1: 259 Start · colour map scale U1: 453 · time, plotter U1: 614 Starting · 428 server U1: 49 · DSUT428 TM: 146 · FDPA428 IM: 455 · LT428 IM: 383 · TMS428 TM: 50 Static correction (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 93, U2: 127, U2: 143 Statics U3: 249 Statistics 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · · · ·

DSUT TM: 169 OVC U1: 698 VE432 U1: 681 VE464 U1: 568

· setup U1: 127

Swath · · · · · ·

Status · · · ·

codes, VE432 DPG and DSD U1: 680 codes, VE464 DPG and DSD U1: 566 VE432 DSD, get U1: 643 VE464 DSD, get U1: 533

Sweep

Step

· basic signal, VE432 (Acquisition type)

· negative U1: 327 · Vibroseismic source U1: 294

Stiffness (ground), APS U2: 160 Stop · button, Operation U1: 253 · Marking U1: 144 · on error, TMS428 TM: 63 Stopping · 428 server U1: 49 Strain-relief · TFOI-428 IM: 349 · TFOI-G TM: 400 · ULS equipment IM: 372 Streamer cable number (SEGD) U2: 24 String · gain, geophone U3: 241 · group, geophone U3: 245 · impedance, geophone U3: 241 · wiring, geophones U3: 246 Subarrays, number of U2: 92, U2: 142 Submersible · electronics IM: 362 · electronics, strain-relief IM: 372 Subscan exponent U2: 23 Superspread U1: 280 · Line window U1: 147 Support · customer U1: 85 Surface · elevation, reference U1: 414 · elevation, SPS U2: 79, U2: 127 Surface elevation · SPS U2: 94, U2: 144 Survey · description U1: 128 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

backup setup U1: 96 first line (SEGD) U2: 25 first number (SEGD) U2: 25 name U1: 98 number U1: 97 type U1: 582

U1: 640 · basic signal, VE464 (Acquisition type)

U1: 521 · freq start, end (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 125 · frequency start,end (SPS) U2: 91,

U2: 141 · · · · · · ·

length (SEGD) U2: 28 length, other vibrator systems U1: 684 length, OVC U1: 690 return signal, VE432 U1: 644 slip time U1: 337 slip, enable U1: 286 type, length (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 91, U2: 125, U2: 141

Switching · port (TMS428) TM: 110

Sync · high line, VE432 U1: 641 · high line, VE464 U1: 522

Syntax (see Description) Synthetic · file format U2: 57 · file syntax U1: 235 · Signal type U1: 235 System · shooting U1: 72 · tools, troubleshooting IM: 166

T T0 · mode, VE432 U1: 649 · Repeat Times, VE432 U1: 648 · setup, VE432 U1: 648

Table · how to select U1: 35 615

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · operation U1: 248

Tap · test, LT428 IM: 388, IM: 416

Tape · copy U3: 16 · drive IM: 35 · drive address FUJI 3x90, displaying IM: 226 · drive, install U1: 74 · Label U1: 468 · label (SEGD) U2: 28 · label, external U1: 94 · Number U1: 468 · number of files U1: 469 · number, SEGD U2: 28 · set U1: 98 · set, creating U1: 467 · setup, Export window U1: 467 · type, format, density (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 87, U2: 123, U2: 137

Tape drive · address 3592 IM: 235 FUJI 3x90, changing IM: 225 LTO IM: 231 · exporting to U1: 462 · installing IM: 223 · interface card IM: 78 · supported IM: 224 Tape/disk identifier (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 82, U2: 121, U2: 132

Taper · length start, end (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 91, U2: 125, U2: 141 · VE432 U1: 623 · VE464 U1: 504

TB · window, process type U1: 260 · window, SEGD U2: 25

Tb to T0 time (SEGD) U2: 27 TB window · LSS U1: 315 TCXO, LCI board TM: 20 TDMA U1: 524 · channel, Tracs TDMA U1: 526 616

Template · TMS428 tester TM: 50

Terminal · Linux IM: 166

Test

· · · ·

acceptance U3: 263 Automatic U1: 289 cable calibration TM: 58 customizing (TMS428) TM: 82 functions U1: 217 functions, FDU U3: 163 generator, FDU calibration U3: 135 Instrument, FDU U3: 168 limit battery U1: 115 Continuity U1: 132 Leakage U1: 132 Noise U1: 132 Sensor U1: 131 Tilt U1: 132 limit file format U2: 53 limits, LT428 IM: 387, IM: 393 multiple U1: 226 network, Resistance, FDU calibration

· · · · · · · ·

record result recovery U3: 113 Record, type (SEGD) U2: 25 Running, DSUT TM: 156 running, TMS428 TM: 65 Sensor, FDU U3: 191 sequence editor, DSUT TM: 154 setup U1: 217 shortcut (Topographic view) U1: 111,

· · · · · · · · ·

U3: 144

U1: 113 · Spread U1: 219 · System, TMS428 IM: 37

Test plan · TMS428 TM: 61 Test report · DSUT TM: 172 Test system · TMS428 TM: 29 Tested · Line Nb, LT428 IM: 390 Tester · cable TM: 195 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · reset TM: 57

Text · box U1: 28 · how to select U1: 35

TFOI · · · · ·

board, replacing TM: 368 cable TM: 363 connecting IM: 348 disassembly instructions TM: 364 reassembly instructions TM: 373

TFOI-G IM: 39 · cable TM: 352 · disassembly instructions TM: 353 · reassembly instructions TM: 357 · strain-relief TM: 400

Third Notch Frequency (SEGD) U2: 24 Threshold · COG radius U1: 416 · Hold/Var (SEGD) U2: 27 · Init U1: 304 · Init Value, noise editing U1: 303 · Load U1: 304 · Save U1: 305 · type tables (SEGD) U2: 27 · type, other vibrator systems U1: 685 · type, OVC U1: 690 · updating (noise elimination) U1: 392 Tilt · correction, enable U1: 68, U1: 179 · error (SEGD) U2: 37 · limit (SEGD) U2: 37 · Model U1: 224 · test U1: 224, U3: 200 DSU TM: 178 · Test limit U1: 132 · test, Field (TMS428) TM: 91 · test, theory U3: 221, U3: 230 · value (SEGD) U2: 37 Tilt angle · DSU3 trace correction formula U3: 261 Time · delay, FTB-SOD (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 88, U2: 123, U2: 138 · Division Multiplex, LRU U1: 208 · domain, correlation U3: 232 · exponential, plotter U1: 609 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· · · · · ·

Interpolation U1: 614 Length, plotter U1: 614 listening U1: 260 management U1: 90 Sequential, plotter U1: 613 SPS U2: 79, U2: 95, U2: 127,

U2: 145 · Start, plotter U1: 614

Time break · SEGD U2: 26 · window, SEGD U2: 33 Time, APS U2: 163 TMS428 IM: 37, TM: 29 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

Connecting an FDU link TM: 71 Connecting an FDU2S TM: 72 Connecting an LAUL TM: 73 Connecting an LAULS TM: 74 Connecting an LAUX TM: 75 Connecting an LAUXS TM: 81 Connecting an LAUXS-428 TM: 79 customizing tests TM: 82 FDU calibration U3: 128 firmware update TM: 57 Grounding TM: 35 installation TM: 35 main window TM: 55 software, installing TM: 37 specifications TM: 31 Templates TM: 50 Test plan TM: 61 test reports TM: 67

TMS428 specifications · Electrical TM: 33 · Environmental TM: 34 · Physical TM: 34 TMU428 TM: 30 · Calibration TM: 122 · FDU calibration U3: 128 Tn · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 630 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 510

Tn, VE432 U1: 630 Tn, VE464 U1: 510 To channel (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 97, U2: 129, U2: 147 617

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z To receiver (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 98, U2: 129, U2: 148 Toggle · button U1: 29 Toolbar · tests TM: 60 Tools · maintenance, field electronics TM: 206 · Meter and test cables calibration

TM: 58 · PCMCIA, VE432 U1: 671 · Reset Meter TM: 57 · Reset Tester Unit TM: 57 · SRHRF cable splicing TM: 303 · ST+ cable splicing TM: 294 · ST+ FM4 plug replacement TM: 298 · STSR FM4 plug replacement TM: 322 · TMS428 TM: 57 · USB key management IM: 166 · WPSR cable splicing TM: 303 · WPSR FM4 plug replacement TM: 322

Topographic · stake U1: 111 · view U1: 107 Total number of traces (SEGD) U2: 25 Towing depth U2: 92, U2: 142 Trace · auxiliary, description U1: 265 · blocking U1: 469 · data block U2: 32 · edit (SEGD) U2: 33 · Low U1: 303 · Noisy percentage U1: 303 · Number (SEGD) U2: 33 · number of samples in U2: 25 · polarity U3: 42 · selecting, plot U1: 605 · Sequential, plotter U1: 613 Trace Header · Extension (SEGD) U2: 33 · Extension Block 1 (SEGD) U2: 34 · Extension block 2 (SEGD) U2: 36 · Extension block 3 (SEGD) U2: 37 · Extension block 4 (SEGD) U2: 38 · Extension block 5 (SEGD) U2: 38 618

· · · ·

Extension block 6 (SEGD) U2: 39 Extension block 7 (SEGD) U2: 41 Extensions (SEGD) U2: 24, U2: 34 SEGD U2: 33

Traceability · · · · · ·

DSU LP board TM: 166 FDU, read (TMS428) TM: 97 FDU, write (TMS428) TM: 97 field equipment U1: 122 LAU, read (TMS428) TM: 116 LAU, write (TMS428) TM: 116

Traces · max number of U3: 289 · per inch U1: 613 · total number of U2: 25

Traces, number of · Aux U2: 25 · Dead seis U2: 25 · Live seis U2: 25 · Seismic U2: 25 Tracking · box, installing IM: 289 · Positioning window U1: 436 · VE464 U1: 526 · vehicle setup U1: 418 Tracs TDMA · Baud rate U1: 526 Trailer, general U2: 21 Trans · socket, replacing TM: 285 Transfer · to drive, spec U3: 287 Transform · Hilbert, VE432 U1: 635 Transmission · Line port (TMS428) TM: 108 · test IM: 408 · test, Line (LT428) IM: 400 · Transverse port (TMS428) TM: 108 · troubleshooting U1: 121 Transverse · connector, LAUX IM: 525 · data rate U3: 287 · port, transmission test (TMS428)

TM: 108 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · test, LT428 IM: 388 Transverse (LT428) IM: 408 TREP-428 · connecting IM: 351 · disassembly instructions TM: 264 · reassembly instructions TM: 265 Troubleshooting · DSU TM: 163 · Line U1: 229 · tools, system IM: 166 · Transmission U1: 121 Type · blaster U1: 72 · box, detour U1: 143 · Model, Polarity (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 76, U2: 77, U2: 87, U2: 89, U2: 90, U2: 123, U2: 124, U2: 125, U2: 137, U2: 139, U2: 140 · of process (SEGD) U2: 27 · of source (SEGD) U2: 25 · plotter U1: 73

U ULS technology IM: 32 · deployment IM: 362 · Handling IM: 368 · in Line window U1: 182 · strain-relief IM: 372 Uninstalling · client software IM: 210 · patch (client) IM: 197 · patch (server) IM: 157 · server software IM: 155 Unit · serial number (SEGD) U2: 39 · type (SEGD) U2: 39 Units · how to select U1: 117 · spacing X, Y (SPS) U2: 76, U2: 77, U2: 89, U2: 90, U2: 124, U2: 125, U2: 139, U2: 140 Unload · tape U1: 473 Unmanned · configuration IM: 80 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

· installation parameters U1: 81 · option, enabling U1: 67

Unselect · in Line topographic view U1: 117

Update · field U1: 105, U1: 151, U1: 223,

U1: 224 · VE464 vib fleet U1: 541

Updating · · · ·

firmware U1: 239 firmware (TMS428) TM: 113 firmware, via XDEV IM: 161 Number of FDUs in link, (LT428)

IM: 419 · Number of FDUs in link, (TMS428)

TM: 123 · TMS428 firmware TM: 57

Upgrade · firmware (TMS428) TM: 113

Upgrading · · · ·

built-in LAUX TM: 119 field electronics U1: 239 TMS428 firmware TM: 57 via XDEV, field electronics IM: 161

Uphole · time (SEGD) U2: 26 · time (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 94, U2: 127,

U2: 144 Upload U1: 62 UPS · configuration IM: 81

URL · opening a session U1: 41

USB · key IM: 166

User · · · · · · ·

account IM: 184 info U1: 92 interface table, DSUT TM: 150 local IM: 41 name U1: 61 registering U1: 45 remote IM: 42, IM: 43, IM: 44

Utilities · LAU (TMS4028) TM: 112 619

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z V V12 IM: 219 VA (plotter) U1: 613 Values · query builder U1: 456 Valve Overload, APS U2: 163 Var/Hold U1: 304 VE432 · connecting IM: 58 · DPG, connecting IM: 58 · functions U1: 654 · Version, APS U2: 163 VE464 · connecting IM: 57 · functions U1: 538 Vehicle · Tracking box IM: 289 Velocity · baseplate, monitoring, VE432 U1: 644 · mass, monitoring, VE432 U1: 644 · plotter U1: 609

Verbose · APS report U1: 591 Veritas IM: 219 Version · firmware, reading (TMS428) TM: 112

Vertical · datum description (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 84, U2: 121, U2: 134 · Stack (SEGD) U2: 24

Vib · · · · ·

position accuracy U1: 417 position Easting, APS U2: 160 position elevation, APS U2: 160 position Northing, APS U2: 160 Status Code, APS U2: 162

Vibrator · · · · · · · 620

drive level (APS) U2: 160 fleet (APS) U2: 160 guidance U1: 381 guidance, enabling U1: 288 number (APS) U2: 160 pattern setup, VE432 U1: 650 pattern setup, VE464 U1: 534

QC choice, VE432 U1: 647 QC choice, VE464 U1: 532 QC limits, OVC U1: 692 QC limits, VE432 U1: 646 QC limits, VE464 U1: 531 Radio management, VE432 U1: 643 Radio management, VE464 U1: 524 signals, recording IM: 357 T0, VE432 U1: 648 type U1: 72 type (SEGD) U2: 22 VE464 Fleet function U1: 539 Vibroseis (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 125 · · · · · · · · · · · ·

View · Graphic, OVC (normal acquisition)

U1: 694 · Graphic, VE432 (normal acquisition)

U1: 675 · Graphic, VE464 (normal acquisition)

U1: 561 · · · ·

Histogram U1: 125 menu, TMS428 TM: 58 numeric, Line window U1: 123 Numeric, OVC (normal acquisition)

U1: 696 · Numeric, VE432 (normal acquisition)

U1: 678 · Numeric, VE464 (normal acquisition)

U1: 564 · topographic, line U1: 107

Vigor · installing, operating system IM: 142 Viscosity (ground), APS U2: 160 Voltage · port (TMS428) TM: 104 · reference, FDU (TMS428) TM: 95 · reference, FDU calibration U3: 131 VP · grabbing radius U1: 416 · Id U1: 277 · to do, increment U1: 294 VSR · deployment IM: 357 · enable U1: 284 · Hilbert transform, VE432 U1: 635 · VE432 U1: 364 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z · VE464 U1: 351

Y

W

Year (SEGD) U2: 19

Warnings

Z

· DSUT TM: 181

Water · depth (SPS) U2: 79, U2: 94, U2: 127,

U2: 144 · gun (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 126

Watertightness TM: 292 Waypoint · first U1: 419 Weathering thickness (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 91, U2: 126, U2: 141 Wiggle U1: 613 Window · Length, AGC U1: 609 · menu, TMS428 TM: 58 · Number of (noise) U1: 302 · TB U2: 25 · TB, process type U1: 260 Wing · nut, replacing TM: 284 Wireless IM: 502 WPSR cable · splicing TM: 303 Write · traceability, FDU (TMS428) TM: 97 · traceability, LAU (TMS428) TM: 116 · user info (TMS428) TM: 113 Wz Velocity, AGC U1: 609

Zeroed · channel U1: 144

Zeroing · · · ·

Length (noise) U1: 302 method (noise elimination) U1: 392 noise editing type U1: 302 Taper Length (noise) U1: 302

Zoom · Line window U1: 118

X XDEV · · · ·

connector, LAUL IM: 521, IM: 524 connector, LAUX IM: 526 socket, replacing TM: 288 upgrading field electronics IM: 161

Xdump · Output button U1: 262

Xmit · test, Line ( LT428) IM: 400 · test, Transverse (LT428) IM: 408 428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

621

Index

A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z

(Page intentionally blank)

622

428XL Installation Manual March 24, 2014

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-01/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: January 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

CDROM Part No. 1L60083958

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of e-428 software version 5.0. New features: 

New VE464 Slip Time management The meaning of the Slip Time setup has changed: now the Slip Time exactly corresponds to the desired minimum delay between two consecutive sweeps. System delays are automatically taken into account (only with VE464).



Improved Master / Slave operations Thanks to Ethernet communications between Master and Slave, operations are fully automated and no longer require any voice communications.



VE464 and Raveon TDMA VE464 can now handle a new type of TDMA radio. Cybit TDMA is still supported (see VE464 V3.0 software update #1 for more details).



LAUXS-428 new field box New cross-line unit LAUXS-428 is supported (50 metre operating depth; 16 Mbps Transverse link and 8 or 16 Mbps Line data rate).



V5.0 also includes the following latest developments: o Vibrator QC statuses are now available in “Autonomous mode” (ISS for example) so COGs can be displayed and checked vs theoretical locations in the 428XL Positioning window. o “Fleet min distance” setup is available in addition to Slip-Sweep parameters, preventing fleets from running simultaneously if too close together (DSSS operations for example).

Restrictions Solaris and RedHat v4.7 or lower Operating Systems are no longer supported.

428XL-01/5.0 1/5

Warning  

Reinstall Linux on Server workstations prior to installing e-428 V5.0 software (see 428XL Installation Manual). Unlike the e-428 password, the plotter licence is not based on the Host Id but on a specific Id given by the lmhostid shell command.

o The lmhost command is available only after installing the e-428 software.  

A new password is required for each server computer. The new Slip Time management is not available for the VE432.

Hardware & Software Level Compatibility 428XL equipment Client PC

PC machine & Windows System 4GB RAM Min

LITE Client / Server PC

PC machine & Linux System (Redhat WS5U4 64bits)

Server Workstation Or Client/Server Workstation

machine & Linux System (Redhat WS5U4 64bits)

Version and/or Model DELL GX755, Windows XP or 2000 Linux RedHat WS5U4 HP XW4600, Windows XP or 2000 or Seven Linux RedHat WS5U4 HP Z400, Windows XP or Seven Linux RedHat WS5U4 Dell precision M6400 4 GB RAM, 320 GB Disk. VIGOR Nextcomputing 4 GB RAM, 320 GB Disk. HP XW 8600 workstation monoproc, 3.16 GHz – FX1700 - 4 GB – 3x146 GB SAS. HP Z800 station, monoproc, 2.93 GHz – FX1800 - 6 GB – 3x146 GB SAS. ------------------------------------------------------------HP XW 8600 workstation, biproc, 3.16 GHz – FX1700 - 8 GB – 3x146 GB SAS. HP Z800 station, biproc, 2.93 GHz – FX1800 - 12 GB – 3x146 GB SAS. ------------------------------------------------------------HP XW 8600 workstation, biproc 3.16 GHz – FX1700 - 16 GB – 3x146 GB SAS. HP Z800 station, biproc, 2.93 GHz – FX1800 - 24 GB – 3x146 GB SAS. ------------------------------------------------------------HP XW 8600 workstation, biproc 3.16 GHz – FX1700 - 32 GB – 5x146 GB SAS. HP Z800 workstation, biproc, 2.93 GHz – FX1800 - 32 GB – 5x146 GB SAS.

428XL-01/5.0 2/5

Comments

Rugged Portable PC (up to 4000 channels).

--------------------------------------------------(up to 10 000 channels).

--------------------------------------------------(up to 20 000 channels).

--------------------------------------------------(up to 40 000 channels).

428XL equipment

Version and/or Model

Comments

LT428

5.0

Release for GoBook Q200 and Intermec CN3E.

Field tools FDPA428

5.0

Release for GoBook Q200.

Test equipment

TMS428

5.0

XP and Seven Windows release.

VE432

6.2

VE432

VE432CE

6.2

including release for GoBook.

VE432CENET

6.2

including release for GoBook.

VE464

3.0

eSGA

1.0 or 2.0

VE464 QC

eSQC-Pro

SEGD file copying software qualified by SERCEL Seismic gateway

GPS for 428

Copy+ sadmpxy sadmfw sadmbgan Trimble Accutime Gold Novatel Propack V3 OCXO

Peripheral equipment Cypress A6 3592 bare drive Cypress A5 Drives

CD490E

qualified

CD590

by SERCEL

3490E bare drive 3590 bare drive

2.2, 2.3 or 2.4 Copy+ V2.5.0b

Windows XP, Vista, Seven (32 bits).

Copy+ V2.5.0

Linux (Red Hat Enterprise 5, 32/64 bit compatible).

V1.4, 1.5, 1.6 or 1.7 V1.4, 1.5, 1.6 or 1.7 V1.4, 1.5, 1.6 or 1.7

Version and/or Model 3592J1A, 3592TS1022 J1A, TS1022

Comments Fiber Channel interface (Note 1, Note 3) Note 3

IBM3590B M2488C, M2488E M8100A M2488C, M2488E

Differential SCSI only (Note 2)

Fujitsu M8100 IBM Magstar B, E, H

LTO bare drive Cypress A6 Supported but

LTO

IBM 3580 Ultrium H11, Ultrium2 H23, Ultrium 3 LTO3 Tandberg LTO3-HH

LVD interface only

not qualified Intelliq

Storage media

Printer Plotter

NAS 2000 Model FX (StoriQ v4.0 OS) NAS 2000 Model XA (StoriQ v4.0 OS) NAS 2000 Model XA (StoriQ v3.1 OS) NAS 800 Model E (StoriQ v3.0 OS) NAS 800 Model F (StoriQ v4.0 OS)

Ethernet

MDR 300-146

Emulated LTO1 tape (Solaris workstation with LVD)

MDR 300-300

Emulated LTO2 tape (Solaris workstation with LVD)

Canon

Pixma IP4500 HP 6000

e-428 clients and TMS-428

12" thermal black and white

ISYS V12DNIC

Ethernet

Note 1: For Linux, SCSI addresses are not allocated by the operator. Note 2: A single SE-LVD SCSI interface is provided with the server workstation. Using a High Voltage Differential SCSI tape drive requires a supported HVD interface board to be added to the server and, possibly, a VHDC-SCSI 3 cable.

428XL-01/5.0 3/5

Note 3: Cartridges may be shipped preformatted. In case of use of preformatted cartridges, note that the E05 cartridge format is not compatible with J1A tape drives. Using an E05-formatted cartridge with a J1A tape drive will: - either give rise to an error on the tape drive (no operation allowed on the tape). - or cause the tape drive to regard the tape as empty, whatever its actual content. (The behaviour depends on the firmware level).

Installing e-428 V5.0 software e-428 V5.0 software is supplied on a DVD-ROM. 1. Insert the e-428 DVD-ROM into the drive. if the e-428 DVD/CD-ROM icon fails to appear automatically on the desktop, double-click on the “Computer” icon, and then open the DVD/CD-ROM Drive by double-clicking on it. Wait until the icon appears on the desktop. 2. Open a Terminal window: - On Linux host computer, type the following commands: cd /media/cdrecorder/e428V5.0/linux/server (or cd /media/cdrom/e428V5.0/linux/server) ./e-428Server-v5.0-linux.bin or, if this fails to launch the install shield, use a temporary directory other than “/tmp”, by typing, for example: ./e-428Server-v5.0-linux.bin -is:tempdir /var/tmp 3. Wait until the installation wizard appears (a dozen of minutes, depending on the DVD/CD-ROM drive speed). See 428XL Installation Manual for details.

Field equipment upgrading After installing a new release of e-428 software, use the download procedure provided in 428XL User’s Manual Vol.1 (Line, Download Setup) to update field equipment firmware. Note:

To upgrade field units from 408UL V4.0.0 to 428XL V428.5.0, you cannot use the download procedure straight away. Instead, use a TMS428 to upgrade field units.

LCI-428 upgrading If the LCI-428 is not visible on the Client computer:  Open a Terminal window and then type the following commands: o

rlogin 172.30.201.1

o

lgsBootStartupSetI "/users/e-428/lcx/binsh/ startLcx.hci428.cmd"

o

sysReset

 If this does not work, connect a serial cable (P/N 1C50079711) from the computer's serial port to the XDEV1 port of the LCI-428, then type the following commands in a Terminal window: o

minicom (on a Linux host)

o

lgsBootStartupSetI "/users/e-428/lcx/binsh/ startLcx.hci428.cmd"

o

sysReset

 Open the Config window and click On Line. Open a LINE main window and select Download Setup to load LCI-428 software to the LCI-428 (use the Update LCI button). 428XL-01/5.0 4/5

428 Lite upgrading If LAUX-428 used as LCI is not visible on the 428 Lite Client computer, please follow step 1, and step 2 if required: Step 1  Connect a serial cable (P/N 1C50079711) from the computer's serial port to the XDEV1 port of the LAUX-428.  In a Terminal window on the computer, type minicom  Type the following commands : o

lgsBootTargetSetI "172.30.201.1"

o

lgsBootStartupSetI "/users/e-428/lcx/binsh/ startLcx.hci428.cmd"

o

lgsBootHostSetI "172.30.128.1"

o

lgsBootBoxSetI 0

o

sysReset

 The LAUX-428 can now be used as an LCI-428 for a 428 Lite configuration.  Open the Config window and click On Line. Open a LINE main window and select Download Setup to load LCI-428 software to the LAUX-428 (use the Update LCI button). Step 2  If LAUX-428 is still not visible after step1, see chapter "Server Software Installation" (Firmware upgrading) in 428XL Installation Manual.  Follow instructions to load 428.5.0 software via the XDEV1 port of the LAUX428.  Upgrading takes about 30 minutes.  When LAUX-428 upgrading is completed, type the following commands: o

sysReset

o

lgsLoadDefaultConfig

o

sysReset

 The LAUX-428 can now be used as an LCI-428 for a 428 Lite configuration.

428XL-01/5.0 5/5

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-02/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: January 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 Field units

: : : :

Yes Yes No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch02. Patch02 must be installed prior to first using e-428 software release 5.0.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch02.

428XL-02/5.0 1/1

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-03/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: April 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 Field units

: : : :

Yes Yes No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch03. Patch03 implements the “Unmanned” option in jInstall, especially intended for the “Microseismic” operating mode. With an uninterruptible power supply and a power distribution unit properly configured, the “Unmanned” option will automatically and safely reboot the server if for any reason SEG-D files stop being generated.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch03.

428XL-03/5.0 1/1

Approved by

428XL

D. Boucard

SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-04/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: April 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 Field units

: : : :

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch04. Improvements (Field electronics software)

- Firing Order is sent on a multiple of 4ms (for compatibility with Unite). - Allows Unite Harvesting along 428XL transverse. Fixed issues (Field electronics software)

- Occasionally, Instrument tests errors on a DSUGPS line segment. - Occasionally, Gain/phase Instrument test errors on FDU-428. - Aux channels sometimes not identified by LCI-428 after Field ON. - DSUGPS showing in grey (GPS OFF) in jLine. - DSU1 408 not properly tested after using UpdateLink tool or SgmUpdateLinkI function. - DSUGPS "Switch OFF/ON Gps" right-click command not working after a field or instrument test.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch04.

428XL-04/5.0 1/1

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-05/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: April 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 Field units

: : : :

Yes Yes No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch05. New Feature

Guidance can be used in Autonomous mode (simultaneous-source shooting with sweeps being launched independently). Improvements

DSUGPS Management. Fixed issues

           

Memory leak on lineServer. Min distance option not properly managed in dynamic Slip-Sweep operations. Display of multi-channel DSU and FDU not properly managed in numeric view. In numeric view, wrong date in saved file. Instruments not properly displayed in jPos when line spacing is less than 1 m. Wrong False Northing limit (99 999 999 instead of 9 999 999). Coordinates converter tool occasionally returning wrong computation. Code point undefined in SPS-R Out file (jLog). Increase possible number of mute traces from 1024 to 10 000. Small SPS-R not loaded. 5-metre shift on latitude of computed geographical positions from DSUGPS. In shallow mode, Ready messages ignored.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch05. 428XL-05/5.0 1/1

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-06/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: June 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 Field units

: : : :

Yes Yes No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch06. Improvements

    

Unmanned mode status display in JOperation. Copy of database saved when launching acquisition in Unmanned mode, and restored if loading fails. In JOperation, SSH connection to all connected NAS systems is tested (Unmanned mode) and displayed in Status Mail bar if failed. Two NAS systems automatically mounted after a reboot (Unmanned mode). Zero dead time feature available even if Slip Time is equal to the acquisition length.

Fixed issues

   

Bad management of Tape Set if number of Tape Sets is greater than 2. Display of LAUXS-428 in numerical instrument view (JLine). In Histogram Instrument view (JLine), change unit for noise test (only for FDU) into µV instead of µm/s². In Jline, take into account limits contained in files under snSol/snFile for instrument tests.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch06.

428XL-06/5.0 1/1

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-07/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: July 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 Field units

: : : :

Yes Yes No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch07. Improvements

       

JLine : “Gps On”, “Bad Antenna” and “Standard deviation on coordinates” columns added in DSUGPS instrument view JLine : DSUGPS Antenna QC view added JLine : Date and time displayed for start/end time in DSUGPS instrument view JConfig : warning generated when DSUGPS is selected in JInstall and line data rate is set to 8 Mbits/s In instrument views, "nb of item per page" parameter is saved Switch on/off DSUGPS in a selected zone now available JLog : “TB GPS Time” available in the observer report Field on/off function switch added on left/right port for LAUXS 408 and LAUXS-428

Fixed issues

      

Bin files removed for boxes in limit of detour Bad antenna QC not displayed correctly in DSUGPS numeric view Receiver position provided in the SPS position file occasionnaly null Point index increased for detour limit in SPS Position file Wrong DSU limits units displayed in Jline Antenna color occasionnaly wrong in instrument view In unmanned mode, the system does not always detect that the SEGD file has not been generated

428XL-07/5.0 1/2

    

Wrong number of items displayed in Sensor Numeric view for DSU In DSUGPS QC view, DSU3-428 boxes displayed in orange color In Survey Setup, Sensor view, bad unit for Noise (only for FDU) JLine : LAUL-428 not taken into account in form line Some windows disappearing without any reason on Linux machine

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch07.

428XL-07/5.0 2/2

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-08/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: July 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 Field units

: : : :

No Yes Yes Yes

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch08. Improvements (Field electronics software)

- Field electronics software: - LAU software compatible with new DSUGPS firmwares APP_1.002 and TEST_1.003. Fixed issues (Field electronics software)

- Field electronics software: . Slow convergence of DSUGPS position and azimuth, in multi-LCI mode and/or spread topology with secondary transverse. . Last line segment sometimes disappears in slip-sweep acquisition mode.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch08.

428XL-08/5.0 1/1

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-09/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: August 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 Field units

: : : :

No Yes Yes Yes

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch09. Fixed issues (Field electronics software) ● Last line segment sometimes disappearing in Slip-Sweep acquisition mode. ● DSUGPS firmware upgrading not working with all DSUGPS units selected.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch09.

428XL-09/5.0 1/1

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-10/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: October 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 Field units

: : : :

Yes Yes No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch10 that brings about new features and fixes some issues in an “Unmanned” 428XL system. New features ● Maximum number of files per tape increased to 1000000. ● Optimization of the line recovery feature: the delay before resuming acquisition and

the allowable number of Field Off/On sequences are adjustable. Fixed issues ● Server sometimes not restarting after a power supply cut. ● Server not rebooting if user is not logged in.

Note: Patch10 also includes updated 428XL manuals.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch10.

428XL-10/5.0 1/1

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-11/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: December 15, 2011

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 DSUGPS Field electronics

: : : : :

Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch11. New features

 JInstall: - NAS 4000 storage system is supported (see appended pages). - Vigor laptop computer (RedHat 5.4 OS) is supported.  JLine: - Background colour can be changed in Instrument, Battery and Sensor views. - Accelerometer horizontal components are hidden by default for Seismonitor. - 8-digit serial number are compatible with Jline's setups. - "GPS recording duration" column in DSUGPS instrument view.  DSUGPS: - If the GPS Base Position (recorder truck) moves and only the position has converged, the position is not recomputed and the server takes the previous acquired data into account to complete the computation of the azimuth. - Azimuth accuracy with DSUGPS pointing North is improved. - When all GPS receivers are turned off after the position is determined, the server stops computing the GPS position.

428XL-11/5.0 1/2

Fixed issues

 JOperation: - TB error sometimes appearing in standard mode with delay. - Slip-sweep mode with different pilots not working.  JLine: - Physical lines making up a single logical line: not working with 3-channel boxes. - Line paths not always refreshed for transmission troubles in instrument view.  JExport: - Some files lost during transfer from server to NAS.  DSUGPS: - "Start of Recording" field not properly estimated (DSUGPS numerical view in JLine). - GPS acquiring function sometimes not switched off after DSUGPS convergence. - Numerical view sometimes not updated after doing again the marking.  DSUGPS application firmware : - No output of GPS acquiring (new firmware SEPASApp_1003.mem to download using "DSUGPS firmware upgrading" function).

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch11.

428XL-11/5.0 2/2

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-12/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: January 2012

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 DSUGPS Field electronics

: : : : :

Yes Yes No No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch12. New features

● Mute traces not using the licence. ● GPS Time for VE464 TB recorded in VAPS file. Fixed issues

● Include simultaneous VPs in scalability formula. ● Joperation: display decimal places for Source Point number and Source Point Line number columns in Operation Report tab.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch12.

428XL-12/5.0 1/1

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-13/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: January 31, 2012

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 DSUGPS Field electronics

: : : : :

Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch13. New features

● Line Radio Bridge (LRB) compatibility. Fixed issues

● Field electronics software: - Unite harvesting along 428XL Transverse not possible. - Transmit errors not detected between LAUL-428 and first FDU.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch13.

428XL-13/5.0 1/1

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-14/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: May 16, 2012

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 DSUGPS Field electronics

: : : : :

Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch14. New features

● ● ● ● ●

Giga Transverse management (new boxes: LAUX-G, LCI-G). Slip-Time computed as a function of the distance between fleets. Export to multiple NAS units sequentially (Virtual NAS feature). The system is able to transfer seismic data to Unite UCI in “infill” mode. New fields in textual observer report (Tape Time, File per Tape, Device Name & Tape Error Text). ● Optimized number of CPU cores used for processing. Fixed issues

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Incorrect increment for tape number when exporting to 2 NAS units in simultaneous mode. Server locking up in particular configuration with detours. Server stopping processing when spread description is too long. Incoherent colours displayed between graphical and numerical sensor views (limit error). Not possible to apply SPS-X with more than 176 lines per shot point. Not possible to connect to the server if "shotPro" is selected in jInstall. Ve464_Basic_Type Setup not loaded (jlog) if field Nb_Freq_Ampl_Item is greater than 2. COG values missing in COG report in simultaneous mode.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch14. 428XL-14/5.0 1/1

428XL SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-15/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: June 18, 2012

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Approved by D. Boucard

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 DSUGPS Field electronics

: : : : :

No Yes No No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch15. This patch is required for the 428XL to take into account the extra leap second applied to UTC time on July 1st, 2012 (0:0:0 UTC). Patch 15 can be installed before July 1st, 2012.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch15.

428XL-15/5.0 1/1

Approved by

428XL

D. Boucard

SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update Number

: 428XL-16/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: July 30, 2012

Mandatory

Specific

Information

DVD or CD-ROM

Targets Client Server LCI-428 DSUGPS Field electronics

: : : : :

Yes Yes No No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of software Patch16. Improvements - Save setup parameters when server locks up. - Go to Waypoint action is possible from JPos. Fixed issues - Lock-up in case of acquisition with a large number of traces. - Lock-up when mixing cluster and group mode in JOperation. - Line recovery feature not working since patch 14. - VP increment not modifiable from JOperation main window. - Ve432 reconfigure functionality not working. - VAPS files not stored in the right swath using simultaneous mode in JLog. - COG lost after CANCEL with multiple Vibros per fleet. - In some cases, GPS time wrong in VAPS files. - Ready not taken into account in some cases.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch16.

428XL-16/5.0 1/1

428XL

Approved by

Software Update

D. Boucard

Software Update Number

: 428XL-17/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: Oct. 22, 2012

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Requires Customer Acknowledgement Of Receipt

Targets Client: Server: LCI-428: DSUGPS: Field electronics:

Yes Yes No No No

Purpose Software Patch 17. New features

 JLine: - Setup to sort Layout view by Line Names. - New Numerical view with all detours connected. - Histogram parameters are saved.  JOperation: - Autolook status indicator in status bar.  JLog: - Date and time displayed in different columns in the observer report.  JPos: - Fleets displayed in different colours depending on TDMA Number. Fixed issues

 Unmanned mode: - Server rebooting unexpectedly. - SSH connection not working properly with NAS 4000.  JOperation: - Ready not taken into account in some cases. - System deadlocks in case of high-production crew.

428XL-17/5.0

1/2

 JLine: - Spreads deleted when switching Swaths. - Cable Paths not properly displayed.  JLog: - Some COG files missing in some cases. - Delay Setup not taken into account if loaded from jLog.  PrmExport: - File count reset after a "Config Off". - Export possibly starting although no output device is selected.  PrmFt: - Conversion factor not properly computed in "Enhanced Diversity" mode.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch 17.

428XL-17/5.0

2/2

428XL

Approved by

Software Update

D. Boucard

Software Update Number

: 428XL-18/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: November 19, 2012

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Requires Customer Acknowledgement Of Receipt

Targets Client: Server: LCI-428: DSUGPS: Field electronics:

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of Software Patch 18. New features

 LAUX-G can be used on secondary transverse.  LAUX-G at full specification regarding the number of channels per line.  GPS on LAUX-G. Fixed issues

   

Ready not taken into account in case of PRM overflow. STOP button frozen in case of line cut. Errors 1121, 1601 on LCI-428. Eeprom corruption on DSUref with DSUT tester.

DSUGPS application firmware

 GPS acquiring dropouts (new SEPASApp_1004.mem firmware to download using "DSUGPS firmware upgrading" function).

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch 18.

428XL-18/5.0

1/1

428XL

Approved by

Software Update

D. Boucard

Software Update Number

: 428XL-19/5.0

Subsystem

:

Date

: January 14, 2013

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Requires Customer Acknowledgement Of Receipt

Targets Client: Server: LCI-428: DSUGPS: Field electronics:

Yes Yes No No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of Software Patch 19. New features

 JLine: GPS management on LAUX-428 and LAUX-G. Fixed issues

 Plot locked up when using Unite export, or playback, or when tape number is set in the banner setup, etc.  SEGD files sometimes not transferred to NAS and lost after rebooting the server.  Some SEGD files copied to "/var/dump/.ueIn" folder and never removed.  JPos: drag and drop for empty fleet no longer possible.  JLine: disable actions in popup menu during acquisition.  JOpe: improve re-shoot management (Acquisitions are paused until user responds Continuous mode still active).  LCX: Avoid system lockup in some cases of re-shoot.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch 19.

428XL-19/5.0

1/1

428XL

Approved by D. Boucard

Software Update Software Update Number : 428XL-20/5.0 Subsystem

:

Date

: February 20, 2013 (supersedes earlier publication)

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Requires Customer Acknowledgement Of Receipt

Targets Client: Server: DSUGPS: LCI-G: Field electronics:

No Yes No Yes Yes (LAUX-G only)

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of Software Patch 20. Fixed issues

 Lock-up in case of acquisition on LCI-G and/or LAUX-G with only one trace segment.



Identification of LAUX-G sometimes wrong in secondary Transverse.

Notes: 1. In this version, TMS software only manages LAUX-G and LCI-G. For other field units, please use patch 18. 2. LAUX-G firmware downloading through the line may take a while (15 minutes).

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch 20.

428XL-20/5.0

1/1

428XL

Approved by D. Boucard

Software Update Software Update Number : 428XL-21/5.0 Subsystem

:

Date

: February 20, 2013

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Requires Customer Acknowledgement Of Receipt

Targets Client: Server: DSUGPS: LCI428: Field electronics:

Yes Yes No No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of Software Patch 21. New features

 DSUGPS Setup manages accuracy of GPS position and azimuth. Note: see attached pages from 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch 21.

428XL-21/5.0

1/4

428XL

Approved by

Software Update

D. Boucard

Software Update Number : 428XL-22/5.0 Subsystem

:

Date

: April 11, 2013

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Requires Customer Acknowledgement Of Receipt

Targets Client: Server: LCI428: Field electronics:

Yes Yes No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of Software Patch 22. New features:

 JOperation: a VP can be done with only mute traces in the active spread (provided one auxiliary trace at least is present).  DSUGPS: - 16-Mbps line data rate with no restrictions. - 8-Mbps line data rate with restrictions: see More about DSUGPS below. Fixed issues:

 JLine: system lockup when connecting more than one LAUR to one LRU.  JOperation: Pattern Number sometimes not available for modification when Guidance is activated.  428 Licence: in some cases while connecting a Java client on the server, licence error message and connection failure.  SEGD : - Wrong trace header for mute traces. - Wrong gain written in test SEGD files for auxiliary traces.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch 22.

More about DSUGPS Supported:

 Compatibility with all 428 equipment, if in a different line segment.  600 DSUGPS’s max per line and per LAUX-428.  300 DSUGPS’s max on either side of a LAUX-428.

428XL-22/5.0

1/3

Not supported:

 408 equipment is not compatible with DSUGPS within the same line.  Ethernet and Line Radio bridges are not supported with DSUGPS.  LAUX-G with a GPS receiver is not compatible with DSUGPS. Specifications: Technical specifications Power consumption (GPS on) Power consumption (GPS off) Weight Operating temperature Water depth Azimuth accuracy Orthogonality accuracy Positioning accuracy

Same as DSU3-428 510 mW 310 mW 580 g -40° to +70°C ST+ (1 m) HP (1 m) ± 3° ± 0.25° ± 1m

Mandatory equipment configuration:

 LCI-428 version C.  Novatel Propak (Sercel P/N 3310233 — PROPAK-V3-OCXO-L1-A[SRCL]) GPS receiver must be connected to the LCI-428.  428XL software 5.0 minimum – patches 04 and 05.  If you are using DSUGPS links, it is recommended to use a Superspread so that the DSUGPS units located outside the active spread can send their GPS data to the central unit.  The Base Position fields are used to enter the position Easting, Northing and Elevation (metres) of the antenna of the GPS reference station attached to the LCI-428 and used to lock its clock to the GPS time.  16-Mbps line data rate with no restrictions.  8-Mbps line data rate with the following restrictions: - either disabling Autolook mode in jLine if DSUGPS connected after last LAUL. - or keeping Autolook mode in jLine if LAUL connected after last DSUGPS in the line.

428XL-22/5.0

2/3

LAU spacing Vs DSUGPS spacing: Telemetry length (m)

Number of DSUGPS’s between LAUs @ 16 Mbps

Number of DSUGPS’s between LAUs @ 8 Mbps

20

34

15

25

32

15

30

30

15

35

28

15

40

26

15

55

24

15

70

20

15

90

18

15

428XL-22/5.0

3/3

428XL

Approved by

Software Update

D. Boucard

Software Update Number : 428XL-23/5.0 Subsystem

:

Date

: August 1, 2013

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Requires Customer Acknowledgement Of Receipt

Targets Client: Server: DSUGPS: LCI428, LCI-G: Field electronics:

Yes Yes Yes Yes LAUX428, LAUXS428, LRB, LAUX-G

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of Software Patch 23. New features:

 LAUX-G identification on 8Mbps lines.  Line Radio Bridge (LRB) compatibility. Fixed issues:

 Incorrect LRB Radio Path properties  Incorrect checkerboard display of LRB radio path.  Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB) not working with e-428V5 patch 18. (For ERB connections, see attached pages from 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1). Notes:

1 - In this version, TMS software only manages LAUX428, LAUXS428, LRB, LAUX-G, LCI and LCI-G. For other field units, please use patch 18. 2 - LAUX-G firmware downloading through the line may take a while (15 minutes). 3 - Downloading to LAU through a radio bridge is not recommended.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch 23.

428XL-23/5.0

1/1

428XL

Approved by

Software Update

D. Boucard

Software Update Number : 428XL-24/5.0 Subsystem

:

Date

: October 3, 2013

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Requires Customer Acknowledgement Of Receipt

Targets Client: Server: DSUGPS: LCI428, LCI-G: Field electronics:

No Yes No No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of Software Patch 24. New features:

 Added GPGGA field to VE464 VAPS headers. Fixed issues:

 COG computation after abort.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch 24.

428XL-24/5.0

1/1

428XL

Approved by

Software Update

D. Boucard

Software Update Number : 428XL-25/5.0 Subsystem

:

Date

: October 30, 2013

Mandatory

Specific

Information

Requires Customer Acknowledgement Of Receipt

Targets Client: Server: DSUGPS: LCI428, LCI-G: Field electronics:

Yes Yes No No No

Purpose The purpose of this software update is to inform you of the release of Software Patch 25. New features:

 Increased delta position limits to +/- 100 metres for Guidance.  GPS time added in manufacturer header in similarity SEGD files. Fixed issues:

 jPositioning: drag and drop authorized for empty OVC fleet.  PRM: export freezing after playback.  jOperation: sometimes locking up, in multi-shooter Explo mode.

Installation instructions See the .txt file in Patch 25.

428XL-25/5.0

1/1